Weapons Given to Iraq Are Missing

0

GAO Estimates 30% of Arms Are Unaccounted For

 By Glenn Kessler

The Pentagon has lost track of about 190,000 AK-47 assault rifles and pistols given to Iraqi security forces in 2004 and 2005, according to a new government report, raising fears that some of those weapons have fallen into the hands of insurgents fighting U.S. forces in Iraq.

The author of the report from the Government Accountability Office says U.S. military officials do not know what happened to 30 percent of the weapons the United States distributed to Iraqi forces from 2004 through early this year as part of an effort to train and equip the troops. The highest previous estimate of unaccounted-for weapons was 14,000, in a report issued last year by the inspector general for Iraq reconstruction.

The United States has spent $19.2 billion trying to develop Iraqi security forces since 2003, the GAO said, including at least $2.8 billion to buy and deliver equipment. But the GAO said weapons distribution was haphazard and rushed and failed to follow established procedures, particularly from 2004 to 2005, when security training was led by Gen. David H. Petraeus, who now commands all U.S. forces in Iraq.

The Pentagon did not dispute the GAO findings, saying it has launched its own investigation and indicating it is working to improve tracking. Although controls have been tightened since 2005, the inability of the United States to track weapons with tools such as serial numbers makes it nearly impossible for the U.S. military to know whether it is battling an enemy equipped by American taxpayers.

“They really have no idea where they are,” said Rachel Stohl, a senior analyst at the Center for Defense Information who has studied small-arms trade and received Pentagon briefings on the issue. “It likely means that the United States is unintentionally providing weapons to bad actors.”

One senior Pentagon official acknowledged that some of the weapons probably are being used against U.S. forces. He cited the Iraqi brigade created at Fallujah that quickly dissolved in September 2004 and turned its weapons against the Americans.

Stohl said insurgents frequently use small-arms fire to force military convoys to move in a particular direction — often toward roadside bombs. She noted that the Bush administration frequently complains that Iran and Syria are supplying insurgents but has paid little attention to whether U.S. military errors inadvertently play a role. “We know there is seepage and very little is being done to address the problem,” she said.

Stohl noted that U.S. forces, focused on a fruitless search for weapons of mass destruction after Baghdad fell, did not secure massive weapons caches. The failure to track small arms given to Iraqi forces repeats that pattern of neglect, she added.

The GAO is studying the financing and weapons sources of insurgent groups, but that report will not be made public. “All of that information is classified,” said Joseph A. Christoff, the GAO’s director of international affairs and trade.

In an unusual move, the train-and-equip program for Iraqi forces is being managed by the Pentagon. Normally, the traditional security assistance programs are operated by the State Department, the GAO reported. The Defense Department said this change permitted greater flexibility, but as of last month it was unable to tell the GAO what accountability procedures, if any, apply to arms distributed to Iraqi forces, the report said.

Iraqi security forces were virtually nonexistent in early 2004, and in June of that year Petraeus was brought in to build them up. No central record of distributed equipment was kept for a year and a half, until December 2005, and even now the records are on a spreadsheet that requires three computer screens lined up side by side to view a single row, Christoff said.

The GAO found that the military was consistently unable to collect supporting documents to “confirm when the equipment was received, the quantities of equipment delivered, and the Iraqi units receiving the equipment.” The agency also said there were “numerous mistakes due to incorrect manual entries” in the records that were maintained.

The GAO reached the estimate of 190,000 missing arms — 110,000 AK-47s and 80,000 pistols — by comparing the property records of the Multi-National Security Transition Command for Iraq against records Petraeus maintained of the arms and equipment he had ordered. Petraeus’s figures were compared with classified data and other records to ensure that they were accurate enough to compare against the property books.

In all cases, the gaps between the two records were enormous. Petraeus reported that about 185,000 AK-47 rifles, 170,000 pistols, 215,000 pieces of body armor and 140,000 helmets were issued to Iraqi security forces from June 2004 through September 2005. But the property books contained records for 75,000 AK-47 rifles, 90,000 pistols, 80,000 pieces of body armor and 25,000 helmets.

A military commander involved in the program at the time, speaking on the condition of anonymity because he was not authorized to discuss the report, acknowledged in an e-mail, “We did issue some items, including weapons, body armor, etc. to new Iraqi units that were literally going into battle.”

But, the commander argued, “there was, frankly, not much of a choice early on: We had very little staff and could have held the weapons until every piece of the logistical and property accountability system was in place, or we could issue them, in bulk on some occasions, to the U.S. elements supporting Iraqi units who were needed in the battles of Najaf, Fallujah, Mosul, Samarra, etc.”

The GAO plans to look for similar problems in the training of Afghan security forces.

During the Bosnian conflict, the United States provided about $100 million in defense equipment to the Bosnian Federation Army, and the GAO found no problems in accounting for those weapons.

Much of the equipment provided to Iraqi troops, including the AK-47s, originates from countries in the former Soviet bloc. In a report last year, Amnesty International said that in 2004 and 2005 more than 350,000 AK-47 rifles and similar weapons were taken out of Bosnia and Serbia, for use in Iraq, by private contractors working for the Pentagon and with the approval of NATO and European security forces in Bosnia.

Another cover-up of the police killing of Jean Charles de Menezes

0

By Julie Hyland

The second report by the Independent Police Complaints Commission on the killing of Jean Charles de Menezes is yet another sordid episode in the cover-up of the brutal state execution of an innocent man.

Jean Charles, a Brazilian, was shot at Stockwell underground station on July 22, 2005. The young electrician was on his way to work when he was surrounded by plainclothes armed police on a train and shot without warning, seven times in the head and once in the shoulder.

In the immediate aftermath of his slaying, the police mounted a campaign of disinformation to back up their claim that de Menezes was a suicide bomber–connected with the failed plot the previous day, July 21. Reports claimed that he had been wearing bulky clothing to disguise a suicide belt, and that when challenged by police officers, had sought to evade arrest by jumping a ticket barrier at the station and running on to a train.

This story was kept up, even after the police were fully aware that they had killed an entirely blameless man. Only later were police forced to admit that none of their accounts of the events leading up to de Menezes’s death were true.

Jean Charles had been wearing light summer clothes, and had walked leisurely into the underground station–even stopping to buy a newspaper–unaware that he was being followed by armed police. It was not until he had boarded the train that de Menezes would have had any inkling of what was to befall him. Having taken his seat, he was suddenly seized by one plainclothes officer, whilst another proceeded to shoot directly into his head. A total of eleven bullets were fired, to the horror of other passengers.

It subsequently emerged that de Menezes was the victim of a shoot-to-kill policy–Operation Kratos–secretly adopted by the police and the highest echelons of the government more than two years before.

There was never any chance that the IPCC would reveal the truth of the events surrounding de Menezes’s death. Its earlier inquiry cleared the police officers involved in his shooting, and Police Commander Cressida Dick, who was in charge of Gold Command–the body responsible for identifying and pursuing de Menezes–has subsequently been promoted. To add insult to injury, the Metropolitan Police face only token charges under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974 for “failing to provide for the health, safety and welfare” of Jean Charles–which at the most will result in a paltry fine, to be borne by the taxpayer.

The IPCC’s second investigation followed complaints by Jean Charles’s family over false claims circulated by police in the wake of his murder. Even this report has been subject to alteration following threats of legal action by the officers criticised.

The IPCC makes clear that these claims were indeed fallacious. It finds that de Menezes “did not refuse to obey a challenge prior to being shot and was not wearing any clothing that could be classed as suspicious.” But it says these false reports were primarily the result of operational failures.

The IPCC’s own 139-page report, however, disproves such assertions. It shows that less than five hours after Jean Charles was shot, leading Metropolitan police officers had “strong suspicions” that an innocent man had been killed.

A wallet found on the deceased contained documents of the identity of de Menezes as a Brazilian national, which were consistent with names listed in his mobile phone, also recovered from the scene.

At 3:30 p.m. that day, Deputy Assistant Commissioner Brian Paddick told the IPCC that he was informed by Chief Superintendent Stewart, “We’ve shot a Brazilian tourist.” At approximately the same time, following a meeting of Gold Command, a government liaison team officer told the Home Office, “There is a strong suspicion that the victim was not one of the four suspects for the failed [July 21] bombings.”

One hour later, Assistant Commissioner Andy Hayman–Britain’s senior anti-terrorist officer–”briefed the Crime Reporters’ Association [CRA] that the deceased was not one of the four sought” for the failed bombing attempts the previous day.

Notes from a meeting of the police management board held shortly after the CRA briefing–comprising senior Metropolitan police officers, Metropolitan Police Association members and Home Office representatives–record Hayman advising that the press were stating that the dead man was not one of the suspects, but that it was “important to present that he was.”

Just before midnight the same day, the police issued another press release, which still insinuated Jean Charles may be one of the suspects. “The man shot is still subject to formal identification, and it is not clear whether he is one of the four people who attempted to cause explosions…his clothing and behaviour at the station added to their [police’s] suspicions,” it claimed.

It is Hayman that is singled out for criticism in the report for placing wrong information in the public domain. The IPCC raises “serious concern” that he briefed the CRA one thing whilst agreeing to press releases that stated another.

The evidence shows that Hayman set out to deceive. Even in this instance, it is up to the Metropolitan Police alone to decide what disciplinary action if any is to follow. Just as importantly, the admission of Hayman’s deceit is intended to present the campaign of disinformation as an individual failing rather than deliberate political policy.

It was Metropolitan Police Commissioner Sir Ian Blair who, just hours after the shooting, led a press conference in which he claimed the killing was “directly linked to the ongoing and expanding anti-terrorist operation,” and that “the man was challenged and refused to obey.”

The IPCC claims that Blair was “unaware” of questions over Jean Charles’s identity for almost 24 hours and that he had been misled by Hayman.

This statement requires the suspension of all rational faculties. The IPCC gives numerous accounts in which individuals working closely with the commissioner and other senior figures told of rumour being rife that an innocent man had been killed. By the afternoon, these had even reached senior police officers enjoying a cricket match at Lord’s and one police officer who had been told there had been a “massive cock-up…involving a Brazilian tourist.”

Blair was present at the Management Board meeting where Hayman made his recommendation on presentation. It is claimed that Jean Charles’s name was not mentioned at the meeting, and that no discussion was held on the recovery of his wallet and mobile phone. Notes from the meeting, however, record Blair stressing public statements should make clear “the man shot today at Stockwell was under police surveillance after he left the house under observation as a result of our inquiries following the incidents yesterday.”

The Metropolitan Police’s Director of Public Affairs, Dick Fedorcio, responsible for drafting the press statement, concurs, “I will craft something for the public.”

This is followed by Hayman’s statement: “There is press running that the person shot is not one of the four bombers. We need to present this that he is believed to be. This is different to confirming that he is. On the balance of probabilities, it isn’t. To have this for offer would be low risk.”

The IPCC notes, “There is no indication that anyone at the meeting challenged AC Hayman when he referred to presenting the deceased as a wanted bomber although it was likely he was not. It would follow that if those at the meeting understood what was proposed and agreed with this course of action then those present were party to an agreement to mislead the media and the public.”

But it continues, “All deny that there was any suggestion that the media should be misled, and all state that they would not have been party to any such agreement.”

It concludes, “There is insufficient evidence to substantiate that all present at the 17:00hrs 22 July 2005 Management Board sub meeting jointly agreed to mislead the media and public. Accordingly, with the exception of AC Hayman, no criticism is levelled at any of the attendees.”

On Blair, the IPCC states, “When the commissioner left New Scotland Yard mid evening on July 22 2005 he was almost totally uninformed.”

It claims he “did not know of the considerable information within the MPS in relation to the emerging identity for Mr de Menezes and the likelihood that he was not involved in terrorism. Numerous others within the MPS did know.”

Britain’s leading police officer, in the midst of a major incident, was unaware of “considerable information” relating to that incident? The IPCC and its political masters clearly believe the public to be stupid.

What of the next day? The IPCC records that at 8 a.m. on July 23, “DCI Evans states that he received a telephone call from D/Supt. Levett who informed him that he had viewed the CCTV footage of Mr de Menezes entering the underground station. The footage showed that Mr de Menezes had walked to the barrier, picked up a newspaper, used his Oyster card to go though the barrier and had then gone down an escalator and out of sight. DCI Evans states he recalled speaking to the Coroner and Pathologist and advising them that it would appear the MPS had shot an innocent man who was not involved in terrorism.”

Yet that morning, the police released a statement admitting that they knew the identity of the dead man and were “now satisfied” he was not a terrorist, but reiterating that his “clothing and behaviour” had caused suspicion.

The IPCC report also shows that even by 11:05 a.m. on July 23, an instruction had gone out from Gold Command that “no further next of kin enquiries were to be made until a press strategy had been agreed at Gold level.” In other words, the police were still trying to whitewash events and work out what new line could be taken to deceive the public.

Writing in the Guardian newspaper, August 1, David Mills gave some indication of just how far these efforts extend.

“For the uncovering of what really happened we have to thank Lana Vandenberghe, who paid the price for revealing the truth, as her leak formed the basis of an ITV News investigation into the shooting of De Menezes,” Mills wrote. “She lost her job at the IPCC, was evicted by her landlady, arrested and treated harshly by the police. The harassment caused by the whole episode turned her into a recluse. She wasn’t the only one. ITV News producer Neil Garrett and his girlfriend–the link between Vandenberghe and Garrett–were arrested.

“They both spent hours in a cell and were bailed on a few occasions. While inside, Garrett’s pregnant girlfriend was deprived of food and drink, and given a blanket full of lice. Unknown to him at the time, Garrett’s flat was raided and turned upside down.”

Jean Charles de Menezes’s family has expressed astonishment at the IPCC’s findings. Their lawyer, Harriet Wistrich, said it was inconceivable that Sir Ian did not know anything about the victim’s identity until the next morning.

Once again, however, the media is playing its role as chief political apologists for the police and government. The Guardian leader, August 3, stated that the police were “too quick to put out information that it could not know to be true” and “too slow to put out more accurate facts,” but attributed this to the understandable pressures arising from a heightened security scare.

Similarly, the Independent complained that Hayman was a “scapegoat,” the result of a “culture that demands personal accountability when something serious goes wrong. This is understandable and usually justified. But it is not always the appropriate response,” it stated, again with reference to the terror threat.

Such calculated indifference to the truth confirms the utter perfidiousness of Britain’s media. Ultimately, it is not simply about protecting one man–Sir Ian Blair–or even the Metropolitan Police as an institution. It is about justifying the imposition of draconian legislation and policies–not least that of shoot-to-kill–in the name of the war on terror.

US power to spy on foreigners gets nod

0

By Thomas Ferraro

The Democratic-led US Congress yielded to President George Bush on Saturday and temporarily expanded the government’s power to spy on foreign suspects electronically without a court order .

Civil liberties groups charged the measure would create a broad net that would sweep up law-abiding US citizens. But the house of representatives approved the bill by 227 votes to 183, a day after senate approval, by 60 votes to 28.

“After months of prodding by house republicans, congress has finally closed the terrorist loophole in our surveillance law – and America will be the safer for it,” declared house minority leader John Boehner, an Ohio Republican.

With legislators to begin a month-long recess this weekend, Bush had called on them to stay until they passed the legislation.

“Protecting America is our most solemn obligation,” Bush said earlier in the day.

The measure authorises the National Security Agency to intercept communications between people in the US and foreign targets overseas.

The administration has to submit to a secret court a description of the procedures used to ensure that surveillance without a warrant only targeted people outside the US.

The court, set up by the 1978 Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act (Fisa ), would review the procedures and may order changes . The administration could appeal.

Fisa now requires the government to obtain orders from its court to conduct surveillance of suspected terrorists in the US.

But after the September 11 attacks, Bush authorised warrantless interception of communications between people in the US and others overseas if one of them was suspected of terrorist ties. Critics charged that programme violated the law, but Bush argued he had wartime powers to do so.

In January, Bush put the programme under the supervision of the Fisa court, but the terms have not been made public.

Congress has subpoenaed documents in an effort to determine Bush’s legal justification for the warrantless surveillance.

The new bill was needed in part, aides said, because of restrictions recently imposed by the secret court on spy agencies’ intercepting of communications. Congress has to come up with permanent legislation within six months.

Republicans earlier rejected a Democrat alternative providing greater court supervision.

Reviewing Ferdinand Lundberg’s “Cracks in the Constitution”

1

By Stephen Lendman
RINF Alternative News

Ferdinand Lundberg (1905 – 1995) was a 20th century economist, journalist, historian and author of such books as The Rich and the Super-Rich: A Study in the Power of Money Today; The Myth of Democracy; Politicians and Other Scoundrels; and the subject of this review – Cracks in the Constitution.

Lundberg’s book was published twenty-seven years ago, yet remains as powerfully important and relevant today as then. Simply put, the book is a blockbuster. It’s must reading to learn what schools to the highest levels never teach about the nation’s most important document that lays out the fundamental law of the land in its Preamble, Seven Articles, Bill of Rights, and 17 other Amendments. Lundberg deconstructs it in depth, separating myth from reality about what he called “the great totempole of American society.”

He does it in 10 exquisitely written chapters with examples and detail galore to drive home his key message that our most sacred of all documents is flawed. It was crafted by 55 mostly ordinary but wealthy self-serving “wheeler dealers” (among whom only 39 signed), and the result we got and now live with falls far short of the “Rock of Ages” it’s cracked up to be. That notion is pure myth. This review covers in detail how Lundberg smashed it in each chapter.

The Sacred Constitution

Lundberg quickly transfixes his readers by disabusing them of notions commonly held. Despite long-held beliefs, the Constitution is no “masterpiece of political architecture.” It falls far short of “one great apotheosis (bathed) in quasi-religious light.” The finished product was a “closed labyrinthine affair,” not an “open” constitution like the British model. It was the product of duplicitous politicians and their close friends scheming to cut the best deals for themselves by leaving out the great majority of others who didn’t matter.

The myths we learned in school and through the dominant media are legion, long-standing and widely held among the educated classes. They and most others believe the framers crafted a Constitution that “powerfully restrained and fettered” the federal government and created “a limited government (or a) government of limited powers.” It’s simply not so because through the power of the chief executive it can do “whatever it is from time to time” it wishes. In that respect, it’s no more precise and binding than The Ten Commandments the Judaic and Christian worlds violate freely and willfully all the time. Even so-called “born-again” types, like the current President, do it, along with Popes, past and present, and the former Israeli Sephardi chief rabbi, Mordechai Eliyahu, who advocates mass killing by carpet bombing Gaza to save Jewish lives.

The “supreme Law of the Land” here deters no President or sitting government from doing as they wish, law or no law. The Constitution is easily ignored with impunity by popular or unpopular governments doing as they please and inventing reasons as justification. Lundberg is firm in debunking the notion that America is a government of laws, not men. It’s “palpable nonsense of the highest order,” he said. Governments enacting laws are composed of men who lie, connive, misinterpret and pretty much operate ad libitum discharging their duties as they see fit for their own self-interest.

It was no different in 1787 when 55 delegates (privileged all) assembled for four months in the same Philadelphia State House, where the Declaration of Independence was signed 11 years earlier, to rework the Articles of Confederation into a Constitution that would last into “remote futurity,” as long as possible, or until others later changed it. None of them were happy with the finished product but felt it was the best one possible under the circumstances and better than nothing at all.

The document is “crisply worded” and can easily be read in 20 to 30 minutes and just as easily be totally misunderstood. The sole myth in it is stated in its opening Preamble words: “We the people of the United States….do ordain and establish this Constitution for the United States of America.” In fact, “the people” nowhere entered the process, then or since.

At its beginning, “the people” who mattered were established white male property owning delegates and members of state ratifying conventions who rammed the ratification process through, by fair or foul means, in the face of a “largely indifferent and uncomprehending populace” left out entirely. They were elected to do it by eligible and interested while males comprising only from 12.5 – 15.5% of the electorate at the time. Women, blacks, Indians and children couldn’t vote and many or most qualified voters didn’t bother to and still don’t. The process, and what it produced, showed “Democracy operatively is little more than a fantasy.”

The American revolution was nothing more than secession from the British empire changing very little with one-third of the colonists favoring it (not upper classes), one-third opposed (mainly upper classes) and another third indifferent to the whole business. From then to now, the country is no nearer “government by the people” than under monarchal or autocratic rule. The latter types rule by application or threat of force whereas sovereign people are manipulated by other means with naked force held in reserve if needed.

Lundberg explained the minimum function of government, ours or others, should be to insure the public welfare is being broadly served. It’s stated in the Preamble and Article I, Section 8 that “The Congress shall have power to….provide for….(the) general welfare of the United States” – the so-called welfare clause. Lundberg let scholar Herman Finer (with more detail on his ideas below) dispel the notion from the constitutional flaws he found and some of the many “social and political evils” he recounted as a result through the middle 20th century decades – rampant crime, unsafe streets, lack of justice, political corruption, dishonest police, racketeering labor officials, corporate fraud in pursuit of profits, raging unresolved social problems and lots more. Only government can address these issues and unless it does successfully it fails. Our is a long history of failure overall with only feeble attempts to fix things.

Lundberg reviewed popular misconceptions about the Constitution saying so many are embedded in the American psyche it’s hard knowing where to begin. He noted the document is called “The Living Constitution” saying, in fact, it’s “whatever government does or does not do” or uses in whatever way it wishes. The Constitution defines itself as the “supreme Law of the Land” in Article VI, Section 2 which it is and includes all amendments, enacted statutes and treaties made with the concurrence (not ratification) of the Senate. The people are left out of the process entirely with Lundberg saying “government of the people, by the people and for the people” is a “nonexistent entity. The people don’t govern either directly or through ‘representatives.’ The people are governed.”

In sum, although the Constitution served many of the purposes its designers and supporters envisioned, in light of the majority populace’s great expectations of it, “it has been, quite plainly, a huge flop.” That’s made clear below.

“We the People”

Lundberg destroys the romanticism and enthusiasm felt today about the Constitution and the revolt against Great Britain preceding it. He began by reviewing the establishment of state constitutions at the time and the enactment of the Articles of Confederation adopted by the Second Continental Congress November 15, 1777 with final ratification March 1, 1781. None of these events had electoral sanction. “They were strictly coup d’etat affairs, run by small groups of self-styled patriots many of whom bettered their personal economic positions significantly” from the revolution and events before and after it took place. Despite what’s commonly taught in schools, most people opposed the Constitution when it was ratified. So by getting it done anyway, the framers (with the conservative Federalists spearheading the effort) went against the will of the people they ignored and disdained.

It wasn’t easy, though, as only by promising amendments did it happen. The anti-Federalist opposition demanded and got the “oft-hymned” first ten amendments, commonly known as the Bill of Rights. In fact, they “made no great difference,” and did little to dilute the 1787 document. More on that below.

Lundberg explained that most anti-Federalists weren’t particularly happy either with the Articles of Confederation or the Constitution. These men were mostly privileged property owners (all white, of course) squabbling over the means to get pretty similar ends and having a generally hostile attitude about the majority population overall. In other words, everyone was not considered “We the people,” which is how radical English Whigs felt and whose traditions colonists adopted. “The illiterate and underprivileged (elements) were not much considered” with the “people” again being the privileged male property owners in charge of everything and out only for their own self-interest.

Lundberg cited voting patterns earlier, up to his time, and clearly now as well, to explain how people are left out of the political process. Whether franchised or not, most don’t vote in presidential elections and even fewer show up for congressional, state and local ones. It indicates the will of the people needs considerable qualifying because most of them aren’t interested, don’t want to bother, don’t think it matters, don’t understand the whole process, and decide to opt out and act like nothing’s going on. “Although repugnant to ideologists of democracy,” Lundberg stated, “this conclusion is quite true.”

In sum, the relevance of this to the Constitution is that its opening words are meaningless window dressing. They neither add nor detract from the document which served as a “screen and launching pad for practically autonomous, freely improvising politicians (like any others in the world)….the gentry….sustained (in whatever their endeavors were) by the constitutional structure” they created for their own self-serving purposes.

What the Framers Thought

This section covers who these men were below as well as more about them in the section to follow. Here, first off, the record needs to be set straight about what these very ordinary men (contrary to popularized myth about them) thought about their creation we extoll today like it came down from Mt. Sinai. In fact, it was the result of wheeling and dealing in likely smoke-filled rooms the way deals are cut today with lots of real and figurative smoke to go along with the usual mirrors. When they finished in September, 1787, there was no joy in Philadelphia. The framers disliked their creation, some could barely tolerate it, yet most signed it.

They understood its defects, that it was full of holes, thought it was the best they could do under the circumstances, felt it was a mess, but, nonetheless, believed they could live with it for the time being, hoping it wouldn’t come back to bite them. Lundberg said they likely “kept their fingers crossed.” One other thing was clear, though, despite “crowd-titillating campaign oratory” about their creation ever since. Not a single framer suggested “a sheltered haven was being prepared for the innumerable heavily laden, bedraggled, scrofulous and oppressed of the earth.” On the contrary, they intended to keep them that way showing not a lot is fundamentally different then than now, and the so-called founders were a pretty devious bunch, not the noble characters we’ve been taught to believe.

As already explained, the deal got done with the usual kinds of wheeling and dealing, and, in the end, a lot of opponents being won over by agreeing to tack on the so-called Bill of Rights that was deliberately left out at first. The dominant elements behind the convention were what today are called nationalists. More precisely, they were “centralizers who were continental and global in their thinking.” The opposition consisted of “localists,” later called “states-righters,” who preferred a decentralized government. The “centralizers” wanted a single or central national capital run by superior people by their definition – the rich and better-connected regardless of ability. Men like John Adams and John Jay (the first High Court chief justice) felt government should be run, in Adams’ words, by “the rich, the well born, and the able.” There was no disagreement on that notion.

There were no populists in the bunch, no anti-property party, and even the most vocal civil libertarians, like Jefferson and George Mason, were slave-owners. Washington, for his part, contributed no pet constitutional ideas other than wanting to protect the new nation from drifting toward disunion which, in fact, happened with the outbreak of the Civil War in 1861. Lundberg described him as “the very top dog of the Philadelphia accouchement (the constitutional birthing process).” He understood the key reason for adopting a flawed document, no matter how bad it was or how the framers felt about it. Accepting it was the way to prevent disunion and resulting confusion that might have prevailed if public consideration entered the equation to become accepted policy and law.

Conflicting ideas of concern at the time visualized three central governments consisting of the New England states, middle Atlantic ones, and those in the South with likely new entries to follow in the West. The framers worried this arrangement might cause endless bickering and wars as well as rivalrous agreements and arrangements with other countries. In one stroke, the Constitution produced a united front against an ever-encroaching Europe and internal struggles.

Lundberg spent much time on who the founders were this review can only touch on. It’s enough just to put a few faces on a group of crass opportunists who today are practically ranked along side the Apostles. But who’s to say those few were any better than others of their day the way myths are constructed and passed on through the ages unchallenged in mainstream thinking. And don’t forget that, in his first term, George Bush might have been aiming for sainthood by claiming he got his orders directly from God who told him to “strike at Al-Queda….and then…. to strike at Saddam.” Even the framers didn’t claim that type heavenly connection.

They did have Lundberg’s focus beginning with Alexander Hamilton, Washington’s wartime aide-de-camp, first Secretary of the Treasury and acknowledged leader of the Federalists. Here’s what this noted man thought of the Constitution in 1802. In a letter, he called it “a shilly shally thing of mere milk and water (and) a frail and worthless document.” This is from the man, more than any other in Philadelphia, who was its most articulate and passionate champion. Franklin, too, had doubts as the grand old man, but mere enfeebled figurehead at the convention, who also signed the final document. He was against two separate chambers, disapproved of some of the articles and wanted others that weren’t included.

Then there’s James Madison miscalled “The Father of the Constitution,” which he expressly repudiated and a year later wrote “I am not of the number if there be any such, who think the Constitution lately adopted a faultless work…..(It’s) the best that could be obtained from the jarring interests of the states….Something, anything, was better than nothing.” Madison’s disaffection went even further, in fact. At the convention, he was an ardent “centralizer,” but 10 years later he reversed himself by aligning with those wanting to recapture more state power. He also spent most of his life disagreeing with the way the document he helped write was used.

Lundberg covered a few other framers most people know little or nothing about but played their part along with the better known ones. They included men like Nicholas Gilman from New Hampshire, William Pierce and William Few from Georgia, Pierce Butler and Charles Pinckney from South Carolina, Robert Morris, Gouverneur Morris (no relation) and James Wilson from Pennsylvania, Jonathan Dayton from New Jersey, and James McHenry from Maryland.

Of the total 55 delegates attending, 39 signed and 16 didn’t, but doing it or not was just a pro forma exercise as only the states had power to accept or reject it. None of the framers believed the Constitution was the glorious achievement people ever since were led to believe – quite the opposite, in fact, but most still went along with it as better than nothing. The nation’s second and third Presidents, Adams and Jefferson, were abroad and didn’t attend the convention although Adams was considered the leading constitutional theorist at the time. His views had weight and were strong ones. Lundberg noted for the rest of his life until 1826 he consistently criticized the document in private correspondence.

Jefferson overall was just as unhappy. Until it was added, he objected to the omission of a Bill of Rights. He also disliked the lack of any requirements for rotation in office, especially the office of the presidency he wished to be ineligible for a succeeding term. In 1801, he was involved with others proposing a menu of changes to strengthen a document he believed was flawed. He also didn’t think any constitution could survive the test of time, unchanged forever, able to meet all legitimate needs, and as a consequence wanted a new convention every 20 years to update things and fix obvious problems.

Lundberg felt Jefferson and Adams’ main objection was they had no part in writing it or were even consulted on what should go in it. They had a point. Adams, as noted, was the leading constitutional theorist of the time and Jefferson (in Lundberg’s view) was the most consummate politician in the nation’s history, but by no means its best President.

The convention ended September 17, 1787 “in an atmosphere verging on glumness.” Delegates signing it were just witnesses to the actions of state delegations, not as individual endorsers, and despite their public approval, nearly all had “inner qualms.” James Monroe from Virginia, a future President, was one of them. He voted nay with 15 others that included important figures like George Mason, Elbridge Gerry and Edmund Randolph.

Southern delegates were won over for ratification by strengthening chattel slavery. The Constitution forbade the federal government from emancipating slaves until Lincoln acted in a meaningless 1862 politically motivated Executive Order. It wasn’t until Congress passed the 13th, 14th and 15th amendments, and enough states ratified them, that the law changed freeing the slaves and giving them nominal rights they never, in fact, had in the South at least for another 100 years. Lundberg noted the “slavocracy was not terminated….for moral reasons; it committed suicide for political and economic reasons, blinded by simple greed and vaingloriousness, and long after slavery was abolished in most places elsewhere.”

Who the Framers Were

Lundberg asked: “Who were these men about whom so many (unjustifiably) have rhapsodized? Fifty-five in total showed up in Philadelphia in 1787 out of 74 authorized by state legislatures. A fourth of them stayed only briefly, another quarter checked in and out like tourists, and no more than five men carried most of the discussion with seven others playing “fitful” supporting roles.

Further, they didn’t, in fact, come to write a new constitution. They were congressionally authorized only to propose amendments to the prevailing Articles of Confederation. Little did they all know in May what would emerge in September, or maybe the ones who counted most did.

Of the 19 non-attending delegates, 11 wanted nothing to do with the affair, were opposed to it, distrusted it, and thought it rigged from the start. The other eight had various excuses – illness (political or real), focused at home with other business, not having their travel expenses covered, and reluctant to make such a long trip to be away from home and hearth for months.

Of those showing up, 33 were lawyers, 44 present or past members of Congress, 46 had political positions at home, including seven as former governors and five high state judges. These were men of note and economic means who promoted their own financial interests and parallel activity in government. In a word, they were movers and shakers or as Lundberg called them – “wheeler dealers.”

He described the group as a “gathering of the rich, the well-born and, here and there, the able (with that quality being the exception).” Washington and Robert Morris were reputed to be the richest men in the country with property holdings in most cases being their main component of wealth at the time along with slaveholdings on it. Directly or indirectly as lawyers or principals, these men were an assemblage of “planters, bankers, merchants, ship-owners, slave-traders, smugglers, privateers, money-lenders, investors, and speculators in land and securities” – essentially a group of powerful figures not much different from their counterparts today. With a few exceptions, Lundberg said they’d now be called a “Wall Street crowd.”

In their mind, “The clear aim of the Constitution was to launch a system that would protect, and enable to flourish, the general interests there represented.” With Great Britain removed, a vacuum was created. The Constitution, with a new government, was created to fill it restoring the same essential British commercial and financial system under new management, or as the French would say, everything changed yet everything stayed the same. Republican government simply removed British monarchal wrappings to operate pretty much the same way. Lundberg quoted Daniel Leonard saying “Never in history had there been so much rebellion with so little real cause” and so little change following it. As for the ingredients of the Constitution, Lundberg explained nearly all of them could have been “stamped with the benchmark ‘Originated in England.’ Only the mixture was different.”

Further, 27 delegates were future members of Congress, two were future Presidents, one a future Vice-President, one a Speaker of the House, and five future High Court justices. They produced a Constitution generated along predetermined lines by the government itself by “a small self-selected elite at the center of government affairs.” They did it in deliberately general, vague, ambiguous language, the product of consummate self-serving insiders. The “people” were nowhere in sight then or for the later future amendment ratifications, all of which were done solely by similar-minded self-serving later officials for their own political purposes. It’s always been that way from the beginning, of course, and is strikingly so today.

Lundberg then reviewed the political background and record of the delegates starting off with the elder statesman in Philadelphia, Benjamin Franklin, the wisest of the bunch. In 1787, he was an octogenarian, attended as a mere figurehead, signed the final document, but was too enfeebled to address the convention at its end, so he enlisted a friend to read his rather notable and prescient remarks to the others saying:

“I agree to this Constitution with all its faults….I think a General Government (is) necessary for us (and) may be a blessing….if well-administered; (I “farther” believe that’s likely) for a Course of Years (but) can only end in Despotism as other Forms have done before it, when the People shall have become so corrupted as to need Despotic Government, being incapable of any other.” Imagine such a dark prophecy at the nation’s birth by a man who never met George Bush but was wise enough to know he’d arrive sooner or later. Franklin today would surely say “I warned you, didn’t I.”

Other notable signers were less insightful, or if they were, didn’t let on. Two of them, John Dickinson and William Johnson were members of the 1765 Stamp Act Congress. Six others were members of the mainly conservative First Continental Congress of 1774 – Thomas Mifflin, Edmund Randolph, George Read, John Rutledge, Roger Sherman, and George Washington.

Other important attendees were Elbridge Gerry, Roger Sherman, George Mason, John Langdon, Robert Morris, Gouverneur Morris (no relation) and William Livingston. Lundberg called Langdon, Livingston, Randolph, Rutledge and R. Morris political power bosses or power-brokers of their day, and Robert Morris was known to his friends and enemies as the “Great Man.” He was the unmatched financial giant of the era with Lundberg saying “his brain would have made two of Hamilton” and that his economic and political power at the time were unrivaled matching that of the House of Morgan in the early 20th century combined with New York’s Tammany Hall.

According to Lundberg, however, this was no “all-star political team” compared to other more distinguished figures not there – Jefferson, John and Sam Adams, John Jay, John Hancock, Thomas Paine, Benjamin Rush, Paul Revere, John Paul Jones, Patrick Henry and many others. Apart from two notables, Washington and Franklin, as well as Robert Morris, few later became prominent nationally. In 1787, Madison and Hamilton (Washington proteges) were virtual unknowns.

Lundberg noted nothing on record shows this assemblage to have been extraordinarily learned, profound in their thinking or even unusually capable. Only 25 attended college, and “the one man who held the convention together by the mere force of his presence”….Washington, never got beyond the fifth grade. Franklin was mostly self-taught and Hamilton was a college dropout his first year. Robert Morris, the JP Morgan of his day, and George Mason also never attended college. Of the 25 college attendees, only Madison, Wilson and G. Morris were contributors of note.

In point of fact, colleges in those days were quite rudimentary and graduated students at a much earlier age, often as young as 16, and a bright student could master the law for a degree in a matter of weeks the way Hamilton did. The same was true in England at the time with Oxford and Cambridge not then considered distinguished educational centers as they are now.

Most of the attending delegates also had military backgrounds, but writing about them kept that information secret. Lundberg stressed it saying “the gathering took on the complexion of the general staff of the war of the revolution.” Why not, the boss himself was there, Washington, along with his leading officers. In all, 27 delegates served under him in the war. He knew them, most of the others, and all of them stood in awe of him as a larger than life figure. He was “always the nonpareil,” assured he’d be the new nation’s uncontested first president. He had no party affiliation, ran unopposed twice and got all the votes for two terms in a process more like coronations than elections.

He and the other delegates came to Philadelphia, assembled, did their work and went home in many cases to pursue “their eclipse.” Lundberg explained “As a collection of supposedly highly sagacious men, the post-convention careers of the framers raise a big question mark.” Ten went bankrupt or became broke, several were involved in financial scandals, two died in duels, one became a shattered drunkard, two “flittered” with treason, one was expelled from the Senate, one went mad, others quarreled bitterly among themselves about politics and interpreting the document they created, and most switched political sides for convenience in their subsequent quests for office. Washington himself, likely died from medical malpractice, the victim of a bloodletting procedure, after he took ill, when he needed all he had.

Other framers began dying off as well, a number of them right after the convention and at ages considered very young today for some. Robert (JP Morgan) Morris went bankrupt speculating in public lands and securities, owed millions as a result, served three and a half ignominious years in debtors’ prison, and died broke in 1806. Other framers also speculated and lost heavily in their financial dealings.

Hamilton was one of the few Philadelphia delegates to achieve a notable post-convention record as Washington’s Secretary of the Treasury and Federalist Party leader. Noteworthy as well was Gouverneur Morris, no relation to Robert. Finally, there was James Madison who was neither the Constitution’s father or its indispensable or principle source. He, in fact, had no original or unique ideas to bring to the convention. In this respect, he was like all the others.

Madison did perform a hugely important function as an “amanuensis,” dutifully and painstakingly recording the convention proceedings in what historians today call an accurate and complete stenographic record, the best available. It was not until 1840 that it became public after Congress bought it from his estate. He documented what Lundberg called “startling” – that the convention delegates were “a group of men intent upon securing various special economic interests” and weren’t the “philosophically detached cogitators they had been held up in propaganda to be.”

Madison’s report shattered the view that these men came together to devise the best possible government. From the start, they knew what they wanted (at least the key ones there) and set about getting it. Madison was also a powerful advocate on the convention floor of widely discussed views. Unlike the others, he had no considerable property or means, but he lived to age 85, outlasted all the other framers, and served as the nation’s fourth President. In total, eight delegates at most can be considered weighty. The rest were “routine or parochial or both,” and that conclusion is astounding for a group of 55 leading men of the day who “participated in the formulation of a reputed deathless document” and are revered in classrooms and society as larger-than-life icons.

The Gorgeous Convention

Lundberg stared off saying “The constitutional convention of 1787, an historical event of first-class importance, was itself an entirely routine, utterly uninspiring political caucus….it produced absolutely no prodigies of statecraft, no wonders of political (judgment), no vaulting philosophies, no Promethean vistas.” In point of fact, as already stressed and repeated, what happened contradicts all we’ve been “indoctrinated from ears to toes” to believe that’s pure nonsense. Lundberg called the main fantasy the popular conception that the Constitution is “a document of salvation….a magic talisman.” The central achievement of the convention, and a big one, (at least until 1861) was the cobbling together of disparate and squabbling states into a union that held together tenuously for over seven decades but not actually until Appomattox “at bayonet point.”

As mentioned above, the delegates came to Philadelphia merely to amend the unwieldy Articles of Confederation so what it did was, “strictly viewed, illegal.” The finished product emerged as an amalgam of the existing Maryland, New York and Massachusetts constitutions dating respectively from 1776, 1777 and 1790, the latter one written almost entirely by John Adams in a few days. Even though he was abroad in London at the time, the finished Constitution was largely the product of his earlier work. Of those attending, no individual theorist dominated proceedings, but two dominant personalities held things together as its “living core.” Without the force of their presence, Lundberg explained, the whole process “would almost surely have foundered.”

Those men were George Washington, the larger-than- life victorious general of the revolution, and “Great Man” Robert Morris, the JP Morgan-type figure who later went bust because even financial whizards can succumb to excess greed. Gouverneur Morris also was prominent in the proceedings while Madison and Hamilton, as already explained, were virtual unknowns.

Lundberg called the convention “very much a prefabricated group affair” with internal differences over concentrating power in the President or Congress. Then, there were the “tight nationalizers, those generally wanting a national government, and lastly in the minority “states-righters” believing no state power should be surrendered to a federal authority. “As for flat-out democrats,” said Lundberg, “there were none in sight.” In terms of what they achieved, he called it “Old Wine in a Fancy New Bottle” with a new name under new management. The purpose of the convention was to gain formal approval for what the leading power figures wanted and then get their creation rammed through the state ratification process to make it the law of the land. On that score, and after much wheeling and dealing, they achieved mightily.

The convention began in May, went on through three phases for 120 days, and concluded in September after dozens of parliamentary-type votes to postpone, reconsider, amend, etc. with a document produced and turned over to a committee of detail in late July. The final phase ran from August 6 to September 17, nine states were needed for ratification with the larger, more populous ones, granting concessions to the small ones to win the day.

Several scenarios or plans were proposed, one of which was the Virginia Plan envisioning a central national government with a bicameral legislature that, of course, was adopted. All the plans were “strongly rightist” or conservative. Members of the lower house were to be elected by the people and those in the upper body by members of the lower one. That became the law and stayed that way until the 17th Amendment, ratified in 1913, allowed the people of each state to elect their own senators.

Also proposed was a chief executive, a national judiciary with a Supreme Court at the top, and provisions for admitting new states with republican governments in them all. In addition, the finished Constitution included proposals for amendments and much else including terms of office and staggered elections to prevent too many officials being unseated at the same time. The final product was what one academic observer called a “bundle of compromises” from beginning to end.

Lundberg described the delegates as “flinty hard-liners, determined to have their way, never to yield on anything substantial….willing to make purely political compromises (over) the means of carrying on government (but) adamantly resistant….when it came to (its) ends.” Those were primarily economic and social, and those were left as they were when ties with Great Britain were cut.

Thinking then was much like today with provisions in the Constitution targeting the discontented. Congress was empowered to raise revenue through taxation, always hitting the less advantaged hardest. It was authorized to borrow money without limit meaning the people would have to service the debt. It was given power to regulate foreign and interstate commerce assuring the rich their interests would be served, and much more. In sum, the document created “was the means by which the traditional establishment….was re-establishing itself” leaving out of the mix the interests of the “common man (who) in point of fact was going to be allowed to remain….common (with) the Constitution, contrary to political blarney (offering) him no bonuses for it.”

Lundberg titled one sub-section: “Down with the People.” In it, he caught the mood of the delegates as expressed by Roger Sherman of Connecticut who said “The people should have as little to do as may be about the government.” Elbridge Gerry then denounced the evils stemming from “the excess of democracy,” and debating delegates drubbed democracy and “the people” repeatedly. That’s how Alexander Hamilton saw things in his view of “mankind in toto (being) wholly depraved” disagreeing with Thomas Paine’s notion of government being depraved and people being inherently good. Paine wasn’t a delegate so he had no input into the proceedings and couldn’t argue against the central interest of property as a requirement for voting and holding office.

Even Jefferson accepted this idea but hated the word enough to use another expression for it in the Declaration of Independence he authored. His substitute language for “property” was “the pursuit of happiness,” meaning the same thing. While Jefferson abhorred that “word,” the attending delegates (Madison and Hamilton among them) found it their “favorite (one), often brought to the fore as a matter of deepest concern.” Also brought up was the “minority,” but not “any minority or all minorities. It was the minority of the opulent.”

The far-sighted among them foresaw a bonanza coming from the revolution that came about when the states passed confiscation acts, putting properties up for sale at bargain prices, still only affordable to the affluent. It sounds very much like the way corporate predators planned to pillage and plunder Iraq and have done a pretty good job of it.

There was also plenty of graft to go around, again just like in Iraq and at home as well. Lundberg noted “the other big bonanza of the revolution was the trans-Allegheny domains in which patriot speculators made and lost fortunes.” The well-off had their eyes on thousands of parcels of land and buildings wrested from their lawful owners. They also wanted to assure that never happened to them.

Then there was the ratification process itself that turned out to be a tussle as soon as the Constitution was sent to Congress. Lundberg reviewed the arduous give and take process of compromise that finally got the document passed by 13 states with three others rejecting it.

This was when adopting the Bill of Rights made the difference. The ones adopted in the first 10 amendments weren’t for “the people,” nowhere in sight, but to provide them to property owners who wanted:

— prohibitions against quartering troops in their property,– unreasonable searches and seizures there as well,

— the right to have state militias protect them,

— the right of people to bear arms, but not the way the 2nd Amendment is today interpreted,

— the rights of free speech, the press, religion, assembly and petition, all to serve monied and propertied interests alone – not “The People,”

— due process of law with speedy public trials, and

— various other provisions worked out through compromise to become our acclaimed Bill of Rights. Two additional amendments were proposed but rejected by the majority. They would have banned monopolies and standing armies, matters of great enormity that might have made a huge difference thereafter. We’ll never know for sure.

Lundberg stressed the importance of the amendments adopted. Without them, the movement for a second convention likely would have prevailed that might have derailed the whole process or greatly changed the Constitution’s structure. That possibility had to be avoided at all costs and was by this compromise that had nothing to do with granting rights to “The People.”

Government Free Style

Lundberg destroyed the popular myth of a government constrained by constitutional checks and balances. In fact, it can and repeatedly has done anything judged expedient, with or without popular approval, and within or outside the law of the land. In this respect, it’s no different than most others able to operate the same way and often do. It’s done through “the narrowest possible interpretations of the Constitution,” but it’s free to “operate further afield under broader or fanciful official interpretations” with history recording numerous examples.

Many presidents operated this way. Lundberg noted Kennedy, Johnson, Nixon, Wilson, T. and F. Roosevelt, Jackson, could have named Lincoln, and didn’t know about Reagan, GHW Bush, Clinton and, most of all, GW Bush when his book was written.

A key point made is that “government is completely autonomous, detached, in a realm of its own” with its “main interest (being) economic (for the privileged) at all times.” In pursuing this aim, “constitutional shackles and barriers (exist only) in the imaginations of many people” believing in them. Regardless of law, custom or anything else, sitting US governments have always been freelancing. They’ve been unresponsive to the public interest, uncaring about the will and needs of the majority, and generally able to finesse or ignore the law with ease as suits their purpose. As Lundberg put it: “forget the mirage of government by the people,” or the rule of law for that matter, with George Bush only being the most extreme example of how things work in Washington all the time under all Presidents.

Lundberg went on to explain the Constitution effectively confers unlimited powers on the government. He cited Article I, Section 8, Sub-section 18 allotting to Congress power “to make all laws which shall be necessary and proper for carrying into execution the foregoing powers, and all other powers vested by this Constitution….or any department or officer thereof.” It’s up to government, of course, to decide what’s “necessary” and “proper” meaning the sky’s the limit under the concept of sovereignty. The power of government is effectively limited only “by the boundaries of possibility.” Special considerable powers are then afforded the President, dealt with in a separate section below, and another on the Supreme Court.

Lundberg explained how the “three divisions of the American government operate under the immoderately celebrated system of checks and balances” with the framers believing too much power in the hands of one person or group of persons was a potential setup for tyranny. Lundberg believed the theory was false, used the British model to make his case, but he never met George Bush who might have given him pause.

In Britain, the legislature and executive are inextricably linked, a single House of Commons runs the government, the upper House of Lords is only advisory, the courts can only apply the law the legislature hands them, all laws passed become part of the constitution, and new elections are generally called if a sitting government loses a vote of confidence.

In the British parliamentary system, the government consists of a committee of the House of Commons called the Cabinet presided over by a prime minister elected by his party members. He and all cabinet members are elected members of parliament (MPs) and can be voted in or out in any general election with all members standing at the same time. It’s a vastly different and much fairer system overall than the convoluted American model even though, in theory, a British prime minister has much more control of the parliament than a US president has over the Congress with two parties and numerous disparate interests.

In practice, many US presidents get their way, despite the obstacles, and George Bush gets nearly everything he wants, takes it when it’s not offered, and hardly ever faces congressional objection. The section below on the power of the presidency shows how the Constitution makes it so easy to do with Presidents, like Bush, taking full advantage on top of all the enormous powers he has under the law.

Britain has another interesting feature unheard of in Washington that would be refreshing to have. Once a week, there’s a question period when the prime minister and his cabinet are held to account by the opposition and must answer truthfully or pretty close to it, at least in theory. Also, theoretically, a minister is supposed to face certain expulsion if an untruth stated is learned. In the US, in contrast, Presidents routinely lie to Congress, the public and maybe themselves to get away with anything they wish. They face no penalty doing it, under normal circumstances, with exceptions popping up occasionally like for Richard Nixon’s serious lying and smoking gun evidence to prove it and Bill Clinton’s inconsequential kind that was no one else’s business but his own.

Lundberg then reviewed the labyrinthine US system the framers devised under the Roman maxim of “divide and rule” as follows:

— a powerful (and at times omnipotent) chief executive at the top;– a bicameral Congress with a single member in the upper chamber able to subvert all others in it through the power of the filibuster (meaning pirate in Spanish);

— a committee system ruled mostly by seniority or a by political powerbroker;

— delay and circumlocution deliberately built into the system;

— a separate judiciary with power to overrule the Congress and Executive;

— staggered elections to assure continuity by preventing too many of the bums being thrown out together;

— a two-party system with multiple constituencies, especially vulnerable to corruption and the power of big money that runs everything today making the whole system farcical, dishonest and a democracy only in the minds of the deceived and delusional.

This is a system under which Lundberg characterized the US electorate – left, right and center – as “the most bamboozled and surprised in the world” and leaves voters “reduced to the condition of one of Pavlov’s experimental dogs – apathetic, inert, disinterested.” It got Professor J. Allen to say “A system better adapted to the purpose of the lobbyist could not be devised,” and that remark came long before the current era with things in government totally out of control leading one to wonder what Lundberg would say today if he were still living and commenting.

Court Over Constitution

Article III of the Constitution establishes the Supreme Court saying only: “The judicial power shall be vested in one Supreme Court, and in such inferior courts as the Congress may from time to time ordain and establish.” Congress is explicitly empowered to regulate the Court, but, in fact, the Court “seems to regulate Congress.” Lundberg believed it was to allow those unelected on it to be blamed for unpopular decisions getting them off the hook. Congress, if it choose to, has the upper hand, and even Court decisions on various issues only apply to a specific case leaving broader interpretations to other rulings if they come.

As for the common notion of “judicial review,” it’s unmentioned in the Constitution nor did the convention authorize it. This concept is derived by deduction from two separate parts of the Constitution: In Article VI, Section 2 saying the Constitution, laws, and treaties are the “supreme Law of the Land” and judges are bound by them; then in Article III, Section 1 saying judicial power applies to all cases implying judicial review is allowed. Under this interpretation of the law, appointed judges theoretically “have a power unprecedented in history – to annul acts of the Congress and President.”

Lundberg then reviewed some notable examples of judicial power, first asserted in the famous Marbury v. Madison case in 1803. It established the principle of “judicial supremacy” articulated by Chief Justice John Marshall meaning the Court is the final arbiter of what is or is not the law. He set a precedent by voiding an act of Congress and the President. It put a brake on congressional and presidential powers, theoretically, but Presidents like George Bush act above the law by ignoring Congress and the Courts and usurping “unitary executive” powers claiming the law is what he says it is. He gets away with it because the other two branches do nothing to stop him.

In 1776 and at the time of the convention, few in the country believed in judicial review with theoreticians like Madison and James Wilson zealously opposed to it. They wanted legislatures and the executive to be the sole judges of their own constitutional powers. Lundberg then said “Judicial review….is just one of the usages of the Constitution that sprung up in the course of jockeying among the divisions, personalities and factions of government.”

Lundberg then reviewed numerous other notable Court cases, including the shameful Dred Scott decision when claimant Scott, a slave, sued for his freedom on justifiable grounds and lost due to the tenor of the times.

A few others were:

— Fletcher v. Peck in 1810 that stabilized the law of property rights, especially regarding contracts for the purchase of land;– Dartmouth College v Woodward in 1819 with the Court holding charters of private corporations were contracts and as such were protected by the contact clause;

— McCulloch V Maryland also in 1819 with the Court ruling a state couldn’t tax the branch of a bank established by an act of Congress;

— Gibbons v. Ogden in 1824 when the Court upheld the supremacy of the United States over the states in the regulation of interstate commerce;

— Plessy v. Ferguson in 1896 with the Court affirming discrimination in public places;

— a number of cases, including US v. EC Knight Company in 1895, in which the Court vitiated the Sherman Anti-Trust Act of 1890 while at the same time keeping “hot on the trail of labor unions” as conspiracies in restraint of trade in violation of Sherman in Loewe v. Lawler in 1908;

— Santa Clara County v. Southern Pacific Railroad in 1886 when Court reporter JC Bancroft Davis wrote what the Court refused to refute, thereby granting corporations the legal status of personhood under the 14th Amendment with all rights and benefits accruing from it but none of the obligations. In this writer’s non-legal judgment, this decision above all others, adversely changed the course of history most by opening the door to the kinds of unchecked corporate power and abuses seen today. It stands as the most far-reaching, abusive and long-standing of all harmful Court decisions now haunting us.

Lundberg ended this chapter with a section titled “The Corporate State” citing what’s pretty common knowledge today in the age of George Bush. The US is a corporate-dominated society run by near-omnipotent figures within and outside government. They believe in an “individualistic economy,” with the law backing it, based on the inviolate principles of free private enterprise, with them in charge of everything for their self-interested gain. In a zero-sum society, it means their benefits harm the rest of us, and that’s pretty much the way things are today with things far more out of control than when Lundberg wrote his book.

Even so, his comments pre-1980 observed how giant corporations arose “under the ministering hand of government officials, especially in the courts (and there emerged) wealthy dynasties of successful corporate intrepreneurs, insuring a line of (future) Robber Barons.” With the Constitution forbidding “the granting of titles of nobility,” corporate titans, in fact, had all the “material substance pertaining to European nobility (making) Money per se….ennobling in the American scheme.”

Gross disparities in income and personal wealth, far more out of proportion now than three decades ago, are largely the result of these earlier events with government and business conspiring to make them possible. Earlier, and especially now, “successful wealthholders in almost every case had an omnipotent lever at their service: the government, including Congress, the courts and the chief executive.” The constitutional story comes down to a question of money and money arrangements – who gets it, how, why, when, where, what for, and under what conditions. Also, who the law leaves out.

This story has nothing whatever to do with guaranteeing, as they say, life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness; establishing justice; upholding the rule of law equitably for everyone; promoting the general welfare; or securing the blessings of freedom for the general public unconsidered, unimportant and ignored by the three branches of government serving monied and property interests only, of which they are part.

This was how it was when the Constitution was drafted, it stayed that way through the years, and is written in stone today with Lundberg concluding “It seems safe to say (this way of things) will never be rectified.” Never is a long time, hopefully on that count he’s wrong, but how insightful and penetrating he was on the constitutional story he revealed equisitely so far with more below, beginning with the crucially important next section. George Bush will love it if someone reads it to him or this review.

The Veiled Autocrat

Lundberg’s dominant theme here is that the US President is the most powerful political official on earth, bar none under any other system of government. “The office he holds is inherently imperial,” regardless of the occupant or how he governs, and the Constitution confers this on him. Whereas under the British model with the executive as a collectivity, the US system “is absolutely unique, and dangerously vulnerable in many ways” with one man in charge fully able to exploit his position. “The American President,” said Lundberg, stands “midway between a collective executive and an absolute dictator (and in times of war like now) becomes in fact quite constitutionally, a full-fledged dictator.”

A single sentence, easily passed over or misunderstood, constitutes the essence of presidential power. It effectively grants the Executive near-limitless power, only constrained to the degree he so chooses. It’s from Article II, Section 1 reading: “The executive power shall be vested in a President of the United States of America. Article II, Section 3 then almost nonchalantly adds: “The President shall take care that the laws be faithfully executed” without saying Presidents are virtually empowered to make laws as well as execute them even though nothing in the Constitution specifically permits this practice. More on that below.

Lundberg said the proper way to understand the Constitution is to view it as a “symphony” with big themes being like separate movements. Theme one in Article I, Section 1 says “All legislative powers herein granted shall be vested in a Congress of the United States.” Theme two is the dominant one on the Executive in Article II, Section 1 cited above. The final movement or theme three deals with “The judicial power.”

Lundberg then continued saying “to understand the inner nature of the United States government (the key question is) What is executive power? – aware all the time that it is concentrated in the hands of one man.” He also reviewed how Presidents are elected “literally (by) electoral (unelected by the public) dummies” in an Electoral College. The process or scheme is a “long-acknowledged constitutional anomaly.” They can subvert the popular vote, never meet or consult like the College of Cardinals does in Rome to elect a Pope, so, in fact, its use is “a farce all the way.”

Now to the issue of executive power covered in Section 2. It’s vast and frightening. The President:

— is commander-in-chief of the military and in this capacity is completely autonomous in peace and a de facto dictator in war; although Article I, Section 8 grants only Congress the right to declare war, the President, in fact, can do it any time he wishes “without consulting anyone” and, of course, has done it many times;– can grant commutations or pardons except in cases of impeachment. Nixon resigned remember before near-certain impeachment;

— can make treaties that become the law of the land, with the advice and consent of two-thirds of the Senate (not ratification as commonly believed); can also terminate treaties with a mere announcement as George Bush did renouncing the important ABM Treaty with the former Soviet Union; in addition, and with no constitutional sanction, he can rule by decree through executive agreements with foreign governments that in some cases are momentous ones like those made at Yalta and Potsdam near the end of WW II. While short of treaties, they then become the law of the land.

— can appoint administration officials, diplomats, federal judges with Senate approval, that’s usually routine, or can fill any vacancy through (Senate) recess appointments; can also discharge any appointed executive official other than judges and statutory administrative officials;

— can veto congressional legislation, with history showing through the book’s publication, they’re sustained 96% of the time;

— while Congress alone has appropriating authority, only the President has the power to release funds for spending by the executive branch or not release them;

— Presidents also have a huge bureaucracy at their disposal including powerful officials like the Secretaries of Defense, State, Treasury and Homeland Security and the Attorney General in charge of the Justice Department;

— Presidents also command center stage any time they wish. They can request and get national prime time television for any purpose with guaranteed extensive post-appearance coverage promoting his message with nary a disagreement with it on any issue;

— throughout history, going back to George Washington, Presidents have issued Executive Orders (EOs) although the Constitution “nowhere implicitly or explicitly gives a President (the) power (to make) new law” by issuing “one-man, often far-reaching” EOs. However, as Lundberg explained above, the President has so much power he’s virtually able to do whatever he wishes, the only constraint on him being himself and how he chooses to govern.

— George Bush also usurped “Unitary Executive” power to brazenly and openly declare what this section makes clear – that the law is what he says it is. He proved his intent in six and a half years in office by subverting congressional legislation through his record-breaking number of unconstitutional “signing statements” – affecting over 1132 law provisions through 147 separate “statements,” more than all previous Presidents combined. In so doing, he expanded presidential power even beyond the usual practices recounted above.

— Presidents are, in fact, empowered to do almost anything not expressively forbidden in the Constitution, and very little there is; more importantly, with a little ingenuity and a lot of license and chutzpah, the President “can make almost any (constitutional) text mean whatever (he) wants it to mean” so, in fact, his authority is practically absolute or plenary. And the Supreme Court supports this notion as an “inherent power of sovereignty,” according to Lundberg. He explained, if the US has sovereignty, it has all powers therein, and the President, as the sole executive, can exercise them freely without constitutional authorization or restraint.

In effect, “the President….is virtually a sovereign in his own person.” Compared to the power of the President, Congress is mostly “a paper tiger, easily soothed or repulsed.” The courts, as well, can be gotten around with a little creative exercise of presidential power, and in the case of George Bush, at times just ignoring their decisions when they disagree with his. As Lundberg put it: “One should never under-estimate the power of the President….nor over-estimate that of the Supreme Court. The supposed system of equitable checks and balances does not exist in fact (because Congress and the courts don’t effectively use their constitutional authority)….the separation in the Constitution between legislative and the executive is wholly artificial.”

Further, it’s pure myth that the government is constrained by limited powers. Quite the opposite is true “which at the point of execution (reside in) one man,” the President. In addition, “Until the American electorate creates effective political parties (which it never has done), Congress….will always be pretty much under (Presidents’) thumb(s).” Under the “American constitutional system (the President) is very much a de facto king.”

Lundberg cited examples such as Franklin Roosevelt, considered one of the nation’s three greatest Presidents along with Lincoln and Washington. He “waged (illegal) naval warfare against Germany before Pearl Harbor.” During the war, he stretched his powers to the limit and functioned as a dictator. Truman atom-bombed Japan twice gratuitously and criminally with the war over and the Japanese negotiating surrender. He also went around Congress to wage a war of aggression on North Korea when its forces attacked the South after repeated US-directed southern incursions against the North. Lyndon Johnson attacked North Vietnam February 7, 1965 using the contrived August, 1964 Gulf of Tonkin Resolution as justification even though there was none. The examples are endless, Presidents take full advantage, and nearly always get away with it.

The only thing Presidents can’t do, in theory, is openly violate the law. But since he can interpret it creatively, it’s up to Congress and the High Court to hold him to account, and that rarely happens. Nixon was forced to resign to avoid impeachment because there was smoking gun evidence on tape to convict him on top of his being roundly disliked making it easier to act. But what he did overall wasn’t unusual except that he paid the price for it.

As Lundberg put it, “highhandedness, unpalatable doings (and) scandals” are part and parcel of politics from top to bottom in the system at all levels of government. Jethro Lieberman showed this type behavior “is a steady occupation at every level of government” in his pre-Watergate book – “How the Government Breaks the Law.” At the executive level, he showed government proceeds “pretty much ad libitum outside the stipulated rules at all levels.” In other words, the nation was always infested with Nixons at all levels, but most got away with their offenses and today that’s truer than ever.

As for impeaching and convicting a President for malfeasance, Article II, Section 4 states it can only be for “treason, bribery, or other high crimes and misdemeanors.” Based on the historical record, it’s near-impossible to do with no President ever having been removed from office this way, and only two were impeached, both unjustly.

Lundberg quoted John Adams on this issue saying he was right believing it would take a national convulsion to remove a President by impeachment, it hasn’t happened up to now, which is not to say it never will with no President more deserving of the “distinction” than the current sitting one who almost makes Richard Nixon look saintly by comparison. It’s long past the time to smash the inviolate notion of presidential invincibility, and given the growing groundswell, it could happen against all odds. If it does, it will be a first, and if he were still living, it would also make Lundberg rethink his final comment on the subject that it’s “virtually impossible to remove a President (and) His security in office….is but one facet of his power.” Still remember, an exception, when it happens, only proves the rule, so Lundberg’s assessment is still valid.

Presidential power since WW II is also reinforced by their own private army through the vast US intelligence apparatus and much more. The CIA is part of it and today functions mainly as a presidential praetorian guard and global mafia-style hit squad operating freely outside the law as a powerful rogue agency backed by an undisclosed budget likely topping $50 billion annually. And since January, 2003, the Department of Homeland Security functions as a national Gestapo about as free to do as it pleases as CIA that also operates outside its mandate on US soil along with the equally repressive FBI. They mainly target disaffected political groups and individuals publicly standing against government policies with enough influence to make a difference.

The Risks in One-Man Rule

Lundberg quoted noted political scientist Herman Finer (1898 – 1969) again reinforcing what’s covered above that “there is (virtually) no limit to the Chief Executive’s power.” In six and a half years in office, George Bush proved he was right and then some. Finer, even in an earlier less complex era, portrayed the President as overweighted with responsibilities while having enough concentrated power in his hands to make irresponsible, rash or dangerous decisions with potentially immense repercussions.

Finer proposed a way to improve the presidency by relieving one man of more responsibility than anyone can handle alone and minimize incompetency or villainy at the same time. His idea was for a collective and supportive leade

Top Ten Myths About the Illegal NSA Spying on Americans

0

MYTH: This is merely a “terrorist surveillance program.”
REALITY:
When there is evidence a person may be a terrorist, both the criminal code and intelligence laws already authorize eavesdropping. This illegal program, however, allows electronic monitoring without any showing to a court that the person being spied upon in this country is a suspected terrorist.

MYTH: The program is legal.
REALITY:
The program violates the Fourth Amendment and Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act (FISA) and will chill free speech.

MYTH: The Authorization for the Use of Military Force (AUMF) allows this.
REALITY:
The resolution about using force in Afghanistan doesn’t mention wiretaps and doesn’t apply domestically, but FISA does–it requires a court order.

MYTH: The president has authority as commander in chief of the military to spy on Americans without any court oversight.
REALITY: The Supreme Court recently found the administration’s claim of unlimited commander in chief powers during war to be an unacceptable effort to “condense power into a single branch of government,” contrary to the Constitution’s checks and balances.

MYTH: The president has the power to say what the law is.
REALITY: The courts have this power under our system of government, and no person is above the law, not even the president, or the rule of law means nothing.

MYTH: These warrantless wiretaps could never happen to you.
REALITY: Without court oversight, there is no way to ensure innocent people’s everyday communications are not monitored or catalogued by the NSA or other agencies.

MYTH: This illegal program could have prevented the 9/11 attacks.
REALITY: This is utter manipulation. Before 9/11, the federal government had gathered intelligence, without illegal NSA spying, about the looming attacks and at least two of the terrorists who perpetrated them, but failed to act.

MYTH: This illegal program has saved thousands of lives.
REALITY: Because the program is secret the administration can assert anything it wants and then claim the need for secrecy excuses its failure to document these claims, let alone reveal all the times the program distracted intelligence agents with dead ends that wasted resources and trampled individual rights.

MYTH: FISA takes too long.

REALITY: FISA allows wiretaps to begin immediately in emergencies, with three days afterward to go to court. Even without an emergency, FISA orders can be approved very quickly and FISA judges are available at all hours.

MYTH: Only liberals disagree with the president about the program.
REALITY:
The serious concerns that have been raised transcend party labels and reflect genuine and widespread worries about the lack of checks on the president’s claim of unlimited power to illegally spy on Americans without any independent oversight.

(Download a printable version of the full ACLU report. Download a printable version of this summary.)

Baghdad – 6 Million People, 117 Degrees And No Water

1
By Richard Becker

For the past 24 hours, Baghdad has had virtually no running water.

Major parts of the city of six million people have lacked running water for six days, while daily high temperatures have ranged from 115 to 120 degrees. The tiny amount of water dripping through the pipes is causing many of those who must drink it to suffer acute intestinal illness.
According to reports, not enough electricity is available to run Baghdad’s water pumps. This in a country with vast energy resources.
Corporate media outlets-to the extent they have reported this horrific and mind-boggling story at all-have treated it as a failure on the part of Iraqis.
In reality, it is an appalling war crime committed by the occupying power, the U.S. military. It threatens the lives of tens of thousands of people in the short term and unthinkable numbers of people unless it is rectified immediately.
According to Article 55 of Geneva Conventions (1949) to which the U.S. government is a signatory: “To the fullest extent of the means available to it the Occupying Power has the duty of ensuring the food and medical supplies of the population; it should, in particular, bring in the necessary foodstuffs, medical stores and other articles if the resources of the occupied territory are inadequate.”
Article 59 states: “If the whole or part of the population of an occupied territory is inadequately supplied, the Occupying Power shall agree to relief schemes on behalf of the said population, and shall facilitate them by all the means at its disposal.”
To say that a huge city deprived of running water is “inadequately supplied” would rank as one of the great understatements of human history.
Of course, the shortage of water-the most vital of all necessities-does not extend to the U.S. personnel and contractors occupying Iraq.
The U.S. government tries to relieve itself of its obligations by pretending that Iraq’s “sovereignty” was restored in June 2004. But that is just another hoax.
Since its illegal invasion and conquest of Iraq in the spring of 2003, the real state power in the country has been the U.S. military.
This latest catastrophe to afflict the Iraqi people is another poisonous fruit of imperialist occupation. Not even in the worst times during the U.S. blockade of Iraq from 1990-2003, did such a disaster occur.
The U.S. regime in Iraq must provide the people of Baghdad with relief in the short-term to avert unprecedented disaster. The U.S. occupation must come to an immediate end. The officials responsible for the terrible crimes committed against the Iraqi people must be held accountable. The U.S. government owes Iraq vast reparations for the death and destruction imposed on that society by an illegal war of aggression.

Bush Isn’t Spying on al Qaeda … He’s Spying on You

1

The extraordinary secrecy surrounding the spying operations revealed in Alberto Gonzales’ Senate testimony is not aimed at al-Qaeda, but at the American people.

By Robert Parry

The dispute over whether Attorney General Alberto Gonzales committed perjury when he parsed words about George W. Bush’s warrantless surveillance program misses a larger point: the extraordinary secrecy surrounding these spying operations is not aimed at al-Qaeda, but at the American people.

There has never been a reasonable explanation for why a fuller discussion of these operations would help al-Qaeda, although that claim often is used by the Bush administration to challenge the patriotism of its critics or to avoid tough questions.

On July 27, for instance, White House press secretary Tony Snow fended off reporters who asked about apparent contradictions in Gonzales’s testimony by saying:

“This gets us back into the situation that I understand is unsatisfactory because there are lots of questions raised and the vast majority of those we’re not going to be in a position to answer, simply because they do involve matters of classification that we cannot and will not discuss publicly.”

Discussion closed.

But al-Qaeda terrorists always have assumed that their electronic communications were vulnerable to interception, which is why 9/11 attackers like Mohamed Atta traveled overseas for face-to-face meetings with their handlers. They limited their phone calls to mostly routine conversations.

The terrorists also had no reason to know or to care that the U.S. government was or wasn’t getting wiretap approval from the secret court created by the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act. They simply took for granted that their communications could be intercepted and acted accordingly.

It never made sense to think that al-Qaeda terrorists suddenly would get loose-lipped just because the FISA court was or wasn’t in the mix. The FISA court rubber-stamps almost all wiretap requests from the Executive Branch for domestic spying, and overseas calls don’t require a warrant.

Can anyone really imagine a conversation like “Gee, Osama, since Bush has to get FISA approval, we can now call our sleeper agents and plan the next attack.”

Similarly, there’s no reason to think terrorists would change their behavior significantly if they knew that the U.S. government was engaged in massive data-mining operations, poring through electronic records of citizens and non-citizens alike.

The 9/11 attackers mostly stayed off the grid and many of their transactions, such as renting housing, would not alone have raised suspicions. Indeed, the patterns that deserved more attention, such as enrollment in flight-training classes and the arrival of known al-Qaeda operatives, were detected by alert FBI agents in the field but ignored by FBI officials in Washington — and by Bush while on a month-long vacation in Texas.

The 9/11 attacks were less a failure of intelligence than a failure of political attention by Bush’s national security team.

Americans in the Dark

So what’s the real explanation for all the secrecy about the overall structure of the so-called Terrorist Surveillance Program?

The chief reason, especially for the excessive secrecy around the data-mining operations, appears to be Bush’s political need to prevent a full debate inside the United States about the security value of these Big Brother-type procedures when weighed against invasions of Americans’ privacy.

Bush knows he could run into trouble if he doesn’t keep the American people in the dark. In 2002, for instance, when the Bush administration launched a project seeking “total information awareness” on virtually everyone on earth involved in the modern economy, the disclosure was met with public alarm.

The administration cited the terrorist threat to justify the program which involved applying advanced computer technology to analyze trillions of bytes of data on electronic transactions and communications. The goal was to study the electronic footprints left by every person in the developed world during the course of their everyday lives — from the innocuous to the embarrassing to the potentially significant.

The government could cross-check books borrowed from a library, fertilizer bought at a farm-supply outlet, X-rated movies rented at a video store, prescriptions filled at a pharmacy, sites visited on the Internet, tickets reserved for a plane, borders crossed while traveling, rooms rented at a motel, and countless other examples.

Cont http://www.alternet.org/rights/58806/?page=2

CIA, not Pakistan, should be asked about Osama’s whereabouts: Ghani

0

By Khalid Hasan

Owais Ahmed Ghani, governor of Balochistan, said here on Thursday that it is the CIA and not Pakistan that should be asked where Osama Bin Laden is, since it was the CIA that recruited, trained and shepherded the future chief of Al Qaeda during the Soviet invasion of Afghanistan and the ensuing conflict.

Pakistan, he said in answer to a question at a speaking engagement arranged by a local think tank, had never had anything to do with Bin Laden. “In fact, Bin Laden always hated Pakistan,” he added.

Ghani described the province of Balochistan as peaceful and secure, barring the tiny Bugti area where there is “some resistance”. “Ours is a society in transition and we have a rising middle class. We face stiff political challenges and there is class tension,” he explained. There were three kinds of terrorism, he said – ethnic, sectarian and the pure kind. Global terrorism should be differentiated from the local variety, he suggested. He also proposed renaming the global war on terrorism to the war on global terrorism. With the exception of three tribal chiefs, he claimed, the rest are now part of the political mainstream. He said the source of weapons that the dissident elements have in the province come from Afghanistan. Only one percent of the population is involved in the insurgency. He said as a young officer in the 1970s, General Musharraf fought against Baloch insurgents and on assuming power, the economic development and modernisation on Balochistan became his first priority. He said out of the 65 members of the Balochistan Assembly, only three now belong to sub-national parties..

Ghani spoke at length about Afghanistan, insisting that it is unfair to hold Pakistan responsible for the neighbouring country’s troubles. He cited several reasons for the situation in Afghanistan, among them: lack of coordination in NATO/Coalition forces, government corruption, lack of law and order, opium and narcotics trade and a disillusioned population. Ninety percent of the world’s heroin originates from Afghanistan, the governor charged, pointing out that the Afghan poppy cultivation area has jumped from 40,000 acres to 400,000 acres. The narcotics mafia has a global outreach, he warned. He denied that there are any Taliban in Balochistan or any training camps. The narcotic mafia, he said, does not want the Pak-Afghan border to be controlled and regulated. Al Qaeda, he said, is regrouping in Afghanistan, not Pakistan, because “we can take care of Al Qaeda”.

Ghani bristled at accusations and threats being made against Pakistan that it is harbouring Al Qaeda and Taliban elements in its tribal areas that could or should be militarily struck by the Unite States, if Pakistan fails to deal with them. “We don’t need such statements because they damage our efforts and they cause public resentment. People want to know if this is the appreciation we are getting after all that we have done and are doing in fighting terrorism.” Afghanistan, he said, needs what the Afghans call “Meesaq-e-Milli” or a national compact. He said when Pakistan suggests that political space should be provided to elements outside the ruling circles, it is accused of wanting the return of the Taliban. He added, “There are elements in the Afghan government that want the conflict to continue.” He denied that the Baloch people are being turned into “Red Indians”. While for the first 50 years of Pakistan, they did not receive their due share, since 1999 the situation has changed. For instance, 35 percent of the federal budget for road construction is being spent on Balochistan. Six new universities have been opened. Schools are being established in remote areas and the Baloch people are partners and shareholders in the development and progress of their province.

Unpaid fines may stop people leaving UK

0

· Home Office plan outlined in ‘e-borders’ scheme
· Huge amounts of data likely to be produced

Alan Travis, home affairs editor
Monday August 6, 2007
The Guardian

Tens of thousands of people who have failed to pay court fines amounting to more than £487m would be banned from leaving the country under new powers outlined by the Home Office. Ministers are also looking at ways of using the new £1.2bn “e-borders” programme to collect more than £9m owed in health treatment charges by foreign nationals who have left the country without paying.The programme, to be phased in from October next year, will also allow the creation of a centralised “no-fly” list of air-rage or disruptive passengers which can be circulated to airlines.

The e-borders programme requires airlines and ferry companies to submit up to 50 items of data on each passenger between 24 and 48 hours before departure to and from the UK. With 200 million passenger movements in and out of the UK last year to and from 266 overseas airports on 169 airlines, an enormous amount of data is expected to be generated by the programme.

Passenger numbers are expected to rise to 305 million a year by 2015 and ministers claim the £1.2bn programme is the only way to provide a comprehensive record of all those seeking to enter and leave the UK. The immigration minister, Liam Byrne, claims that the programme will create a kind of border control, with information being passed to police and security services before passengers board a plane, boat or train: “It will create a new, offshore line of defence – helping genuine travellers, but stopping those who pose a risk before they travel.”

However, the long-term nature of the programme means that by 2009 only half the passenger movements in and out of Britain will be logged in the e-borders computers, and even by 2011 coverage will have reached only 95%.

A Home Office assessment of the secondary legislation that is being used to implement the programme gives some early indications of who, other than suspected terrorists and international criminals, will be on the British no-fly list and be banned from travelling to and from the country. It floats the idea that provisions should be introduced to ban travel overseas for the tens of thousands of offenders who have not paid outstanding court fines or failed to discharge confiscation orders made against them. Although no official estimate exists of the number of people who have to pay court fines the amount they owe has now reached a record £487m, with a further £300m in unpaid confiscation orders.

Passengers will be further encouraged in future to book their tickets and check in online. Other suggested benefits of the e-borders programme include easier identification of those who falsely claim non-domicile or non-resident status to avoid UK income tax, thought to be costing as much as £2bn a year, and those who wrongly claim social security benefits despite having left the country.

Unpaid fines may stop people leaving UK

0

· Home Office plan outlined in ‘e-borders’ scheme
· Huge amounts of data likely to be produced

Alan Travis, home affairs editor
Monday August 6, 2007
The Guardian

Tens of thousands of people who have failed to pay court fines amounting to more than £487m would be banned from leaving the country under new powers outlined by the Home Office. Ministers are also looking at ways of using the new £1.2bn “e-borders” programme to collect more than £9m owed in health treatment charges by foreign nationals who have left the country without paying.The programme, to be phased in from October next year, will also allow the creation of a centralised “no-fly” list of air-rage or disruptive passengers which can be circulated to airlines.

The e-borders programme requires airlines and ferry companies to submit up to 50 items of data on each passenger between 24 and 48 hours before departure to and from the UK. With 200 million passenger movements in and out of the UK last year to and from 266 overseas airports on 169 airlines, an enormous amount of data is expected to be generated by the programme.

Passenger numbers are expected to rise to 305 million a year by 2015 and ministers claim the £1.2bn programme is the only way to provide a comprehensive record of all those seeking to enter and leave the UK. The immigration minister, Liam Byrne, claims that the programme will create a kind of border control, with information being passed to police and security services before passengers board a plane, boat or train: “It will create a new, offshore line of defence – helping genuine travellers, but stopping those who pose a risk before they travel.”

However, the long-term nature of the programme means that by 2009 only half the passenger movements in and out of Britain will be logged in the e-borders computers, and even by 2011 coverage will have reached only 95%.

A Home Office assessment of the secondary legislation that is being used to implement the programme gives some early indications of who, other than suspected terrorists and international criminals, will be on the British no-fly list and be banned from travelling to and from the country. It floats the idea that provisions should be introduced to ban travel overseas for the tens of thousands of offenders who have not paid outstanding court fines or failed to discharge confiscation orders made against them. Although no official estimate exists of the number of people who have to pay court fines the amount they owe has now reached a record £487m, with a further £300m in unpaid confiscation orders.

Passengers will be further encouraged in future to book their tickets and check in online. Other suggested benefits of the e-borders programme include easier identification of those who falsely claim non-domicile or non-resident status to avoid UK income tax, thought to be costing as much as £2bn a year, and those who wrongly claim social security benefits despite having left the country.

Unpaid fines may stop people leaving UK

0

· Home Office plan outlined in ‘e-borders’ scheme
· Huge amounts of data likely to be produced

Alan Travis, home affairs editor
Monday August 6, 2007
The Guardian

Tens of thousands of people who have failed to pay court fines amounting to more than £487m would be banned from leaving the country under new powers outlined by the Home Office. Ministers are also looking at ways of using the new £1.2bn “e-borders” programme to collect more than £9m owed in health treatment charges by foreign nationals who have left the country without paying.The programme, to be phased in from October next year, will also allow the creation of a centralised “no-fly” list of air-rage or disruptive passengers which can be circulated to airlines.

The e-borders programme requires airlines and ferry companies to submit up to 50 items of data on each passenger between 24 and 48 hours before departure to and from the UK. With 200 million passenger movements in and out of the UK last year to and from 266 overseas airports on 169 airlines, an enormous amount of data is expected to be generated by the programme.

Passenger numbers are expected to rise to 305 million a year by 2015 and ministers claim the £1.2bn programme is the only way to provide a comprehensive record of all those seeking to enter and leave the UK. The immigration minister, Liam Byrne, claims that the programme will create a kind of border control, with information being passed to police and security services before passengers board a plane, boat or train: “It will create a new, offshore line of defence – helping genuine travellers, but stopping those who pose a risk before they travel.”

However, the long-term nature of the programme means that by 2009 only half the passenger movements in and out of Britain will be logged in the e-borders computers, and even by 2011 coverage will have reached only 95%.

A Home Office assessment of the secondary legislation that is being used to implement the programme gives some early indications of who, other than suspected terrorists and international criminals, will be on the British no-fly list and be banned from travelling to and from the country. It floats the idea that provisions should be introduced to ban travel overseas for the tens of thousands of offenders who have not paid outstanding court fines or failed to discharge confiscation orders made against them. Although no official estimate exists of the number of people who have to pay court fines the amount they owe has now reached a record £487m, with a further £300m in unpaid confiscation orders.

Passengers will be further encouraged in future to book their tickets and check in online. Other suggested benefits of the e-borders programme include easier identification of those who falsely claim non-domicile or non-resident status to avoid UK income tax, thought to be costing as much as £2bn a year, and those who wrongly claim social security benefits despite having left the country.

Unpaid fines may stop people leaving UK

0

· Home Office plan outlined in ‘e-borders’ scheme
· Huge amounts of data likely to be produced

Alan Travis, home affairs editor
Monday August 6, 2007
The Guardian

Tens of thousands of people who have failed to pay court fines amounting to more than £487m would be banned from leaving the country under new powers outlined by the Home Office. Ministers are also looking at ways of using the new £1.2bn “e-borders” programme to collect more than £9m owed in health treatment charges by foreign nationals who have left the country without paying.The programme, to be phased in from October next year, will also allow the creation of a centralised “no-fly” list of air-rage or disruptive passengers which can be circulated to airlines.

The e-borders programme requires airlines and ferry companies to submit up to 50 items of data on each passenger between 24 and 48 hours before departure to and from the UK. With 200 million passenger movements in and out of the UK last year to and from 266 overseas airports on 169 airlines, an enormous amount of data is expected to be generated by the programme.

Passenger numbers are expected to rise to 305 million a year by 2015 and ministers claim the £1.2bn programme is the only way to provide a comprehensive record of all those seeking to enter and leave the UK. The immigration minister, Liam Byrne, claims that the programme will create a kind of border control, with information being passed to police and security services before passengers board a plane, boat or train: “It will create a new, offshore line of defence – helping genuine travellers, but stopping those who pose a risk before they travel.”

However, the long-term nature of the programme means that by 2009 only half the passenger movements in and out of Britain will be logged in the e-borders computers, and even by 2011 coverage will have reached only 95%.

A Home Office assessment of the secondary legislation that is being used to implement the programme gives some early indications of who, other than suspected terrorists and international criminals, will be on the British no-fly list and be banned from travelling to and from the country. It floats the idea that provisions should be introduced to ban travel overseas for the tens of thousands of offenders who have not paid outstanding court fines or failed to discharge confiscation orders made against them. Although no official estimate exists of the number of people who have to pay court fines the amount they owe has now reached a record £487m, with a further £300m in unpaid confiscation orders.

Passengers will be further encouraged in future to book their tickets and check in online. Other suggested benefits of the e-borders programme include easier identification of those who falsely claim non-domicile or non-resident status to avoid UK income tax, thought to be costing as much as £2bn a year, and those who wrongly claim social security benefits despite having left the country.

Unpaid fines may stop people leaving UK

0

· Home Office plan outlined in ‘e-borders’ scheme
· Huge amounts of data likely to be produced

Alan Travis, home affairs editor
Monday August 6, 2007
The Guardian

Tens of thousands of people who have failed to pay court fines amounting to more than £487m would be banned from leaving the country under new powers outlined by the Home Office. Ministers are also looking at ways of using the new £1.2bn “e-borders” programme to collect more than £9m owed in health treatment charges by foreign nationals who have left the country without paying.The programme, to be phased in from October next year, will also allow the creation of a centralised “no-fly” list of air-rage or disruptive passengers which can be circulated to airlines.

The e-borders programme requires airlines and ferry companies to submit up to 50 items of data on each passenger between 24 and 48 hours before departure to and from the UK. With 200 million passenger movements in and out of the UK last year to and from 266 overseas airports on 169 airlines, an enormous amount of data is expected to be generated by the programme.

Passenger numbers are expected to rise to 305 million a year by 2015 and ministers claim the £1.2bn programme is the only way to provide a comprehensive record of all those seeking to enter and leave the UK. The immigration minister, Liam Byrne, claims that the programme will create a kind of border control, with information being passed to police and security services before passengers board a plane, boat or train: “It will create a new, offshore line of defence – helping genuine travellers, but stopping those who pose a risk before they travel.”

However, the long-term nature of the programme means that by 2009 only half the passenger movements in and out of Britain will be logged in the e-borders computers, and even by 2011 coverage will have reached only 95%.

A Home Office assessment of the secondary legislation that is being used to implement the programme gives some early indications of who, other than suspected terrorists and international criminals, will be on the British no-fly list and be banned from travelling to and from the country. It floats the idea that provisions should be introduced to ban travel overseas for the tens of thousands of offenders who have not paid outstanding court fines or failed to discharge confiscation orders made against them. Although no official estimate exists of the number of people who have to pay court fines the amount they owe has now reached a record £487m, with a further £300m in unpaid confiscation orders.

Passengers will be further encouraged in future to book their tickets and check in online. Other suggested benefits of the e-borders programme include easier identification of those who falsely claim non-domicile or non-resident status to avoid UK income tax, thought to be costing as much as £2bn a year, and those who wrongly claim social security benefits despite having left the country.

Unpaid fines may stop people leaving UK

0

· Home Office plan outlined in ‘e-borders’ scheme
· Huge amounts of data likely to be produced

Alan Travis, home affairs editor
Monday August 6, 2007
The Guardian

Tens of thousands of people who have failed to pay court fines amounting to more than £487m would be banned from leaving the country under new powers outlined by the Home Office. Ministers are also looking at ways of using the new £1.2bn “e-borders” programme to collect more than £9m owed in health treatment charges by foreign nationals who have left the country without paying.The programme, to be phased in from October next year, will also allow the creation of a centralised “no-fly” list of air-rage or disruptive passengers which can be circulated to airlines.

The e-borders programme requires airlines and ferry companies to submit up to 50 items of data on each passenger between 24 and 48 hours before departure to and from the UK. With 200 million passenger movements in and out of the UK last year to and from 266 overseas airports on 169 airlines, an enormous amount of data is expected to be generated by the programme.

Passenger numbers are expected to rise to 305 million a year by 2015 and ministers claim the £1.2bn programme is the only way to provide a comprehensive record of all those seeking to enter and leave the UK. The immigration minister, Liam Byrne, claims that the programme will create a kind of border control, with information being passed to police and security services before passengers board a plane, boat or train: “It will create a new, offshore line of defence – helping genuine travellers, but stopping those who pose a risk before they travel.”

However, the long-term nature of the programme means that by 2009 only half the passenger movements in and out of Britain will be logged in the e-borders computers, and even by 2011 coverage will have reached only 95%.

A Home Office assessment of the secondary legislation that is being used to implement the programme gives some early indications of who, other than suspected terrorists and international criminals, will be on the British no-fly list and be banned from travelling to and from the country. It floats the idea that provisions should be introduced to ban travel overseas for the tens of thousands of offenders who have not paid outstanding court fines or failed to discharge confiscation orders made against them. Although no official estimate exists of the number of people who have to pay court fines the amount they owe has now reached a record £487m, with a further £300m in unpaid confiscation orders.

Passengers will be further encouraged in future to book their tickets and check in online. Other suggested benefits of the e-borders programme include easier identification of those who falsely claim non-domicile or non-resident status to avoid UK income tax, thought to be costing as much as £2bn a year, and those who wrongly claim social security benefits despite having left the country.

Biometric Recognition Used To Personalize Ads

0

By J. Nicholas Hoover

In the film version of Minority Report, a personalized ad that knows about past purchases greets a character as he enters the Gap. Meanwhile, American Express ads tell Tom Cruise’s own character that he looks like he needs an escape as he’s chased by authorities.

Now Microsoft has filed for a patent that could eventually help make these advertising scenarios come true.

Microsoft has been investing heavily in advertising, including a $6 billion acquisition of aQuantive that should close this quarter, a new top ad exec at the company, and a new applied search and advertising research group.

“Techniques for the targeting of advertisements are meager,” the patent application said. “Some industry experts question how long the old world approach can last before the entire system becomes impossible to justify.”

The new Microsoft system, described in the patent application published last week, would be able to determine the identity of someone watching a display and deliver personalized ads to that person. Identification could come from biometric sensors, cameras, or more traditional login methods. A computer would then evaluate information that has been tracked about the person and the content and present a personally relevant advertisement.

The information being tracked could be very extensive, including but not limited to personal interests and hobbies, sex, age, location, profession, subscriptions, group membership, ethnicity, marital status, height, status in the family (i.e., parent or child), the viewer’s address book, calendar, e-mail inbox, notes, purchasing history, and advertising preferences.

So, for example, the system could know that a man watching TV has a wife whose birthday is tomorrow, that the man has bought flowers for her birthday before, and what her name is. The targeted advertisement might create a virtual, photorealistic bouquet based on preferences and ask the viewer if he’d like to buy this bouquet for Julie’s birthday tomorrow.

Such a system is bound to create privacy concerns, and Microsoft takes that into consideration, unlike in another recently published patent application regarding personalized ads for computer users. The new application mostly covers home devices, like cell phones, smart phones, PDAs, computer monitors, televisions, and projections, and does so with security of personal information in mind. “The tracking system may be located inside the person’s home or at some other trusted location, so that the personal information stored therein is protected,” it said. The system could also be tweaked so kids don’t receive targeted ads.

There also seems to be a limit on how much information would ultimately get back to advertisers. The personalization would take place on the local system, rather than with the advertiser. “While the tracking system may notify an advertiser of the opportunity and request advertiser data, the advertiser is not aware to which person the advertisement is going to be presented, and therefore cannot personalize the advertisement at its end,” the application reads.

DNA swab brings us closer to a police state

1

The move to widen the UK genetic database is yet another example of a relentless desire to monitor every aspect of our everyday lives

Henry Porter
Sunday August 5, 2007
The Observer

An elderly lady called a BBC Wales radio phone-in programme on which I was a guest last week to say that she wouldn’t mind in the slightest if she was stopped and ordered to submit to a DNA test when her dog fouled the pavement. ‘Everyone should give their DNA to the police,’ she said before the discussion was cut short.There wasn’t time to talk about the sinister absurdity of sanctioning a law that compels old ladies to offer up a mouth swab, whether they want to or not. No time to state that the Home Office and police are engaged on a programme to introduce mass DNA testing by stealth. No time to wonder at the complete absence of parliamentary debate on this crucial issue of liberty. No time to ask whether we can truly trust the police; or to consider what the relatively new science of genetics may be used for in the future; or to wonder at the alarming disappearance of the liberal reflex in British political life.

The show ended and we were on to the news and traffic updates. People were more worried about a lorry blocking the M4. There were supermarkets to visit, jobs to be done, planes to be caught. But before we all shut up shop for the holidays, it is worth underlining one sentence that needs to be written in neon across every town centre: Britain is on the way to becoming a police state.

Writing about the crisis of liberty in Britain, I have been careful not to use these words, but today I see no other conclusion to draw. Taken in the context of the ID card database, the national surveillance of vehicles and retention of information about every individual motorway journey, the huge number of new criminal offences, the half million intercepts of private communications every year, the proposed measures to take 53 pieces of information from everyone wishing to go abroad, which will include powers to prevent travel, this widening of the DNA database for minor misdemeanours confirms the pattern of attack on us all. It is time to pay attention to what the government under Labour has done to British society and what may be awaiting us just a short distance down the road.

Some will say I am being alarmist, but they should consider what we have lost since the mid-Nineties. The inventory of freedoms is eroded every week with measures and laws that individually seem just about acceptable but which accrue to alter the nature of a society where rights and liberty were believed to be as natural as summer rain. People might be reassured by Gordon Brown’s talk of a constitutional settlement and a new Bill of Rights, but they should look at his statist views and what is happening in the Home Office, surely one of the most incompetent of the ministries, yet, with its vision for a totally controlled society, also one of the most malign?

Our liberal society is threatened because we don’t think it is. This crisis is a crisis because we have not yet acknowledged it.

Let me explain why extension of the database should worry us all. The taking of a swab from a person’s mouth – by force when necessary – and retaining that sample indefinitely, whether that person has committed a crime or not, is a very serious intrusion. The state owns and has access to the essence of that individual’s being. In the future, it may share the information with whom it likes, investigate the as yet unknown secrets of that sample and make deductions which are prejudicial to that individual or the individual’s blood relations. Once on the DNA database, a person is regarded as being in a pool of potential criminals and in an oblique way likely to be guilty of something or other.

DNA is a very useful tool in solving serious crime, but to force people to give a sample because they are not wearing a seatbelt, have littered or let their dog foul a pavement is wrong because it is a measure designed to increase the database, driven by a bureaucratic rather than judicial imperative. In the words of Alex Marshall, deputy chief constable of Thames Valley Police: ‘Extending the taking of samples to all offences may be perceived as indicative of the increasing criminalisation of the generally law-abiding citizen.

That is exactly right. Any democratic society with a respect for rights must strike a balance between the needs of crime detection and the principle that a person’s privacy is inviolate and their basic innocence unaffected even when they have committed a minor misdemeanour. To compel the sampling of DNA from someone who has driven past a stop sign is a greater offence to society than driving past the stop sign.

The cynical minds of the Home Office concede that the DNA database is inadequate – that the proportion of young black men represented is unacceptable, that the presence of 90,000 innocent minors is regrettable. They argue that these ‘anomalies’ would disappear if everyone was on the database and DNA was taken at birth as matter of routine. Very well, let the matter of a compulsory national DNA database come before Parliament. Better still, let it become the subject of a referendum so that each party takes a clear stand one way or the other. This is a very important issue which we are letting slip from our grasp. It surely won’t be long before someone at the Home Office suggests a DNA sample is added to the information on the ID card database. Indeed, I would guess that is already part of their long-term planning.

Overall, our concern must be that we are allowing the state to accumulate too much power over the individual. The more that power is concentrated, the more likely it is to be abused. On the morning that the Home Office announced the proposals for extending the database, two police officers in Nottingham were found guilty of leaking intelligence to a gangster named Colin Gunn and in London the Independent Police Complaints Commission found that Assistant Commissioner Andy Hayman had misled the public about the shooting of Jean Charles de Menezes.

These cases underline that police officers are not beyond unlawful or irregular behaviour. If DNA evidence was available during the 1974 Birmingham or Guildford bombings, it seems likely that the police would have used samples to clinch convictions, which would then have been that much harder to overturn. DNA evidence goes unchallenged in court and as the database expands clearly the opportunities to ‘fit up’ suspects will increase.

The vast majority of police officers are upstanding servants of the community, which is how I’d like them to remain. But too much power will change that.

As a nation, we need to have more confidence in people’s ability to determine the course of society during difficult times. In an excellent article in the Daily Telegraph, Janet Daley commented on the ingenuity of and the sacrifice made by ordinary people during the floods. She ended with a suggested sentence for David Cameron’s speech writers. ‘It is because of that faith we have in ordinary people and their ability to do the right thing that we want to entrust them with more power over their lives and communities.’

We begin by resisting this demonic move to criminalise us with this database.

Specter, Leahy question use of 9/11 fund money

0

Two senators want to know why a $1 billion Sept. 11 insurance fund appropriated by Congress to help ailing ground zero workers has not been used to compensate those exposed to harmful substances.

Senate Judiciary Chairman Patrick Leahy, D-Vt., and the committee’s ranking Republican, Arlen Specter of Pennsylvania, said in a letter to the insurance company overseeing the Sept. 11 health-related claims that they are considering convening a hearing in September.

“Reports that the World Trade Center Captive Insurance Company has spent hundreds of thousands of dollars on salaries on administrators and over $45 million to private law firms are troubling,” the letter said.

The two also said they have concerns about the $74 million that reportedly has been spent on overhead costs and legal bills. The letter, dated Wednesday, was addressed to Christine LaSala, CEO of WTC Captive Insurance Co.

Michael A. Cardozo, New York City’s corporation counsel, said in a statement that Captive Insurance Company is an insurance company, not a compensation fund. He said the city has urged Congress to create a compensation fund for injured workers.

“Instead, Congress created an insurance company, and the Captive Insurance Company is obligated to defend all claims that have a reasonable and valid defense,” Cardozo said. “We would strongly welcome Congress, as we have repeatedly urged, to allocate funds for compensation without the need for litigation.”

The insurance company issued a statement saying it would respond to the letter once it is received. It says it has fulfilled its mandate, which is to insure the city of New York and its contractors and subcontractors.

Last month, attorneys representing thousands who became ill after working to clean up the site while breathing toxic trade center dust went to court to demand the insurance company spend money on their health care.

California Limits E-Voting

Prorev 

[The Times plays down the import of this story, but basically the California Secretary of State found that these machines, used to decide who won recent elections, are not to be trusted.]
 
NY TIMES – Expressing concern that several brands of electronic voting machines used in California were vulnerable to tampering, Secretary of State Debra Bowen late Friday ordered new security protections be added and limited the use of two types of machines that were to be used in next year’s elections in several Southern California counties. Bowen also withdrew state approval of the InkaVote Plus machines used in Los Angeles County, saying that the machines’ maker, Election Systems and Software, had failed to submit its equipment to her office in time to analyze its vulnerability to hacking. . .
 
Bowen ordered that some machines made by Diebold Election Systems and Sequoia Voting Systems be limited to one per polling place to limit the chances that they could be tampered with. The Sequoia machines are used in Riverside, San Bernardino and Ventura Counties.
 
Bowen said the presence of the machines, though limited, would be helpful for disabled voters, though any voter could use the machines. Weir, however, said she was creating a “separate but unequal” voting system.
 
The security requirements Bowen imposed include: reinstalling the software before the Feb. 5. election to ensure it has not already been tampered with; placing special seals at vulnerable parts of the machines to reveal tampering; securing each machines at the close of each day of early voting; assigning a specific election monitor to safeguard each machine; and conducting a complete manual count of all votes cast.

BRAD BLOG – The [review] had found that all electronic voting systems certified in California were easily accessible to hacking. A single machine, the testers discovered, could be easily tampered with by an election insider, voting machine company employee, or other individual in such a way that an entire election could be effected without detection. . .

‘Torture flight’ airline sued by MI5 informer

1

David Rose
Sunday August 5, 2007
The Observer

Bisher al-Rawi, the British-based Iraqi and former MI5 source detained by America for more than four years, is suing the US private airline that transported him to Afghanistan on an illegal CIA ‘extraordinary rendition’ torture flight.Last week’s Observer revealed how MI5 failed to protect al-Rawi when US agents abducted him during a business trip to Gambia in November 2002, despite the fact that he had helped the Security Service keep tabs on the radical preacher Abu Qatada – Osama bin Laden’s ‘ambassador to Europe’ – when he was in hiding.

After a month being interrogated in Gambia, he was rendered to the CIA’s ‘dark prison’ in Kabul on a US charter plane, chained, immobilised and in nappies. Later he spent four years in Guantanamo Bay before being released in March, cleared of any connection with terrorism.

He has joined a legal action already filed by the American Civil Liberties Union on behalf of three other detainees, including a UK resident, Binyam Mohammed, an Ethiopian. It claims that the aviation firm Jeppesen, a subsidiary of Boeing, ‘knowingly provided direct flight services to the CIA enabling the clandestine transportation of Bisher al-Rawi to secret overseas locations where he was subjected to torture and other forms of cruel, inhuman and degrading treatment.’

‘Being a victim of the CIA’s rendition programme was horrific beyond words,’ al-Rawi said yesterday.

Jeppesen this weekend declined to comment.

Israel receives new British request over 2003 journalist killing

0

AFP

Israel said on Sunday it has been asked by Britain to reopen the case of the 2003 killing of a British journalist in Gaza by suspected Israeli fire.

A month and a half ago we received a new request from British justice authorities,” the justice ministry said in a statement, without elaborating.

“This request is being examined by organisations and institutions concerned and a response will be provided in accordance with the calendar in use by Israeli institutions,” it said.

The statement was released in the wake of a report by the liberal Haaretz daily, which said that the British attorney general had asked his Israeli counterpart to reopen the case of journalist James Miller, shot dead in the Gaza Strip in May 2003.

Haaretz said British Attorney General Peter Goldsmith, who has since been replaced in his post by Baroness Patricia Scotland, notified Miller’s family of his action in a letter.

In it, he said that a British coroner “wrote to me and invited me to consider instituting criminal proceedings in the United Kingdom against… members of the Israeli Defence Forces… for an offence of willful killing contrary to section I of the Geneva Conventions Act 1957.”

Haaretz said that if the British authorities decided to open such criminal proceedings, London could file an extradition request for the Israeli soldiers involved — a move that could sour relations between the two countries.

A spokesman for the attorney general’s office in London confirmed that a letter had been sent to the Israelis.

“We have not yet had a response from the Israeli attorney so we’re not really in a position to comment further,” a spokesman for the attorney general’s office said on condition of anonymity in line with government policy.

Any extradition would be a matter for the Home Office, he added.

Miller, an award-winning television journalist, was shot dead in the town of Rafah near the Egyptian border as he was filming a documentary on the Israeli army’s destruction of hundreds of homes in the Palestinian territories.

The 34-year-old’s crew said they were carrying a white flag and identified themselves as British media to troops in the area.

As they left a Palestinian home they were fired upon, and a bullet struck Miller in the neck between his helmet and bullet-proof vest, which was marked with the letters “TV.”

An autopsy carried out in Israel with a British doctor present found that the freelance journalist was hit by a bullet from an M-16 assault rifle fired by soldiers facing him.

In April 2005, the Israeli army cited lack of evidence in a decision not to take any action against the officer accused of responsibility over the fatal shooting, although it did chastise him for “allegedly firing his weapon.”

A year later, a coroner’s jury in Britain ruled that Miller had been murdered.

The Dumbest Thing the Washington Post Could Print

0

By David Swanson

The Washington Post today published an article by Michael Tomasky called “The Dumbest Move the Dems Could Make.” With a lot of publications, this article itself would have been the dumbest thing they’d ever printed. Of course, we’re talking about the Washington Post, a newspaper that cheered in hundreds of articles and columns and editorials for a cakewalk in Iraq. Still, this was the single dumbest thing the Post could possibly have printed at this time.

The Democrats in Congress, already less popular than the least popular president in history, have just rolled over and legalized his illegal spying. That’s the only way they can “get things done.” They can pass bills that should not be passed. Any useful bills have been and will be vetoed. So, the Democrats have two options left to them. First, they can announce that there will be no more bills to fund the occupation of Iraq. Second, they can impeach Bush and Cheney. Impeachment would force Republicans to defend Bush and Cheney for the next year and a half, which ought to be deadly to any politician. In fact, if enough Republicans recognize that, a conviction in the Senate will be possible. But the point is to impeach in the House, to put Bush and Cheney on the defensive, and to pass bills at the same time with an increased chance of them actually becoming law.

Tomasky’s claim, of course, is that impeachment would be the dumbest move the Democrats could make. By standing up for 54% of Americans and 76% of Democrats, Congressional leaders would, according to Tomasky, somehow hurt themselves. Tomasky makes no mention of the people who would die in Iraq and as a result of other Bush-Cheney policies while the Democrats wisely refrained from impeaching. Nor does he recall the last time they listened to arguments identical to his, when they took the impeachment of Ronald Reagan off the table. A pack of criminals got off easy, and the Democrats LOST the elections. Nor is there any mention of Richard Nixon, who was more popular than Bush and Cheney are, but whose popularity did not get any boost from Congress’s efforts to impeach him. In fact, the Democrats won the biggest victories in recent memory (well, apparently not recent enough for Tomasky).

Based on absolutely no evidence or anecdote of any sort, Tomasky simply asserts, as the Republican National Committee and Nancy Pelosi both initially did 14 months ago, that impeachment would “convert Bush from the figure of contempt and mockery he is now into one of vague sympathy.” Sympathy? People disapprove of Bush and Cheney in record numbers because they view them as criminals. Getting tough on crimes rarely creates sympathy for the criminals in the hearts of Americans.

“Just as bad,” says Tomasky, “it’s the one move that would definitively alienate nonideological voters and, therefore, harm the Democrats’ otherwise excellent chances for winning congressional seats and the White House in 2008.” Definitively? Clearly “definitively” should not be confused with “based on at least a shred of evidence.” Fewer than 5% of voters in 2004 ever planned to vote for Bush or Kerry and switched to the other. Isn’t a candidate’s relationship to the much greater number of voters who support their party going to prove much more important than how they play to that 5 percent?

But listen to this bit of fantasy from Tomasky: “One of the Democrats’ strongest arguments for 2008, regardless of their nominee, will be that it’s time for the country to set aside rampant partisanship and ideologically driven government. Impeachment would take away that argument.”

The fact that it didn’t work out this way for the Republicans after they impeached Clinton (they hung onto both houses and the White House) is something Tomasky dismisses by simply claiming that Republicans are different. But so would be a Democratic Party that finally stood up on its hind legs and impeached.

The Democrats’ strongest arguments will not include a promise to end partisanship, which most Democratic voters don’t give a rat’s ass about. The Dems strongest arguments will derive from whatever they do in the next year and a half to develop partisanship, to distinguish their party from the other one. Their strongest criticisms of the Republicans will include Bush and Cheney’s numerous crimes and abuses. Accusing people who are guilty of routine law-breaking, lying, detaining, torturing, and murdering, of “partisanship” misses the mark widely.

Tomasky claims to believe that impeachment would “pull the country apart.” Unlike, say, launching an unpopular illegal aggressive war on the basis of lies, jettisoning the Bill of Rights, and transferring massive wealth from the rest of us to the filthy rich? Anyone who believes this country is united, and united with the least popular president on record, had better acquire and keep a regular job with the Washington Post. Impeaching Nixon ended a crisis and healed a nation. As John Nichols says, calling impeachment a constitutional crisis is like calling aspirin a headache crisis.

What would Tomasky have Congress do instead of impeaching? Well, he says, “There are plenty of ways to hold the administration accountable that don’t carry so high a price. Last I looked, Democrats were doing a pretty aggressive job of it. According to Pelosi’s office, 13 high-ranking administration officials have resigned rather than face genuine congressional oversight.”

So, that’s the plan? Get subordinates to resign? What about all the subordinates, resigned and otherwise, who have refused to comply with subpoenas? Have they been held accountable? Has Bush? Has Cheney? These are serious questions, Mr. Tomasky, ones you should try to come up with an answer for out of your own head, rather than running to Pelosi to find out what the official line is.

Pelosi tends to feed her view of the world to astroturf groups like Daily Kos that do her bidding. But any group with enough people in it, is pro-impeachment whether permitted to be or not. Even the Washington Post reports that the high point of Congressman Dennis Kucinich’s speech today at the Yearly Kos convention was this: “‘With respect to Dick Cheney he should be impeached for lying.’ ‘Nuff said. In this audience Kucinich couldn’t have scored better if he announced he was handing out $100 bills after the forum.”

Impeachment is on the table outside the beltway, as even Tomasky admits. But, as the Washington Post has never reported and probably never will, impeachment is also alive and well in Congress. Forty-three Congress Members now stand in one manner or another for impeachment.

Seventeen have signed on as cosponsors of H. Res. 333, a bill proposing articles of impeachment against Vice President Dick Cheney. H Res 333 cosponsors include, Dennis Kucinich, Jan Schakowsky, Maxine Waters, Hank Johnson, Keith Ellison, Lynn Woolsey, Barbara Lee, Albert Wynn, William Lacy Clay, Yvette Clarke, Jim McDermott, Jim Moran, Bob Filner, Sam Farr, Robert Brady, Tammy Baldwin, and Donald Payne.

Twenty-seven have signed onto H Res. 589, a bill proposing the impeachment of Attorney General Alberto Gonzales. The cosponsors are Jay Inslee, Xavier Becerra, Michael Arcuri, Ben Chandler, Dennis Moore, Bruce Braley, Tom Udall, Earl Blumenauer, Peter DeFazio, Hank Johnson, Steve Cohen, Keith Ellison, David Wu, Yvette Clarke, Darlene Hooley, Betty McCollum, Timothy Bishop, Barney Frank, Carolyn Maloney, Ed Perlmutter, Tammy Baldwin, Shelley Berkley, Raul Grijalva, Ed Pastor, Ellen Tauscher, Rush Holt, and Jim McGovern.

Only Johnson, Ellison, Clarke, and Baldwin have signed onto both bills. (17 + 27 -4 = 40)

Congressmen Jesse Jackson Jr. and Maurice Hinchey have recently said that they support the impeachment of Cheney and Bush, but have not yet signed onto any bills. (40 + 2 = 42)

Other Congress Members have said privately that they favor impeachment but not these bills, even that they would only support impeachment if it included Bush. The lack of cross-over support between the two existing bills is an indication of the importance of petty personal politics within Congress, and the extent to which Congress Members will sign onto a bill based on who the sponsor and cosponsors are and who asks them, and whether anyone asks them, to sign on.

Speaker of the House Nancy Pelosi has opposed impeachment since May 2006, but this week said that if she were not the Speaker she would probably be backing impeachment, and that impeachment of Gonzales is clearly merited. (42 + 1 = 43)

And here’s some breaking news from YearlyKos about Rep. Steve Cohen (D-TN), a very progressive freshman who serves on the crucial Judiciary Committee.

Rep. Cohen could not get to Chicago but he sent a spokesman who announced, as reported by Bob Fertik:

Rep. Cohen is leaning strongly towards joining Rep. Kucinich’s bill to impeach Cheney. Congress needs hearings, but so much evidence has already been produced, and there is so much obstructionism from the administration. Congress does not have to wait months for procedural decisions to come down from the Supreme Court. If Congress can’t get to the root of the matter right quick it could be brought to a vote. All they need is a majority in the House.

Well, that and the wisdom not to believe really really dumb things.

Psychologists and CIA torture

3

By Stephen Soldz

Last month Vanity Fair online published Katherine Eban’s account of the psychologist-designed torture of Abu Zubaydah, designed and conducted by CIA consultants Mitchell and Jessen, former Suvival, Evasion, Resistance and Escape (SERE) psychologists. This week, the New Yorker publishes a companion piece by Jane Mayer on the CIA torture of Khalid Sheikh Mohammed [The Black Sites]. In the course of a long piece, the article sheds more light on the role of psychologists in US torture.

Here are a few excerpts on the role of psychologists:

The C.I.A. program’s first important detainee was Abu Zubaydah, a top Al Qaeda operative, who was captured by Pakistani forces in March of 2002. Lacking in-house specialists on interrogation, the agency hired a group of outside contractors, who implemented a regime of techniques that one well-informed former adviser to the American intelligence community described as “a ‘Clockwork Orange’ kind of approach.” The experts were retired military psychologists, and their backgrounds were in training Special Forces soldiers how to survive torture, should they ever be captured by enemy states. The program, known as SERE–an acronym for Survival, Evasion, Resistance, and Escape–was created at the end of the Korean War. It subjected trainees to simulated torture, including waterboarding (simulated drowning), sleep deprivation, isolation, exposure to temperature extremes, enclosure in tiny spaces, bombardment with agonizing sounds, and religious and sexual humiliation. The SERE program was designed strictly for defense against torture regimes, but the C.I.A.’s new team used its expertise to help interrogators inflict abuse. “They were very arrogant, and pro-torture,” a European official knowledgeable about the program said. “They sought to render the detainees vulnerable–to break down all of their senses. It takes a psychologist trained in this to understand these rupturing experiences.”

The use of psychologists was also considered a way for C.I.A. officials to skirt measures such as the Convention Against Torture. The former adviser to the intelligence community said, “Clearly, some senior people felt they needed a theory to justify what they were doing. You can’t just say, ‘We want to do what Egypt’s doing.’ When the lawyers asked what their basis was, they could say, ‘We have Ph.D.s who have these theories.’ ” He said that, inside the C.I.A., where a number of scientists work, there was strong internal opposition to the new techniques. “Behavioral scientists said, ‘Don’t even think about this!’ They thought officers could be prosecuted.”

Nevertheless, the SERE experts’ theories were apparently put into practice with Zubaydah’s interrogation. Zubaydah told the Red Cross that he was not only waterboarded, as has been previously reported; he was also kept for a prolonged period in a cage, known as a “dog box,” which was so small that he could not stand. According to an eyewitness, one psychologist advising on the treatment of Zubaydah, James Mitchell, argued that he needed to be reduced to a state of “learned helplessness.” (Mitchell disputes this characterization.)

Steve Kleinman, a reserve Air Force colonel and an experienced interrogator who has known Mitchell professionally for years, said that “learned helplessness was his whole paradigm.” Mitchell, he said, “draws a diagram showing what he says is the whole cycle. It starts with isolation. Then they eliminate the prisoners’ ability to forecast the future–when their next meal is, when they can go to the bathroom. It creates dread and dependency. It was the K.G.B. model. But the K.G.B. used it to get people who had turned against the state to confess falsely. The K.G.B. wasn’t after intelligence.”

As the C.I.A. captured and interrogated other Al Qaeda figures, it established a protocol of psychological coercion. The program tied together many strands of the agency’s secret history of Cold War-era experiments in behavioral science. (In June, the C.I.A. declassified long-held secret documents known as the Family Jewels, which shed light on C.I.A. drug experiments on rats and monkeys, and on the infamous case of Frank R. Olson, an agency employee who leaped to his death from a hotel window in 1953, nine days after he was unwittingly drugged with LSD.) The C.I.A.’s most useful research focussed on the surprisingly powerful effects of psychological manipulations, such as extreme sensory deprivation. According to Alfred McCoy, a history professor at the University of Wisconsin, in Madison, who has written a history of the C.I.A.’s experiments in coercing subjects, the agency learned that “if subjects are confined without light, odors, sound, or any fixed references of time and place, very deep breakdowns can be provoked.”

Agency scientists found that in just a few hours some subjects suspended in water tanks–or confined in isolated rooms wearing blacked-out goggles and earmuffs–regressed to semi-psychotic states. Moreover, McCoy said, detainees become so desperate for human interaction that “they bond with the interrogator like a father, or like a drowning man having a lifesaver thrown at him. If you deprive people of all their senses, they’ll turn to you like their daddy.” McCoy added that “after the Cold War we put away those tools. There was bipartisan reform. We backed away from those dark days. Then, under the pressure of the war on terror, they didn’t just bring back the old psychological techniques–they perfected them.”

The C.I.A.’s interrogation program is remarkable for its mechanistic aura. “It’s one of the most sophisticated, refined programs of torture ever,” an outside expert familiar with the protocol said. “At every stage, there was a rigid attention to detail. Procedure was adhered to almost to the letter. There was top-down quality control, and such a set routine that you get to the point where you know what each detainee is going to say, because you’ve heard it before. It was almost automated. People were utterly dehumanized. People fell apart. It was the intentional and systematic infliction of great suffering masquerading as a legal process. It is just chilling.”

Katherine Eban’s Vanity Fair articlerevealed the existence of a December 10, 2002 document – SERE Interrogation Standard Operating Procedure – establishing certain of these SERE-derived torture techniques as standard Operating procedure for US abuse at Guantanamo. Mayer reveals a bit more of the contents of this chilling document which shows the degree to which torture became routinized and bureaucratically organized in American gulags:

A secret government document, dated December 10, 2002, detailing “SERE Interrogation Standard Operating Procedure,” outlines the advantages of stripping detainees. “In addition to degradation of the detainee, stripping can be used to demonstrate the omnipotence of the captor or to debilitate the detainee.” The document advises interrogators to “tear clothing from detainees by firmly pulling downward against buttoned buttons and seams. Tearing motions shall be downward to prevent pulling the detainee off balance.” The memo also advocates the “Shoulder Slap,” “Stomach Slap,” “Hooding,” “Manhandling,” “Walling,” and a variety of “Stress Positions,” including one called “Worship the Gods.”

Mayer also reveals the important role of doctors in US torture:

In the process of being transported, C.I.A. detainees such as Mohammed were screened by medical experts, who checked their vital signs, took blood samples, and marked a chart with a diagram of a human body, noting scars, wounds, and other imperfections. As the person involved in the Council of Europe inquiry put it, “It’s like when you hire a motor vehicle, circling where the scratches are on the rearview mirror. Each detainee was continually assessed, physically and psychologically.”

Mayer also makes clear that we are talking about “torture” here, not any supposed “torture-lite”:

Ramzi Kassem, who teaches at Yale Law School, said that a Yemeni client of his, Sanad al-Kazimi, who is now in Guantánamo, alleged that he had received similar treatment in the Dark Prison, the facility near Kabul. Kazimi claimed to have been suspended by his arms for long periods, causing his legs to swell painfully. “It’s so traumatic, he can barely speak of it,” Kassem said. “He breaks down in tears.” Kazimi also claimed that, while hanging, he was beaten with electric cables.

According to sources familiar with interrogation techniques, the hanging position is designed, in part, to prevent detainees from being able to sleep. The former C.I.A. officer, who is knowledgeable about the interrogation program, explained that “sleep deprivation works. Your electrolyte balance changes. You lose all balance and ability to think rationally. Stuff comes out.” Sleep deprivation has been recognized as an effective form of coercion since the Middle Ages, when it was called tormentum insomniae. It was also recognized for decades in the United States as an illegal form of torture. An American Bar Association report, published in 1930, which was cited in a later U.S. Supreme Court decision, said, “It has been known since 1500 at least that deprivation of sleep is the most effective torture and certain to produce any confession desired.”

Under President Bush’s new executive order, C.I.A. detainees must receive the “basic necessities of life, including adequate food and water, shelter from the elements, necessary clothing, protection from extremes of heat and cold, and essential medical care.” Sleep, according to the order, is not among the basic necessities.

In addition to keeping a prisoner awake, the simple act of remaining upright can over time cause significant pain. McCoy, the historian, noted that “longtime standing” was a common K.G.B. interrogation technique. In his 2006 book, “A Question of Torture,” he writes that the Soviets found that making a victim stand for eighteen to twenty-four hours can produce “excruciating pain, as ankles double in size, skin becomes tense and intensely painful, blisters erupt oozing watery serum, heart rates soar, kidneys shut down, and delusions deepen.”

And:

Among the few C.I.A. officials who knew the details of the detention and interrogation program, there was a tense debate about where to draw the line in terms of treatment. John Brennan, Tenet’s former chief of staff, said, “It all comes down to individual moral barometers.” Waterboarding, in particular, troubled many officials, from both a moral and a legal perspective. Until 2002, when Bush Administration lawyers asserted that waterboarding was a permissible interrogation technique for “enemy combatants,” it was classified as a form of torture, and treated as a serious criminal offense. American soldiers were court-martialled for waterboarding captives as recently as the Vietnam War.

But the psychological disorientation was paramount:

Some detainees held by the C.I.A. claimed that their cells were bombarded with deafening sound twenty-fours hours a day for weeks, and even months. One detainee, Binyam Mohamed, who is now in Guantánamo, told his lawyer, Clive Stafford Smith, that speakers blared music into his cell while he was handcuffed. Detainees recalled the sound as ranging from ghoulish laughter, “like the soundtrack from a horror film,” to ear-splitting rap anthems. Stafford Smith said that his client found the psychological torture more intolerable than the physical abuse that he said he had been previously subjected to in Morocco, where, he said, local intelligence agents had sliced him with a razor blade. “The C.I.A. worked people day and night for months,” Stafford Smith quoted Binyam Mohamed as saying. “Plenty lost their minds. I could hear people knocking their heads against the walls and doors, screaming their heads off.”

Some US interrogators with SERE training claim that this treatment can’t be torture because its nothing more than is done to US troops during SERE training. They can’t seem to distinguish a couple of days of abuse under known limited conditions from the never-ending tortures inflicted upon real detainees:

One of these former [CIA] officers defends the C.I.A.’s program by noting that “there was absolutely nothing done to K.S.M. that wasn’t done to the interrogators themselves”–a reference to SERE-like training. Yet the Red Cross report emphasizes that it was the simultaneous use of several techniques for extended periods that made the treatment “especially abusive.” Senator Carl Levin, the chairman of the Senate Armed Services Committee, who has been a prominent critic of the Administration’s embrace of harsh interrogation techniques, said that, particularly with sensory deprivation, “there’s a point where it’s torture. You can put someone in a refrigerator and it’s torture. Everything is a matter of degree.”

As Mayer makes clear, the US torture regime became more systematic, more routinized, more bureaucratic over time. Eventually Mohammed was moved to the US’s state-of-the-art secret torture facility in Poland:

But, according to well-informed sources, it was a far more high-tech facility than the prisons in Afghanistan. The cells had hydraulic doors and air-conditioning. Multiple cameras in each cell provided video surveillance of the detainees. In some ways, the circumstances were better: the detainees were given bottled water. Without confirming the existence of any black sites, Robert Grenier, the former C.I.A. counterterrorism chief, said, “The agency’s techniques became less aggressive as they learned the art of interrogation,” which, he added, “is an art.”

Mohammed was kept in a prolonged state of sensory deprivation, during which every point of reference was erased. The Council on Europe’s report describes a four-month isolation regime as typical. The prisoners had no exposure to natural light, making it impossible for them to tell if it was night or day. They interacted only with masked, silent guards. (A detainee held at what was most likely an Eastern European black site, Mohammed al-Asad, told me that white noise was piped in constantly, although during electrical outages he could hear people crying.) According to a source familiar with the Red Cross report, Khalid Sheikh Mohammed claimed that he was shackled and kept naked, except for a pair of goggles and earmuffs. (Some prisoners were kept naked for as long as forty days.) He had no idea where he was, although, at one point, he apparently glimpsed Polish writing on a water bottle.

In the C.I.A.’s program, meals were delivered sporadically, to insure that the prisoners remained temporally disoriented. The food was largely tasteless, and barely enough to live on. Mohammed, who upon his capture in Rawalpindi was photographed looking flabby and unkempt, was now described as being slim. Experts on the C.I.A. program say that the administering of food is part of its psychological arsenal. Sometimes portions were smaller than the day before, for no apparent reason. “It was all part of the conditioning,” the person involved in the Council of Europe inquiry said. “It’s all calibrated to develop dependency.”

The inquiry source said that most of the Poland detainees were waterboarded, including Mohammed. According to the sources familiar with the Red Cross report, Mohammed claimed to have been waterboarded five times. Two former C.I.A. officers who are friends with one of Mohammed’s interrogators called this bravado, insisting that he was waterboarded only once. According to one of the officers, Mohammed needed only to be shown the drowning equipment again before he “broke.”

“Waterboarding works,” the former officer said. “Drowning is a baseline fear. So is falling. People dream about it. It’s human nature. Suffocation is a very scary thing. When you’re waterboarded, you’re inverted, so it exacerbates the fear. It’s not painful, but it scares the shit out of you.” (The former officer was waterboarded himself in a training course.) Mohammed, he claimed, “didn’t resist. He sang right away. He cracked real quick.” He said, “A lot of them want to talk. Their egos are unimaginable. K.S.M. was just a little doughboy. He couldn’t stand toe to toe and fight it out.”

The article also shows the moral complexity of America’s torture regime as a former CIA official insists the program is “safe” for the detainees but speaks of the psychological damage to the interrogators”:

The former officer said that the C.I.A. kept a doctor standing by during interrogations. He insisted that the method was safe and effective, but said that it could cause lasting psychic damage to the interrogators. During interrogations, the former agency official said, officers worked in teams, watching each other behind two-way mirrors. Even with this group support, the friend said, Mohammed’s interrogator “has horrible nightmares.” He went on, “When you cross over that line of darkness, it’s hard to come back. You lose your soul. You can do your best to justify it, but it’s well outside the norm. You can’t go to that dark a place without it changing you.” He said of his friend, “He’s a good guy. It really haunts him. You are inflicting something really evil and horrible on somebody.”

This article again raises the issue of the centrality of psychology to America’s torture regime. It was the supposed knowledge, expertise, credentials, and legitimacy of psychologists that was important to the CIA torture-planners.The psychological profession will be stained by this association, and by its silence while these abuses occurred in our name. Not untill the profession fully investigates and condemns these abuses will the stain begin to be lifted. No simple “banning” of specific torture techniques by the American Psychological Association (APA) can possibly be an adequate reply to these horrors. The profession must loudly and collectively cry “Shame!” and “Never again!”

Further, the critical collaboration and silence of the APA leadership during this profound moral crisis cannot go unchallenged. In the interests of maintaining their ties to the military and the CIA, these leaders were more than willing to turn a blind eye to the torture being designed and conducted by our psychological colleagues. They never uttered a peep of concern for these abuses, but, rather, parsed words to try and evade responsibility. In the final accounting for US torture, the APA leadership will certainly bear a measure of the responsibility.

Bush beats Nixon for disapproval

0

George W. Bush has sunk below Richard Nixon and could break Harry Truman’s record for persistent unpopularity among modern U.S. presidents.

The latest Gallup Poll found that Bush’s popularity had been below 40 percent for six consecutive quarters, the Dallas Morning News reports. Nixon ended his five-quarter streak by resigning in 1974.

Truman’s approval ratings were below 40 percent for 10 months, the longest ever in the history of the Gallup Poll. Bush, with six quarters remaining in his second term, could surpass Truman.

Bush would like to see himself as a Truman, a president far more popular in retrospect with historians and even the public than he was while he was in office, but political observers aren’t so sure.

“If Iraq goes down, Bush joins the Nixon pantheon,” said Bruce Buchanan, a University of Texas expert on presidential politics. “If it doesn’t, he may be able to live up to his hero Truman.”

© Copyright 2007 United Press International.

Science lab suspected in foot and mouth outbreak

1

· Research plant is near infected farm
· Ban on export of British livestock

Jo Revill, Juliette Jowit and Anushka Asthana
Sunday August 5, 2007
The Observer

An accidental leak of an experimental vaccine from a private research site was being investigated urgently last night as the likely source of Britain’s new foot and mouth disease outbreak. The news came as the government attempted to avert a full-scale crisis in farming and the tourism industry.Movement of all livestock has been banned, exports to Europe stopped and country fairs cancelled to minimise the risk of the country suffering a disastrous rerun of the 2001 foot and mouth epidemic which cost the nation £8.5bn.

Scientists made a breakthrough last night as they identified the strain of the virus as one which is not naturally occurring, but is a vaccine strain, and has never been seen before in Europe. This enabled investigators to link the outbreak to a company which lies less than three miles down the road from the source of the outbreak.

Merial Animal Health, a private pharmaceutical firm shares facilities with a government laboratory in Pirbright, and is commissioned by the European Union to formulate new vaccines for animal diseases. Both companies are expected to meet tight regulatory standards for biosecurity.

Investigators are now focusing on whether there was a lapse which meant that a batch of the vaccine, made last month, escaped the site. The company is believed to test its vaccines on animals, which may have been able to graze on the land. The virus may have been carried by the wind, or by people or vehicles down the road from the site to a rented field in the village of Normandy, near Guildford, where the outbreak happened.

By last night, dozens of vets and farm officials had been sent into a 10km ‘surveillance’ zone around the outbreak centre at Woolfords Farm to start disinfecting equipment and vehicles, as well as testing sheep, cattle and pigs from other farms. Hundreds more cattle, sheep and pigs in the zone face slaughter amid fears that they may have been infected by an airborne strain of the virus escaping from a nearby research centre.

The news that this may be an isolated outbreak, caused accidentally because of human error, will come as a relief to many farmers, because it makes it far less likely that the disease has already begun to spread around Britain. It also alleviates fears that the disease could somehow have made its way into the animal food chain, as happened in 2001 when it was found to be contained in pigswill.

The fact that it is a vaccine strain – called 01 BFS67 – also means that the infected animals are likely to have had a more mild form of the disease, and are much less likely to be contagious to other cattle.

At a press conference in London, the government’s chief veterinary officer, Debby Reynolds, said one of her first acts was to review biosecurity at Pirbright.

She said earlier in the day, before the strain was known, that the government was ‘focusing on all possibilities: legal, illegal, lab-based, deliberate release – all those possibilities will be investigated and I wouldn’t want to put any undue emphasis on any of those’. A few potential cases had been reported in the wake of the discovery of infected cattle, some of which had already been found to be negative while others were still coming in, she added.

Yesterday Prime Minister Gordon Brown and the environment secretary, Hilary Benn, broke off their holidays to hold two emergency Cobra meetings to discuss the outbreak. Brown signalled his determination not to close off the countryside – which happened six years ago in the epidemic that ended in the slaughter of some 10 million animals.

A spokesman for Merial Animal Health said last night that it would co-operate fully with the government inquiry ‘to determine the source of the disease’. The company has agreed to voluntarily halt vaccine production.

Workers began culling infected cattle from Woolfords Farm where farmers were first told by vets on Thursday night that the herd might have foot and mouth. ‘We will be doing, night and day, everything in our power to make sure that what happens happens quickly and happens decisively in a way that can reassure people that everything is being done,’ said Brown.

‘Our first priority has been to act quickly and decisively. That is why we have a national ban already imposed on the movement of sheep and pigs and cattle. That is why we have acted to create exclusion zones that are already in existence. That is why also the culling of the herd in the infected area is already taking place.’

Conservative leader David Cameron also postponed his holiday in Brittany, France, to talk to farmers in his Oxfordshire constituency.

Richard Macdonald, head of the National Farmers’ Union, said the news was ‘pretty devastating’ but praised Defra’s quick response. He appealed to farmers to help contain the disease.

The case at Woolfords is the first in Britain since 2001, when the epidemic led to animal carcasses being burned on pyres countrywide. This time, ministers have decided, there will be no pyres. The bodies of the first infected cattle were sent instead to an incinerator.

Tomorrow, the European Commission will decide what steps to take to limit any spread of the disease, but an automatic ban on livestock imports from the UK is now in place, under trade rules. An emergency meeting will be held in Brussels to look at restrictions on movement of animals and dispatch of food products from the UK.

Yesterday, Northern Ireland banned movement of animals from mainland Britain. Three big agricultural shows in Scotland taking place this weekend are still going ahead – without cows, sheep and goats.

In the heart of the 10km surveillance zone is Oxenford farm, between Elstead and Milford, close to Pride’s home. Yesterday, the owners were waiting for news about what would happen to their livestock. Meanwhile, farmers were urged to look for symptoms in their animals, which include shivering, lameness and blisters on the foot and in the mouth.

U.S. soldier sentenced to 110 years in prison for rape, murder

0
www.chinaview.cn

A U.S. soldier convicted of raping and murdering an Iraqi girl and killing her family last year has been sentenced to 110 years in prison, the military said Saturday.

    Private First Class Jesse Spielman, 23, was convicted late Friday by a military court at Ft. Campbell, Kentucky of rape, conspiracy to commit rape, housebreaking with intent to rape and four counts of felony murder.

    Spielman was among five soldiers charged in the March 2006 attack on the family in Mahmoudiya, a village about 32 km south of Baghdad. He received the longest sentence of four soldiers who have been convicted.

    On March 12, 2006, five American soldiers, all from the 101st Airborne Division, based at Fort Campbell, saw 14-year-old Abeer Qassim al-Janabi in Mahmoudiya, and conspired to rape the girl, prosecutors said.

    They then broke into Janabi’s home, killed her parents and six-year-old sister, and raped and murdered her. Later, they put kerosene on the girl’s body and set it on fire to destroy evidence.

    Spielman had pleaded guilty Monday to lesser charges of conspiracy to obstructing justice, arson, wrongfully touching a corpse and drinking, but not guilty of raping and murder. The 110-year sentence was said to be part of a plea agreement between his attorneys and the prosecutors.

    One of the soldiers involved in the gang rape case, James Barker, was sentenced to 90 years in jail in November last year under a plea agreement, and has agreed to testify against the others in the case. Two other soldiers have also pleaded guilty and have been sentenced to jail terms ranging from five to 100 years.

    The fifth defendant, former soldier Steven Green, has been charged in a federal court because he was discharged from the Army before the murder allegations surfaced. He has pleaded not guilty to charges including murder and sexual assault.

    Prosecutors have said that they would seek death for Green, the mastermind of the crime. Two of his accomplices have testified that Green shot and killed Janabi’s parents and sister while they were gang-raping her. He then killed Janabi after their sexual assaults.

House approves changes in terror spy program

0

Democrats under pressure from Bush vote for measure

By Carl Hulse and Edmund L. Andrews

Under pressure from President Bush, the House on Saturday gave final approval to changes in a terrorist surveillance program despite serious objections from many Democrats about the scope of the executive branch’s new eavesdropping power.

Racing to complete a final rush of legislation before a scheduled monthlong break, the House voted 227-183 to endorse a measure the Bush administration said was needed to keep pace with communications technology in the effort to track terrorists overseas.

The House Democratic leadership had severe reservations about the proposal and an overwhelming majority of Democrats opposed it. Speaker Nancy Pelosi, D-San Francisco, said the measure “does violence to the Constitution of the United States.”

But with the Senate already in recess, Democrats confronted the choice of allowing the administration’s bill to reach the floor and be approved mainly by Republicans or letting it die.

If it stalled, that would have left Democratic lawmakers, who have long been anxious about appearing weak on national security issues, facing an August fending off charges from Bush and Republicans that they left Americans exposed to terror threats.

Despite the political risks, many Democrats argued they should stand firm against the president’s initiative, saying it granted the administration far too much latitude to initiate surveillance without judicial review. They said the White House was using the specter of terror to usurp the privacy rights of Americans and empower Attorney General Alberto Gonzales, an official Democrats said had proved himself untrustworthy. Under the bill, Gonzales would share authority with Mike McConnell, the director of national intelligence.

“Legislation should not be passed in response to fear-mongering,” said Rep. Rush Holt, a Democrat from New Jersey.

There was no indication that lawmakers were responding to new intelligence warnings. Rather, Democrats were responding to administration pleas that a recent secret court ruling had created a legal obstacle in monitoring foreign communications relayed over the Internet.

But the disputes were significant enough that they were likely to resurface before the end of the year. Democrats have expressed concerns that the administration is reaching for powers that go well beyond solving what officials have depicted as narrow technical issues in the current law.

Bush on Saturday urged the House to act promptly after the Senate approved changes Friday night in the terrorist surveillance program sought by the administration.

Other Republicans called for swift House action as well. “I can’t imagine they would take a monthlong vacation without fulfilling their obligation to keep America safe,” said Sen. Mitch McConnell of Kentucky, the Republican leader.

Administration officials have been quietly pushing Congress to pass a broad “modernization” of the existing law, arguing that technological changes – especially the expansion of telephone calls over the Internet – had made the current rules outdated.

One key issue, apparently raised in secret by judges overseeing the problem, is that many calls and e-mail messages between people outside the United States are routed over data networks that run through the United States. In principle, the surveillance law does not restrict eavesdropping on foreign-to-foreign communications. But in practice, administration officials contend, the path of those calls through this country means the government cannot monitor them without a warrant.

Democratic lawmakers have been deeply suspicious that the administration was seeking a broader and more controversial expansion of surveillance authority by making changes that were vague on important issues. Rep. Silvestre Reyes, D-Texas, and chairman of the House Intelligence Committee, said Friday that the administration-supported bill would allow wiretapping without warrants as long as it was “concerning a person abroad.” As a result, he said, the law could be construed as allowing any search inside the United States as long as the government claimed it “concerned” al Qaeda.

Crash of Cargo Plane in Holland Revealed Existence of Israeli Chemical and Biological Weapons Plant

1

By Victor Ostrovsky

On Oct. 4, 1992 a Tel Aviv-bound El Al cargo aircraft crashed into an apartment complex in Bijlmermeer, a neighborhood on the outskirts of Amsterdam a few minutes after takeoff from the nearby Shipol airport. The crash of the Boeing 747-200 killed 39 people on the ground and all four crew members.

The plane’s cargo was the subject of wide speculation for the next six years. The local media suspected something was not right when the crash site was cordoned off and access was limited to non-Dutch search teams in space suit-like protective gear.

At first the rumor was that there were radioactive materials on board, and radioactive traces continued to send Geiger counters off their scales long after the site was cleaned up. The Dutch government accepted the Israeli government’s explanation that radioactive counterweights were present in all early models of the 747s.

After the crash El Al representatives handed over to the Dutch authorities a revised cargo manifest which, sources now admit, included a variety of materials previously not disclosed. For some unexplained reason, the Dutch officials agreed to keep Israel’s secrets.

For years following the crash, however, residents of the surrounding neighborhoods displayed a uniquely high number of unusual ailments. But when they took to the media their inquiries as to whether the plane’s cargo could have contained health hazards, both the residents and the media were brushed off. Even though Dutch authorities knew what was on that plane, they preferred to lie to their own citizens rather than confront Israel.

Finally, on Oct. 1 of this year, the Dutch daily newspaper NRC Handelsblad reported it had obtained documents confirming that when the El Al flight crashed six years ago it had on board 190 liters of dimethyl methyl phosphonate (DMMP), a chemical used to produce Sarin, the nerve gas used to deadly effect by members of a religious cult on the Tokyo subway system.

The following day a spokesman for El Al, the Israeli national airline, confirmed that “the documentation states that DMMP was on the plane, that it was packed in accordance with the international regulations governing uplift of this material, and the document was signed by the captain stating that everything was in order prior to departure. All of these documents were turned over to the Dutch authorities after the accident.” It was further learned that the chemical in question was ordered by the Israeli biological institute in Nes Zionna. Finally, the jig was up.

Pre-Emptive Face-Saving

In an ironic attempt to save face, Israeli Transport Minister Shaul Yahalom ordered the Civil Aviation Authority to reopen its investigation into what the Boeing 747-200 was carrying. Shortly thereafter, Aviv Bushinsky, the spokesman for the office of the Israeli prime minister, stated that the chemical known as DMMP was not used for the manufacturing of nerve gas (which is illegal under all of the international treaties to which Israel is a signatory, but has never ratified), but instead is used in the testing of gas masks.

The Dutch paper said the chemical came from Solkatronic Chemicals Inc., an American company based both in Pennsylvania and at 30 Two Bridges Road, Fairfield, NJ 07004-1530. The newspaper also reported that the amount of DMMP on board the aircraft was enough to produce up to 594 pounds of Sarin, and that three of the four main components needed for Sarin production were on the plane.

Solkatronic vice president John Swanziger told an Israeli newspaper that the chemicals his company sold to the “Israel Institute for Biological Research” were not for testing gas masks and were, in fact, on a special restrictive list, requiring a license from the U.S. Department of Commerce for their sale. The license was provided to the company by the office of Israel’s prime minister prior to shipment.

Swanziger added that after the crash there was a second order which also was filled. The second order, however, was made by an Israeli gas mask manufacturer. He added that Israel was the only country outside the U.S. to which his company had ever sold DMMP, and that at the time he believed that the institute was a civilian rather than a military research facility.

In fact, however, the Israeli government has always regarded the Nes Zionna facility as one of its most closely kept military secrets. Israeli journalist Uzi Mahanimi wrote in the London Times that the plant at Nes Zionna first attracted unwanted scrutiny when the Dutch authorities confirmed that it was the intended destination of the DMMP shipment aboard the El Al plane that crashed. The plant, he wrote, manufactures not only chemical and biological weapons for use in bombs, but more unusual arms as well. It supplied the poison for last year’s assassination attempt by the Mossad, Israel’s equivalent of the CIA, on the life of Khaled Meshal, a Hamas Party leader in Jordan.

Mahanimi also attributed to official military sources a report that Israeli assault aircraft have been equipped to carry chemical and biological weapons manufactured at a top-secret institute near Tel Aviv. Crews of Israel’s F-16 fighters have been trained to mount an active chemical or biological weapon on the aircraft within minutes of receiving the command to attack.

Despite the fact that Israel has accused just about every country it regards as an enemy of developing chemical and biological weapons, it has never acknowledged its own programs to develop weapons of mass destruction. Yet a biologist who once held a senior post in Israeli intelligence told Mahanimi, “There is hardly a single known or unknown form of chemical or biological weapon…which is not manufactured at the institute.”

The institute, which covers 70 acres and is about to be expanded by as much as 20 percent, was founded in 1952 as a single building hidden in an orange grove. It is surrounded by a six-foot-high concrete wall topped with sensors that reveal the exact location of any intruder. However, the institute is omitted from all local and aerial survey maps.

The institute answers only to the office of the prime minister (as does Mossad), but professionally is under the direction of “REFAEL” (Rashut Pituach Amtsai Lechima). This is the weapons development authority, the umbrella agency for the weapons development in Israel.

Official publications disguise its more sinister activities, stating vaguely that the institute provides services to the defense ministry as well as chemicals for agriculture and research for civilian companies. When elected members of the Knesset (Israel’s parliament) foreign affairs and defense committee asked to visit the plant, however, they were denied access.

The mayor of Nes Zionna won a temporary injunction freezing the institute’s expansion plans. According to sources, four accidents in the plant have killed at least six workers, but detailed accounts of the accidents have been banned by military censors.

The secrets Israel holds behind the six-foot-high walls surrounding the complex are far darker then anyone can imagine. Professor Marcus Klingberg, who worked in the institute and was jailed some 20 years ago after being convicted of spying for the former Soviet Union, has finally been released, due to his medical condition. Even though it has been more than 20 years since he worked in the institute, his release was under the strictest stipulations. The 80-year-old man is not allowed out of his apartment except for a few hours a day, and he must pay the costs of two guards approved by Israel’s internal security service who are with him around the clock. He is not allowed to use the phone, make contact with the media or talk to anyone except for three approved people, his daughter, his grandson and a friend.

This surveillance is almost as strict as that under which he spent more than 10 years of his imprisonment. He was in a section of the Israeli prison system known as “the Xes.” There the prisoners are known only by a number. Their identities and even the fact that they are imprisoned are considered national secrets.

The fact that none of this detail has been covered in the U.S. mainstream media is testimony to the power of Israel’s U.S. lobby which, it seems, has enabled the Israeli government to get away with anything up to and including murder, over and over again.

So the next time someone shouts, “The sky is falling, the sky is falling,” Americans might well take a minute to look up. You never know what might be coming down.

U.S. Senate passes Bush-backed spy bill

1

By Thomas Ferraro and Richard Cowan

The Democratic-led U.S. Senate, amid warnings of further attacks on the United States, approved a bill on Friday that would allow President George W. Bush to maintain his controversial domestic spying program.

On a vote of 60-28, the Senate sent the measure to the Democratic-led U.S. House of Representatives for consideration as early as Saturday as lawmakers push to begin a month-long recess.

Director of National Intelligence Mike McConnell said earlier he needed the legislation “in order to protect the nation from attacks that are being planned today to inflict mass casualties on the United States.”

The Senate bill was needed, congressional aides said, because of restrictions recently imposed by a secret court on the ability of U.S. spy agencies to intercept telephone calls and e-mails of suspected terrorists overseas.

Offered by Senate Republican leader Mitch McConnell of Kentucky, no relation to the national intelligence director, the bill would allow the administration to continue the warrantless surveillance but require it to describe to a secret federal court the procedures it uses in targeting foreign suspects.

The Senate defeated, on a 45-43 vote, a Democratic alternative, which would have placed tighter controls on the spying and provided for independent assessments of the attorney general’s implementation of the measure.

The Senate votes came shortly after Republicans in the House rejected as inadequate a competing Democratic measure.

Senate Democratic Leader Harry Reid criticized the Senate-passed bill, saying it “authorizes warrantless searches and surveillance of American phone calls, e-mails, homes, offices and personal records for however long (it takes for) an appeal to a court of review.”

If signed into law, the Senate bill would expire in six months. During that period, Congress would seek to write permanent legislation.

The Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act, passed in 1978, requires the government to obtain orders from the secret FISA court to conduct surveillance of suspected terrorists in the United States.

After the September 11 attacks, Bush authorized the interception without warrants of communications between people in the United States and others overseas if one had suspected ties to terrorists. Critics charge that program violated the FISA law, but Bush argued he had wartime powers to do so.

In January, Bush put the program under the supervision of the FISA court. Terms of the oversight have not been made public.

House Democrats argued their bill gave the national intelligence director what he wanted and that he demanded more after conversations with the White House.

The House bill would have required the attorney general, Alberto Gonzales, to submit procedures for international surveillance to the secret FISA court for approval and require periodic audits by the Justice Department’s inspector general.

Gonzales had proven to be a problem in reaching an agreement since mostly Democratic lawmakers have accused him of misleading Congress on the spying program.

CIA techniques cause serious mental damage

Granma International

flamesong

Interrogation techniques used by the CIA on alleged terrorists can cause serious mental damage and are illegal in the United States, according to a report released Thursday by two non-governmental organizations, Physicians for Human Rights and Human Rights First.

The report, titled “Leave No Marks, ‘Enhanced’ Interrogation Techniques and the Risk of Criminality,” was drafted by medical and legal investigators from both groups and based its conclusions on extensive medical documentation and various cases of torture survivors.

Researchers analyzed CIA techniques, which include sensory and sleep deprivation, exposing prisoners to excessive heat and/or cold for long periods, placing prisoners in “stress” (extremely uncomfortable) positions, sexual humiliation and simulated drowning of prisoners via a technique known as “water-boarding.”

The report found that these practices can cause long-term consequences such as post-traumatic stress disorder, psychosis, substance abuse, and suicide, and for that reason are illegal, the AP reported.

Video: 9/11 Truth Takes on Festival

0

Whilst ex MI5 officer Annie Machon provided the public with a chance to hear a first hand account of her interesting observations during her time with the intelligence services, as well as details on 9/11, the East Anglia Truth tent acted as an information centre with a display board containing important details relating to 9/11, as well as an in-house cinema. Also available were DVDs, books, magazines, stickers and leaflets and hundreds of DVDs and leaflets were distributed during the weekend.During the Saturday night, anybody within viewing distance of the Truth tent should have witnessed our outdoor cinema with “The British Broadcasting Conspiracy” looped throughout the night. Fortunately, being adjacent to the beer tent and directly opposite the acoustic stage which accommodated headline act the “Levellers” that night, it was guaranteed an audience.

So, in essence, it was a very productive weekend and we look forward to the next. In the main, those that weren’t already aware of the various problems with the official account of 9/11 were open to discussing them.

So, thank you to all the great people that we met for contributing towards us having such a wonderful weekend. We hope to see you again soon.

There are more photos of the Eastern Haze festival posted in the pics section of our MySpace Profile at www.myspace.com/eastangliatruth.

MPs doubt UK’s commitment to equality

0

An all-party group of MPs Thursday raised doubts about the British government’s commitment to wipe out discrimination, saying that not enough action is being taken to achieve parity in employment and education.

The communities and local government committee said delays to the government’s single equality bill showed the issue is not a priority and that a new Commission for Equality and Human Rights to be created in October may “not be fully ready to take on its new work.” The creation of the new anti-discrimination body, combing various equality watchdogs, had been botched and characterized by “indecision, instability and delays,” it said.

In a report, the committee warned that at the present rate of progress, it may take decades to achieve equality in employment and education for some groups while for others it will never happen,” the report said.

“It is estimated that it will take until 2085 for the gender pay gap to be closed and until 2105 to close the gap in ethnic employment,” it said.

“The situation is much starker for some groups, such as disabled people and Pakistani and Bangladeshi women who, under the same measure, are unlikely ever to achieve parity in employment.” Committee chairman Phyllis Starkey said the government was being urged to do more to tackle unfair discrimination and reduce inequalities, particularly those that are deep-rooted and persistent in society.

“There are not just moral imperatives in reducing inequality and discrimination but economic and social benefits to be gained too,” Starkey warned.

One of the main concerns was that the government did not publish its proposals to bring together 40 years of laws against sex, race and religious discrimination in a new single equality bill until last month with consultations due to last until September.

This is despite the announcement that the new CEHR would be created to replace the Commission for Racial Equality, the Equal Opportunities Commission and the Disability Rights Commission some two years ago.

The parliamentary report also expressed fears that the budget for the new commission “will not be sufficient; and that there may be some loss of expertise among the staff of the three former commissions.”

A valedictory report by the Equal Opportunities Committee also warned last week that at current rates of progress it would take 200 years for there to be as many women as men in the House of Commons and 65 years to achieve boardroom equality at top companies.–IRNA

Fingerprints can reveal race and sex

0

By Nic Fleming

A new fingerprinting technique that can identify the race and sex, and possibly the diet of suspects has been developed.

Scientists have shown that using a gelatine-based gel and high-tech chemical analysis can provide significant clues to a person’s identity even if police do not hold existing fingerprint records.

The new method can pick up tiny traces of substances such as gunpowder, drugs, or biological or chemical weapons. Preliminary tests, highlighted in this month’s edition of the journal Analytical Chemistry, also suggest it could be used to provide crucial court evidence by pinpointing the precise time – accurate to the nearest hour – that prints were left at crime scenes.

Prof Sergei Kazarian, from Imperial College London’s Department of Chemical Engineering, who led the team that developed the technique, said: “Our trials show that this technique could play a significant role in the fight against crime.

“The combined operational advantages and benefits for forensic scientists of tape lifting prints and spectroscopic imaging really maximises the amount of information one can obtain from fingerprints.

“By focussing on what is left in a fingerprint after periods of time, scientists could potentially gauge how old a crime scene is.

“Studying what happens to prints, when they are exposed to high temperatures, could also be particularly significant, especially in arson cases where lifting prints has been notoriously hard.”

Chemical residues containing a few millionths of a gram of fluid can be found on all fingerprints, however they are often distorted or destroyed by conventional techniques.

Prof Kazarian found that using commercial gelatine based tape, already used by police to collect footprint, can provide a simple method for collection and transportation of prints.

He analysed prints left by volunteers under spectroscopic microscope — providing a detailed picture of its chemical make-up.

Particular chemical compositions were found to provide specific clues to the identity of the volunteer who left the fingerprint.

Strong traces of urea, a chemical found in urine, suggested a man left the print.

Lower levels of the chemical made it more likely to be from a women.

Specific amino acids indicated whether the “suspect” was a vegetarian or meat-eater, and different fatty acid profiles suggested provided clues to their racial origins.

Prof Kazarian added: “In the courtroom of the near future, chemical images could feature as key evidence.

“I hope our work assists law enforcement authorities to bring dangerous criminals to justice.”

Forensics experts both from the Home Office and the US government are known to be studying the results of the initial tests with interest.

Police may be given power to take DNA samples in the street

0

Alan Travis
The Guardian

A forensic police officer swabs a drinks can for DNA
A forensic police officer swabs a drinks can for DNA. Photograph: Graham Turner
 

The Home Office is considering giving the police the power to take a DNA sample on the street, without taking the suspect to a police station, as well as taking samples from suspects in relatively minor offences such as littering, speeding or not wearing a seat belt.The move comes as an official genetics watchdog prepares a public inquiry into the police national DNA database, following concern over the retention of samples from people acquitted of any offence, and disclosure that the database holds DNA records for one in three of British black males.The database is the largest in the world, with 3.4m profiles, more than 5% of the UK population. If the powers are granted, it would expand massively.

Baroness Kennedy, chair of the Human Genetics Commission, said the power of the police in England and Wales to take DNA samples from any arrested individual without requiring their assent was unrivalled in the world. “We want to ensure the public voice is heard on issues people think are relevant. The Citizen’s Inquiry is likely to grapple with issues such as whether storing the DNA profiles of victims and suspects who are not charged, or who are subsequently acquitted of any wrongdoing, is justified by the need to fight crime.”

She added that under law it was very difficult, and sometimes impossible, to have your sample removed. “On the other hand a steadily increasing number of serious crimes, including murder and rapes, are being solved and criminals brought to justice with its help. It is likely that the use of DNA information by police authorities for criminal intelligence purposes will grow. It is therefore vital that the public are able to voice their views.”

The inquiry will recruit representative panels of the public to consider social and ethical issues in police use of DNA.

The initiative comes as the Home Office finishes consulting on police powers to extend use of the DNA database, with a view to legislation this autumn. The results show wide support from the police to take DNA, fingerprints and footwear impressions on the street to confirm identity and check against the national database, and support to lower the threshold to take in suspects in minor offences. A Home Office paper summarising the consultation said respondents “welcomed the ability to reduce the threshold, including to the extent of allowing for the taking of fingerprints, DNA and footwear impressions for non-recordable offenses for the purpose of offender identification and searching databases”.

It adds: “The second issue relates to the taking of fingerprints, photographs and samples on the street. This was welcomed at an operational level as a means of increasing officer confidence in knowing who they are dealing with and enabling them to deal more effectively with the incident at the scene.”

US sergeant guilty of Iraq murder

0

A US marine squad leader charged over the kidnap and killing of a grandfather in Iraq last year has been found guilty of murder.

A military jury at Camp Pendleton base, near San Diego, found on Thursday that Sergeant Lawrence Hutchins committed unpremeditated murder and larceny.

Hutchins, 23, was also convicted of making false official statements and participating in a conspiracy to murder.

Witnesses said Hutchins led the unit in planning to kidnap and kill a suspect on the night of April 26, 2006 in Hamdania.

When the unit could not find the suspect, they randomly killed Hashim Ibrahim Awad, 52, a father of 11 and grandfather of four who lived next door.

After Hutchins shot Hashim in the head, the squad then set a stolen AK-47 and shovel next to the corpse to suggest he had been planting a roadside bomb.

The prosecutor in the case, Lieutenant-Colonel John Baker, said in closing arguments that Hutchins masterminded “a cold and calculated plan … to take the law into his own hands”.

Hutchins’s lead defence lawyer, Richard Brannon, said that the actions of Hutchins and his men was “a failure of command”, alluding to allegations that their platoon leader’s rough handling of some detainees sent the wrong message to the marines.

Hutchins was cleared of additional charges of kidnapping, assault and housebreaking.

The jury will now begin considering his sentence.

Further convictions

Hutchins is one of seven marines and one sailor charged in the killing of the Iraqi in Hamdania.

A separate military jury on Wednesday found Corporal Marshall Magincalda guilty of larceny and housebreaking, demoted him to private, forfeited all military pay and benefits, and gave him a bad-conduct discharge.

Five members of the squad, including the navy medic, pleaded guilty to lesser charges in connection with the shooting.

A military jury convicted a sixth member, team leader Corporal Trent Thomas, of conspiracy and kidnapping and as well as conspiracy to murder.

Agencies

Glasgow bombing suspect dies

0

Three others are facing charges over the alleged

A man who set himself alight during a suspected failed car bomb attack at Glasgow airport has died after being hospitalised for a month with critical burns.

Kafeel Ahmed, 27, who allegedly crashed an explosive-laden jeep into the airport building in June, died on Thursday, Strathclyde police said.

“We can confirm that the man seriously injured during the course of the incident at Glasgow airport on Saturday June 30 has died in Glasgow Royal Infirmary,” a police spokesman said on Thursday.

The other suspect in the car, Bilal Abdullah, an Iraqi doctor, has been charged with conspiring to set off explosions, which followed a day after two other failed car bombings in London.

Ahmed, an Indian national from Bangalore, suffered burns to 90 per cent of his body and had been in a coma throughout his stay at a specialist burns unit under armed guard.

His brother, Sabeel Ahmed, 26, is facing trial after being charged with withholding information that could prevent an act of terrorism.

He was arrested in Liverpool on the same day as the Glasgow attack.

Mohammed Jamil Asha, a Jordanian doctor, is the other man facing charges over the botched attacks.

Mohamed Haneef, the 27-year-old cousin of the Ahmed brothers, was arrested and charged in Australia for supporting the bombing plot.

He was released after prosecutors admitted to having insufficient evidence against him.

The Glasgow airport attack followed two car bombing attempts in central London when police discovered two vehicles laden with gas canisters and fuel.

Eight people were initially held over the two incidents and three were eventually charged.

Agencies

Counter-terrorism chief ‘misled public’ over Menezes shooting

0

By Kim Sengupta and Nigel Morris

Sir Ian Blair, the Commissioner of the Metropolitan Police, was “almost totally uninformed” of events after the shooting of an innocent Brazilian who was mistaken for a terrorist suspect, an inquiry found yesterday.

The investigation by the Independent Police Complaints Commission (IPCC), which lasted two years and cost £300,000, found one person culpable over the mishandling of emerging information about Jean Charles de Menezes, 27, who was shot seven times in the head at Stockwell Tube station on 22 July 2005.

It accused Assistant Commissioner Andy Hayman, the head of counter-terrorism operations, of “misleading the public” by trying to hide the fact that the dead man was not a suspect of the 21 July suicide bombing plot. His actions, says the report, “cause us serious concerns”.

The report reveals that Mr Hayman had briefed crime reporters on the day of the shooting that the dead man was not one of the 21 July suspects. However, that information was “deliberately withheld” from a press release he helped to write later on. The report states: “Assistant Commissioner Hayman chose to mislead the public by his actions.”

A bullish Sir Ian said the report showed that “despite much speculation to the contrary, I did not lie to the public. The IPCC describes me, when I left New Scotland Yard on the evening of 22 July as ‘being almost totally uninformed’. As far as the shot man was concerned, I knew my officers were conducting inquiries expeditiously… I neither believe that my senior colleagues let me down, nor that my position on that night was unreasonable.”

But the family of Mr Menezes claimed the police had “got away with murder” as they denounced the IPCC findings as a whitewash. It was, they said, “unbelievable” that the Commissioner was unaware of what had happened. Relatives also pointed to a passage in the report which established that Mr Menezes was not given a proper chance to protest his innocence. The police had stated that he was challenged and warned before being shot but that was untrue.

Patricia Armani da Silva, a cousin, said: “No one has been held responsible for anything, no one is going to be prosecuted. The police have been allowed to get away with murder. We are very disappointed.”

The inquiry presented an extraordinary picture of chaos, confusion and rumour on the day Mr Menezes was shot. A number of senior officers at Scotland Yard began to realise within hours that an innocent man had been killed, as did officers unconnected with the case and even some off-duty colleagues. Yet Sir Ian was said to have been kept out of the loop of “crucial information” about the identity of Mr Menezes until the next morning.

Mr Menezes, an electrician from Sao Paulo, was killed just after 10am. His wallet was later searched and revealed his Brazilian identification. The report says that, within minutes, news of that reached the Commissioner’s office and his chief of staff, Caroline Murdoch. However, at 3.30pm, Sir Ian told a press conference that the shooting was linked to the “ongoing and expanding” investigation into the 21 July plot.

In the course of the afternoon, a group of officers watching cricket at Lord’s were aware, they told the inquiry, that a “terrible mistake” had been made. Among them was Deputy Assistant Commissioner John Yates, who was then the superior to Commander Cressida Dick, the officer in charge of the operation when Mr Menezes died.

At 6.30pm the Home Office was informed of Mr Menezes’s identity. But, the inquiry continues, when Sir Ian asked a senior officer, Detective Chief Superintendent Maxine De Brunner, about the dead man at 7pm he was told that identification had still not been established.

In the News of the World, in August 2005, Sir Ian said: “The key component was that, at the time, and indeed for the next 24 hours or so, I and everybody who advised me believed that the person who was shot was a suicide bomber.”

Members of the IPCC yesterday expressed surprise that the Commissioner had apparently failed to find out about the identification issue from his senior officers for so long after the shooting.

Timetable of a tragedy

July 22

10.06am – Jean Charles de Menezes, right, is shot dead by police at Stockwell Underground station.

1.00pm – Mr de Menezes’s mobile phone is found to contain names of Latin rather than Arabic or Asian friends and family.

1.55pm – At a meeting with Sir Ian Assistant Commissioner Alan Brown says he does not know whether the shot man was a suspect.

2.47pm – The wallet recovered from the scene is found to contain Brazilian documents.

3.10pm – Sir Ian Blair’s own staff officers are told of the contents of the wallet and given a name.

Shortly after 3.10pm – Both Caroline Murdoch and Moir Stewart on Sir Ian’s staff, are told about the discoveries in Mr de Menezes’s wallet.

Just before 3.30pm – Deputy Assistant Commissioner Brian Paddick claims he is told by one of Sir Ian’s staff officers: “We’ve shot a Brazilian tourist.”

3.30pm – Sir Ian tells a press conference that the shooting was directly connected to an “ongoing and expanding anti-terrorist operation”.

4.30pm – Assistant Commissioner Andy Hayman briefs a journalists that the victim is not one of the 21 July bombers.

5.00pm – Andy Hayman tells a management meeting attended by Sir Ian that there are media reports that the shot man is not one of the 21 July bombers. But he fails to tell them that is because he has just briefed the members of the press to that effect.

6.30pm – The Home Office and Foreign Office provide Mr de Menezes’s identity, subject to formal confirmation.

6.44pm – A police press release, approved by Andy Hayman, states that it is “not yet clear” whether the shot man is one of the 21 July bombers.

Approx 9.30pm – Senior detectives are told Mr de Menezes is not thought to be linked to the events of 21 July.

11.37pm – A Met press release says it is still not clear if the shot man is linked to the 21 July bomb attempts.

July 23

10.15am – Sir Ian is told the shot man is a Brazilian national, unconnected to terrorism.

4.52pm – The Met tells the media that the man shot dead is not connected to the 21 July attacks. But a press release still maintains that his “clothing and behaviour” added to surveillance officers’ suspicions.

Inquiry findings

* Assistant Commissioner Andy Hayman, right, “misled the public” and the Commissioner Sir Ian Blair over the dead man’s identity.

* Sir Ian Blair was kept in the dark about the tragic mistake for 24 hours.

* The Commissioner “did not wilfully mislead the public” when he said the killing was part of a terrorist operation.

* Other senior officers knew an innocent man had been killed – even off-duty officers at a cricket match.

* There were “serious weaknesses” in Scotland Yard’s handling of information after the shooting.

The men under pressure

* Assistant Commissioner Andy Hayman, head of specialist operations, including counter-terrorism, is said by the IPCC to have misled Sir Ian Blair and the public. On the afternoon of the shooting, he briefed crime reporters that the dead man was not a terror suspect, but shortly afterwards “deliberately withheld” the information from a meeting chaired by the Commissioner.

* Sir Ian Blair, Metropolitan Police Commissioner, cleared of wilfully misleading the public when he said the shooting was “directly linked to the ongoing anti-terrorist operation”. The IPCC concluded he was not told of Mr Menezes’ innocence until the next day.

* Assistant Commissioner Alan Brown, now retired, was in charge of operations on 22 July. Rebuked for an “error of judgment” in failing to keep Sir Ian fully informed.

* Chief Superintendant Moir Stewart, the Commissioner’s staff officer, did not pass on information about Mr Menezes to Sir Ian. The IPCC said he should be given management advice.

* Brian Paddick, who is now retired and was Deputy Assistant Commissioner at the time, did not pass on information from Sir Ian’s staff as ‘it was their responsibility’.

Timeline: how de Menezes identity emerged

0

The IPCC put together a timetable of events as they investigated the aftermath of the shooting of Jean Charles de Menezes by police

July 21, 2005

Attempted suicide bomb attacks on London, two weeks after July 7 attacks

July 22, 2005

10:06 De Menezes shot by police marksmen at Stockwell Underground station

10:10 His wallet, containing his identity card, and his mobile phone recovered

10:30 Sir Ian Blair, the Commissioner of the Metropolitan Police Service (MPS), says he was told by Assistant Commisioner Andy Hayman that a man was shot

10:46 First MPS press release says that a man has been shot at Stockwell Underground

11:41 Second MPS press release issued, saying that a man was challenged by officers and subsequently shot

13:55 First meeting between Hayman and Blair. Hayman says no information available on identity of dead man

14:00 Photographs and numbers from Jean Charles de Menezes’s mobile phone at New Scotland Yard

14:50 Mr de Menezes’s identity card, showing his Brazilian nationality, is in the office at New Scotland Yard

15:10 Two secretaries in Sir Ian Blair’s front office are aware of the id card

15:30 Brian Paddick, Deputy Assistant Commissioner, is told: “We’ve shot a Brazilian tourist”

15:30 Sir Ian Blair tells press conference that shooting is “directly linked” to the investigation into the previous day’s failed suicide bombings

16:30 Hayman is first told that the shot man is not thought to be one of the four men being hunted after the previous day’s attempted bombings

After 16:30 Hayman tells journalists at a briefing of specialist crime reporters that the dead man was thought not to be one of four — he disputes this, saying he would not have speculated

17:00 Detective Inspector Howarth at Marylebone Police Station, who had no involvement in the investigation, was told that there had been a massive ‘cock up’ at Stockwell and a Brazilian tourist had been shot

17:07 BBC start quoting the police as saying the man was not one of the four bombers

17.00 or 18.00 (approx) Blair and Hayman and others discuss the Met’s third press release to be issued. Hayman fails to tell his boss what he has just suggested to the journalists. Blair takes personal role in preparing the release

18:44 Third press release issued, saying that it is not clear if the man was one of the four bombers. Release adds that the dead man’s clothing and behaviour of the man added to police suspicion, and that he emerged from a house that was under investigation linked to yesterday’s attempted bombings

21:45 Anti-terrorism branch formally hands over the investigation to police, after being satisfied no link to the attempted bombings

23:05 MPS fourth press release issued, saying that officers confronted a 27-year-old who was subsequently shot

23:37 MPS fifth press release issued. It says that dead man was challenged by officers, and that it is not yet clear whether he was one of the four bombers, although his clothing and behaviour added to police suspicion, and he emerged from a house that was under investigation linked to yesterday’s attempted bombings

July 23, 2005

10:15 Blair officially told identity of dead man in meeting. No longer takes role in preparing press releases

16:52 MPS sixth press release issued. It says police “think” they know identity of the dead man, and are satisfied that there is no connection with attempted bombings, although his clothing and behaviour added to police suspicion

21:28 MPS ninth press release names Jean Charles de Menezes

August 19, 2005

Sir Ian Blair says in interview in the News of the World that for 24 hours, everyone who advised him and he himself believed it a suicide bomber or suspected bomber.

August 20, 2005

Brian Paddick queries the truth of Sir Ian’s interview

November 9, 2005

Sir Ian Blair says in interview in the Guardian: “I’m quite clear that by 7.30 at night we still had nothing that was identifying him otherwise we wouldn’t have been putting out the message that we were putting out.”

Thousands Of British Troops Suffering Mental Problems

0

Thousands Of British Troops Suffering Mental Problems, Alcoholism And Family Breakdowns From Iraq, Afghanistan Service

Thousands of Britain’s frontline veterans of the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan are facing escalating mental health problems, alcoholism and family breakdown, an extensive examination of the British military has found.

Prolonged periods in conflict are linked to higher levels of post-traumatic stress disorder, psychological distress and problems at home, researchers report in the British Medical Journal online.

Britain’s Ministry of Defense (MoD) said it would study the findings to try to better understand mental health problems in the military, but last night there was pressure on the government to address accusations that the military is currently overstretched, forcing personnel into longer tours of duty. Opposition Parliament members said the burden on the military was another reason to begin phased withdrawal from Iraq.

The Kings College London military health center’s study of 5,547 veterans of overseas tours focused on the 20% who were deployed for more than 13 months within a three-year period, the maximum recommended time limit set by the government and known as the “harmony guidelines”.

Nicola Fear, one of the researchers, said: “We asked about problems with partners, children, financial problems and whether their families were receiving enough support. Being deployed for 13 months or more was associated with significantly higher problems at home. It could be that people aren’t home long enough to adjust from military to family life.”

They found that nearly one in four of those deployed for longer than 13 months had “severe” alcohol problems compared with one in 10 of those deployed for less than five months.

Post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) is running at a rate of 5.2% of those deployed above the 13-month limit compared with 3% of those who spent less than five months in conflict.

The study covered the period since 2001 and included tours of duty by service members of the army, navy and Royal Air Force in Afghanistan and Iraq as well as Kosovo and Sierra Leone. The researchers found that uncertainty about when personnel would return home was linked to mental distress.

They conclude: “A clear and explicit policy on the duration of each deployment of armed forces personnel may reduce the risk of post-traumatic stress disorder. An association was found between deployment for more than a year in the past three years and mental health that might be explained by exposure to combat.”

The findings come after warnings that the forces are overstretched in Iraq and Afghanistan. The House of Commons defense committee has said the military is currently “overstretched”. Of those questioned for the BMJ study 86% had spent time in Iraq. The latest figures suggest there are 46,370 civilian and service military personnel on active service abroad.

The report prompted immediate political criticism. The Liberal Democrat defense spokesman, Nick Harvey, said: “Our armed forces are suffering the consequences of massive overseas commitments caused in no small part by the illegal war in Iraq.”

Shadow defense secretary Liam Fox said: “The government’s failure to share the burden of operations with our allies is adding to the pressures.

“Harmony guidelines that are meant to allow troops to rest and recuperate are habitually breached, leaving our troops feeling used and abused by the government.”

An MoD spokesman said: “We will of course study the research and work with the researchers to improve our understanding of the effect of operations on personnel.

“Before their deployment every member of the armed forces will know the length of their operational tour. But there will always be occasions where unforeseen circumstances will impact on their return. The MoD works hard to minimize the effects and will not keep personnel in operations unnecessarily.”

He said that the latest figures showed that of all personnel less than 1% of the Royal Navy, 12% of army and 6% of RAF personnel were exceeding the harmony guidelines.

Adherence to the guidelines had improved, he claimed and mental health nurses had been deployed in Iraq and Afghanistan to support troops. The harmony guidelines were more specific for each of the armed forces than the researchers allowed for, he added.

The under secretary of state for defence, Derek Twigg, said the BMJ research would be studied to see how the number of troops who suffer from mental illness can be reduced. He insisted the military was not over-stretched.

“The vast majority of British troops do not have their tours extended and are on operations for no longer than six to seven months. As such it indicates that our current policies on the duration of tours are right,” he said.

“We are taking steps to remind the small number of troops who see their tours extended about the support that is available to them. We have, for example, mental health nurses in Iraq and Afghanistan.”

Intellpuke: You can read this article by Gaurdian health correspondent Polly Curtis, reporting from Manchester, England, in context here: www.guardian.co.uk/military/story/0,,2140805,00.html

U.S. spy satellite declared loss, to drop from orbit

0

By Andrea Shalal-Esa

The National Reconnaissance Office has deemed an experimental U.S. spy satellite a total loss and will allow it to slowly drop from orbit and burn up in the atmosphere, two defense officials told Reuters this week.

The classified L-21, built by Lockheed Martin Corp at a cost of hundreds of millions of dollars, was launched on December 14 but has been out of touch since reaching its low-earth orbit, put by satellite watchers at about 220 miles above the earth.

It will now gradually fall out of orbit over the coming decades, said the officials, who asked not to be named. At some later date, it will burn up as it enters the earth’s atmosphere, posing no danger to people below, they said.

Meanwhile, the Pentagon will likely now have to test aspects of new technologies that were on the L-21 by piggybacking them onto other satellites over the next four to five years, the officials said.

For instance, the military could put the new sensors aboard TacSat 3, the latest in a series of smaller satellites, when it launches later this year.

The NRO could still try to build a new spacecraft to test the technology, but it would take several years to get the funding for such a satellite and build it, one official said.

The two officials declined to identify what exactly the experimental Lockheed satellite was meant to test, but said its failure was troubling, given that other countries were rapidly plowing ahead with development and launch of new capabilities, especially in the area of synthetic aperture radars.

Synthetic aperture radars offer high-resolution and can pierce darkness and thick clouds to identify targets, even peering below the surface of the ground or peeking into foliage that might obstruct the view of photo-based sensors.

Continue

Court Ruling that NSA Wiretapping is Illegal Drives Emergency Push for New Spy Powers, Newsweek Reports

0

By Ryan Singel

The Bush Administration’s hard press for emergency wiretapping powers from Congress before the August break now has an explanation: a secret court decided several months ago that at least one portion of the NSA wiretapping program is illegal, according to MSNBC Newsweek. That program operated for four years without court supervision, until the Administration bowed to public pressure in January 2007 and allowed the secret Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Court to review it.

In short, prior to the Patriot Act passage, the Administration launched a series of secret, warrantless wiretapping operations, which included snooping on Americans and wholesale data mining of innocent Americans’ communications records (the latter only according to press reports). The Administration believes it can do this surveillance since it is a King in wartime and thus never asked Congress to make any of this legal in the Patriot Act for fear it would be turned down.

Years later, a part of this secret surveillance is revealed by the New York Times. After a year of criticism and revelations, the Administration agrees to let a super-secret and very compliant court oversee the program using some very super secret, and legally dubious program warrants. A few months later, a judge from this court finds portions of the program illegal. The administration refuses to make this decision public. Instead, it goes on offense and says it needs the power to wiretap anyone overseas including Americans. A Republican Congressman accidentally leaks the a hint of the decision on Fox News, while saying that Democrats are putting the country at risk. Newsweek’s Michael Isikoff and Mark Hosenball (published on MSNBC.com) followed up with good reporting.

The order by a judge on the top-secret Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act court has never been publicly acknowledged by administration officials–and the details of it (including the identity of the judge who wrote it) remain highly classified. But the judge, in an order several months ago, apparently concluded that the administration had overstepped its legal authorities in conducting warrantless eavesdropping even under the scaled-back surveillance program that the White House first agreed to permit the FISA court to review earlier this year, said one lawyer who has been briefed on the order but who asked not to be publicly identified because of its sensitivity.

Now, we know why there’s an intelligence gap. Democrats afraid of looking soft on terrorism are now at work to give more spying power to the government to fill the mineshaft gap.

Once again: a secret court judge found that the Bush Administration’s formerly warrantless wiretapping program was illegal.

And that was the program AFTER it was scaled down in March 2004 after Justice Department officials revolted. I wonder what judges would have made of the earlier program — the one so bad that then-Attorney General John Ashcroft was ready to resign.

If there’s an intelligence gap, and I’m not sure there is, it’s only due to the Administration’s hubris.

Lawyers: Military violated rules at Gitmo

2

AP

Lawyers for Guantanamo Bay detainees told a federal appeals court Wednesday that the United States violated its own rules when it branded hundreds of prisoners as enemy combatants – basing their argument on statements by two U.S. military officers.

The lawyers asked the U.S. Court of Appeals for the District of Columbia Circuit to order the immediate release of Mohammed Sulaymon Barre, a Somali among some 360 prisoners at Guantanamo Bay. Barre was arrested in Pakistan in November 2001 after he had obtained refugee status from a U.N. agency.

Shane Kadidal, a New York lawyer, said petitions will be filed for other Guantanamo detainees, alleging the military violated its own rules in the Combatant Status Review Tribunals – the military panels that determine whether someone was an enemy combatant who should be held.

Barre’s attorneys say a Navy rear admiral who used to be in charge of the tribunal system noted in an affidavit that the military, at least in some cases, did not present all exculpatory evidence.

In his May 31 statement, Navy Rear Adm. James M. McGarrah acknowledged that “if certain information which suggested that the detainee should not be designated as an enemy combatant was duplicative” then that “duplicative information” might not have been presented to the tribunals at Guantanamo.

FIND MORE STORIES IN: Wednesday | Guantanamo Bay | Guantanamo | BARRE | Tribunals

Evidence indicating a detainee was not an enemy combatant may also have been excluded “if it did not relate to a specific allegation being made against the detainee,” McGarrah said.

Combatant Status Review Tribunals have been held for about 570 detainees at Guantanamo Bay, a U.S. Naval base in southeast Cuba. The military determined that all but 38 were “no longer enemy combatants.”

Rules issued by Deputy Secretary of Defense Gordon England in July 2006 stipulate that any “evidence to suggest that the detainee should not be designated as an enemy combatant” must be presented to the tribunal.

A Pentagon spokesman defended the process Wednesday, referring a reporter to a statement by Justice Department lawyers that said “it is manifestly reasonable not to fill the administrative record with duplicative material.”

Furthermore, presenting exculpatory evidence unrelated to a specific allegation against the detainee “would be useless at best and confusing at worst,” the Justice Department lawyers argued.

The New York-based Center for Constitutional Rights, which represents many of the Guantanamo detainees, filed the petition Wednesday. It did not file the petition on behalf of other detainees because the court previously requested that cases be presented individually, Kadidal said.

The petition also cited a statement by Army Reserve Lt. Col. Stephen Abraham, a 26-year veteran of military intelligence who served as a main liaison between the Combat Status Review Tribunals and intelligence agencies. Abraham’s affidavit, submitted to the U.S. Supreme Court in June, said Combatant Status Review Tribunal members relied on vague and incomplete intelligence while being pressured to rule against detainees.

The petition said that among the exculpatory evidence that the military failed to present was that he was recognized by the United Nations as a refugee from war-torn Somalia.

He is accused of having links to al-Wafa, a charity the U.S. State Department classifies as a terrorist organization. Barre has consistently denied having any ties to al-Wafa.

Meanwhile, the Miami-based Democracy Movement said 22 Cuban men were entering the third day of a hunger strike at the Migrant Operation Center at Guantanamo Bay. A U.S. official said there were 17 strikers.

The protesters are among 44 Cubans who were captured at sea but could not be returned to Cuba because U.S. authorities determined they had a credible fear of persecution. They have been detained at Guantanamo while the U.S. seeks to settle them in a third country.

The ugly rumour that never reached Sir Ian

0

Sometimes, if you read the IPCC’s Stockwell Two report, you get the impression that Sir Ian Blair must have been the only policeman in London who went to bed on July 22, 2005, without knowing that an innocent man had been shot in the Tube.

The Independent Police Complaints Commission’s report shows the startling speed at which rumours that the wrong man had been shot spread across the force. There were major problems with the internal communications systems – but not, it seems, with the Met’s grapevine.

Even officers watching a cricket match at Lords learned about the “terrible mistake”. Among them was Deputy Assistant Commissioner John Yates, the boss of Commander Cressida Dick, the officer responsible for the botched operation.

He told the inquiry that he received a number of calls through the day, but did not recall being told further details.

Roy Clark, a former IPCC director of investigations, who was also at the cricket, said he “became aware” that a mistake had been made.

Lambeth Borough officers were also told of the emerging identity of Mr de Menezes. Pc John Jeffrey, a Police Federation representative, said he was told that afternoon that the wrong man, a Brazilian, had been shot.

“He also observed that the atmosphere in his workplace was subdued,” the report states.

Later on July 22, at about 3pm, senior officers met members of the Muslim Safety Forum at Stockwell Tube station.

One member, Azad Ali, said it was “what was not said rather than what was said” that led him to believe an innocent man was dead.

Four hours later, as Sir Ian, the Met Commissioner, left Scotland Yard, he asked one of his staff officers if the identity of the dead man was known. Detective Chief Superintendent Maxine de Brunner told him it was not and the police must wait for DNA tests.

She added that it was also not yet known if the dead man had links to terrorism.

The report makes clear that evidence of Jean Charles de Menezes’ true identity began to emerge before Sir Ian told the public that his death was “directly linked” to the anti-terror operation.

His wallet, containing documents identifying the Brazilian, was first found minutes after he was shot and then searched properly before 3pm.

At 3.30pm, Sir Ian was telling the world that the shooting was linked to the “ongoing and expanding” terrorist investigation.

The miscommunication is the clearest example of how senior officers in the Met failed to speak to each other in the aftermath of the shooting. According to the IPCC report, the wallet was found just four minutes after Mr de Menezes was gunned down.

It was placed on a seat of the Tube carriage at Stockwell station along with the Brazilian’s mobile phone. Over the next few hours senior officers were briefed that the man they had shot was a “lone Pakistani male” as crucial evidence to the contrary lay in the wallet.

It was not until around 1pm that other evidence began to emerge after an officer accessed the memory of Mr de Menezes’s phone. The phone revealed names of Latin origin, rather than Arabic or Asian, while a photograph of the Brazilian was also found in the phone’s memory.

Then, at 2.47pm, police found the Brazilian’s documentation in the wallet, giving the identity of Jean Charles de Menezes born in Sao Paulo on January 7 1978. Stockwell Two reveals that the information was immediately phoned through to Scotland Yard, with a senior officer being informed as early as 3.08pm.

Within minutes Sir Ian’s own office, including his chief of staff Caroline Murdoch, were aware of the contents of the wallet but did not tell the Met chief.

Then just before Sir Ian attended the key press conference, Deputy Assistant Commissioner Brian Paddick claims he was told by another officer: “We’ve shot a Brazilian tourist”.

Rumours of the dead man’s true identity began to fly around – even reaching other police stations.

At 5pm a detective at Marylebone Police Station in the north west of the capital was told by a senior officer that there had been a “massive cock-up” at Stockwell.

Despite the widespread rumours, the Met continued to assume that Mr de Menezes’s identity had not been firmly established. Officers claim this was in part due to the mobile phone having a past link to crime – something Mr de Menezes may not have known – and a Pakistani business card recovered from the scene.

But throughout the evening of July 22 more evidence emerged of the Brazilian’s true identity.

At 7pm, a detective was informed that a trace of a bank card found on Mr de Menezes confirmed his name and placed his address as 17 Scotia Road. This was slightly different from the flat that police had under surveillance.

A senior officer then recorded in a log at 8.21pm that a letter discovered under the Brazilian’s body also confirmed his address as No 17. This effectively cut any link to the anti-terror operation into the July 21 attacks, but despite this it was still many hours before the Met confirmed it had made a mistake.

Responding to the report today, Sir Ian says that it had criticised him for being “almost totally uninformed” – but that exonerated him.

“Speaking personally, I have always made it clear that it was never my intention to mislead and, that if I had lied, I would not be fit to hold this office,” he said, over accusations that he misled the public. “I did not lie.”

Rumsfeld helped Al Qaeda establish a stronghold in Northwestern Pakistan

0

By Prof. Michel Chossudovsky

The Bush administration is contemplating sending US Forces to Pakistan with a view to neutralizing Al Qaeda in its safe haven in the Northwestern region of Waziristan.

Waziristan including Federal Administered Tribal Areas (FATA

This initiative is part of the administration’s “preemptive war doctrine.”

The Al Qaeda stronghold in a remote mountainous area is said to constitute a threat to the security of the American Homeland. According to the Directorate of National Intelligence:

“Al Qaeda remains the most serious threat to the United States ( . . . )

We assess the group has protected or regenerated key elements of its homeland attack capability, including: a safe haven in the Pakistan Federally Administrated Tribal Areas (FATA), operational lieutenants and its top leadership.” ( Inside The Pentagon July 26, 2007)

At closed sessions of the Senate and House Armed Services and Intelligence committees, Undersecretary of Defense for Intelligence James Clapper confirmed the Administration’s resolve to dismantle the “terror network” inside Pakistan:

“The United States was not content to sit still while the militant network blamed for the September 11 attacks on New York and Washington regenerated its strength in North Waziristan. ( . . . ) 

“I think our objective will be to neutralize, not eliminate, but certainly make this safe haven — as we have the others — less safe and less appealing for AQ [Al Qaeda],” (quoted by Reuters, 26 July 2007)

Waziristan

This statement was made following the release on July 11, 2007 of the CIA’s “National Intelligence Estimate” which points to a possible Al Qaeda attack on America. The intelligence report also suggests that Al Qaeda’s stronghold from which it plans its terrorist operations is in the tribal areas of Northwestern Pakistan. Both Washington and Islamabad accuse militant tribesmen in Waziristan of “harboring al Qaeda and supporting the Taliban.”

The White House favors a us military operation in Pakistan

Bush’s Homeland Security adviser Frances Townsend, who advises the president on domestic security issues, concurs with this assessment: “the White House is not ruling out using [the] U.S. military to attack terrorists camps in Pakistan.” (Fox News, July 22, 2007)

In chorus

In an evolving interagency consensus, the State Department has made similar statements. In separate hearings before the Senate Foreign Relations Committee, Undersecretary of State Nicholas Burns broadly concurs with The Pentagon and the White House:

“The United States would take unilateral action against Al Qaeda in Pakistan under certain circumstances.” (Reuters 26 July 2007).

The logic of these statements is that Al Qaeda is indelibly plotting a second major attack on America out of its Waziristan stronghold, and “we must go after them.”

According to the Senate and House committees, Pakistan’s military involvement has been ineffective. A carefully planned and targeted US military operation directed against Al Qaeda’s headquarters is called for:

“Al Qaeda is now in a part of Pakistan that is largely inaccessible to Pakistani forces, the Pakistani government. Always has been. And it is a very difficult operating environment for them,” said Edward Gistaro, the top U.S. intelligence analyst on transnational threats. (Reuters op cit)

Providing a safe-haven to Al Qaeda fighters?

(The following section of this article is in part based on the author’s earlier analysis in “War on Terrorism,” Chapter XIV entitled Providing a Safe-haven to Al Qaeda Fighters)

The Bush administration is using the alleged presence of Al Qaeda operatives in Northwestern Pakistan with a view to justifying a pre-emptive military intervention on a sovereign country. Such an action on the part of the US adminstration would have farreaching implications. It could potentially lead to an escalation of the US sponsored “war on terrorism” beyond the boundaries of the Middle East -Central Asian region.

Is the Al Qaeda stronghold in Waziristan a real threat to the security of America?<!–[if !supportLineBreakNewLine]–>
<!–[endif]–>

How did Al Qaeda manage to establish its headquarters in Northwestern Pakistan in the first place? This question in crucial in assessing recent Bush administration’s commitments to neutralizing the terror network:

The Al Qaeda stronghold was established in the months following the US-NATO invasion of Afghanistan. The military campaign commenced in early October and was completed in late November 2001. The invasion was a war of retribution directed against Afghanistan, for the alleged sponsorship of the September 11, 2001 attacks by the Taliban government. (To this date there is no evidence that the Afghan government had any involvement in these attacks.)

In late November 2001, the Northern Alliance supported by US bombing raids took the hill town of Kunduz in Northern Afghanistan. Eight thousand or more men “had been trapped inside the city in the last days of the siege, roughly half of whom were Pakistanis. Afghans, Uzbeks, Chechens, and various Arab mercenaries accounted for the rest.”

(Seymour M. Hersh, The Getaway, The New Yorker, 21 January 2002, http://www.globalresearch.ca/articles/HER206A.html )

Also among these fighters, were several senior Pakistani military and intelligence officers, who had been dispatched to the war theater by the Pakistani military.

The presence of high-ranking Pakistani military and intelligence advisers in the ranks of the Taliban/ Al Qaeda forces was known and approved by Washington. Pakistan’s military intelligence, the ISI, which also played a direct role in the 9/11 attacks, was overseeing the operation.

(For details on the links of ISI to the CIA, see Michel Chossudovsky, America’s “War on Terrorism,” ch. II, IV and X.)

President Bush in a November 2001 statement in the Rose Garden of the White House confirmed America’s resolve to going after the terrorists:

I said a long time ago, one of our objectives is to smoke them out and get them running and bring them to justice . . . I also said we’ll use whatever means necessary to achieve that objective — and that’s exactly what we’re going to do. (The White House, November 26, 2001)

Ironically, rather than arresting Al Qaeda “foreign fighters” who were combating alongside the Taliban, the US military actually facilitated their evacuation in military planes to Northwestern Pakistan.

A large number of these “foreign fighters” were never brought to justice, nor were they detained or interrogated. In fact quite the opposite: as confirmed by Seymour Hersh, they were flown to safety on the orders of Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld:

The Bush Administration ordered US Central Command to set up a special air corridor to help insure the safety of the Pakistani rescue flights from Kunduz to the northwest corner of Pakistan . . .

[Pakistan President] Musharraf won American support for the airlift by warning that the humiliation of losing hundreds-and perhaps thousands-of Pakistani Army men and intelligence operatives would jeopardize his political survival. “Clearly, there is a great willingness to help Musharraf,” an American intelligence official told me [Seymour Hersh]. A CIA analyst said that it was his understanding that the decision to permit the airlift was made by the White House and was indeed driven by a desire to protect the Pakistani leader. The airlift ‘made sense at the time,’ the CIA. analyst said. ‘Many of the people they spirited away were the Taliban leadership’-who Pakistan hoped could play a role in a postwar Afghan government. According to this person, “Musharraf wanted to have these people to put another card on the table” in future political negotiations. “We were supposed to have access to them,’ he said, but ‘it didn’t happen,” and the rescued Taliban remain unavailable to American intelligence.

According to a former high-level American defense official, the airlift was approved because of representations by the Pakistanis that “there were guys — intelligence agents and underground guys — who needed to get out. (Seymour Hersh, op cit)

In other words, the semi-official story was: “we were tricked into it” by the Pakistanis.

Out of some 8000 or more men, 3300 surrendered to the Northern Alliance, leaving between 4000 and 5000 men “unaccounted for.” According to Indian intelligence sources (quoted by Hersh), at least 4000 men including two Pakistani Army generals had been evacuated. (Ibid). The operation was casually described as a big mistake, leading to “unintended consequences.” According to US officials: “what was supposed to be a limited evacuation, apparently slipped out of control, and, as an unintended consequence, an unknown number of Taliban and Al Qaeda fighters managed to join in the exodus.” (quoted in Hersh op cit)

An Indian Press report confirmed that those evacuated, courtesy of Uncle Sam, were not the moderate elements of the Taliban, but rather “hard-core Taliban” and Al Qaeda fighters. (Times of India, 24 January 2002).

“Terrorists” or “intelligence assets”?

The foreign and Pakistani Al Qaeda fighters were evacuated to Northwestern Pakistan as part of a military-intelligence operation led by officials of Pakistan’s ISI in consultation with their CIA counterparts.

Many of these “foreign fighters” were also incorporated into the two main Kashmiri terrorist rebel groups, Lashkar-e-Taiba (“Army of the Pure”) and Jaish-e-Muhammad (“Army of Mohammed”). In other words, one of the main consequences of the US sponsored evacuation was to reinforce these Kashmiri terrorist organisations.

Saving Al Qaeda fighters, kidnapping civilians

Why would the US military arrange for several thousand “foreign fighters” to be airlifted and flown to safety?

Why were they not arrested and sent to Camp Delta, Guantanamo?

What is the relationship between the evacuation of “foreign fighters” on the one hand and the detention (on trumped up charges) and imprisonment of so-called “enemy combatants” at the Guantanamo concentration camp.

While Defense Secretary Rumsfeld claimed at the time that the Guantanamo detainees, were “vicious killers,” the evidence suggests that most of those arrested and sent to Guantanamo were in fact civilians:

 . . . The Northern Alliance has received millions of dollars from the U.S. Government, and motivated the arrest of thousands of innocent civilians in Afghanistan on the pretext they were terrorists, to help the U.S. Government justify the “war on terror.” Some Guantanamo prisoners “were grabbed by Pakistani soldiers patrolling the Afghan border who collected bounties for prisoners” 13. Other prisoners were caught by Afghan warlords and sold for bounty offered by the U.S. for Al-Qaeda and Taliban fighters8. Many of the prisoners are described in classified intelligence reports as “farmers, taxi drivers, cobblers, and laborers.

(Testimony provided by the Lawyer of Sageer, quoted in America’s War on Terrorism)

Whereas Al Qaeda fighters and their senior Pakistani advisers were “saved” on the orders of Donald Rumsfeld, also on the orders of the Secretary of Defense, innocent civilians, who had no relationship whatsoever to the war theater, were routinely categorized as “enemy combatants,” kidnapped, interrogated, tortured and sent to Guantanamo.

Why?

Did the Bush administration need to “recruit detainees” among the civilian population and pass them off as “terrorists” with a view to bearing out its resolve and commitment to the “global war on terrorism” (GWOT).

Did they need to boost up the numbers “to fill the gap” resulting from the several thousand Al Qaeda fighters, who had been secretly evacuated, on the orders of Donald Rumsfeld and flown to safety?

In other words, are these detentions part of the Pentagon’s propaganda campaign?

Conversely, did the Bush administration require the existence of an Al Qaeda stronghold to continued military interventions in its preemptive war on terrorism. Were these “terrorists” needed in the Kashmiri Islamic militant groups in the context of a ISI-CIA covert op?

Whatever the motivation, we are dealing with a diabolical intelligence operation.

More than 600 people from 42 countries, have been held in the Camp Delta concentration camp in Guantanamo. While US officials continue to claim that they are “enemy combatants” arrested in Afghanistan, a large number of those detained had never set foot in Afghanistan. They were kidnapped in several foreign countries including Pakistan, Bosnia and The Gambia on the West Coast of Africa, and taken to the US military base in Bagram, Afghanistan, before being transported to Guantanamo.

Several children were held in Guantanamo, aged between 13 and 15 years old. According to Pentagon officials: “the boys were brought to Guantanamo Bay because they were considered a threat and they had “high value” intelligence that US authorities wanted.” (Washington Post, 23 August 2003). According to Britain’s Muslim News: “out of the window has gone any regard for the norms of international law and order . . . with Muslims liable to be kidnapped in any part of the world to be transported to Guantanamo Bay and face summary justice.”

( http://www.muslimnews.co.uk/index/press.php?pr=177 )

The children were arrested but none of the real “foreign fighters” who had been evacuated, courtesy of Uncle Sam, were considered a security threat. Quite the opposite they had been flown to safety in US and Pakistani military planes.

Going after Al Qaeda in Northwestern Pakistan

In the months following the 2003 invasion of Iraq, the Pentagon decided to boost its counter terrorism operations in Northwestern Pakistan with the support of the Pakistani military. These operations were launched in the tribal areas of northern Pakistan, following the visit to Islamabad of Deputy Secretary of State Richard Armitage and Assistant Secretary of State Christina Rocca in October 2003.

The operation was aired live on network TV in the months leading up to the November 2004 US presidential elections. The targets were bin Laden and his deputy Ayman al-Zawahri, who were said to be hiding in these border regions of Northern Pakistan.

The Pentagon described the strategy of “going after” bin Laden as a “hammer and anvil” approach, “with Pakistani troops moving into semiautonomous tribal areas on their side of the border, and Afghans and American forces sweeping the forbidding terrain on the other.” (The Record, Kitchener, 13 March 2004).

In March 2004, Britain’s Sunday Express, quoting “a US intelligence source” reported that:

bin Laden and about 50 supporters had been boxed in among the Toba Kakar mountainous north of the Pakistani city of Quetta and were being watched by satellite . . . Pakistan then sent several thousand extra troops to the tribal area of South Waziristan, just to the north. (quoted in South China Morning Post, 7 March 2004)

In a bitter irony, it was to this Northern region of Pakistan that the estimated 4000 “foreign fighters” had been airlifted, in the first place, in November 2001, on the orders of (former) Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld. And these Al Qaeda units were being supplied by Pakistan’s ISI. (UPI, 1 November 2001)

In other words, the same units of Pakistan’s military intelligence, the ISI, –which coordinated the November 2001 evacuation of foreign fighters on behalf of US military — are now involved in the “hammer and anvil” search for Al Qaeda in northwestern Pakistan, with the support of Pakistani regular forces.

From a military standpoint, it does not make sense. Evacuate the enemy to safe-haven, and then a few years later “go after them” in the tribal hills of Northwestern Pakistan.

Why did they not arrest these Al Qaeda fighters in November 2001?

Was it incompetence or poor military planning? Or was it a diabolical covert op to actually safeguard and sustain “enemy number one”?

Because without this “outside enemy” personified by Osama bin Laden, there would be no “war on terrorism.”

The operation certainly makes sense from the point of view of war propaganda

The terrorists are there, we put them there.

And then “we go after them” and show the World that we are committed to weeding out the terrorists.

The Bush campaign needs more than the rhetoric of the “war on terrorism.” It needs a “real” “war on terrorism,” with an Al Qaeda headquarters in the chosen theater of the tribal areas of Waziristan.

Where is the threat?

In recent developments, the existence of this Al Qaeda stronghold is now being used as a justification for a US military intervention in Pakistan on the pretext that a coordinated “attack on the American Homeland” is being designed and masterminded from these inaccessible mountainous areas, which have little in terms of infrastructure and communications networks.

Believe it or not!

© Copyright Michel Chossudovsky, Global Research, 2007

Bush Officials May Face New Subpoenas

0

By

High-profile Bush administration officials could be called to the witness stand if two deposed pro-Israel lobbyists have their way in a court case that is moving toward a January 2008 trial date.

Lawyers for two former lobbyists at the American Israel Public Affairs Committee have asked federal judge T.S. Ellis III to subpoena the highest-ranking foreign policy players in the administration, including Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice, National Security Advisor Stephen Hadley, Hadley’s deputy, Elliott Abrams, and other top officials from the White House, State Department and Pentagon.

The two Aipac lobbyists, Keith Weissman and Steve Rosen, are on trial for allegedly receiving classified information from government officials and relaying it to diplomats, journalists and other Aipac staff members. Their attorneys are seeking testimony from Rice and others in order to make the case that passing on classified information to lobbyists was routine conduct in Washington. The prosecution filed a series of motions asking that all subpoenas for government officials be dismissed.

If the subpoenas are approved by the court, the Aipac trial has the potential of turning into a major embarrassment for the Bush administration, which has made fighting leaks in the government one of its policy cornerstones. Having the most senior members of the administration testify under oath about conversations with lobbyists in regard to classified information could shatter what is left from the anti-leak posture the administration has adopted in its early years.

Last Tuesday, the judge moved closer to setting a trial date, securing January 14 – three-and-a-half years after the case first broke out – as the target for beginning the jury trial.

“We’ve got to get this done,” said Ellis in the hearing, while prodding the prosecution to speed up procedures. “This case has languished for quite a long time.”

Currently, the case’s closed-door discussions have reviewed the classified information that will be put forward. After that is completed, the proposed list of witnesses is expected to take center stage in the pretrial hearings.

The list contains some 30 witnesses, few of them directly involved in specific events mentioned in the indictment. Such is the subpoena requested for Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice. When Rice was national security adviser during the first term of the Bush administration, she held a White House meeting with Aipac’s executive director, Howard Kohr, and with Rosen, who was then the lobby’s policy director. During the meeting, Rice allegedly revealed information that was later conveyed to Rosen and Weissman by former Pentagon analyst Larry Franklin, who already has admitted to passing on classified information as part of a plea agreement with the prosecution.

The purpose of having the government officials testify, defense sources said, is to prove to the jury that leaking classified information to Aipac members, as well as to other lobbyists, journalists and diplomats, was not only standard procedure but also a pattern of behavior directed from the highest ranks in the administration.“We want to show it was authorized from the top,” a defense source said.

In addition to members of the State Department and Pentagon, the list may include current senior staff members of Aipac, though defense sources would not confirm that they are actually on the final list.

Due to the nature of the case, which centers on the use and proliferation of classified information, the court is required to approve each of the witnesses, and the topics about which he or she will be asked, in order to ensure that classified information is not revealed during the testimonies.

The government prosecution has filed motions arguing that the subpoenas are not relevant to the case. But Ellis has given some indication that he sees things otherwise. During one of the closed-door hearings, Ellis said that testimonies dealing with the nature of the relationship between Aipac and America’s government are “flatly relevant to this case,” since it is important for determining the defendants’ state of mind when they encountered classified information.

It is already clear that court will not allow the entire witness list presented by the prosecution, since Ellis is attempting to keep the trial short and not all the officials requested are relevant to Aipac issues.

Meanwhile, as the trial date was postponed yet again, the legal bills of the defendants have reached a record high. According to unofficial estimates within the defense team, both defendants have already incurred $7 million in legal fees a figure that might grow to $10 million by the time the case is over, making this trial one of the costliest in American history.

An agreement reached several months ago between Aipac and lawyers for Weissman ensures that the lobby will cover Weissman’s legal costs. A similar agreement is still being negotiated between Aipac and Rosen’s lawyers.

Democrats Offer Compromise Plan On Surveillance

0

Proposal Would Involve FISA Court in Warrants

By Ellen Nakashima and Spencer S. Hsu

Congressional Democrats outlined a temporary plan yesterday that would expand the government’s authority to conduct electronic surveillance of overseas communications in search of terrorists.

The proposal, according to House and Senate Democrats, would permit a secret court to issue broad orders approving eavesdropping of communications involving suspects overseas and other people, who may be in the United States. To issue an order, the court would not need to identify a particular target overseas, but it would have to determine that those being targeted are “likely,” in fact, overseas.

If a foreign target’s communications to a person inside the United States reaches a “significant” number, then an court order based on probable cause would be required. It is unclear how “significant” would be defined.

Under a sunset provision, the authority would have to be revisited in six months.

“Given the continued threat environment and some recent technical developments, I have become convinced that we must take some immediate, but interim, step to improve collection of foreign intelligence in a manner that doesn’t compromise civil liberties of U.S. citizens,” said John D. Rockefeller (D-W.Va.), chairman of the Senate Select Committee on Intelligence.

In recent days, the administration has proposed giving the attorney general sole authority to authorize the surveillance, suggesting that if Democrats do not act quickly Americans would be at greater risk of attack.

Democrats said that giving sole authority to the attorney general would be unacceptable and insisted that the secret Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Court have an oversight role.

Some civil liberties advocates were pleased.

“It is vastly better than the administration’s bill and preserves the Fourth Amendment warrant requirement,” said Kate Martin, director of the Center for National Security Studies.

Others, including some Democrats, said that granting the government authority to intercept calls with broad warrants could allow a large number of phone calls and e-mails of U.S. individuals and companies to be intercepted, as well.

Caroline Fredrickson, director of the American Civil Liberties Union‘s Washington legislative office, contended that Democrats are “capitulating to the politics of fear.”

Sen. Russell Feingold (D-Wis.) said that the proposal, while better than the administration’s, “does not have adequate safeguards to protect Americans’ privacy.”

Still, Democratic leaders are holding out hope of reaching a deal and passing legislation before leaving for the August recess.

The 1978 Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act requires the government to obtain an order from a secret court to conduct electronic surveillance of terrorist or intelligence suspects in the United States. After the Sept. 11, 2001, terrorist attacks, President Bush authorized a secret warrantless wiretapping program that allowed the National Security Agency to intercept communications between individuals in the United States and others overseas when at least one of them is suspected of links to terrorism.

The full extent of that program has never been disclosed. In January, it was put under the supervision of the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Court, though officials have never made public the terms of the court’s oversight.

In recent weeks, the administration has warned that the United States is under heightened threat of another terrorist attack. It is seeking broadened authority to step up surveillance, but for now, Democrats do not want to provide that power indefinitely. Congressional leaders met with Bush yesterday at the White House, where they discussed the administration’s wiretapping authority.

On Friday, Director of National Intelligence Mike McConnell submitted a proposal to Congress that asked for the authority to intercept without a court order any international phone call or e-mail between a surveillance target outside the United States and any person in the United States.

Yesterday, the administration updated its proposal by saying that the attorney general and the director of national intelligence could authorize such surveillance and that the guidelines on what constitutes an overseas target be subject to some court review. But the surveillance could begin before the court review and the oversight would be limited.

A Bush administration official, requesting anonymity because of the sensitivity of the issue, said, “What we want to be careful about is not having FISA take on a role for which it was never intended, which is to essentially . . . extend privacy rights to foreigners located in foreign lands.”

A Democratic aide familiar with the negotiations said that if communications are determined to involve U.S. persons, then their names would be removed before any transcript is disseminated unless they were relevant to a foreign terrorism investigation.

If further investigation were needed, “individualized warrants for Americans” would be required, according to a proposal by conservative House Democrats led by Reps. Robert E. “Bud” Cramer (Ala.) and Jane Harman (Calif.). It is unclear what would specifically trigger that requirement.

The Democrats‘ proposal also would compel compliance by private companies.

It would also affirm that no court order is needed to eavesdrop on communications that begin and end outside the United States, even if routed through the United States.

The Miami Five – Victims of American Justice

1

flamesong

On 8th June 2001 in a federal court in Miami five Cuban men, Gerardo Hernández, Ramón Labañino, Antonio Guerrero, Fernando González and René González were convicted of charges of false identification, espionage and conspiracy to commit murder. Their sentences ranged from 75 years to life.

Cuba has been the bogey man for the American people since the Castro-led revolution resulted in the ousting of US puppet Fulgencio Batista in January 1959 and the resulting expulsion of American tax exiles and gangsters. Many of the exiled settled in Florida and have since waged a largely unreported ‘private’ terrorist war on Cuba which has resulted in the deaths of over 3000 Cubans.

The five men, known as the Miami Five in Cuba and the Cuban Five in Miami were sent to infiltrate and monitor the anti-Cuban terrorist activities of such groups as Brothers to the Rescue, Comandos F4, CORU, Alpha 66 and Omega 7, based in Miami and warn of planned terrorist attacks – though it transpired that the groups activities were know, if not supported, by the FBI and CIA. As a result of the information they supplied, many terrorist act were pre-empted and two aircraft involved in these attacks were shot down.

However, the five were arrested on 12th September 1998 and held in solitary confinement for 17 months. The trial, which began in November 2000, was held in Miami and the defence lawyers argued from the outset that this could not lead to a fair trial – given the local anti-Cuban sentiment – and five times the judge denied a change of venue.

Four years after their conviction (and after seven years in prison) their convictions were overturned and they were granted a new trial outside Florida. Within two months a panel of twelve judges began deliberating thier case and a year later their retrail was denied.

They remain in prison. The wives of two men, Gerardo Hernández and René Gonzáles, are persistently denied visas to visit their husbands. Amnesty International challenged the fairness of the trial in an open letter to the U.S. State Department in 2006 and continue to monitor the situation. Those who have champione their cause include Eight Nobel laureates – amongst them Desmond Tutu and Günter Grass.

Caught on Camera
Caught on camera.
The Federal Prosecutor for Southern Florida, Guy Lewis (right) steps up to hug Jose Basulto, the head of the so called ‘Brothers to the Rescue’ organisation after sentencing the hearings. Basulto, a former CIA agent and vetran of the Bay of Pigs invasion is a member of the Cuban American National Foundation. He was at the forefront of the campaign to keep Elian Gonzalez in the US and has admitted to having made attemps on the life of Fidel Castro. It was Basulto’s planes that were shot down by Cuban air force Migs in 1996 when they violated Cuban airspace despite repeated warnings not to do so. These pictures talken from US television prove the close links between the Federal prosecutor’s office and the Cuban-American Mafia. Is it possible that the Miami Five got a fair trial?

There is an international campaign to Free The Five. In the UK, Father Geoff Bottoms works tirelessly to raise awareness and frequently travels to Cuba and Miami to represent the prisoners and was awarded the Cuban Frienship Medal by Fidel Castro for his work.

The ‘medical miracle’ that brought near-vegetative brain back to life

1

The mother of a man who was left in a near-vegetative state by a serious assault spoke yesterday of her joy at the “medical miracle” that has allowed him to speak and eat again – and which could benefit tens of thousands of people in a similar condition.

The severely brain-injured patient, who is now 38, was unable to communicate, swallow or make co-ordinated movements for six years, before doctors revived him from this mini-mally conscious state (MCS) with a revolutionary therapy.

Since his skull was implanted with electrodes to stimulate a deep-lying and undamaged part of his brain, he has improved so dramatically that he can now feed himself, brush his hair and recognise and talk to his parents and doctors.

“My son can now eat, sleep, watch a movie without falling asleep, he can drink from a cup, he can express pain, he can cry, and he can laugh,” his mother said.

“He can say, ‘I love you, Mommy’. God bless those wonderful doctors who believed in my son, and gave their time and effort to help my son.”

One of his most impressive achievements has been to say from memory the first 16 words of the Pledge of Allegiance, which is recited daily by American schoolchildren.

The transformation achieved by the deep brain stimulation (DBS) technique, which is already used to treat Parkinson’s disease and some mental illnesses, has raised hopes that it could offer a way back to consciousness for many people with similarly serious brain damage. While there are few reliable figures for the number of MCS patients around the world, doctors estimate that the total runs to hundreds of thousands. The research team will now start the first formal clinical trial on 12 American patients.

“We hope that the first use of DBS to treat patients in an MCS marks the beginning of a significant period of innovation in our approach to trau-matic brain injury,” said Ali Rezai, Professor of Neurosurgery at the Cleveland Clinic in Ohio, who im-planted the electrodes.

Joseph Fins, Professor of Medicine at the Weill Cornell Medical Centre in New York and another team member, said: “This innovative procedure holds the potential for patients to recapture a lost personhood as they regain an ability to communicate through a prosthetic device that helps them participate in the human community.

“If this is replicated, its success could usher in a whole new era for the treatment of patients in MCS. Any intervention that can unlock the neurological potential of patients in MCS should have us reconsider how we care for these individuals.”

MCS patients differ from those in a persistent vegetative state (PVS) in that, while they are so brain-damaged as to be mostly unaware of their surroundings, they show signs of consciousness and may communicate with simple signals or respond to stimuli. They retain capacity in parts of the brain that process higher cognitive functions, which are inert in PVS.

It is not thought that DBS would benefit PVS patients such as Terri Schiavo, the Florida woman allowed to die in 2005 after a legal battle between her husband, who wanted her feeding tube removed, and her parents, who wanted her to be kept alive.

The patient’s improvement after DBS treatment was almost immediate. His mother had previously been told that, if her son survived, he would be “a vegetable for the rest of his life”.

She said: “Each time I visited my son in the nursing home on my way home, I would cry, as it’s so hard for a mother to see her son like that, and I’d pray for a miracle . . . In 2005 it happened, the opportunity came.

“I can imagine what other families are going through, when they come back from the war with all sorts of injuries, and I would like to say to them, ‘Don’t give up hope. There is hope’.”

Electrodes used to stimulate key areas

The first patient to be treated with DBS suffered brain injuries in a robbery and assault in 1999

He was fed through a tube, could not speak and was barely able to communicate

Brain scans showed that key regions still functioned and, in 2005, his parents approved the treatment conducted by Professor Ali Rezai and his team

Two electrodes were inserted through the skull to stimulate the thalamus, a part of the brain that arouses other important circuits

Over six months, they were switched on and off, in a random pattern, so doctors did not know when he was being stimulated

The improvement was almost immediate

The implants now work permanently: they are switched on for 12 hours and off for 12 hours, to allow him a normal asleep-awake cycle

Police DNA database ‘risks criminalising non-offenders’

0

By Ben Russell

People are being added to the Government’s national DNA database at the rate of more than one a minute, figures from the Liberal Democrats have revealed.

Their research showed that 547,020 profiles were added last year, the equivalent of 62 an hour, leading to claims that ministers were taking Britain into a “headlong rush” towards a surveillance state as numbers on the controversial police record topped four million.

Yesterday the Human Genetics Commission, a government-backed watchdog, launched a major inquiry into the use of DNA records by police. Due to report in the spring, it will look at the size of the DNA database, the large number of black men whose samples are recorded, and the difficulties in removing samples once they are entered into the system.

It emerged that senior police officers have warned the database might criminalise law-abiding people. Alex Marshall, Deputy Chief Constable of Thames Valley, said in a response to the Home Office’s review of the Police and Criminal Evidence Act that “extending the taking of samples to all offences may be perceived as indicative of the increasing criminalisation of the generally law-abiding citizen”.

A spokeswoman for the Commission for Racial Equality said: “Statistics paint a frightening picture. Black men are four times more likely than white men to have their DNA profiles stored in the police national DNA database. In the interests of fairness we would like to call for DNA profiles to be limited to those that are convicted only.”

The Home Office insists that the DNA database – the largest in the world – is a vital tool in the fight against crime. But critics warn that the system could lead to discrimination against ethnic minorities. Nick Clegg, the Liberal Democrat home affairs spokesman, who obtained the figures, said: “The Government’s onward march towards a surveillance state has now become a headlong rush. They seem determined to hoover up the DNA details of as many people as they can, regardless of guilt or innocence.”

BAA denies seeking blanket ban on airport protest

0

By John Vidal

BAA backtracked yesterday from trying to get one of the widest-ranging injunctions ever sought in Britain and denied it was trying to stop 5 million members of the National Trust and other groups going to Heathrow to demonstrate against climate change.

But BAA, which owns the airport, said it still wanted to ban the Camp for Climate Action, planned for August 14 to 21, because it was intended to disrupt the airport with direct action.

BAA said in the high court that it was seeking a broad injunction to prevent four individuals, Joss Garman, Leo Murray, John Stewart and Geraldine Nicholson, representing four small aviation watchdog groups, from going near the airport.

It argued that it needed to include their organisations and supporters in case they were part of the camp. These included the RSPB, the National Trust, Greenpeace and the Woodland Trust.

“I am seeking to bring within the definition of protesters persons acting unlawfully in the name of Camp for Climate Action,” said BAA’s lawyer, Timothy Lawson-Cruttenden. “We are only trying to injunct people who are acting unlawfully … we only wish to injunct those who wish to obstruct us or prevent us using the airport. We say there are four groups who are intending to have a climate camp – the raison d’être is to disrupt our lawful activities. What BAA does not want is people coming on to the airport to act unlawfully and, on the evidence, these four groups intend to [do] just that.”

Transport for London and London Underground said they had not been consulted over the injunction. Their counsel, Martin Chamberlain QC, told the court that the injunction was “an attempt to bind 5 million people”.

“What Mr Lawson-Cruttenden has said … is that it has been clear all along that the only people sought to be injuncted are the four named defendants,” he said. “It is quite the reverse. It has been clear all along, until the moment we arrived at court today, that in fact the people sought to be injuncted included all the members of the defendant organisations … This is unjustifiable and disproportionate.”

But the judge, Mrs Justice Swift, who said she was a member of three of the groups, said she was confused about what BAA wanted and instructed the company to return today with a skeleton legal argument to justify its case.

MPs and others said yesterday that the company was in danger of making itself more unpopular than it already was.

“This injunction is a challenge to a basic British value,” said Susan Kramer, MP for Richmond, who represents people living near Heathrow. “People who have been quietly opposed to the airport expansion are now getting fed up. This attempt at an injunction against a very reasonable group smacks of arrogance.”

Ken Livingstone, the London mayor, had earlier in the week accused BAA of being “out of their skull” and merely paving the way for hardcore protesters to invade the climate action camp.

The injunction seeks to keep protesters away from platforms 6 and 7 of Paddington station, all trains travelling to Heathrow, the Piccadilly line of London Underground, the M4 motorway and all service stations between junctions 3 and 6. Junctions 13 to 15 were also included.

Protesters would not be allowed to carry wooden poles, stepladders, spades, saws, nails, hammers, ropes, glue or whistles.

The Camp for Climate Action said the protest would go ahead whether or not BAA won its injunction.

“We accuse BAA of abusing people’s rights to freedom of expression and of pushing for the expansion of airports in the knowledge that it will lead directly to climate change and indirectly to millions of deaths,” it said.

The hearing continues.

Government Technologies Reduce National Security

0

By Mick Meaney
RINF Alternative News 

080107_epassport_250×1.jpg A German hacker and security consultant, Lukas Grunwald, has again demonstrated how Governments are enforcing insecure technology that puts our security, identity and privacy at risk, while claiming to provide the exact opposite.

Biometric passports containing the highly controversial RFID chips have been shown to be even more vulnerable than first thought as Grunwald managed to crash two passport readers and states it could be possible to reprogram readers to approve forged or expired passports. The exploit will also allow someone to access, hijack and clone a passport holder’s fingerprint, a truly shocking revelation.

It is also possible to create false fingerprints to fool the system but officials bury their head in the sand and remain silent on the issue.

RFID enabled biometric passports were specifically introduced, or so we are told, to prevent passport forgery and increase national security but as Grunwald has discovered, they actually reduce security and provide hackers and identity thieves with a new set of tools to compromise our welfar and allow hackers to override the computer system.

Grunwald stated: “The whole passport design is totally brain damaged, from my point of view all of these RFID passports are a huge waste of money. They’re not increasing security at all.”

Last year he demonstrated how easy it is to clone passports.

“If you’re able to crash something you are most likely able to exploit it, I predict that most of the vendors are using off-the-shelf (software) libraries for decoding the JPEG2000 images,” says Grunwald, meaning all airports are susceptible to the hack.

The U.S. State Department had no comment, a telling sign.

Haneef linked to MI5 probe

0

By Renee Viellaris, Ian McPhedran and Margaret Wenham

FREED terror suspect Mohamed Haneef was regularly in contact with Islamic radicals under surveillance by Britain’s top spy agency MI5.

Highly classified intelligence reveals the former Gold Coast doctor – still considered a person of interest by British and Australian investigators – made contact using medical chat rooms, international phone cards and phone boxes.

The intelligence suggests this was to avoid detection and suspicion.

The leaked dossier, part of the information that formed a key plank in Immigration Minister Kevin Andrews’ decision to revoke Dr Haneef’s visa, alleges the Indian-born doctor spoke to a number of suspects about a “project” and a “purpose” before the failed UK bombings.

However, it’s understood the intelligence does not contain information about a terrorist attack in Australia and only puts Dr Haneef as being on the outer edge of a large group of like-minded people.

But it comes as Indian police intelligence alleged Dr Haneef had links to Al-Qaeda.

He remains under surveillance in India by at least two law enforcement agencies.

Australian Federal Police Commissioner Mick Keelty yesterday said Dr Haneef could face further charges.

“It’s still potentially possible that a brief of evidence will be submitted against Dr Haneef,” he said.

And in a significant development yesterday, senior Government sources confirmed that Dr Haneef’s former Gold Coast colleague and Liverpool flatmate, Dr Mohammed Asif Ali, was being investigated over his knowledge of terrorist activities.

Dr Ali, stood down from Queensland Health on Friday for lying about his employment history in India, owned two rubber stamps used to forge medical testimonials.

Dr Ali admitted to the Medical Board of Queensland that he made up about an extra 12 months of experience but it was because he had taken time off to take care of a family problem.

But sources said the AFP were suspicious of his activities in that time.

“(Dr Ali) is a person of interest to us,” Mr Keelty said yesterday.

Immigration Minister Kevin Andrews revealed on Tuesday parts of information relating to Dr Haneef to explain why he revoked his visa.

However, he said he would not reveal “part B” because of the ongoing AFP investigation.

The Courier-Mail reports that the second document contains names of suspects and detail of involvement in planned attacks.

Dr Haneef’s lawyer Peter Russo said there were plans for Dr Haneef to address the allegations contained in the so-called protected information released by Mr Andrews.

“He will be coming out with a general statement about the allegations against him,” he said.

Mr Russo also denied reports that a large party had been thrown for him in India.

The CIA proposed that I assassinate Fidel in Chile, Veciana confesses

4

Founder of Alpha 66, identified as an accomplice in the conspiracy to assassinate Kennedy

Granma International

It was the CIA that informed Antonio Veciana Blanch, 10 months ahead of time, of a visit to Chile by the president of Cuba; it proposed he should organize Fidel’s assassination, directed him to carry it out in a press conference and provided his transportation with weapons to Santiago in a U.S. diplomatic vehicle.

This was confirmed to a Miami radio station by Veciana himself who, aged 79, decided to confess some of the crimes he has committed over close to 50 years for the U.S. intelligence services in their dirty war on Cuba.

Founder of Alpha 66, identified as an accomplice in the conspiracy to assassinate Kennedy, this killer trained in Operation 40 was convicted of drug trafficking in New York in 1974.

In an attempt to respond to an interview with General (ret) Fabian Escalante Fonts recently published in Granma International, Veciana gave his version of various acts of terrorism in which he was involved on ‘La noche se mueve’ program on Miami radio.

‘I was in Bolivia working for USAID as advisor to the Central Bank,’ the terrorist chief explained on approaching the issue of the Chile attempt in 1971.

The ‘aid to development’ granted to Bolivia by that official U.S. agency linked from its foundation to intelligence activities, was wide-ranging, he reveals. ‘There was a group of us Cubans. I was a banking advisor in the Central Bank. Rafael Dalmau was in the Mining Bank. Charles Bacon who, despite his American name, was Cuban by birth, was in the Agricultural Bank and the CIA had other people working in the Ministry of the Interior.’

A CIA official told me that Fidel was going to Chile
One day, ‘a CIA official told me that Fidel was going to Chile and asked me if I was prepared to participate in organizing an attempt on his life,’ Veciana related. ‘I had been based in Bolivia for four years. I hadn’t read anything about Castro going to Chile until someone from the CIA called me from Peru.’

The U.S. agency took on coordinating the contact with Chilean police conspiring against the democratic regime of the socialist Salvador Allende.

‘He told me that I could have confidence in the two people who were going to visit me on behalf of the Chilean police.’

At various points in the interview Veciana declined to confirm that one of those individuals was Police Colonel Eduardo Sepúlveda. ‘I cannot confirm to you if it was Sepúlveda or someone else,’ he said enigmatically. Later, he insisted: ‘It could have been Sepúlveda but I didn’t know Sepúlveda. They used false names.’

‘These gentlemen came to see me in La Paz and we had two meetings. Then they informed me that effectively, a visit to Chile by Fidel Castro was planned and would probably be quite extensive. They thought that he would be at least two weeks in Chile and said that they were prepared to cooperate…’

‘I was the organiser’
During the three-hour interview, broadcast by three separate stations. Veciana insisted on attributing the leadership of the operation being planned to himself and cast aside his rival Luis Posada Carriles, who was handling CIA operations from Caracas.

‘I was the organizer,’ he repeated, expressing his dissatisfaction with the Chilean accomplices. ‘I asked them for some support that they never gave. I asked them to give me police uniforms, to give me more facilities. And they told me; we’re just going to give you information.’

Where would Veciana find the support that he needed? In Miami, of course. That city contained the large reserve of killers and conspirators constituted by the CIA years back. And heading up that pack of terrorists were his Alpha 66 buddies, with offices on Flager Street.

‘I sent a coded telegram to Alpha 66…. There are people here still who can back that up… To see if there were any men of action prepared to operate.’

Veciana finally decided to travel to the place that is still the sanctuary of continental terrorism.

‘Andres Nazario (Sargent, then head of Alpha 66) received me… We interviewed various people.’

All the candidates realized that participating in an attempt on the life of Fidel Castro was asking them to commit suicide.

‘They weren’t prepared to give up their lives.’

The ‘killers’: Islander Dominguez and Marco Rodriguez
Veciana returned, disappointed, to Bolivia after four days. However, he recalled, a new coded message from Sargent soon arrived, announcing that two individuals prepared to join the conspiracy had been found.

‘I went back to Miami… The two people belonged to Orlando Bosch’s group.’ They had worked with Poder Cubano (Bosch’s group) and in the CORU; they were Domínguez ‘the Islander,’ I think his name was Antonio, and Marco Rodríguez. I provided them with all the means to get to Venezuela and in Venezuela there were certain Venevisión officials who gave me all the facilities.’

‘The plan was to convert the two killers into Venevisión cameramen to subsequently infiltrate them into a press conference to be given by the Cuban president in Santiago de Chile.

Whose idea was that? The CIA’s, Veciana confirmed. ‘They suggested the camera idea… they suggested taking advantage of the conference where 600 or 700 journalist would be present, for the assassination.’

‘CIA personnel participated in preparations fro the attempt: ‘Afterwards the plot was complemented by getting the people who, as experts, were recommended by them: this can be done, this can’t be done… ‘

‘We had somebody who knew about the workings of Cuban press conferences: possibly the people who attended would have to leave their cameras outside and these would be checked. But by using a small weapon and hiding it in a certain section of the camera, when they began to run, the weapon wouldn’t be detected,’ he confessed.

So Domínguez and Rodríguez ‘were trained as cameramen and I got them Venevisión credentials.

‘The preparation of the two terrorists was meticulous.

‘They had to be trained because they were Cuban, they had to know the Venezuelan language… They were in Caracas for 60 to 90 days training so that they would be undetectable as Cubans, but as Venezuelans,’ he stated.

Veciana was then asked: ‘Did these two people receive training as shooters, as killers, as assassins?’

The 79 year old replied with surprising candor: ‘Well, I would call them assassins.

‘They were action men of Poder Cubano who had worked with Orlando Bosch.’

The two ‘assassins arrived in Santiago de Chile ‘long before Castro was due to arrive; in other words, they were there and began interviewing the Chilean government as if they were Venezuelan journalists.’

At the beginning of the interview, Veciana responded to an initial question on the Santiago attempt: ‘I didn’t go to Chile.’ But, on getting into his story of the events, he suddenly told everything about his stay in that country.

‘Yes, of course, I was in Chile,’ he exclaimed and added a strange revelation.

In a U.S. Diplomatic car… with weapons!
‘I left La Paz for Lima in a diplomatic car from the U.S. embassy with the weapons,’ Veciana suddenly admitted on pointing out that other U.S. agents left Lima for Santiago to join the plot.

‘We had rented the apartment in Huérfanos Street in Santiago where they (Domínguez and Rodríguez) were going to pass themselves off as simple journalists and we met up somewhere on the border of Chile and Peru and went from Arequipa, Tagna to Santiago.

‘While we were there, I had a minimum support base of three people who only knew what was being prepared when I needed a certain movement.’
Going back to the story of the idea to blame the planned assassination on the Soviet Union, Veciana gave his own version.

‘Somebody suggested to me: who’s going to be blamed for Castro’s death… Who’s going to make the public announcement? Let’s put the blame on the Soviet Union… That seemed like a good idea to me.’

‘The ‘Islander’ was told to go to a house just to ask for an address… ‘An alleged Soviet agent was living there.

‘He was a professor at the Central University of Caracas who was also a KGB agent… and there was a photographer who took photos so that if there were deaths on our account, it could be stated that these people had been working with the KGB.’

And what was happening, in the meantime, with Luis Posada Carriles?

‘Posada didn’t have anything to do with it,’ answered Veciana with something of scorn for the current hero of the Miami mafiosi. ‘He boasted a bit of his anti-Castro activity,’ he commented, noting that the CIA taught him to keep himself ‘compartmentalized.’

Protests at UK embassy in Tehran

0

Petrol bombs and rocks have been thrown at the British embassy in Tehran during a rally supporting the detention of 15 British sailors and marines.

About 200 people also threw firecrackers at the embassy on Sunday and called for the expulsion of Geoffrey Adams, Britain’s ambassador.

The protesters chanted “death to Britain” and “death to America” as they hurled stones into the embassy’s courtyard.

Britain’s foreign office said nobody was hurt and there was no damage.

‘Balanced stance’

Witnesses said demonstrators approached a barrier near the embassy and crossed into lines of police before being pushed back.

Manouchehr Mottaki, the Iranian foreign minister, said on state television his government was waiting for Britain to show a balanced stance over Iran’s legal demands.

The Iranians have demanded an apology which acknowledges the British troops illegally entered Iran’s territorial waters.

Britain denies the accusation and says the sailors were seized in Iraqi waters.

Iran also sent a letter to the British embassy in Tehran on Saturday complaining about shots fired by British troops near its consulate in the southern Iraqi city of Basra.

Iran previously accused British forces of surrounding the consulate on Thursday and firing into the air in a provocative act, which the British military has denied.

Basra shootings

Iran’s ISNA news agency on Sunday quoted a foreign ministry official as saying: “Iran asked Britain to prevent any such actions from happening again and asked for the British soldiers in Iraq to respect international regulations applied to diplomatic places.”

The British military said the shots heard came from a British convoy that was ambushed in the same street as the consulate in central Basra.

In his first commetns on the capture of the Royal Navy sailors George Bush, the US president, on Saturday demanded Iran release the sailors.

Bush said at a news conference: “I support the Blair government’s attempts to resolve this peacefully. And I support the prime minister when he made it clear there were no quid pro quos. The Iranians must give back the hostages.

“The British hostages issue is a serious issue because the Iranians took these people out of Iraqi water, and it’s inexcusable behaviour.”

Britain ‘arrogant’

Ali Reza, Al Jazeera’s correspondent in Tehran, said Bush’s use of the term “hostages” will likely further infuriate Mahmoud Ahmedinejad, Iran’s president, who has labelled Britain as “arrogant” for failing to apologise.

Reza said: “Demands from the European Union that they are freed immediately and unconditionally are only antagonising the situation”.

Mohammad Ali Hosseini, a spokesman for the Iranian foreign ministry, said: “The recent stance of the European Union officials regarding this issue will not help in solving the problem, but instead it will complicate the issue and might even make it last even longer.”

Iran’s ambassador to Russia has said the 15 could be tried for violating international law.

Britain said on Saturday that it had sent a letter of response to accusations of “trespassing” in Iranian waters.

Mediation offer

Terry Waite, who was held captive for almost five years in Lebanon the country’s civil war, has offered his services to help settle the issue.

Speaking to Al Jazeera on Saturday, Waite said: “I would hope that the Iranians would behave in the same courteous way to me as they’ve behaved before, would perhaps give me access to the people they’ve detained just to be assured of their welfare, so that that could be conveyed to their families, and begin to see if we can find a sensible way through this problem.”

Reza said Tehran maintains that what the sailors did was wrong, that they have confessed to their actions and foreign interference will achieve little to secure their release.

Al Jazeera and agencies

Briton tells of Guantanamo ordeal

0

A British resident released from Guantanamo Bay after being held for more than four years has said that the US failed to observe fair legal processes at the detention camp.

Al-Rawi said he had no chance to prove US allegations wrong whilst in detention in Guantanamo [AP]

Bisher al-Rawi, an Iraqi national and British resident, had been held at the US military base in Cuba since 2002, but was reunited with his family this weekend in England.

“Allegations are made against you that are laughably untrue, but you have no chance to prove them wrong. There is no trial, no fair legal process,” al-Rawi said in a statement on Sunday.

British officials investigated al-Rawi’s case after it emerged he had provided assistance to MI5, Britain’s domestic spy agency.

George Brent Mickum IV, a US lawyer representing al-Rawi, said his client had agreed to work for the British spy service in exchange for his release.

‘Suspicious’ equipment

Al-Rawi and Jamil el-Banna, another British resident, were alleged to have been associated with al-Qaeda through their connection with Abu Qatada, a London-based cleric.

The two were arrested in 2002 in Gambia while trying to return to Britain with electronic equipment that authorities described as “suspicious”.

Zachary Kaznetzelson, a senior counsel from the US law firm representing al-Rawi, told Al Jazeera: “He was actually arrested in [London’s] Gatwick airport. The device turned out to be a perfectly innocent battery charger.

“The police in London apologised and let him go but … the British had sent information to the Americans that he was travelling with a suspicious device.

“The British never then corrected the initial information, to say the device was innocent. That was the basis for [al-Rawi’s] original seizure.”

‘Rendition’ flight

Lawyers claim that after their arrests in Gambia, the men ended up in American custody.

Mickum said that the US Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) took them from Gambia on a “rendition flight” to Cairo, Egypt, where the plane re-fuelled.

They were then taken to a CIA facility in Afghanistan where they were interrogated as suspected terrorists.

Al-Rawi said in his statement that he and el-Banna were held in a CIA underground prison close to Kabul before being transferred to Guantanamo Bay.

‘Extreme treatment’

Kaznetzelson said al-Rawi had been subjected to extreme treatment while in detention.

“[Al-Rawi] has been held in Guantanamo Bay in total isolation — lights on, 24 hours a day, in a six-foot by eight-foot cell,” he said.

Al-Rawi said in his statement issued through Reprieve that he wanted to advocate for the remaining British citizens held in Guantanamo Bay.

“I hope everyone who believes in justice and the rule of law will join with me to work for the release of Jamil and the other British residents,” he said.

Britain has secured the release of all nine of its citizens who were held at Guantanamo but says the release of nine others who were resident in Britain but not nationals is not it’s responsibility.

Al Jazeera and agencies

Rosie O’Donnell 9/11 Conspiracy, Sheen To Narrate ‘Loose Change’

0

Rosie O’Donnell believes it and Charlie Sheen has agreed to narrate it. We are talking, of course, about the documentary about the 9/11 tragedy and Sheen feels it’s a “story that needs to be told.”

The actor will provide commentary to the film, Loose Change: Final Cut, which investigates conspiracy theories suggesting the US government played a role in the 9/11 terrorist attacks.

Sheen says, “It’s a story about the truth, and the truth needs to be exposed.

“It’s not just me, not just the Hollywood community, but the social community that is standing up saying, ‘What you have given us doesn’t make sense.’ We just want better answers.”

The ‘Two and a Half Men’ said in a radio interview last year that on 9/11/2001 he “was up early and we were gonna do a pre-shoot on Spin City, the show I used to do, I was watching the news and the north tower was burning. I saw the south tower hit live, that famous wide shot where it disappears behind the building and then we see the tremendous fireball.”

http://www.postchronicle.com/news/original/article_21272349.shtml

Ex-CIA- 911 Almost Certainly A Monstrous Series Of Lies

2

Paul Chen

David Ray Griffin is widely recognized as one of the leading spokespersons of the 9/11 truth movement. This is by virtue of his previous four books on the subject. Professor Griffin and a growing list of scholars, other researchers as well as diverse experts and activists, reject the official Islamist mastermind conspiracy theory about 9/11 advanced by Establishment interests.

Although the 9/11 truth movement was long ignored by the U.S. government and the mainstream media, recent polls have shown that (as Time magazine has acknowledged) the rejection of the official theory has become “a mainstream political phenomenon.”

It is not surprising, therefore, that the U.S. government and the Big Business controlled media have shifted tactics. No longer ignoring the 9/11 truth movement, they have released a flurry of stories and reports aimed at debunking it.

In David Ray Griffin’s new book entitled Debunking 9/11, shows that these attempts can themselves be easily debunked.

“Debunking 9/11 is a superb compendium of the strong body of evidence showing the official U.S. Government story of what happened on September 11, 2001 to be almost certainly a monstrous series of lies. Tragically, the entire course of U.S. foreign and domestic policies since that date has grown out of these almost certain falsehoods,” says Bill Christison, former senior official of the CIA.

Mr. Christison further indicates that, “This single book could (and should) provide the basis for the United Nations International Court of Justice, or some specially constituted global body (independent of the U.S.) to investigate with highest priority, and publicly report its findings about, the charge that unknown elements within the U.S. Government, and possibly some individuals elsewhere closely allied to the U.S., caused or contributed to causing the events of September 11 to happen.”

Besides demonstrating the pitiful failure of “Debunking 9/11 Myths” (published by Popular Mechanics and endorsed by Senator John McCain), Professor Griffin critically challenges recent reports and stories put out by the US Department of State, the National Institute of Standards and Technology, the New York Times, Vanity Fair, and Time magazine.

Professor Griffin also responds to criticisms of these efforts by left-leaning and Christian publications — which one might have expected to be supportive.

Throughout these critiques, Griffin shows that the charge that is regularly levelled against critics of the official theory — that they employ irrational and unscientific methods to defend conclusions based on faith — actually applies more fully to those who defend the official theory.

“Considering how the 9/11 tragedy has been used by the Bush administration to propel us into immoral wars again and again, I believe that David Ray Griffin’s provocative questions about 9/11 deserve to be investigated and addressed,” says Howard Zinn, author of A People’s History of the United States.

“Professor Griffin is the nemesis of the 9/11 cover-up. This new book destroys the credibility of the NIST and Popular Mechanics reports and annihilates his critics,” says Paul Craig Roberts, Assistant Secretary of the U.S. Treasury during the Reagan administration.

“David Ray Griffin hits another one out of the park by taking on the left gatekeepers and the mass media for the lies and cover-up called ‘the official story of 9/11/01,’ which is the greatest conspiracy theory ever perpetrated on the American public. I highly recommend this book for all thinking Americans,” further indicates Meria Heller, Producer Host of the Meria Heller Show http://www.meria.net/

This book, by debunking the most prevalent attempts to refute the evidence cited by the 9/11 truth movement, shows that this movement’s central claim — that 9/11 was an inside job — remains the only explanation that fits the facts.

-###-

April 1, 2007 Make comments about this article in The Canadian Blog. David Ray Griffin is professor of philosophy of religion and theology, emeritus, at Claremont School of Theology and Claremont Graduate University in Claremont, California, where he remains a co-director of the Center for Process Studies. His 30 books include The New Pearl Harbor: Disturbing Questions about the Bush Administration and 9/11 (2004), The 9/11 Commission Report: Omissions and Distortions (2005), 9/11 and American Empire (2006, ed. with Peter Dale Scott), and Christian Faith and the Truth behind 9/11 (2006)

George Orwell, Big Brother is watching your house

0

The Big Brother nightmare of George Orwell’s 1984 has become a reality – in the shadow of the author’s former London home.

It may have taken a little longer than he predicted, but Orwell’s vision of a society where cameras and computers spy on every person’s movements is now here.

Foresight: The cameras crowd George Orwell's former London home

Foresight: The cameras crowd George Orwell’s former London home

According to the latest studies, Britain has a staggering 4.2million CCTV cameras – one for every 14 people in the country – and 20 per cent of cameras globally. It has been calculated that each person is caught on camera an average of 300 times daily.

Use of spy cameras in modern-day Britain is now a chilling mirror image of Orwell’s fictional world, created in the post-war Forties in a fourth-floor flat overlooking Canonbury Square in Islington, North London.

On the wall outside his former residence – flat number 27B – where Orwell lived until his death in 1950, an historical plaque commemorates the anti-authoritarian author. And within 200 yards of the flat, there are 32 CCTV cameras, scanning every move.

Orwell’s view of the tree-filled gardens outside the flat is under 24-hour surveillance from two cameras perched on traffic lights.

The flat’s rear windows are constantly viewed from two more security cameras outside a conference centre in Canonbury Place.

In a lane, just off the square, close to Orwell’s favourite pub, the Compton Arms, a camera at the rear of a car dealership records every person entering or leaving the pub.

Within a 200-yard radius of the flat, there are another 28 CCTV cameras, together with hundreds of private, remote-controlled security cameras used to scrutinise visitors to homes, shops and offices.

The message is reminiscent of a 1949 poster to mark the launch of Orwell’s 1984: ‘Big Brother is Watching You’.

In the Shriji grocery store in Canonbury Place, three cameras focus on every person in the shop. Owner Minesh Amin explained: ‘They are for our security and safety. Without them, people would steal from the shop. Although this is a nice area, there are always bad people who cause trouble by stealing.’

Three doors away, in the dry-cleaning shop run by Malik Zafar, are another two CCTV cameras.

‘I need to know who is coming into my shop,’ explained Mr Zafar, who spent £400 on his security system.

This week, the Royal Academy of Engineering (RAE) produced a report highlighting the astonishing numbers of CCTV cameras in the country and warned how such ‘Big Brother tactics’ could eventually put lives at risk.

The RAE report warned any security system was ‘vulnerable to abuse, including bribery of staff and computer hackers gaining access to it’. One of the report’s authors, Professor Nigel Gilbert, claimed the numbers of CCTV cameras now being used is so vast that further installations should be stopped until the need for them is proven.

One fear is a nationwide standard for CCTV cameras which would make it possible for all information gathered by individual cameras to be shared – and accessed by anyone with the means to do so.

The RAE report follows a warning by the Government’s Information Commissioner Richard Thomas that excessive use of CCTV and other information-gathering was ‘creating a climate of suspicion’.

Source

Listen Up, Mr. President

0

Fred Kaplan

Two myths have sprung up around the House and Senate bills that require President Bush to withdraw U.S. forces from Iraq. One is that he would have to pull out all the troops. The other is that, if Bush vetoes the final bill (as he is nearly certain to do), the war–and all other military activities–would grind to a halt, leaving the troops in the lurch, bereft of basic ammo and supplies.

Both myths are false, the product of spin.

The Pentagon has several ways to reroute money if a veto locks the emergency-spending bill in temporary limbo while Congress goes on Easter recess. And both chambers’ bills leave leeway for quite a lot of U.S. troops to stay in Iraq indefinitely–though, true, there would be fewer than there are now, and they would perform less-ambitious missions.

Beyond this, the House version of the bill offers a political-military strategy toward Iraq that the White House might do well to emulate–as a general approach, if not in all its details.

First, let’s deal with the consequences of a veto. The congressional demands for a troop withdrawal are merely sections of the much larger bill to provide $96 billion in emergency spending for military operations in Iraq and Afghanistan. A veto would kill not only the language on withdrawal but also the $96 billion.

Administration officials invoke the time when President Bill Clinton vetoed the Republican Congress’ budget and House Speaker Newt Gingrich walked away, forcing the federal government to shut down–a series of events that politically tarnished the Republicans in the long run. Officials warn that the same thing will happen to the congressional Democrats if they force Bush to shut down the war.

That’s not going to happen. A story in today’s edition of the Hill outlines several ways the Pentagon could still get funds to the troops. Secretary of Defense Robert Gates could “reprogram” money from one account to another. He could shift “unobligated balances” from the operations and maintenance accounts. If worst comes to worst, he could invoke the Civil War-era Feed and Forage Act, which allows him to allocate money for the troops’ basic provisions without congressional approval.

Finally, it seems the Pentagon’s war chest won’t go bare until the beginning of June. If Bush vetoes the emergency-spending bill and Congress goes on recess till mid-April, it will be an administrative hassle but not a disaster.

But more to the point, what’s in these bills? Exactly what would they force Bush to do?

The Senate bill does take out the cleaver. No later than 120 days after the bill’s enactment, the president “shall commence the phased redeployment of United States forces from Iraq,” with “the goal of redeploying” all combat troops by March 31, 2008.

Even so, there are some loopholes. First, there are those two words I’ve italicized above: The March 2008 deadline is put forth as not the requirement but rather “the goal.”

Second, the bill allows “a limited number” of combat forces to stay “that are essential for the following purposes: (A) Protecting United States and coalition personnel and infrastructure. (B) Training and equipping Iraqi forces. (C) Conducting targeted counter-terrorism operations.”

Force-protection, infrastructure, training, counterterrorism–these missions could justify keeping at least 50,000 American troops in Iraq for a long, long time.

The clear intent of this provision–and this is true in the House bill as well–is not so much to end the Iraq war but to return to the course that U.S. commanders were taking late last year, before Bush ordered the “surge” in force levels and shifted to a more active counterinsurgency plan.

Continue…

US rejects Iran captives exchange

0

US officials have ruled out a deal to exchange 15 Royal Navy personnel captured in the Gulf for five Iranians seized by American forces in Iraq. Faye Turney said her captors had been 'friendly'State department spokesman Sean McCormack rejected suggestions that a swap could be made.

The five, believed to be members of Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, were seized in January in the Iraqi city of Irbil.

Britain denies Iran’s claims that the UK crew was in its waters when seized on 23 March.

The five Iranians were captured in a raid along with equipment which the Americans say shows clear Iranian links to networks supplying Iraqi insurgents with technology and weapons.

US officials have condemned Iran’s actions and publicly supported the UK.

Mr McCormack said: “The international community is not going to stand for the Iranian government trying to use this issue to distract the rest of the world from the situation in which Iran finds itself vis-a-vis its nuclear programme.”

Meanwhile, Iran’s ambassador to Russia has said the UK captives could face trial for violating international law.

“It is possible that the British soldiers who entered into Iranian waters will go on trial for taking this illegal action,” Gholamreza Ansari told Russian television channel Vesti-24, according to Iran’s IRNA news agency.

Earlier, Prime Minister Tony Blair condemned Iran for “parading” the UK crew on television in a way which would only “enhance people’s sense of disgust”.

In what appeared to be an edited broadcast on an Iranian channel, sailor Nathan Thomas Summers said: “I would like to apologise for entering your waters without permission.”

‘Sacrificed’

He was shown alongside two colleagues, including Leading Seaman Faye Turney, 26, from Shropshire, who was broadcast apologising to Iran earlier in the week.

A third letter, allegedly from LS Turney, was released on Friday in which she said she had been “sacrificed” to UK and US government policy.

The BBC has been able to confirm the names of six of the 15 captured sailors and marines.

Along with LS Turney and Nathan Summers, who is from Cornwall, they are Paul Barton from Southport, Danny Masterton from Ayrshire, Joe Tindall from south London and Adam Sperry from Leicester.

European Union foreign ministers, meeting in Bremen, Germany, called for “the immediate and unconditional release” of the sailors and expressed “unconditional support” for Britain’s position.

UK Foreign Secretary Margaret Beckett described the latest footage as “quite appalling” and “blatant propaganda”.

She also disclosed there was nothing in a formal letter from the Iranians to the UK that suggested they were looking for a solution to “this difficult situation”.

‘Not harmed’

In the latest video, Nathan Summers says: “Since we’ve been arrested in Iran our treatment has been very friendly.

“We have not been harmed at all. They’ve looked after us really well.

“The food they’ve been serving us is good and I am grateful that no harm has come to us.

“I would just like to apologise for entering your waters without permission. And that happened back in 2004, and the government promised that it wouldn’t happen again.”

BBC defence correspondent Paul Wood said last year US President Bush gave a secret order that Iranian agents believed working in Iraq should be captured or killed because of the coalition’s belief that Iran was “fermenting trouble in Iraq”.

He said it meant there was a “compelling theory” that the UK sailors were captured as a result of an order “from the highest levels of Iranian government” which would make it a “very different game” for the Foreign Office to sort out.

Earlier, the UN Security Council called on Tehran to allow the UK access to the personnel and urges an “early resolution”, including release of the crew, but stopped short of “deploring” Iran’s action, as requested by the UK.

The Britons, based on HMS Cornwall, were seized by Revolutionary Guards as they returned from searching a vessel in the northern Gulf.

http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6512927.stm

Terror suspect alleges torture for confession

0

Lolita C. Baldor

A suspected Saudi terrorist testified at a military hearing that he was tortured into confessing he was involved in the bombing of the USS Cole, according to a Pentagon transcript released yesterday.

Abd al-Rahim al-Nashiri, a Saudi national of Yemeni descent, said he made up stories that tied him to the 2000 Cole attack, which killed 17 US sailors and nearly succeeded in sinking the $1 billion destroyer in Yemen’s Aden Harbor .

“From the time I was arrested five years ago, they have been torturing me. It happened during interviews. One time they tortured me one way, and another time they tortured me in a different way,” Nashiri said, according to the transcript. “I just said those things to make the people happy. They were very happy when I told them those things.”

Portions of the 36-page hearing transcript were redacted, and the transcript does not include any details of the torture Nashiri said took place over five years. Pentagon spokesman Bryan Whitman said that any allegations of torture would be investigated and that sections were blacked out of the transcript because of national security reasons.

Nashiri is one of 14 so-called high-value detainees who were moved to the base at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba, in September from secret CIA prisons abroad. The military is conducting hearings for the 14 to determine whether they are “enemy combatants” who can be held indefinitely and prosecuted for war crimes.

Human rights groups have argued for years that the CIA’s detention and interrogation techniques amount to torture. The International Committee of the Red Cross has interviewed the 14 detainees.

In a confidential report that has not been publicly distributed, the Red Cross said the 14 prisoners described highly abusive interrogation methods, especially when techniques such as sleep deprivation and forced standing were used in combination. None of the detainees’ accounts has been verified.

US officials long have said the CIA program is for the most dangerous detainees, and the CIA says its officers do not torture.

According to US intelligence, Nashiri is the suspected mastermind of the Cole bombing, and was Al Qaeda’s operations chief in the Arabian Peninsula until he was caught in 2002. Nashiri, 41, was allegedly tasked by Osama bin Laden to attack the Cole.

In the transcript, Nashiri says he met with bin Laden many times and received as much as a half million dollars from the terror leader. The money, he said, was for “personal expenses,” including for marriage and business deals.

Nashiri said he told interrogators that he spent some of the money on the explosives used to bomb the Cole, but in reality he said he gave the explosives to friends to help dig wells. He acknowledged that he confessed to be involved in several other terror plots in order to get the torture to stop — including the 2002 bombing of the French oil tanker Limburg, plans to bomb American ships in the Gulf, a plan to hijack a plane and crash it into a ship, and claims that bin Laden had a nuclear bomb.

In one instance, he said, he took money to buy a boat and develop a fishing business, and bin Laden later told him it could be used for a bombing. Nashiri said he ended the project and was not involved when bin Laden later used it “as a military tool.”

In the Limburg attack, suicide bombers rammed an explosive-laden boat into the tanker, killing a Bulgarian crew member and spilling 90,000 barrels of oil into the Gulf of Aden.

Speaking through a translator, Nashiri said he knew many of the people involved in attacks, including on the Cole, but said he is not a member of Al Qaeda . Asked whether he is an enemy combatant, Nashiri said he does not consider Americans his enemies.

But, he said, “Do you call anybody who ask you to leave from the Gulf as an enemy combatant? . . . Everybody in the world is telling you to leave.” He said he is one of those people who wants the United States to leave the Gulf.

In a hearing at Guantanamo Bay on March 20, Mohammed Nazir Bin Lep, a Malaysian also known as Lillie, declined to attend. But in a written statement, he denied allegations against him, principally that he helped transfer funds for the 2003 bombing at a Jakarta hotel that killed 12.

“It is true I facilitated the movement of money . . . but I did not know what it was going to be used for,” he said.

UK writes to Iran over troops

0

Al Jazeera and agencies

Britain has responded by diplomatic note to Iran’s capture of 15 British naval personnel last week in the Gulf, Margaret Beckett, the British foreign secretary, has said.

Iranian television has aired footage of 'confessions' by some of the seized personnel [AFP]

“We had a diplomatic note and we have made our response,” she said on the sidelines of an EU meeting in Bremen, Germany, on Saturday.

“I think everyone regrets that this position has arisen. What we want is a way out of it, we want it peacefully and we want it as soon as possible,” Beckett said.

“We would like to be told where our personnel are, we would like to be given access to them, but we want it resolved,” she added.

Apology demanded

Also on Saturday, Iran’s president said the British governnment was not following “the legal and logical way” over the case.

“After the arrest of these people, the British government, instead of apologising and expressing regret, over the action taken, started to claim that we are in their debt and shouted in different international councils,” Mahmoud Ahmadinejad was quoted as saying by the state radio report.

“But this is not the legal and logical way for this issue.”

A diplomatic note from Iran to Britain released on Friday condemned the “illegal act” by British naval staff and called on the UK to accept responsibilty for the standoff.

Also on Friday, Iranian television broadcast footage of three of the British naval personnel in which one of them apologised for entering Iranian waters without permission.

Britain has insisted that the naval personnel were in Iraqi waters when they were detained.

Trial denied

Iran’s ambassador to Moscow has meanwhile denied saying that the British naval personnel held by Iran may face trial for illegally entering Iranian waters.

Gholam Reza Ansari said a Russian television station had mistranslated his remarks.

“The network has made a mistake in translating the comments about detained British personnel and has reported the possibility of their trial,” he told the Iranian state news agency IRNA.

Ansari was earlier quoted by IRNA as telling Russian television channel Vesti-24: “It is possible that the British soldiers who entered into Iranian waters will go on trial.”

“The legal phase concerning these British soldiers has started and if charges against them are proven, they will be punished,” he said.

Mediation offer

Terry White, a former British hostage who was held captive for almost five years in Lebanon from 1987 to 1991, has offered to mediate in resolving the crisis.

Speaking to Al Jazeera, White expressed his readiness to visit Iran to persuade Tehran free the seized personnel.

Giuliani Testified He Was Briefed on Kerik in ’00

0

WILLIAM K. RASHBAUM

Rudolph W. Giuliani told a grand jury that his former chief investigator remembered having briefed him on some aspects of Bernard B. Kerik‘s relationship with a company suspected of ties to organized crime before Mr. Kerik’s appointment as New York City police commissioner, according to court records.

Mr. Giuliani, testifying last year under oath before a Bronx grand jury investigating Mr. Kerik, said he had no memory of the briefing, but he did not dispute that it had taken place, according to a transcript of his testimony.

Mr. Giuliani’s testimony amounts to a significantly new version of what information was probably before him in the summer of 2000 as he was debating Mr. Kerik’s appointment as the city’s top law enforcement officer. Mr. Giuliani had previously said that he had never been told of Mr. Kerik’s entanglement with the company before promoting him to the police job or later supporting his failed bid to be the nation’s homeland security secretary.

In his testimony, given in April 2006, Mr. Giuliani indicated that he must have simply forgotten that he had been briefed on one or more occasions as part of the background investigation of Mr. Kerik before his appointment to the police post.

He said he learned only in late 2004 that the briefing or briefings had occurred, after the city’s investigation commissioner reviewed his own records from 2000. To this day, Mr. Giuliani testified, he has no specific recollection of any briefing or the details of what he was told. But he said he felt comforted because the chief investigator had cleared Mr. Kerik to be promoted.

“He testified fully and cooperatively,” a statement from Mr. Giuliani’s consulting firm said of the former mayor’s grand jury appearance. The statement added: “Mayor Giuliani has admitted it was a mistake to recommend Bernie Kerik for D.H.S. and he has assumed responsibility for it.”

Mr. Kerik pleaded guilty last summer to improperly allowing the company, Interstate Industrial Corporation, or its subsidiaries, to do $165,000 worth of free renovations on his Bronx apartment in late 1999 and 2000. The company has denied paying for the work, and has disputed any association with organized crime. But the two brothers who run it have been indicted in the Bronx on charges they lied under oath about their dealings with Mr. Kerik.

There is no evidence that Mr. Giuliani knew about the apartment renovation before promoting Mr. Kerik to police commissioner. But the top investigator who briefed Mr. Giuliani in 2000, the transcript shows, was aware that Mr. Kerik’s brother and a close friend had been hired by an affiliate of the company, which for years had been struggling to secure a city license.

For Mr. Giuliani, who is seeking the Republican nomination for president and who has done well in early polls, his history with Mr. Kerik looms as a likely issue in the campaign. His own aides have anticipated that questions are likely to arise about Mr. Giuliani’s judgment in, among other things, promoting Mr. Kerik for one of the country’s most important national security posts.

Now, Mr. Giuliani, whose private company provides background checks for companies as part of its services, may have to explain his response to the information that was provided to him in 2000.

His company’s statement yesterday said that Mr. Giuliani was not concerned that issues surrounding Mr. Kerik would become a liability to his presidential campaign.

The transcript of Mr. Giuliani’s testimony was not given to The New York Times by any rival campaign.

In his testimony, Mr. Giuliani suggests he might have been presented with only limited information about Mr. Kerik’s issues. And he said the city investigators who did the background check on Mr. Kerik ultimately cleared him to be hired as police commissioner.

Mr. Giuliani testified that the background investigators’ approval might explain why he, and aides who were involved, could not recollect any briefing, according to the 101-page transcript of his April 20, 2006, testimony.

“We may have filed it away somewhere that it wasn’t as significant,” Mr. Giuliani testified. Mr. Giuliani said Edward J. Kuriansky, the commissioner of the city’s Department of Investigation, had also forgotten about the briefings until he checked his records days after Mr. Kerik’s withdrawal from consideration as homeland security secretary in late 2004.

Mr. Kuriansky did not return phone calls seeking his account of what he remembered telling Mr. Giuliani.

According to the grand jury transcript, a prosecutor for the Bronx district attorney’s office told Mr. Giuliani that Mr. Kuriansky and his investigators had compiled a considerable body of knowledge about Mr. Kerik’s relationship with the company before his August 2000 appointment as police commissioner.

Mr. Kerik, who was then the city’s commissioner of correction, had himself come forward months earlier to tell the investigators that the company had recently given jobs to his brother, Donald, as well as the best man from his wedding, Lawrence Ray, and that he himself had interceded on the company’s behalf as it sought a city license, the prosecutor told Mr. Giuliani.

Mr. Kerik even told the investigators that his friend Mr. Ray had recently been indicted on federal criminal charges, along with Edward Garafola, a reputed Gambino soldier, the brother-in-law of Salvatore Gravano, the former underboss known as Sammy the Bull.

An Interstate affiliate was at that time seeking a license to operate a waste transfer station on Staten Island. City officials refused to license the transfer station because of the organized crime allegations, which stemmed in part from the fact that the transfer station was bought in 1996 from two organized crime figures.

Interstate is a construction company based in New Jersey that undertakes large public and private projects in the metropolitan area.

The company has long denied the accusation of mob ties, and New Jersey regulators issued a license to the company in 2004, allowing it to do construction work on Atlantic City casinos, after a lengthy review of the same material. That license was suspended after the owners were charged with perjury last summer.

By 2000, Mr. Kerik had known or worked for Mr. Giuliani for close to a decade. Mr. Kerik first came to know Mr. Giuliani when he provided security during his second mayoral campaign. Mr. Giuliani later became godfather to two of Mr. Kerik’s children and promoted him to lead the Correction Department. Mr. Kerik was one of two candidates Mr. Giuliani seriously considered to succeed Howard Safir as police commissioner as Mr. Giuliani neared the final year of his administration.

Mr. Kerik served in that post for 16 months, and was at Mr. Giuliani’s side on the morning of Sept. 11 when the World Trade Center collapsed.

In their questioning of Mr. Giuliani last April, Bronx prosecutors sought repeatedly to determine how much the mayor remembered being told about Mr. Kerik’s problems, and what, if anything, he had done about the information.

Throughout his questioning, Mr. Giuliani said he remembered close to nothing about what he had been told about the broader background investigation of Mr. Kerik or what he had done after hearing it. He testified that he remembered being told something about Mr. Kerik’s experience as a security consultant in Saudi Arabia, but little else.

He testified, as well, that he could not remember if he had ever discussed the issues with Mr. Kerik directly.

At one point, a senior Bronx prosecutor, Stephen R. Bookin, asked Mr. Giuliani, “As you sit here today, your testimony is, and correct me if I am wrong, that you don’t recall ever being told that a close friend of your correction commissioner had been indicted in a federal case?”

Mr. Giuliani responded: “I don’t recall that until 2004. I can’t tell you that it wasn’t, but I don’t – I don’t – I don’t remember.”

The prosecutor also explored whether Mr. Giuliani would find it odd that the city’s top investigator, with whom he met almost daily, would not have fully shared what appeared to be rather alarming information with him.

“Do you know of any reason why Mr. Kuriansky, who met with you every day that you were in town, part of your core group as you put it, would not have briefed you on these facts?” the prosecutors asked.

Mr. Giuliani, in the end, replied that the facts about Mr. Kerik might not have been presented to him in as much detail and with as much emphasis back in 2000.

The prosecutor then asked Mr. Giuliani whether, if the information had been presented to him with as much emphasis, he would have appointed Mr. Kerik police commissioner.

“If he told it to me the way you described it to me, no,” Mr. Giuliani replied. “If he had told it to me in a different way because, maybe he didn’t know all of the facts, or had come to a different conclusion about the facts, then maybe I would have – I can’t tell you that.”

Mr. Giuliani was a key backer of Mr. Kerik when President Bush nominated him to be homeland security secretary in December 2004. Mr. Kerik withdrew his name a week later, citing possible tax and immigration problems involving his family’s nanny.

Several newspapers at the time were already pursuing stories about his relationship with Interstate, which were published in the succeeding days. It is unclear to what extent Mr. Kerik’s relationship with the company was made clear to the White House before his nomination.

But Mr. Giuliani testified that Mr. Kerik had assured him that he had briefed presidential aides about the matter.

Mr. Kerik also assured him, Mr. Giuliani testified, that there was no reason for concern when questions later arose as to whether Interstate had paid for the renovations to his apartment.

“He told me that Interstate didn’t do the work, that another company had done it legitimately, that he had the checks to show he paid for it,” Mr. Giuliani said.

Mr. Giuliani testified that he took Mr. Kerik’s word for it and did not ask to see the canceled checks.

Last year, when Mr. Kerik admitted in court that the renovations had actually been largely underwritten by Interstate or its subsidiaries, Mr. Giuliani released a statement that displayed no irritation at having been misled.

“Bernard Kerik has acknowledged his violations,” the statement said, “but this should be evaluated in light of his service to the United States of America and the city of New York.”

Obama: Bush not respecting Constitution

0

Democratic presidential candidate Barack Obama on Friday accused President Bush of failing to respect the Constitution amid the uproar over the firing of eight federal prosecutors.The Illinois senator also took a swipe at embattled Attorney General Alberto Gonzales. Obama has joined several other Democrats in calling for Gonzales to resign.

“I was a constitutional law professor, which means unlike the current president I actually respect the Constitution,” Obama told an audience at a campaign fundraiser. “I believe in an attorney general who is actually the people’s lawyer, not the president’s lawyer.”

Obama’s remarks drew one of the most enthusiastic responses in a speech often interrupted by applause.

Gonzales acknowledged Friday there is confusion about his role in firing the eight U.S. attorneys last fall. His former chief of staff, Kyle Sampson, told Congress Thursday that prosecutors put on a list to be fired got there in part because they were not deemed “loyal Bushies.”

During his stop in Florida, Obama held a brief meeting with Democratic lawmakers and then spoke for about three minutes to more than 100 college students who held an impromptu rally outside an IMAX theater where he held his fundraiser.

“I just hope that everyone here has that same sense of urgency that I do,” Obama told the students. “I hope the young people in particular use this campaign as a vehicle to get involved and engaged. This is one of those rare moments where we could change history, and those moments don’t come that often. So I hope that all of you take advantage of it.” POLITICS

Inside the fundraiser, which was a sellout at 640 tickets and raised about $150,000, people packed a room and balcony.

Obama told the group that he can unite the country, and a united country will bring change.

“But there are going to be times when I’m tired, there are going to be times when I’m weary, there are going to be times when I make mistakes, but none of that matters if we have millions of voices who are coming together insisting on a new America,” he said.

At the Capitol, Obama signed books for a handful of lawmakers before inching his way through a packed room.

“One of the things that I’ve come to realize is how much I learn in the state Legislature, because there’s very few jobs that give you a better sense of the state and the people in it _ the struggles they’re going through every day,” Obama said. “It was that experience in the Legislature that convinced me that politics can be a noble calling.”

http://www.msnbc.msn.com/id/17876280/

CCTV On School Buses

0

Pam Caulfield and Michael Meaney

Pupils could be under increased surveillance if a proposed school transport shake-up goes ahead.

CCTV could be set for Leicester school buses Leicestershire County Council is looking at the idea of more CCTV on school buses, as part of a review of transport spending. The Council is consulting on proposals to reduce the £9 million per year it currently spends on home to school and college transport – £7 million of which comes from Council Tax.

If the proposals are approved it could include portable CCTV sets, which can be switched to buses on different routes.

Ivan Ould, the Cabinet’s member for Children and Young People’s Services, said: “Although we don’t have a major problem with misbehaviour on school buses, some parents and pupils have expressed concern about it.“These proposals will help to tackle the issue and may well help to encourage more pupils to use school transport.

“I hope that as many Leicestershire residents as possible express their views on these proposals.”

Police sought terror suspect before plot

0

Caroline Gammell

Police were hunting one of the alleged July 21 terrorists six months before he tried to detonate explosives on London’s transport network, a court heard yesterday.

Muktar Said Ibrahim, 29, was sent two letters by the police in February 2005 saying they were seeking his arrest for refusing to surrender bail.

The alleged bus bomber had been charged under the Public Order Act for threatening or abusive behaviour after a run-in with police in October 2004.

He and two others had been distributing Islamic material outside Debenhams on Oxford Street, Woolwich Crown Court heard.

Ibrahim was due to appear before magistrates in December but did not turn up because he had flown to Pakistan, the jury was told.

In February, the Metropolitan police wrote him two letters, urging him to hand himself in.

The first, dated February 14 2005, said Ibrahim was being sought for arrest because he had not surrendered bail.

The letter added: “Come to us before we come to you.”

A second identical letter was sent on February 28. Both were addressed to his flat in Farleigh Road, Stoke Newington, north London. Ibrahim did not get back to the UK until March.

But junior prosecution counsel Max Hill told the jury that on his return from Pakistan Ibrahim spent most of his time at the house of co-defendant Yassin Omar.

The court heard the letters were found in the bins at Omar’s flat in Curtis House, New Southgate, north London – site of the alleged “bomb factory”.

Ibrahim and Omar, 26, are among six defendants accused of carrying out an extremist Muslim plot.

Mr Hill accused Ibrahim of intentionally staying away from Farleigh Road because “you knew the police were on to you.”

He said Ibrahim was in the midst of putting together his plot to detonate a number of rucksack devices across the capital.

“You did not return to Farleigh Road because to do so would be to run the risk that you would be arrested and not be able to carry out the plan you hatched.”

“No,” Ibrahim replied.

The defendant insisted he contacted the police once he received the letters to arrange a court date, but never heard back.

Mr Hill said: “On your return to the UK you settled on nothing less than a mission which would lead you and the others to martyrdom.”

“No, that’s not true at all,” he said.

“In order for you to carry out your mission you had to make sure that the authorities did not catch you at Farleigh Road,” said Mr Hill.

“No, that’s not true because I was claiming housing benefit,” the defendant replied.

The jury heard details of Ibrahim’s trip to Pakistan at the end of 2004.

Armed with £2,000, he flew to Islamabad with two other men on December 11, but all three were stopped en route by police at London’s Heathrow airport.

The jury has heard how Ibrahim told the officers they were going to a wedding and then on holiday and did not expect to be longer than 20 days.

When searched, one of his companions was found carrying £2,200 in cash, a military first aid kit in camouflage packaging and part of a first aid manual on how to treat ballistic injuries.

When asked about the contents, Ibrahim said: “This kind of stuff comes in handy when you are on holiday.”

Mr Hill replied: “Really? You are in need of a manual telling you how to treat ballistic injuries when you are going to get married?”

Before going, Ibrahim and the two men had a leaving party at the defendant’s flat in Farleigh Road.

The barrister said the gathering was “more to do with a jihadi sending off party.

“It was a collection of like-minded extremist individuals dressed in Muslim clothing, sporting long beards who came to wish you and your two companions well in your determined trip of jihad.”

“No,” Ibrahim insisted.

Mr Hill said Ibrahim was not going to Pakistan for a wedding or a holiday but wanted to stay and fight.

“Your intention was not to return (to this country) but to become a jihadi and die in the attempt.”

“That’s not true,” the defendant replied.

Ibrahim and Omar are accused alongside Hussain Osman, 28, of no fixed address, Ramzi Mohammed, 25, of North Kensington, west London, Adel Yahya, 24, of High Road, Tottenham, north London and Manfo Kwaku Asiedu, 33, of no fixed address.

All six deny conspiracy to cause explosions likely to endanger life.

UK headed for prison meltdown

0

Duncan Campbell and Alan Travis

The former head of the prison service has warned that up to 100,000 people could be in jail by the end of the decade unless drastic and immediate action is taken by the government.The prediction from Martin Narey came as the prison population in England and Wales reached an all-time high yesterday of more than 80,300, with only four spare places left in emergency police cells anywhere in the country. The crisis meant prison service officials were, for the first time, forced to turn to cells in magistrates courts with hard benches, no beds and no toilets. The move had near disastrous consequences. Securicor officers were asked to volunteer to look after four prisoners held overnight at a magistrates court in north London. One of the prisoners made a suicide attempt which was only prevented at the last minute.Speaking to the Guardian, Mr Narey warned that Britain is heading towards US levels of imprisonment.

“I wouldn’t be surprised at all if by 2010 there were 100,000 people in prison. I think there is every chance that, at the end of the decade, we will look back nostalgically at a figure of 80,000. The US experience shows there is no end to this.”

He added that about 6,000 people were locked up at any one time who are “profoundly mentally ill”.

The former director of the prison service was speaking as part of a Guardian investigation into the huge rise in the prison population over the last decade.

David Blunkett also admitted his regrets that, as home secretary, he was unable to convince judges of the importance of non-custodial sentences for minor offences.

“If I have a big regret about the three and half years as home secretary, it is that I never quite got that message across. Judges used to say to me that ‘there is a contradiction here; you keep saying you want more community sentences and less short prison sentences but then in the next breath you’re talking about tough sentences and life meaning life.’ They are entirely compatible as far as I’m concerned… I never wanted them to go soft but to be consistent.”

A former prison governor, Stephen Rimmer, now director of strategy at the Metropolitan police, suggested that only another Strangeways riot might gain the public’s attention on the issue of overcrowding.

Yesterday the jail population in England and Wales reached an all-time high of 80,316, including 397 locked overnight in police cells under Operation Safeguard.

But, with impending local elections, the home secretary John Reid is firmly against any new early release programme.

Ministers are in the process of building 10,000 extra prison places with “temporary custodial modules” being rushed into existing prison perimeters to create 700 more places this year. The bulk of the extra places, however, are several years behind Mr Narey’s prediction.

Lord Falconer, who will take over responsibility for prisons in May when they pass into the control of the newly created justice ministry, said yesterday the role and limits of incarceration needed to be clarified and acknowledged the need to manage the “burgeoning prison population” better. He refused to rule out a new early release programme and said he would consider legislation requiring judges to consider prison overcrowding when sentencing.

The last three years has seen a 26% increase in the number of children and young people criminalised and seven times as much is spent on youth custody as on prevention schemes. We lock up 23 children per 100,000 population, compared with six in France, two in Spain and 0.2 in Finland.

“Another bacon burger, anyone?”

1

Jason Miller

“If my competitor were drowning, I’d stick a hose in his mouth and turn on the water.”–Ray Kroc“….a funny, jowly, canny, barbarous guy who lives in a multimillion-dollar condo on Park Avenue in Manhattan and conveys himself about the planet in a corporate jet and a private yacht. At sixty-seven, he is unrepentant in the face of criticism. He describes himself as a “tough man in a tough business”…..”The animal-rights people,” he once said, “want to impose a vegetarian’s society on the U.S. Most vegetarians I know are neurotic.””

–Jeff Tietz’s description of meat processing magnate, Joseph Luter III (from his Rolling Stone article, “Boss Hog”)

Despite the obvious signs that our nation is declining rapidly and despite the increasing global animosity against us for our greed, excesses, hypocrisy, and belligerence, we US Americans are defiantly “staying the course”. Neither harsh reality nor the ire of the world community has shaken our foundations. Mouthing hollow platitudes about freedom and liberty while supporting a war machine perpetrating genocide in

Iraq, we mindlessly buttress a socioeconomic system some of history’s most notable fascists would envy.

While many of us mollify ourselves with the belief that the malevolence of the Bush administration is merely an anomaly in American government, the reality is that the current administration has simply become emboldened enough to dispose of the false mask of benevolence worn tightly by its predecessors.

Let’s face it. We are obsessed with American Capitalism, a system so rotten that it actually encourages, enables, legalizes, and richly rewards pathological degrees of narcissism, greed, competitiveness, and ruthlessness. While millions suffer and die because of us, we cocoon ourselves in impenetrable bubbles of denial and continue feeding our pathetic addictions to fast food, gas guzzling automobiles, American Idol, military domination, video games, the NFL, “righteous” Christianity, and the acquisition of material possessions. Yet we actually expect human beings who are not mentally incapacitated to believe that the

United States is a beacon of hope for humanity on a noble quest to spread “freedom and democracy”?

How could one maintain a straight face while asserting that a

Constitutional Republic (alleged to be premised on Enlightened principles) could co-exist with such a deeply depraved socioeconomic system?

We’re talking about the system that made the “successes” of men like Ray Kroc and Joseph Luter III possible. Those eager to assuage their guilt or avoid the mental exercise of critical thinking can simply embrace the inane mythology that those who rise to the top of the economic hierarchy in the

United States are harmlessly enjoying the fruits of their labor they so richly deserve. Yet for truth seekers, this conclusion reeks with a stench that rivals the pungent stink of Boss Hog’s factory farms.

Since the meat industrial complex represents such a rich example of the abject inhumanity of American Capitalism, corporations like Smithfield Foods and McDonald’s were so instrumental in the growth of this complex, and men like Kroc and Luter profited so handsomely from such a massive entity’s existence, let’s scrutinize the devastation this abominable entity is wreaking upon our fur, feather and scale-bearing cousins, the Earth, and humanity.

According to muck-raking journalist Eric Schlosser, US Americans spent over $110 billion on fast food in the year 2000, more than they did on higher education. Aside from being a tragic indicator of our grossly misplaced priorities, this shocking statistic is an indictment of McDonald’s and its ilk. Ubiquity, affordability, convenience, laboratory-developed great taste, and a capacity to manipulate public opinion that puts Bernays to shame enable fast food giants to spread like noxious weeds, annihilating hapless “mom and pop” competitors like so much “collateral damage” in a US imperialistic invasion.

And what red-blooded American would leave the drive-thru without a Big Mac, chicken nuggets, sausage biscuit, bacon burger, fish sandwich, or some other delightful victual containing meat?

To keep up with the sky-rocketing demand for meat caused by the mass-production and mass consumption of fast food, men like Luter jumped to the fore to pioneer factory farming and “vertical integration” of the industry.

Thanks to corporate behemoths, livestock producing family farms are all but extinct. In the

United States, 54% of cattle are raised by 5% of the nation’s farms and corporate entities produce a staggering 98% of our poultry.

While many pets in our country receive better care than billions of deeply impoverished humans in developing countries, we consume the flesh, fat, and muscle of sentient beings merely to satiate our carnivorous desires. Compounding this barbarism is the fact that this behavior enriches those who condemn millions of pigs, cattle, fish, and chickens to abbreviated and miserable existences.

Consider what our fellow living beings endure that we might indulge ourselves with burgers, filets, chops and such:

Unfortunately, this trend of mass production has resulted in incredible pain and suffering for the animals. Animals today raised on factory farms have had their genes manipulated and pumped full of antibiotics, hormones and other chemicals to encourage high productivity. In the food industry, animals are not considered animals at all; they are food producing machines. They are confined to small cages with metal bars, ammonia-filled air and artificial lighting or no lighting at all. They are subjected to horrible mutilations: beak searing, tail docking, ear cutting and castration. Even the most minimum humane standards proposed are thwarted by the powerful food conglomerates.” The 9 billion chickens raised each year for their meat are packed into horribly over-crowded, filthy and under-ventilated sheds. Pharmaceuticals and genetic manipulation accelerate their body growth to the extent that their internal organs often fail or they become severely crippled. Denied their natural inclinations to roost, nest, and bathe in the sun, their wretched lives end with a slash of their throats by a mechanical razor.85 million cattle die each year to put beef on our tables. Four corporate conglomerates account for 80% of this massive slaughter. Ravaged by diseases and metabolic disorders caused by unnatural diets, over-crowding, and cocktails of growth-enhancing hormones and antibiotics, cattle fare little better than their feathered counter-parts. Branding, castration, waddling, and dehorning are often performed without anesthesia. In spite of the Humane Slaughter Act, many cattle are improperly stunned before their throats are slit to bleed them in preparation for the final mutilation of their remains. Pigs have the cognitive ability to be quite sophisticated. Even more so than dogs and certainly [more so than] three-year-olds,” says Dr. Donald Broom, Cambridge University professor and former scientific advisor to the Council of Europe.” Yet each year in the United States we torture and kill 100 million of them. Factory “farmers” keep sows confined in tiny spaces and in perpetual states of impregnation for several years until they are eventually slaughtered. Hogs are “fortunate” in that their sentence to a life of profound misery is a “mere” six months before they “nobly sacrifice themselves” to provide us with ham, sausage, and bacon. As with cattle, pigs are subjected to multiple mutilations without pain-killers, including tail and tooth removal. Cursed by their own intellect, the porcine “farm” experience is perhaps the cruelest. Packing them into claustrophobic enclosures causes them serious mental distress, often leading to cannibalism, self-mutilation, and repetitive, compulsive behaviors.

Commercial fishing has decimated fish populations to the extent that nearly 30% of the seafood we consume now needs to be raised on aquafarms. Aside from driving some varieties of fish to near extinction, commercial fishing techniques cause the deaths of over 100,000 marine mammals each year. Fish raised on aquafarms face many of the same horrors as their terrestrial cousins. Over-crowding, disease, and injury kill approximately 40% of farm-raised fish before they reach market. Aquafarming also has disastrous environmental consequences resulting from the release of “tons of fish feces, antibiotic-laden fish feed, and diseased fish carcasses.”

What does our overwhelming support for this systematic torment and massacre of millions of our fellow creatures say about our society? Patrice Greanville, board member of Animal People Magazine, editor and publisher of Cyrano’s Journal Online, and renowned Leftist radical, put it like this:

“This moral blindness is inexcusable for those who rightly see themselves as the moral vanguard of humanity. For the bottom line is that speciesism–a surreptitious form of human fascism applied to animals and nature in general–is by far the oldest and most pervasive form of brutal tyrannization encountered in the sorry annals of human history. I don’t use the word “fascism” as hyperbole in this context or for dramatic effect. I wish it were hyperbole. But the fact is that fascism is noted for its unilateral proclamations of superiority by a certain race or breed, endowing said race with the “right” to dominate, exploit, and annihilate at will any group deemed “inferior.” If that pretty much doesn’t describe eloquently our despicable behavior toward non-human animals, I don’t know what does.” Speciesism is yet another ugly manifestation of the hubristic narcissism that has infected our collective psyche here in the United States. While tormenting and butchering “lesser beings” simply to please our palates is reprehensible behavior, there is a less obvious but equally sinister component to the meat industrial complex. Let’s explore it, shall we?

Consuming meat is a luxury that comes with an extremely high human cost. While dated, agricultural economist Rene Dumont’s observation rings even more true in 2007 than when he made it in 1974:

“The overconsumption of meat by the rich means hunger for the poor. This wasteful agriculture must be changed – by the suppression of feedlots where beef are fattened on grains, and even a massive reduction of beef cattle.”

Dr. Aaron Altshul, author of Proteins: Their Chemistry and Politics, concluded that the foods cultivated to sustain a vegetarian diet provide enough calories per acre to support twenty times more people than the meat produced by raising livestock. Altshul further observed that the Earth could support up to 20 billion people if available agricultural land was devoted to cultivating vegetarian sustenance.

So while we savor our succulent T-bones, relish our tender pork loin, and feast upon our marinated chicken breasts, over 35,000 of our fellow human beings starve to death EACH DAY. 30,000 of them are CHILDREN UNDER THE AGE OF FIVE.

Consider these disturbing facts (most of which can be found here):

–80% of starving children live in countries where there is actually a grain surplus, but farmers use the grain to feed livestock in order to sell meat to wealthier nations

–Due to its profitability, cattle ranching is rapidly replacing the cultivation of essential crops in Central and

South America (where millions of people are malnourished or starving). Deforestation to create cattle pasture is also occurring at an alarming rate.

–Over 70% of the grain that we grow goes to feed livestock. Of the calories animals derive from this grain, only a small percentage yields meat for human consumption.

–In a world in which potable water is becoming increasingly scarce, the

United States devotes 50% of its supply to livestock production.

–Raising crops to feed humans requires far less land than producing meat. Today there is 2/3 of an acre of arable land per person on the Earth. Within 40 years that figure is expected to drop to 1/3 of an acre.

–Typically, 60 gallons of water will yield one pound of wheat. It takes about 2500 gallons to produce a pound of beef. While water is a fairly renewable resource, the meat industrial complex does its best (or more appropriately, worst) to ensure that such renewal is seriously compromised. The EPA has determined that livestock waste, 1.4 billion tons of which were released into our water supply in 1996, is the principal water pollutant in the

United States.–“Vegfam, a British non-profit organization also claims that 10 acres can support 60 people when growing soybeans, 24 when growing wheat, 10 when growing corn, 2 when raising cattle. Also, PETA claims, “because of deforestation for cattle land, each vegetarian saves 1 acre of rainforest a year.””

Pork chops, fried chicken, bacon, and KC strip steaks are delectable in a way that defies description. Yet like so many of the tantalizing offerings dangled before us by our corporate masters, they are contributing to the demise of the human race, our animal brethren, and the Earth itself.

The system we have been conditioned to accept, support, and adore is unsustainable, vile, exploitative, and, frankly, murderous. American Capitalism is little more than an “evolved” form of feudalism in which corporations have replaced lords and the working class has been condemned to economic serfdom. The concomitant symptoms of this global malignancy, including runaway industrialization, imperial conquest, technological advances sans ethical considerations, environmental destruction, fascism, racism, speciesism, neoliberalism, and rampant consumerism, are straining the Earth and its inhabitants beyond reasonable limits.

Don Robertson, the American Philosopher, has concluded that “we are all moral barbarians today.”

If we wish to evolve into more civilized human beings and perpetuate life on Earth, we need to put some serious effort into embodying Robertson’s moral imperative:

“The moral imperative of life is to live a life that detracts not at all from the lives available to those who will follow us into this world.”While not easy, shunning the egregiously deleterious meat industrial complex is a simple first step. (To learn more, go to http://www.goveg.com/)Disclosure Statement: The author of this essay converted to vegetarianism two months ago. As a result, he has experienced spiritual, physical, and mental invigoration. He highly recommends it.
Jason Miller is a wage slave of the American Empire who has freed himself intellectually and spiritually. He writes prolifically, his essays have been widely published, he is an associate editor for Cyrano’s Journal Online, and he volunteers at homeless shelters. He welcomes constructive correspondence at willpowerful@hotmail.com or via his blog, Thomas Paine’s Corner, at http://civillibertarian.blogspot.com/

British marine ‘apologises’ to Iran

0

Al Jazeera and agencies

Iranian television has broadcast an interview with a captured British marine in which he admitted to entering Iranian waters illegally and apologised to the Iranian people.

The Arabic-language Al-Alam television channel showed an interview with the marine on Friday in which he said: “I deeply apologise for entering your waters.”

Footage of three of the 15 captured British navy personnel was shown by Al-Alam.

“The treatment has been very friendly,” the marine – identified as Nathan Thomas Summers – said on the state-run channel.

Tony Blair, the British prime minister, said people would be disgusted by the broadcast.

“I don’t know why the Iranian regime keeps doing this. All it does it heightens people’s sense of disgust.

“Captured personnel being paraded and manipulated in this way, it doesn’t fool anyone.”

Letter published

Summers was shown sitting with another male serviceman and the female British sailor Faye Turney – who was shown issuing a televised apology herself earlier this week – against a pink floral curtain.

The Iranian embassy in London also released a third letter it said was written by Turney on Friday, in which she said she had been “sacrificed due to the intervening policies of the Bush and Blair governments”.

The letter said: “It is now time to ask our government to make a change to its oppressive behaviour towards other people.”

The embassy also issued a statement criticising the British move to involve the UN in the diplomatic standoff.

“Attempts to engage the Security Council with this matter of purely bilateral nature are completely unacceptable, unwarranted and unjustifiable,” the statement said.

Official visit

Ali Reza Ronaghi, Al Jazeera’s correspondent in Tehran, says that the broadcast was part of Iran’s attempt to prove that the British personnel were in Iranian waters.

“However,” Ronaghi said, “I’m not sure if the credibility of these pictures will be trusted by a global audience”.

Fifteen British sailors and marines were captured by the Iranian navy on March 23 while patrolling near the mouth of the Shatt al-Arab waterway.

Britain has demanded their release, insisting that they were in Iraqi waters at the time they were intercepted.

Manouchehr Mottaki, the Iranian foreign minister, said that British officials would be able to visit the military personnel “in a consular framework.”

So far Iran has denied Britain access to the 15.

Apology

The interview was broadcast as Mahmoud Ahmadinejad, the Iranian president, demanded an apology by the British government, the Fars news agency said.

The Iranian leader made the statement in a telephone conversation with Tayyip Erdogan, the Turkish prime minister, Fars said.

The statement came as Margaret Beckett, the British foreign secretary, said a diplomatic note from Tehran did not contain a way out of the standoff.

“We have been looking for a way out of it for them, for us and particularly for our service personnel from the very beginning.

“I wish I saw any sign that this is what Iran is trying to do.”

The note is the first written communication from Tehran to Britain over the issue.

It appeared to resemble a statement used to resolve a similar standoff in 2004 when Iran seized eight British servicemen and held them for three days.

The note protests against what it describes as an “illegal act” by British personnel and urges the UK government to accept responsibility for it.

European Union foreign ministers said on Friday that they were considering backing London with practical measures to put pressure on Iran to free the 15.

O’Donnell 9/11 Rant Reaches 30 Million Viewers

0

Paul Joseph Watson

Rosie O’Donnell is certainly not backing away from her public stance about 9/11, and this morning on The View went on a 9 minute rant about the many questions surrounding the attack, reaching around 30 million viewers in the process.

This is the largest single exposure 9/11 truth has enjoyed to date and it represents a watershed moment in the quest to bring the truth to the masses.

Go here to watch

Bush Administration Has Double-Secret Private Communication System

0

Everybody smart knows you shouldn’t do questionable things on your work computer, whether sending out resumes or posting Casual Encounters ads or basically anything you might have a hard time explaining to your boss.

The scumbag criminals in the White House also practice this “cover your tracks” rule. Technically, they “work” for the “American people,” which means the White House computer network and affiliated websites, e-mail accounts, backups and archives are the property of the United States, as required by the Presidential Records Act.

Find out how they’re breaking yet another federal law, after the jump.

This U.S. Attorneys mess has again shown that White House senior officials are conducting all their dirty work using a privately owned secret computer system – White House e-mails sent to Jack Abramoff were also mailed from the private server, GWB43.com.

The secret server isn’t part of the government or officially part of the Executive Office. Karl Rove apparently does 95% of his e-mailing using the GWB43.com server. Bush claims his office doesn’t use e-mail at all, specifically because he doesn’t want to leave any evidence that could be subpoenaed – obviously, all presidential e-mail is also through the secret private mail server.

When they are put on trial, there will be no written record of their thievery and campaigns of horror, because there won’t be any e-mail archives.

Here’s the domain’s registration info:

Domain Name: GWB43.COMAdministrative Contact, Technical Contact:

Republican National Committee dns@RNCHQ.ORG

310 First Street SE

Washington, DC 20003

US

999 999 9999 fax: 999 999 9999

Record expires on 16-Jan-2008.

Record created on 16-Jan-2004.

Database last updated on 21-Mar-2007 17:45:46 EDT.

Ha ha, it’s also a federal crime to use false phone numbers in a domain registration.Ha ha ha, a political party accountable to no-one – okay, it is accountable to Halliburton executives – owns the domain for the secret private mail server the Bush Administration uses to evade the law. Ha ha. Ha.

The various chairmen in Congress who maybe just maybe might be starting to grow teeny tiny leetle balls regarding Impeachment have already sent formal demands to the White House to stop deleting e-mail records. And we bet they’re really paying attention at the White House!

Source

Giuliani Faces Questions About 9/11

0

Larry McShane 

Rudy Giuliani’s White House aspirations are inescapably tied to Sept. 11, 2001 — for better and for worse.

While the former mayor of the nation’s largest city was widely lionized for his post-9/11 leadership — “Churchillian” was one adjective, “America’s mayor” was Oprah Winfrey’s assessment — city firefighters and their families are renewing their attacks on him for his performance before and after the terrorist attack.

“If Rudolph Giuliani was running on anything but 9/11, I would not speak out,” said Sally Regenhard, whose firefighter son was among the 343 FDNY members killed in the terrorist attack. “If he ran on cleaning up Times Square, getting rid of squeegee men, lowering crime — that’s indisputable.

“But when he runs on 9/11, I want the American people to know he was part of the problem.”

Such comments contradict Giuliani’s post-Sept. 11 profile as a hero and symbol of the city’s resilience — the steadfast leader who calmed the nerves of a rattled nation. But as the presidential campaign intensifies, criticisms of his 2001 performance are resurfacing.

Giuliani, the leader in polls of Republican voters for his party’s nomination, has been faulted on two major issues:

— His administration’s failure to provide the World Trade Center’s first responders with adequate radios, a long-standing complaint from relatives of the firefighters killed when the twin towers collapsed. The Sept. 11 Commission noted the firefighters at the World Trade Center were using the same ineffective radios employed by the first responders to the 1993 terrorist attack on the trade center.

Regenhard, at a 2004 commission hearing in Manhattan, screamed at Giuliani, “My son was murdered because of your incompetence!” The hearing was a perfect example of the 9/11 duality: Commission members universally praised Giuliani at the same event.

— A November 2001 decision to step up removal of the massive rubble pile at ground zero. The firefighters were angered when the then-mayor reduced their numbers among the group searching for remains of their lost “brothers,” focusing instead on what they derided as a “scoop and dump” approach. Giuliani agreed to increase the number of firefighters at ground zero just days after ordering the cutback.

More than 5 1/2 years later, body parts are still turning up in the trade center site.

“We want America to know what this guy meant to New York City firefighters,” said Peter Gorman, head of the Uniformed Fire Officers Association. “In our experiences with this man, he disrespected us in the most horrific way.”

The two-term mayor, in his appearance before the Sept. 11 Commission, said the blame for the death and destruction of Sept. 11 belonged solely with the terrorists. “There was not a problem of coordination on Sept. 11,” he testified.

Giuliani was also criticized for locating the city’s emergency center in 7 World Trade Center, a building that contained thousands of gallons of diesel fuel when it collapsed after the terrorist attack.

The lingering ill will between Giuliani and firefighters was resurrected when the International Association of Fire Fighters initially decided not to invite the former mayor to its March 14 candidates forum in Washington. Other prominent presidential hopefuls, including Republican John McCain and Democrats Barack Obama, Hillary Rodham Clinton and John Edwards, addressed the nation’s largest firefighters union.

According to the Giuliani camp, the contretemps with the union dates to tough contract negotiations in his second term as mayor. His critics deny any political motivation.

The IAFF drafted a membership letter — it was never sent — that excoriated Giuliani and promised to tell “the real story” about his role in handling the terrorist attack.

The then-mayor’s decision to change policy on the ground zero recovery effort was “an offensive and personal attack” on firefighters, the letter said, going on to say that Giuliani’s “disrespect … has not been forgotten or forgiven.”

Giuliani countered the attacks by releasing an open letter of support from retired firefighter Lee Ielpi, whose firefighter son was among the 2,749 victims on Sept. 11. “Firefighters have no greater friend and supporter than Rudy Giuliani,” Ielpi said.

A contingent of nearly 100 South Carolina firefighters also expressed their support for Giuliani and his White House hopes.

Hank Sheinkopf, a veteran political consultant, predicted the 9/11 criticisms could resonate beyond New York during the presidential campaign.

“These are very emotional people who will touch a responsive chord with a lot of the electorate,” he said. “The things that the 9/11 families say will wind up in television commercials used against Rudy Giuliani.”

The issues also have forced Giuliani to try to strike a balance to avoid the perception that he’s exploiting the attacks for his own personal gain. President Bush faced the same challenge in 2004 when he invoked the attacks to portray himself as a strong and steady leader in the face of terrorism. Some victims’ relatives criticized Bush for using the ruins of the World Trade Center in his campaign commercials, while others defended him.

Big brands turning to Big Brother

0

Questionnaires and focus groups aren’t enought – now companies are having volunteers filmed for days on end to see what makes customers really tick, finds Stephen Hoare

Teenagers around the world could soon be sporting a new range of Doc Martens trainers with coloured laces and a long tongue that pulls out of the shoe. Channel 4 viewers might find more of their favourite kind of programmes. And impatient ice-cream lovers could soon find that their favourite brand of tub ice-cream defrosts straight from the freezer.

Innovation is the norm in our fickle, fast-moving consumer culture. But launching new products or repositioning faded brands is increasingly the subject of scientific scrutiny.

As development costs escalate so do the risks of a commercial failure. Global brands want to make sure their products succeed across national boundaries and are turning for help to a new kind of market testing — ethnographic research.

In less than a decade ethnographic research — detailed observations of the day-to-day behaviours of a small sample from a target group of consumers to shed light on how they use, choose or buy products — has established itself alongside consumer surveys and focus groups as a leading tool of market research.

Siamack Salari, boss of one firm specialising in this field called EverydayLives, explains ethnographic research as social anthropology meets the internet. Salari’s researchers follow paid volunteers for days filming their every move with a hand-held camcorder in order to uncover hidden truths about the way they lead their lives.

Some time, usually towards the end of the first day, the novelty of being filmed will wear off and unselfconscious behaviours will start to emerge. The best insights come when people are feeling relaxed and off their guard. Hours and hours of video are analysed for key behaviours before being finally edited down to around an hour of film that can be played back to the subject and shared with the client.

To research any given product, a sample is constructed usually of no more than six individuals or households each of which is filmed for two to three days. Then, as Salari explains, the hard work begins — analysing and interpreting behaviours.

Film has the advantage over questionnaires because the camera doesn’t lie. People are often unaware of how they appear feeding the cat, for example, or chatting with other family members, or shopping in a supermarket aisle.

Salari explains: “What the subject didn’t do or nearly did can often reveal far more about their inner motives than what is happening on the surface. If you ask me how often do I make coffee I would say ‘every day’. But if you were to film me then you might find that quite often I help myself to my wife’s tea in the morning. Even though I have a percolator and ground coffee at the ready, I am usually too lazy to make myself a cup.”

The discussion between researcher and subject is used to generate insights which Salari calls ‘co-discoveries’. Salari’s spare-time activity — making and posting video blogs on YouTube — reveals a disarming lack of inhibition about sharing his own private moments over the worldwide web.

“I’m a great YouTube junky. I’d spend every minute of my life on YouTube — it’s my way of demonstrating to people who I am. I film myself talking to my three-year-old on my knee — just having everyday conversations. I have had dozens of fathers send me clips and sharing their own observations of their children. It’s a whole community I didn’t know existed.”

Describing his own brand of ethnography as “observational research with common sense and lateral thinking thrown in”, Salari points out that only this type of qualitative research offers unexpected insights.

While supermarkets mine data from micro-chipped loyalty cards to segment markets and target special offers, this kind of number-crunching misses the bigger picture of how products are chosen and how they could be improved.

Salari points out: “Ethnographic research is always agenda-less. It’s totally opposed to other forms of research and its big benefit is that it generates insights. It uncovers things you didn’t know you didn’t know about.”

Ethnographic research is widely endorsed and has gained in popularity through word of mouth. EverydayLives mostly researches fast-moving consumer brands for companies such as Unilever, Proctor & Gamble, Pedigree and GlaxoSmithKline. It has conducted research for new products to be launched in Russia, Poland, Latin America and Africa.

London Business School even devotes its latest MBA core module — discovering entrepreneurial opportunities — to expounding the principles of ethnographic research, and MBA students borrow heavily on these skills in their business start-up competition.

John Mullins, assistant professor of entrepreneurship at LBS, says: “We use only ethnographic and qualitative research — in-depth observation — because a long list of the best and biggest companies are doing it to discover real customer insights and to satisfy their needs.”

Such insight does not come cheap, however. According to Salari, an observational survey would cost in the region of £4,000-£6,000 per household

. Normally a minimum of six households would participate. Sometimes ethnographic research suggests small changes that can make the difference between a product succeeding in its market or falling flat.

One of Salari’s earliest commissions was to critique Oxo’s long-running TV advertising campaign. He found, not surprisingly, that times had moved on since the idealised housewife Katie and her shared family mealtimes were first conceived back in the early Sixties.

“I forget what happened to Katie,” he says, “but food advertising is now more likely to involve noisy argumentative families or children grabbing a bite to eat in front of the telly.”

On the Dr Martens assignment, Salari and his team started by questioning youth buying patterns. The client brief was: how are young people using fashion brands in their everyday lives? Why, for example, have Nike trainers, baseball caps and hoodies become so embedded in youth culture?

Salari says: “We wanted to find out what is it about a product that makes it iconic.” Salari’s young researchers fanned out to the east and west coasts of America, Japan, Europe and beyond. They found individuals who conformed to Dr Martens’ target market and followed paid volunteers for several days shooting hours and hours of their daily routine with a hand-held digital camera.

At the end of it 180 hours were edited down to just one hour of highlights with an analysis and commentary and shown to Dr Martens’ marketing and product development people. What emerged? Teenagers preferred fashions that allowed them to customise the item of clothing and take ownership of it, such as wearing a cap the wrong way round or pulling the tongue of a pair of trainers out from behind the laces.

Salari says: “Iconic products had one thing in common: they had something distinctive — a label or a style — that made wearers stand out as part of a tribe.” He adds: “I didn’t design a new pair of Dr Martens, but we ended up with a series of abstract observations which could be translated into tangible product ideas.” Such as coloured shoe laces, possibly.

The five golden rules of ethnographic research

 

  • Ensure you have a hypothesis to test. Come at research with beliefs rather than questions. This forces the client to really think.

     

  • Avoid telling households what the research project is about (until the end) because you don’t want to influence them into showing you the behaviours they think you want to see.

     

  • Don’t interview the subjects until the end of the filming. You don’t want to disrupt naturally occurring events, conversations and decisions by asking them to explain their behaviour to you. You want to explore.

     

  • By the end of the project the subject should know as much about the researcher as the researcher knows about the subject. This helps people to feel relaxed and builds trust

     

  • Ensure the client is fully involved in the process. Do not wait to present findings to the client at the end of the process. Encourage them to work with you and to take ownership of any insights and discoveries.
  • © Copyright of Telegraph Media Group Limited 2007.

    Big brother Britain

    0

    How can free people grapple with growing threats to their privacy and liberty? A computer-security guru’s view of the surveillance dystopia worries Becky Hogge

    Becky Hogge

    Image: CIA Factbook

    The entry for “tin-foil hat” in Wikipedia includes the definition “a popular stereotype and term of derision; the phrase serves as a byword for paranoia and is associated with conspiracy theorists”. Tin-foil hats (or beanies), are sported by the apocryphal “tin-foil beanie brigade” – a posited group of paranoid individuals who believe that such headgear will prevent their minds from being captured by anything from agents of a malevolent state to tribes of aliens.

    It was with some surprise and amusement, therefore, that I opened a parcel from a respected American media and telecommunications advocacy group last year to find a tin-foil protector for my passport. Its purpose? To prevent rogue radio frequency identification (RFID) readers from capturing my personal details in busy airports.

    As technology advances, perceived threats to individual liberties shift. Last week, I attended the seventh Social Study of Information Communications Technology (ICT) workshop at the London School of Economics. Themed “Identity in the Information Society: Security, Privacy, the Future,” the program featured a keynote speech by the American cryptologist and computer security guru Bruce Schneier. His talk furnished me with both answers and questions. The path of technological development and its effects on privacy and personal freedoms had been laid out clearly. How a free society might mitigate against the challenges brought by such a path, however, had never been more unclear.

    The surveillance dystopia

    Schneier’s premise was simple: “Data is the pollution of the information society.” As computers become more and more involved in our daily activities, from buying a coffee, to traveling on public transport, to borrowing a book from our local library or going to a movie or a play, we leave behind transaction records. Whether they are receipts for credit-card purchases or records of where we have traveled – collected via the use of electronic tickets like London’s “Oyster” card or through cameras that recognize car number-plates – these transaction trails provide data about us that is often linked to semi-unique identifiers, such as our name and address. This data is becoming cheaper and cheaper to store, to the extent that storage costs will soon approach zero. This pollution of detail about our patterns of living is not often within our control; instead, it is owned by corporate or bureaucratic entities. And it has the power to say a lot about our daily lives.

    In his speech, Schneier took his audience through the different kinds of routine surveillance with which a modern western citizen might expect to come into contact. Closed-circuit television (CCTV) is the form most commonly experienced, especially in Britain, which has the world’s highest ratio of CCTV cameras to people. But Schneier also mentioned audio surveillance, including telephone tapping, aerial surveillance – in the form of manned or unmanned helicopters – and internet surveillance, as well as the new opportunities afforded by mobile phones, GPS tracking systems and RFID tags.

    On top of this, identification-based surveillance systems abound. They include automatic facial recognition systems (as used by the London borough of Newham in its CCTV system), vehicle license-plate capture, identity cards, identity codes hard-wired into high-end consumer electronics and store loyalty cards, which allow customers special discounts in exchange for information about what they buy.

    Privacy is a human right. Without the ability to hide from the world, to choose when our actions are public and when they are private, we lose something of what it means to be human. But in a world where data about almost everything we do can be stored indefinitely, how can anything be private?

    Schneier led his audience deeper into the surveillance dystopia than I had ever cared to travel. Storing everything you typed on your computer for a year would take 100 megabytes (MB) of disk space. Throw in every file you ever sent for an extra four to eight gigabytes (GB). Five GB of compressed audio would capture every telephone conversation you had in a year. Two-hundred GB of audio, or 700 GB of audio-visual material, and you could have a “life recorder” for a year – a record of everything you said or did, captured by a tiny digital recorder sewn into the lapel of your jacket.

    Such musings on total surveillance aside, the question of how society must change to deal with existing technical realities is a pressing one. There are several approaches. “Digital natives” – teenagers who have grown up in the age of ubiquitous networked communications and who share intimate details of their lives on sites such as MySpace – seem to believe that any real data, or “signal”, will be obscured by so much noise. But how much further do automatic pattern-recognition algorithms need to develop to make this strategy unviable? Then there’s the geek philosophy of the Panopticon, which sees state, corporation and citizen in a mode of total disclosure, with any challenges overridden by opportunities for open government and true corporate social responsibility. But as Schneier observes, the presumption that total disclosure on behalf of the state and corporations, as well as citizens, is any type of remedy ignores the initial power imbalance between the institution and the individual.

    Schneier’s own remedy – the rule of law – was convincing up to a point. As an American citizen, he admires Europeans their data-protection legislation, which sets strict criteria for data handling and forbids a set of data collected for one purpose from being used for another. But what might work in theory doesn’t always hold in practice, as controversies in late 2006 over the right of British citizens to opt out of having their medical records transferred to a centralised National Health Service database demonstrate.

    One week on from the workshop, some of that cold, paranoid feeling has left me, but questions still persist. Surely, in the face of such potential intrusions on privacy, some sort of cultural shift is needed? Yet it seems that people make poor decisions about their privacy all the time: for the price of a small percentage off their car-insurance premiums, people will sign up to having details of every journey they make logged; for a few pounds off their weekly shop, they will tell a supermarket chain everything they buy in a year. At the same time, the threat of terrorism persuades us to sign away privacy safeguards. Now is a unique moment in the history of surveillance. The cameras are still big enough that we can see them. So why don’t we care more?

    But the sands seem to be shifting. The United Kingdom, according to the Surveillance Studies Network, is “the most surveilled country” of the industrialised western nations. In March 2007, Jack Straw, the leader of the House of Commons, announced an imminent inquiry into Britain’s surveillance society by the Commons home affairs committee. Reports indicate that the inquiry will cover CCTV, identity cards and the rapidly mushrooming police DNA database. And the Royal Academy of Engineering just released, on 27 March, a report urging the government to plan future technology projects and adapt current ones in order to ensure that the country did not become “Big Brother Britain”.

    In terms of my own personal fears, the timing couldn’t be better. In fact, it appears too good. Could they be reading my mind already?

    Surveillance cameras, metal detectors in US schools

    0

    The Township Council has awarded a contract to an Ocean County company for new video surveillance equipment for the Lenape Regional High School District.North American Video Inc. of Brick Township was the lowest bidder in the amount of $134,321.

    The video cameras will be paid for with funds from the federal Secure Our Schools grant program.

    Medford and Evesham townships applied for the grants on the district’s behalf, according to Katherine Burger, Medford’s chief financial officer.

    Lenape and Shawnee High schools in Medford and Cherokee High School in Evesham will receive the new equipment under the grants. The Lenape district will pay for the new surveillance equipment for Seneca High School in Tabernacle, said Keith Patterson, the district’s director of technology.

    Patterson said each of the four high schools will have video cameras installed outside of the buildings, in addition to the existing video cameras.

    “Anything that will help enhance the safety and security at the schools is very important to us,” Patterson said.

    Secure Our Schools grants are administered by the office of U.S. Justice Department’s Community Oriented Policing Services. The Secure our Schools initiative gives grantees the opportunity to establish and enhance school safety equipment and programs.

    Besides surveillance cameras, the grants help cover the cost of metal detectors, locks, lighting, security assessments, security training for students and personnel, and coordination with local law enforcement.

    Since 2002, nearly 80 Secure Our School grants, worth more than $6 million, have been awarded to state law enforcement agencies and school districts.

    North American Video is a national security systems integration contractor, according to its Web site. It provides consultation, design and installation services for video surveillance equipment for casinos, corporations, retail, banking and financial institutions, as well as schools.

    ©2007 Copyright Calkins Media, Inc. All rights reserved. 

    Russia and US accused of abusing men freed from Guantanamo Bay

    0

    Andrew Osborn

    The Kremlin and the United States have been accused of flouting international law in areport which tells the little-known story of seven Russian men freed from Guantanamo Bay.

    According to the report by Human Rights Watch (HRW), the men, who were released from the US detention centre in Cuba without charge, returned to Russia to face a life of torture, harassment and unfair trials.

    All seven were arrested by US forces in Afghanistan and Pakistan during 2002 and only released from Guantanamo in 2004 on the promise that they would receive “humane treatment” on their return to Russia.

    Of the seven, all of whom are ethnically non-Russian and come from predominantly Muslim areas, three are in prison, three are in hiding, and the seventh refuses to talk about his experience.

    The New York-based rights organisation said Washington knew that the men would face torture at the hands of the Russian authorities but accepted the flimsy diplomatic assurances offered by Moscow.

    “The US government knew that these men would likely be tortured, and sent them back to Russia anyway,” the report said.

    “The Russian experience shows why diplomatic assurances simply donÕt work.” Human Rights Watch said the UK government also accepted ‘diplomatic assurances’ to render terrorism suspects to countries where they were likely to face torture.

    Of the seven Russian nationals sent back from Guantanamo the case of Rasul Kudaev, a resident of the southern Russian republic of Kabardino-Balkaria, is the most shocking.

    Kudaev was initially given his liberty by the authorities but in October 2005 he was accused of taking part in an armed uprising in the city of Nalchik, an allegation he fiercely denies.

    Although he has not been charged, he remains in custody to this day; according to Human Rights Watch there is compelling evidence that he has been tortured. When his lawyer visited him in custody she noted that he had to be carried because he couldnÕt walk and that “his eye was full of blood, his head was a strange shape and size, his right leg was broken and he had open wounds on his hands.” Two of the other Guantanamo Seven were convicted of blowing up a gas pipeline in Tatarstan, a charge they deny.

    According to Human Rights Watch confessions were beaten out of them by depriving one of them of sleep for one week and using a gas mask to asphyxiate him until he was ready to sign anything.

    Fake Maritime Boundaries

    0

    Craig Murray

    The British Government has published a map showing the coordinates of the incident, well within an Iran/Iraq maritime border. The mainstream media and even the blogosphere has bought this hook, line and sinker.But there are two colossal problems.

    A) The Iran/Iraq maritime boundary shown on the British government map does not exist. It has been drawn up by the British Government. Only Iraq and Iran can agree their bilateral boundary, and they never have done this in the Gulf, only inside the Shatt because there it is the land border too. This published boundary is a fake with no legal force.

    B) Accepting the British coordinates for the position of both HMS Cornwall and the incident, both were closer to Iranian land than Iraqi land. Go on, print out the map and measure it. Which underlines the point that the British produced border is not a reliable one.

    None of which changes the fact that the Iranians, having made their point, should have handed back the captives immediately. I pray they do so before this thing spirals out of control. But by producing a fake map of the Iran/Iraq boundary, notably unfavourable to Iran, we can only harden the Iranian position.

    BBC fights to suppress internal report into allegations of bias against Israel

    0

    Andy McSmith

    The BBC was in court yesterday fighting over the public’s right to know. But the Corporation was not battling to bring information into the open. Instead it has paid an estimated £200,000 in legal fees to keep the report secret.

    The Corporation is trying to persuade the High Court to overrule a decision by the Information Tribunal that an internal report into the BBC’s Middle East coverage should be made public.

    It puts the Corporation in the awkward position of arguing that the Freedom of Information Act should not apply in this case, although their journalists have previously made free use of the Act to prise information from the Government.

    The dispute is over a 20,000-page report commissioned four years ago, at a time when the Israeli government had announced that it was withdrawing all co-operation with the BBC staff stationed in the Middle East, including all the help BBC journalists could normally expect with issues such as passports and visas.

    The Israelis were angered by a BBC documentary about Mordecai Vananu, who spent many years in solitary confinement for revealing to The Sunday Times that Israel was developing a nuclear weapon. It’s government called the programme “Nazi propaganda”. Danny Seaman, the director of the government’s press office, claimed: “The innuendoes, the insinuation on the programme were to depict Israel as a police state.”

    The ban lasted for about three months. They were mollified when the BBC announced that it was bringing in an outside consultant, Malcolm Balen, to watch over their Middle East coverage. Mr Balen, an experienced television executive known to BBC staff as the “Middle East policeman”, worked from an office 10 minutes walk away from the BBC’s White City headquarters.

    He ruled on tricky questions such as the word BBC correspondents should use to describe the long chain of fences and walls that the Israelis were erecting along the West Bank, to keep out suicide bombers. Palestinians call it the “apartheid wall”. To the Israelis it is simply a ” fence “. On Mr Balen’s advice, the BBC settled on the word ” barrier ” .

    In October 2004, as his one-year contract drew to a close, Mr Balen presented the BBC with a 20,000-page report. Those who accuse the BBC of anti-Israeli bias suspect that it supported their case but no one outside the BBC has been allowed to see it.

    Mr Balen has gone on the record to say that he does not believe there is anti-Semitism in the BBC, but did imply that the Corporation had made ” mistakes”, which should not be seen as evidence of malice.

    Steven Sugar, a commercial solicitor from Putney, west London, put in a request to the BBC to see the whole report, citing the Freedom of Information Act.

    “A very large proportion of the Jewish community felt rightly or wrongly that the BBC’s reporting of the second Palestinian intifada or uprising that broke out in 2000 was seriously distorted,” he said. ” I myself, as a member of the Jewish community, felt that and was very distressed by it.Now I don’t know whether it is important to see this report or not. Instinct says that if they don’t want to give it to me it may be important.”

    The BBC’s website invites members of the public to send in requests for information, but there is also a warning that they are not necessarily going to tell you everything you might want to know. They claim that the Act does not apply to “information held for the purposes of creating the BBC’s output, or information that supports and is closely associated with these activities”.

    The BBC argues that if its journalists are collecting information, they should not have to give it out to people who put in Freedom of Information requests until they are ready to broadcast. The Information Commissioner, Richard Thomas, hadruled in favour of the BBC. He was overruled by the Information Tribunal.

    Orla Guerin, the BBC’s Middle East correspondent, was the next correspondent to draw the anger of the Israeli government, in March 2004, for her coverage of the arrest of Hussam Abdu, 16, a Palestinian caught with explosives strapped to his chest.

    Guerin, in the eyes of the government, already had form because it had given her a document it said was found on the bomber praising the September 11 attacks. She had questioned whether it was genuine. She accused the Israelis of using the teenager for propaganda purposes, of parading the child in front of the international media” and then denying journalists the chance to ask questions. Natan Sharansky, minister for diaspora affairs, a man highly respected in Israel and the West for enduring years of persecution in communist Russia, claimed that her report showed “such a gross double standard” that “it is difficult to see Ms Guerin’s report anything but anti-semitic”.

    Barbara Plett also drew hundreds of complaints after her report of the terminally ill Palestinian leader Yasser Arafat leaving the West Bank in October 2004. She said in From Our Own Correspondent on Radio 4, that until then it had been a “real grind” reporting on his long illness. ” Yet when the helicopter carrying the frail old man rose above his ruined compound… I started to cry… without warning.” In November the BBC’s governors ruled that the reference to crying “unintentionally gave the impression of over-identifying with Yasser Arafat and his cause”.

    A BBC spokeswoman said yesterday that the Corporation was fighting the case because it needed clarity over how the Freedom of Information Act applied to it, not because of the content of the Balen report. The report was always meant to be “an internal review of programme content, to inform future output” and never intended for publication, she added. The case continues today.

    So, is the BBC fair in its reports on Israel?

    Lord Janner of Braunstone Former president of Board of Deputies of British Jews

    “The BBC’s reporting of Israel is sometimes fair and sometimes biased. On the whole, the BBC could never be accused of being pro-Israel.”

    Rod Liddle former editor, Today

    “There is bias at the BBC… against the powerful and in favour of the powerless. In the Middle East context, this is naively characterised as Israelis vs Palestinians being the powerful against the powerless. That is why the BBC seems to be sympathetic towards the Palestinians but that the Israeli settlers, for instance, do not get a fair hearing.”

    George Galloway Respect MP

    “To accuse the BBC of anti-Israel bias is akin to accusing Jeremy Clarkson of being a health and safety obsessive. The word incongruous does not begin to capture this.”

    Lorna Fitzsimons Head of Britain Israel Centre

    “Over 81 per cent of the public trusts the BBC. It is imperative the BBC gets it right. Historically, there has been huge concern as to coverage but the BBC is now adhering to its policy of impartiality.”

    Louise Ellman Labour MP

    “There has been a bias and lack of context with the BBC reporting of Israel. Problems are related to citing individual acts of Israeli aggression by failing to put them into context or explaining the reasons. It makes them look like unprovoked acts, when in fact they were reaction to a terrorist act. I would certainly like to see what’s in the report.”

    Greg Philo Glasgow Media Group. Author of Bad News from Israel

    “In March 2002, when the BBC noted Palestinians had suffered the highest number of casualties in a week since the start of the intifada, there was more coverage of Israeli deaths.”

    Hicks faces about a year in Australian jail

    1

    Tom Allard

    DAVID HICKS will be behind bars in Australia until after this year’s election, but his stint in an Adelaide prison will be relatively short, under a plea bargain being hammered out between prosecutors and his defence counsel.

    Government sources confirmed yesterday that Hicks’s prospective sentence would take into account his five years and two months in Guantanamo Bay but would also include a short period to be served in Australia. That period is “not close” to the five years being mooted in some reports, one government official said. The Herald understands that additional time to be served in Australia is about a year.

    The outcome, still to be approved by a panel of US military commission officials and its Convening Authority, is a bonus for the Federal Government, as Hicks will be unable to conduct potentially embarrassing interviews before this year’s election.

    Terry Hicks, who heard of his son’s guilty plea on an airport tarmac as he prepared to leave Guantanamo Bay for Australia, yesterday blamed the Federal Government for influencing the court hearing and forcing the guilty plea. “They demonised him, they prejudged him for five years,” he said. “I suppose Mr Howard would be throwing his hands up with glee at the moment, but … this was a way out for David regardless of whether he was guilty or innocent.”

    Mr Howard said he was not into “glee and vindication”. “I understand how Mr Hicks feels. It is his son,” he said. “I respect that, but let me deal with the facts. His son has pleaded guilty to a charge that he knowingly gave assistance to a known terrorist organisation, namely al-Qaeda.”

    But there is no doubt the Government is delighted. The Minister for Foreign Affairs, Alexander Downer, said yesterday the Government had unashamedly “been tough on the Hicks case”. However, it remains unclear how long it will take for Hicks to return. First he and his lawyers have to agree on which of 24 specific allegations that underpinned the charge of providing material support to terrorists he will admit to.

    Hicks will also be grilled by a military commission judge over the authenticity of his guilty plea. His sentence will then be completed, probably within a week.

    Hicks, along with the US and Australian governments, will then have to agree on the conditions surrounding his transfer to Australia.

    The Attorney-General, Philip Ruddock, said the process meant that Hicks had no grounds to appeal against his sentence when he returned home, despite suggestions from the South Australian Premier, Mike Rann, to the contrary.

    Mr Ruddock also said international prisoner exchange treaties prevented the Government receiving the prisoner from altering his sentence. This has implications for any attempt by a Rudd Labor government, or the South Australian Government, which will run his prison, to commute his sentence or offer a pardon.

    “The principle is very clear: if a country were to unilaterally vary a sentence imposed on an individual in another jurisdiction, no country would deliver anybody up,” Mr Ruddock said.

    He also said Hicks would be banned from selling his story, which publicists said yesterday would be worth more than $1 million. In a letter to his friend Louise Fletcher, Hicks urged her not to write a book about him “because I would have no chance to make any money when I get home”.

    The Government spent more than $300,000 assisting Hicks, his lawyers and his father. The journey of Terry Hicks and David’s sister Stephanie to Guantanamo Bay was paid by the Department of Foreign Affairs.

    The future’s bright, the future’s green

    0

    Tara Greaves

    Say electric vehicle and many people think milk float – unless, that is, they have taken a look at the latest cars and bikes on display at the Green Wheels event in Norwich.

    A selection of vehicles, including biofuel and hybrid, are on display until the end of tomorrow at the Forum, alongside the spectacular Earth from the Air exhibition.

    The event began yesterday, the day that transport secretary Douglas Alexander said Britain must look at ways to ensure that by 2030, UK cars emitting zero, or very little, carbon are commonplace.

    On show yesterday for the first time in the UK, and for one day only, was the electric powered Tesla Roadster – a sports car that can go from 0-60mph in four seconds, with a top speed of more than 130mph.

    Brian Randall, Tesla’s test and validation manager, said: “The company is based in California. It was started by a chap who wanted a sports car but an eco-friendly one.

    “When he couldn’t find anyone to make him one he did what any good entrepreneur might do and decided to make his own.”

    The $100,000 car will be made by Lotus at Hethel but will only be available in the US. It does not go into production until the end of the year, but 300 have already been ordered.

    It has a range of 200 miles and buyers will be offered the option to purchase solar panels to fit on their garage to power it.

    Also causing a stir was the Vectrix Motorbike, officially launched at the end of April in London, which has a maximum speed of 62mph, has a range of 68 miles and takes two hours to recharge.

    Paul Craymer, from Vectrix, said: “There is a lead under the seat which goes into a normal household plug. It costs £6,930 on the road and has a four years warranty.”

    Other cars on display include the Lotus Bioethanol Exige 265 E and EVE Hybrid, a Honda Civic and Toyota Prius.

    Speaking in London, Mr Alexander said planned road pricing pilot schemes could be extended to “major towns and cities across England in the coming years”.

    He expected the first business cases to address congestion, from authorities interested in taking forward local road pricing pilots, to be received this summer.

    Mr Alexander said the Department for Transport would soon publish a report on how the rise in emissions from heavy and light goods vehicles could be dealt with.

    He said the UK should adopt a target of cutting road vehicle emissions to an average 100g per kilometre, down from the current average for cars of around 160g, as a contribution to combating global warming.

    The UEA-based CRed carbon reduction campaign, Carbon Connections and Lotus are offering one lucky visitor who makes an Earth from the Air pledge the chance to ride around the Hethel test track in an Exige.

    Copyright © 2007 Archant Regional. All rights reserved.

    CU professor uses grass pellets as an alternative energy

    0

    Jennie Daley

    Grass pellets sound more like rabbit food than a local, sustainable energy source, but a Cornell University professor hopes to change that perception.Jerry Cherney, the E.V. Baker professor of agriculture in the department of crop and soil sciences, has been working for about five years to pull together the pieces needed to create an industry around grass pellets and the stoves that burn them. The latest step toward that was the installation of a grass pellet stove in Cornell’s Big Red Barn, which serves as the graduate and professional student center.

    “This technology holds so much promise and we wanted to draw some attention to it,” said Ethan Rainwater, Cornell’s sustainability intern who helped facilitate the on-campus installation. On the mantel above the stove in the Big Red Barn is a large, informational poster that reads, “It takes 70 days to grow a crop for grass pellets. It takes 70 million years to make the fossilized grass in fossil fuels.”

    Grass pellet proponents appreciate this quality of the fuel as well as the fact that it’s a product that can be grown locally, dramatically reducing transportation costs and potentially providing local jobs.

    Mike Rutzke, a senior research associate in Cornell’s food science department, considered these advantages two years ago when he decided to buy a pellet stove that burns corn. Since his Danby home has acreage on which his neighbor grows corn, it was an easy decision for him and his wife to invest in a slightly more expensive stove that would burn what they grow. They quickly found that adding about a 20 percent ratio of grass pellets to their corn made for a cleaner burn, so they now also use some of the grass pellets Cherney provides.

    While Rutzke is thrilled with the performance and cost of his new heating system, he’s seeing clear signs that more needs to happen to improve the industry. He said there is a long wait for new stoves, suggesting anyone who wants one for next winter should order now. He has also found that securing grass pellets is tough if you don’t know someone like Cherney.

    Yet even for Cherney it’s tough. He had to send grasses to Canada for his latest batch of pellets. Infrastructure issues such as these are ones he feels could be overcome with some government support of the industry such as what he has seen in Pennsylvania and Vermont.

    Middlebury College in Vermont recently decided to invest $11 million in a biomass plant that is fueled by wood chips, grass pellets and willows. They hope state grants will offset some costs. The plant will provide heat for the college and is part of its initiative to be carbon neutral by 2012, meaning it will produce all of its own clean energy locally.

    “Trying to start a whole new energy system is tough,” Cherney said, especially when New York state recently dedicated significant resources to ethanol production. “I’m trying to get everything together to get an industry going where there’s supply and demand but you can’t do that on your own. Most things start up with some sort of government support.”

    The New York State Energy Research and Development Authority, NYSERDA, said that they have no programs supporting the development of grass pellets in part because it’s not a new technology.

    While not novel, there are still barriers that Cherney thinks government funds could help overcome, for instance subsidizing the purchase of pellet machines in areas where they could be shared by several farmers.

    Once a farm had a way of creating pellets, there would be little required for it to produce a heating source, according to Cherney. Most farms already grow and harvest grasses and it’s a plant that can grow on marginal soils that aren’t well suited for other crops.

    Cherney noted that interest in grass pellets seems to be driven by two things, the price of fuel oil and the weather. He said he gets fewer inquiries in the warmer months and when fuel costs are low. Also, the availability of wood pellets affects interest. While wood pellet stoves aren’t equipped to burn grass pellets, many people wonder about that possibility when wood pellet supplies become limited.

    The relatively higher ash content of grass pellets makes them incompatible with wood stoves. When the ash gets heated it can melt and form a mass that blocks air flow and ash removal. Many corn-burning stoves have some type of rotating device to prevent this.

    While incompatible in stoves, Cherney said the existing research demonstrates that the amount of heat from grass pellets is comparable to that of wood and the two should be comparable in cost, too.

    Rutzke has found his stove to be efficient and cost-effective.

    “We think it’s a much better alternative to fossil fuels than converting biomass to ethanol because there are fewer steps, it’s more direct and it’s a technology that already exists,” Rutzke said.

    Details on Cherney’s research and information about grass pellet stoves is available at www.grassbioenergy.org.

    UK sailors detained 0.5 km inside Iranian waters, embassy confirms

    0

    Iran confirmed Wednesday that the detention of 15 British marines and sailors took place last Friday after they had illegally entered Iranian territorial waters in the northern part of the Persian Gulf.

    “Iran has already provided the geographical coordinates of the detention to the British government and has sufficient evidence, including GPS navigator systems, to indicate the penetration of British military personnel 0.5 km deep into Iranian waters,” the embassy in London said.

    “Violation of international border and their intrusive act justified their detention,” it said in a written statement obtained by IRNA.

    In a corresponding statement, Britain’s deputy chief of defence staff, Vice Admiral Charles Style confirmed that his government had been given a second set of coordinates by Iran about the detentions that were in Iranian waters.

    But Styles also presented different British coordinates to claim that the British naval personnel were arrested 1.7 nautical miles inside Iraqi waters.

    The Iranian Embassy said that the two governments have been closely examining and discussing the case on a daily basis due to “its sensitive security aspects.” “We are confident that Iranian and British governments are capable of resolving this security case through their close contacts and cooperation in which would prevent the reoccurrence of such incidents in the area,” it said.

    The statement also reassured that as the investigation continued “all British marines and sailors are in good health and condition and they enjoy welfare and Iranian hospitality.” “We understand the anxiety of their families, but they must be assured that they are in safe hands and have a better life than the risky mission in the Persian Gulf waters,” it said.

    The embassy also added that the legal and technical issue had “no links to any other issues” and warned that unfounded speculation and provocative rhetoric can only be “counterproductive.”

    Issue of British marines to be settled through patience and respect to law

    TEHRAN, March 28 (Mehr News Agency) — Iran’s Foreign Ministry announced on Tuesday that the British embassy will be allowed to make contact with 15 sailors and marines seized by Iran as soon as a preliminary investigation has been completed.Iranian armed forces captured the British soldiers on Friday as they entered illegally into Iran’s territorial waters in the Persian Gulf.

    “After preliminary investigations are over contacts of the British embassy and consulate with the soldiers will be possible,” Foreign Ministry spokesman Mohammad Ali Hosseini said.

    Hosseini said, “The incursion of British soldiers into Iranian waters will be resolved through restraint and respect to law and regulations.”

    He said, “Media hyperbole and inexpert and provocative statements” will not speed up the issue of resolving the illegal entry of British military forces into Iranian waters.

    On Sunday, British Ambassador to Iran, Jeffrey Adams, held talks with Iranian Foreign Ministry Director General for Western Europe Ibrahim Rahimpur on the arrest of marines.

    Britain’s ambassador has asked for access to detained soldiers.

    ON Tuesday, Iran said the soldiers were healthy and being treated in a humane fashion.

    “They are in completely good health. Rest assured that they have been treated with humanitarian and moral behavior,” Hosseini told the Associated Press on Tuesday.

    Hosseini said the one woman in the group, Faye Turney, had complete privacy.

    “Definitely all ethics have been observed,” he said.

    “The case should follow procedures,” Hosseini added.

    In 2004, in a similar incident Iran stopped three British boats after they entered Iranian waters.

    Woman sailor ‘confesses’ on Iranian TV

    0

    Sam Knight

    Iran has broadcast a film of the lone woman among 15 Royal Navy personnel seized in the Gulf last week, in which she says she “obviously trespassed” into Iranian territory.

    Faye Turney is shown on film saying Britons 'obviously trespassed' into Iraqi waters and her captors are friendly

    As the seven sailors and eight Marines were paraded on Iranian state television, Leading Seaman Faye Turney was shown separately, wearing a headscarf and smoking a cigarette.

    An apparent recording of the 26-year-old said: “I am Leading Seaman Faye Turney. I come from England. I serve on Foxtrot Nine Nine. I have been in the Navy nine years. I live in England.”

    “I was arrested on Friday March 23. Obviously we trespassed into their waters. They were very friendly and very hospitable, very thoughtful, good people. They explained to us why we had been arrested. There was no aggression, no hurt, no harm.They were very, very compassionate.”

    The broadcast was accompanied by what was claimed to be a letter from Ms Turney, 26, to her parents, which was released by the Iranian Embassy in London. In the letter, Ms Turney said they had “apparently” gone into Iranian waters and repeated her assurances that was being treated well by her captors.

    “We were out in the boats when we were arrested by Iranian forces as we had apparently gone into Iranian waters,” the letter said. “I wish we hadn’t because then I’d be home with you all right now.”

    The footage, condemned immediately by the Foreign and Commonwealth Office as “completely unacceptable”, was made available at the end of a day of increasingly tense diplomatic gestures. This morning the Ministry of Defence published satellite coordinates which commanders said proved that the personnel were 1.7 nautical miles inside Iraqi waters when they were “ambushed” by the Iranian Revolutionary Guard.

    The Foreign Secretary, Margaret Beckett, then told MPs that Britain was immediately freezing all bilateral ties with Iran – except for negotiations directly concerning the 15. “They should not be under any doubt at all about how seriously we regard this act, which is unjustified and wrong,” Mrs Beckett said.

    Iran responded by stating that the “first stage” of the investigation into the capture was nearly complete and hinted that Ms Turney could be released as early as this evening. “Today or tomorrow, the lady will be released,” Manouchehr Mottaki, the Foreign Minister, said on the sidelines of an Arab summit in Riyadh.

    The sixth day of the hostage crisis began with a briefing by Vice-Admiral Style, Deputy Chief of the Defence Staff, who displayed nautical charts and photographs showing the position of the group when they were seized.

    Vice-Admiral Style said that their coordinates had been confirmed by the skipper of an Indian-registered merchant vessel that the sailors had just inspected when they were captured.

    The Navy chief said that the group were engaged in routine anti-smuggling patrols under a UN Security Council mandate at the time, operating with the authorisation of Baghdad.

    He also accused the Iranians of having changed their story over the weekend after being told that the coordinates Tehran initially gave for the incident showed that the patrol boats were in Iraqi waters.

    Minutes after the MoD press conference, the Prime Minister told the Commons that Britain was mobilising international support to show Iran how isolated it was. Mr Blair described the seizure as “completely unacceptable, wrong and illegal”.

    Responding to a question from David Cameron, the Conservative leader, about the rules of engagement the patrols were operating under, Mr Blair said that the sailors and Marines could have used force in self defence. But he was was quite satisfied that they had taken the right decision in not drawing their arms after being surrounded by six heavily armed Iranian Republic Guard vessels.

    “If they had engaged in military combat at the stage, there would undoubtedly have been severe loss of life,” he said.

    Mr Blair added by the time the crew of HMS Cornwall realised that the 15 had been detained and a Lynx helicopter dispatched to find them, they were already in Iranian waters – making intervention that much more dangerous.

    The vice-admiral said that far from being inside Iranian waters, the two boats were 1.7 nautical miles – almost two land miles – inside the Iraqi part of the Shatt al-Arab waterway, which forms the border between Iran and Iraq.

    Their exact postition – 29′ 50.36″ N, 048′ 43.08″E – was confirmed by a Global Positioning System (GPS) on one of the small patrol boats that was displayed on the Cornwall. It was confirmed on a subsequent fly-past of the site.

    In a statement to the Commons, Mrs Beckett said that the Government had tried to deal with the crisis through “private, but robust diplomacy”. When the Iranians’ mistake over the coordinates had been established, she had suggested to her Iranian counterpart that the situation “could be easily resolved” by releasing the detained Britons.

    But it was now clear that a change of tack was needed. Accordingly, Britain was mobilising diplomatic support to show Iran how isolated it was over the issue. The Foreign Secretary said that she had spoken to various world leaders, including the US Secretary of State, the Turkish Prime Minister and the foreign ministers of both Iraq and Iran.

    Mrs Beckett said that the Government had “no doubts about the facts or the legitimacy of our requirements”: that Tehran state where the detainees are being held, grant Britain consular access to them and give details of their release.

    The U.S. Terrorist Database

    0

    Bruce Schneier

    Interesting article about the terrorist database: Terrorist Identities Datamart Environment (TIDE).

    It’s huge:

    Ballooning from fewer than 100,000 files in 2003 to about 435,000, the growing database threatens to overwhelm the people who manage it. “The single biggest worry that I have is long-term quality control,” said Russ Travers, in charge of TIDE at the National Counterterrorism Center in McLean. “Where am I going to be, where is my successor going to be, five years down the road?”TIDE has also created concerns about secrecy, errors and privacy. The list marks the first time foreigners and U.S. citizens are combined in an intelligence database. The bar for inclusion is low, and once someone is on the list, it is virtually impossible to get off it. At any stage, the process can lead to “horror stories” of mixed-up names and unconfirmed information, Travers acknowledged.

    Mostly the article tells you things you already know: the list is riddled with errors, and there’s no defined process for getting on or off the list. But the most surreal quote is at the end, from Rick Kopel, the center’s acting director:

    The center came in for ridicule last year when CBS’s “60 Minutes” noted that 14 of the 19 Sept. 11 hijackers were listed — five years after their deaths. Kopel defended the listings, saying that “we know for a fact that these people will use names that they believe we are not going to list because they’re out of circulation — either because they’re dead or incarcerated. . . . It’s not willy-nilly. Every name on the list, there’s a reason that it’s on there.”

    Get that? There’s someone who deliberately puts wrong names on the list because they think the terrorists might use aliases, and they want to catch them. Given that reasoning, wouldn’t you want to put the entire phone book on the list?

    Pakistan intelligence staff killed

    0

    Armed men have attacked an army vehicle in a Pakistani tribal area, killing five members of the military’s spy agency, officials say.

    The attack on Tuesday happened in the Bajaur region bordering Afghanistan, where Pakistan authorities and tribal elders signed a deal on Monday to deny sanctuary to foreign fighters.

    Pakistani soldiers near  a border outpost in the

    A major and an assistant director of the military-run Inter-Services Intelligence (ISI) were killed in the attack, along with two other ISI officials and their driver, Moaz Khan, a local intelligence official, said.

    He said: “Masked men riding on a motorcycle opened fire on the vehicle when the ISI officials were coming to Bajur tribal district from Peshawar.

    “They also lobbed two hand grenades at the vehicle and fled.”

    Security officials gave the men’s ranks on condition of anonymity.

    They did not say what the ISI officials were doing in the area.

    Previous attacks

    Bajaur, one of Pakistan’s seven federally administered tribal zones bordering Afghanistan, was the scene of an air strike on a school in October 2006 that killed 80 people.

    Pakistani officials said it was an al-Qaeda training camp but locals said the victims were students.

    In January 2006, a purported CIA missile strike aimed at Ayman al-Zawahiri, the Egyptian deputy al-Qaeda leader, killed 18 people.

    Development deal

    Monday’s “anti-terror” agreement was signed at a ceremony attended by tribal elders near Khar, the main town of the Bajur region, said Malik Abdul Aziz, head of Bajaur’s tribal council.

    Aziz said local activists said they will not shelter foreign fighters, but it was unclear whether the deal included measures to prevent them joining Taliban operations.

    Aziz said: “After hectic efforts and talks with [local fighters in the tribal region], we have signed a peace deal with the government to help it fight terrorism.”

    In return for the tribal elders’ support, the government will expedite development projects in the region, he said.

    Officials argue that the development projects will counter the poverty that helps extremist groups find recruits among the tribal region’s young and unemployed.

    Critics say the government’s military pullback has instead handed even greater control to fighters.

    Hundreds of al-Qaeda fighters and Taliban fugitives sought refuge in the tribal belt after the fall of the Taliban regime in Afghanistan in 2001.

    Principal abducted

    Tuesday’s attack which killed the Pakistani intelligence officers occurred around the time the principal of a high school in nearby Tank was abducted.

    About a dozen armed pro-Taliban activists barged into the house of Farid Mehsud, principal of the Oxford Public School in Tank, which borders the South Waziristan tribal region, his relatives said.

    They “manhandled” family members and took Mehsud and his brother Humayun away in waiting cars, a close relative of the abductees said, requesting not to be identified by name.

    The relative quoted the armed men as saying: “If you destroy us, you cannot expect safety.”

    The principal on Monday had called for police protection after a group of armed men visited his school and others in a bid to recruit youth to fight against Nato and US forces in Afghanistan.

    In the same town, a militant recruiter and a policeman died in a clash on Monday.

    Earlier on Tuesday, fighters fired eight rockets at a paramilitary troop fort in Tank and troops retaliated, but the exchange of fire caused no casualties, officials said.

    Activists recently torched video shops and banned barbers from shaving beards in northwestern Pakistan, fuelling concern about the “Talibanisation” of the already conservative area.

    Pakistan poured thousands of troops into parts of the tribal belt to combat fighters who fled Afghanistan. Operations in the area have left 700 soldiers and 1,000 fighters dead.

    Agencies

    OFFICIAL ACCOUNT OF 9/11 FLIGHT CONTRADICTED BY GOVERNMENT’S OWN DATA

    0

    Pilots for 9/11 Truth, an international organization of pilots and aviation professionals, petitioned the National Transportation and Safety Board (NTSB) via the Freedom of Information Act to obtain their 2002 report, “Flight Path Study-American Airlines Flight 77”, consisting of a Comma Separated Value (CSV) file and Flight Path Animation, allegedly derived from Flight 77’s Flight Data Recorder (FDR).

    The data provided by the NTSB contradict the 9/11 Commission Report in several significant ways:

    1. The NTSB Flight Path Animation approach path and altitude does not support official events.
    2. All Altitude data shows the aircraft at least 300 feet too high to have struck the light poles.
    3. The rate of descent data is in direct conflict with the aircraft being able to impact the light poles and be captured in the Dept of Defense “5 Frames” video of an object traveling nearly parallel with the Pentagon lawn.
    4. The record of data stops at least one second prior to official impact time.
    5. If data trends are continued, the aircraft altitude would have been at least 100 feet too high to have hit the Pentagon.

    In August, 2006, members of Pilots for 9/11 Truth received these documents from the NTSB and began a close analysis of the data they contain. After expert review and cross check, Pilots for 9/11 Truth has concluded that the information in these NTSB documents does not support, and in some instances factually contradicts, the official government position that American Airlines Flight 77 struck the Pentagon on the morning of September 11, 2001.

    According to the 9/11 Commission Report, which relied heavily upon the NTSB Flight Path Study, American Airlines Flight 77 struck the Pentagon at 9:37:46 AM on the morning of September 11, 2001. However, the reported impact time according to the NTSB Flight Path Study is 09:37:45. Also according to reports, American Airlines Flight 77 struck the Pentagon and by doing so, struck down 5 light poles on Highway 27 in its path to the west wall.

    The information provided by the NTSB does not support the 9/11 Commission Report of American Airlines Flight 77 impact with the Pentagon.

    Pilots for 9/11 Truth is committed to discovering the truth surrounding the events of September 11, 2001. We have contacted both the NTSB and the FBI regarding these and other inconsistencies. To date, they have refused to comment on, correct, refute, retract or offer side-letters that might explain the discrepancies between what they claim are the data extracted from the FDR of AA Flight 77 and the official story alleging its crash into the Pentagon.

    As concerned citizens and professionals in the aviation industry, Pilots for 9/11 Truth asks, why have these discrepancies not been addressed by agencies within the United States Government? Why have they falsely represented their own data to the American people? Pilots for 9/11 Truth takes the position that an official government inquiry into these discrepancies is warranted and long overdue. We call upon our fellow citizens to write to their Congressional representatives to inform them of these discrepancies and call for an immediate investigation into this matter. For more information please visit pilotsfor911truth.org.

    Signed:

    Robert Balsamo
    4000+ Total Flight Time
    Former:
    Independence Air/Atlantic Coast AirlinesGlen Stanish
    15,000+ Total Flight Time
    American Airlines, ATA, TWA, ContinentalCaptain Russ Wittenberg (ret)
    30,000+ Total Flight Time
    Former Pan Am, United
    United States Air Force (ret)
    Over 100 Combat Missions Flown

    John Lear
    Son of Bill Lear
    Founder, creator of the Lear Jet Corporation
    More than 40 years of Flying
    19,000+ Total Flight Time

    Captain Jeff Latas
    USAF (ret)
    Captain – JetBlue Airways

    Ted Muga
    Naval Aviator – Retired Commander, USNR

    Col Robert Bowman USAF (ret)
    Directed all the �Star Wars� programs under Presidents Ford and Carter – 101 combat missions

    Alfons Olszewski
    Founder Veterans For Truth
    US Army (ret)
    Aircraft Maintenance Crew Chief

    Robin Hordon Former Boston Center Controller
    Commercial Pilot

    John Panarelli
    Friend and fellow aviator of John Ogonowski – Capt. AA #11
    11,000+ Total Flight Time
    Eastern Metro, Braniff, Ryan International, Emery
    Worldwide, Polar Air Cargo
    Lt. Colonel Shelton F. Lankford
    United States Marine Corps (ret)
    10,000+ Total Flight Time
    303 Combat MissionsCaptain Dan Govatos
    10,000+ Total Flight Time
    Former Chief Pilot of Casino Express airlines
    Director of Operations Training at Polar Air

    George Nelson
    Colonel USAF (Ret.)
    Licensed Commercial Pilot and Aircraft Mechanic

    Dennis Spear
    Army Aviator (ret)
    7000+ Total Flight Time Operations Officer, Aviation Safety Officer

    Captain Joe H. Ferguson
    30,000+ Total Flight Time (ret) USAF (ret)

    For complete member list please visit http://pilotsfor911truth.org/core.html

    Government Misconduct, Not Truthers, Most Insulting to 9/11 Heroes, Victims

    0

    Toxic air, abuse of recovery process and pothole scandal is the real disgrace

    Paul Joseph Watson

    A popular tactic to shut down debate on behalf of debunkers is to claim that asking questions about the official 9/11 story is insulting to the victims, and yet it is the progenitors of that myth, the government itself, that through its post-9/11 actions has inflicted the most misery and suffering upon ground zero heroes and victims.

    Frothing Neo-Con attack dogs like Bill O’Reilly and Sean Hannity, along with high profile 9/11 truth TV and newspaper hit pieces put out by the BBC and their ilk, have all regurgitated the emotional rhetoric that having skepticism towards the official 9/11 fairy tale is a direct attack on the memories of those lost on 9/11 and their loved ones.

    As is usually the case with arguments put forth by debunkers, the exact opposite is true.

    Many of the 9/11-related court proceedings against the government and the educational efforts that tie in with them, were organized directly by 9/11 victim groups. Bill Doyle, the head of the largest 9/11 families organization, states that around half of his members have serious questions about the attacks. Doyle himself lost his own son in the collapse of the twin towers and says the 9/11 Commission Report is “a total fallacy.”

    Continue…

    Children to ‘face criminal checks’

    1

    Tony BlairAll children could face compulsory checks to discover if they are at risk of turning into criminals, according to new plans announced by the Prime Minister.

    The controversial proposal would mean checks at important stages in a child’s life, such as the move from primary to secondary school, Tony Blair said.

    He also announced plans to further expand the DNA database to include ‘all suspected offenders who come into contact with the police’.

    Currently it is only people actually arrested who must give a DNA sample, which remains on record even if they are not charged, or are acquitted.

    The plans are part of a wide-ranging review of crime and security policy published by Number 10.

    The document said the government wanted to: ‘Establish universal checks throughout a child’s development to help service providers to identify those most at risk of offending.

    ‘These checks should piggyback on existing contact points such as the transition to secondary schools.’

    Other plans set out included publishing efficiency data on the courts for the first time, with the prospect of poor-performing courts facing measures to force improvements.

    Another proposal was extending the police’s ability to seize non-cash assets from criminals, such as plasma screen televisions, jewellery and laptop computers.

    Shadow home secretary David Davis said the proposals on child checks were an example of the ‘nanny state gone mad’.

    He added: ‘We would have great and grave concerns about any extension of the DNA database. This is an admission that Labour have failed on crime and justice.

    ‘All they have come up with is a swansong to try and secure some sort of legacy for Tony Blair. They should realise that they cannot put right in two months what they have got wrong over 10 years.’

    ©2007 Associated Newspapers Limited

    Judge dismisses lawsuit against Rumsfeld

    0

    Former Defense Secretary Donald H. Rumsfeld cannot be tried on allegations of torture in overseas military prisons, a federal judge said Tuesday in a case he described as “lamentable.”

    Defense Secretary Donald H. Rumsfeld U.S. District Judge Thomas F. Hogan threw out a lawsuit brought on behalf of nine former prisoners in Iraq and Afghanistan. He said Rumsfeld cannot be held personally responsible for actions taken in connection with his government job.

    The lawsuit contends the prisoners were beaten, suspended upside down from the ceiling by chains, urinated on, shocked, sexually humiliated, burned, locked inside boxes and subjected to mock executions.

    Lawyers for the American Civil Liberties Union and Human Rights First had argued that Rumsfeld and top military officials disregarded warnings about the abuse and authorized the use of illegal interrogation tactics that violated the constitutional and human rights of prisoners.

    “This is a lamentable case,” Hogan began his 58-page opinion.

    No matter how appealing it might seem to use the courts to correct allegations of severe abuses of power, Hogan wrote, government officials are immune from such lawsuits. Additionally, foreigners held overseas are not normally afforded U.S. constitutional rights.

    “Despite the horrifying torture allegations,” Hogan said, he could find no case law supporting the lawsuit, which he previously had described as unprecedented.

    Allowing the case to go forward, Hogan said in December, might subject government officials to all sorts of political lawsuits. Even Osama bin Laden could sue, Hogan said, claiming two American presidents threatened to have him murdered.

    “There is no getting around the fact that authorizing monetary damages remedies against military officials engaged in an active war would invite enemies to use our own federal courts to obstruct the Armed Forces’ ability to act decisively and without hesitation,” Hogan wrote Tuesday.

    Had the Rumsfeld lawsuit been allowed to go forward, attorneys for the ACLU might have been able to force the Pentagon to disclose what officials knew about abuses at prisons such as Abu Ghraib prison in Iraq and what was done to stop it.

    Hogan also dismissed the charges against other officials named in the lawsuit: retired Lt. Gen. Ricardo S. Sanchez, former Brig. Gen. Janis L. Karpinski and Col. Thomas M. Pappas.

    Karpinski, whose Army Reserve unit was in charge of the Abu Ghraib prison, was demoted and is the highest-ranking officer punished in the scandal. Sanchez, who commanded U.S. forces in Iraq, retired from the Army and said his career was a casualty of the prison scandal.

    The ACLU and Justice Department had no immediate response to the ruling.

    http://news.yahoo.com/s/ap/20070327/ap_on_go_ot/detainee_abuse_rumsfeld

    Public webcams, not CCTV, urged to avoid Big Brother society

    0

    Ian Sample

    Footage from surveillance cameras must be made freely available to the public if Britain is to avoid becoming a Big Brother state, researchers warned yesterday.Under the proposals, networks of CCTV cameras would be turned into public webcams, allowing those under surveillance to see where cameras are directed, what images are recorded and who is viewing the footage.

    The recommendations, in a report called Dilemmas of Privacy and Surveillance, published by the Royal Academy of Engineering, come as the Home Office and police forces prepare to upgrade national CCTV networks amid concern that evidence from the cameras is often too poor in quality to use in criminal investigations.

    The review was ordered after the bombings in London on July 7 2005, when police found that images recorded by many cameras were not good enough to help investigations.

    The creation of “community webcams” would redress the imbalance of power between those in front and those behind the cameras by making organisations and individuals who use the information as accountable as those being filmed, the researchers claim.

    “We are the most watched-over society in the world, and if we are being watched, then we need to be able to watch the watchers,” said Ian Forbes, a consultant and co-author of the report.

    Britain has an estimated 5m surveillance cameras operated by councils and private companies – roughly one for every 12 people – but footage from them is unavailable to the public. The rise in surveillance systems has alarmed some MPs, and prompted the Commons home affairs select committee to launch an inquiry into so-called Big Brother Britain this week.

    The report says: “The greatest value of this sort of “community webcam” would be its power to prevent a Big Brother state … Community members could object if they felt particular cameras were unnecessary or unnecessarily intrusive. This would limit the potential for voyeuristic or prejudicial misuse of surveillance.”

    The report also raises fears over the security of personal details held by supermarkets, credit card companies and health authorities. Leaked health records, it says, could jeopardise people’s employment prospects, or even put them at risk of attack.

    UK in ‘discreet talks’ with Iran

    1

    BBC

    Faye Turney was interviewed by the BBC last week

    The government is attempting to “discreetly” talk to the Iranians to secure the release of 15 Royal Navy personnel, Downing Street has said.

    Tony Blair’s spokesman said that if the talks were unsuccessful, the government may have to become “more explicit”.

    He said they were “utterly confident” the 15 had been in Iraqi, not Iranian, waters, when they were captured.

    Meanwhile, Foreign Secretary Margaret Beckett will shorten a visit to Turkey to fly home to help manage the crisis.

    The 15 sailors and marines from HMS Cornwall were captured on Friday after searching a boat in the Gulf, off the coast of Iraq, which they suspected was smuggling cars.

    ‘No doubt’

    Iran says the British personnel were trespassing in Iranian waters when they were seized – but the prime minister said the group were in Iraqi waters under a UN mandate.

    The prime minister’s spokesman said the matter was being dealt with “privately” but the Iranians could be “in no doubt that we expect the immediate release of our personnel”.

    Earlier, Mr Blair warned of a “different phase” if diplomacy failed to secure their release.

    His spokesman said he was referring to a “different way” of handling talks, which could involve making public reasons why the UK was certain the group was in Iraqi waters.

    It is understood this could include producing evidence such as boat co-ordinates and details of the searched vessel apparently still anchored in Iraqi waters.

    The spokesman told reporters: “We are utterly confident that we were in Iraqi waters, and not just marginally in Iraqi waters but in Iraqi waters. It’s a case of tactics and if and when we have to prove that.”

    However, one high-ranking Iraqi official has expressed surprise that British forces were operating in the area.

    Brigadier-General Hakim Jassim, commander of Iraq’s territorial waters, said: “Usually there is no presence of British forces in that area, so we were surprised and we wondered whether the British forces were inside Iraqi waters or inside Iranian regional waters.”

    The BBC has been told the group are being held at an Iranian Revolutionary Guards Corps base in Tehran.

    They have been held for five days, but are said to be being treated humanely.

    Commons statement

    On Tuesday, Defence Secretary Des Browne chaired a meeting of ministers and officials – under the auspices of the government’s “civil contingencies committee” known as Cobra – to discuss the situation.

    Officials said it was intended to ensure coordination across Whitehall and keep civil servants updated on the latest developments.

    Cobra leads responses to national crises and convened in recent years for the 7 July London bombings, the fuel protests and 11 September attack.

    It is understood that while still in Turkey, Mrs Beckett spoke to Iran’s Foreign Minister Manouchehr Mottaki to push again for immediate consular access to them.

    The Associated Press news agency reported that Iranian officials had repeated assurances that British diplomats would get access to the detainees once their inquiry into the incident was complete.

    On Wednesday, Mrs Beckett is expected to make a statement to the Commons.

    Faye Turney, one of the 15 captured, was interviewed by the BBC last week.

    She said: “Sometimes you may be called upon, and when you do you’ve just got to deal with it and get on with it”.

    Meanwhile, her family, from Shrewsbury, Shropshire, have said it is a “very distressing time” for them.

    Gulf Map

    Binning ID Cards

    0

    Liverpool joins in national day of action against ID Cards

    Liverpool Defy ID

    A giant mock ID card in a bin proved to be an eye-catching symbol to draw the attention of lunchtime shoppers in Liverpool city centre this afternoon. The Liverpool Defy ID group handed out leaflets and talked to passers-by about the government’s ID card plans, as part of a national day of action, called to coincide with the opening of the first of the new passport interview (interrogation) centres that mark the next step towards ID card Britain.

    69 new passport-processing centres will open over the next few weeks, and new applicants will all have to travel (at their own expense) to one of them to undergo an interview. Next year people will have to give fingerprints too – maybe you thought fingerprinting was for criminals, but no, in a surveillance society we are all turned into suspect individuals!

    Buried within a story about how 10,000 fraudulent passport applications are granted every year (clearly timely propaganda to justify this new more troublesome passport procedure) are more details about how the passport interviews will work, and how bureacrats will snoop about in government & financial databases to pull together information about applicants’ lives:

    “IPS announced that adult first-time passport applicants would have to attend face-to-face interviews from May.

    The IPS executive director, Bernard Herdan, said applicants would be expected to know answers from a pool of around 200 questions about their ancestry, financial history and previous addresses.

    “We will not ask questions to which we don’t know the answers,” he said. “Before the interview takes place, we will have cross-checked that individual against various databases in order to uncover information about them.”

    The questions are intended to ensure that applicants are the people they claim to be and uncover any cases of identity fraud, he added.

    Applicants will be asked who lives with them, whether they have a mortgage, where and when their parents were born and which bank accounts they hold, and will also face questions about the counter-signatory to their passport application.” 
     http://www.guardian.co.uk/terrorism/story/0,,2038442,00.html

    “Take a look at the hoops through which new applicants will have to jump. Filling in the application form is just the start. Once the IPS has established that the applicant exists and is entitled to a passport, he will be invited to call a 24-hour advice line to arrange a face-to-face interview at one of 69 new centres (costing £180 million).

    The “interrogation” (their word) will take between 10 and 20 minutes, though it will be conducted in a “non-threatening manner”; how very comforting. A list of up to 200 personal questions will be drawn on to authenticate people’s identities.

    And that is the nub of this intrusive and costly (£66 for a passport, plus the travel costs) new process. The Government is in fact installing the machinery for its misguided and ludicrously expensive system of ID cards ” 
     http://www.telegraph.co.uk/opinion/main.jhtml;jsessionid=XVCMEP5ZRXCHHQFIQMGSFF4AVCBQWIV0?xml=/opinion/2007/03/21/dl2101.xml

    Links to more news & information about ID cards, state surveillance & threats to privacy & freedom: 
     http://del.icio.us/liverpool_defy_id/ 

     http://www.defy-id.org.uk |  http://www.no2id.net |  http://www.renewforfreedom.org

    BARCODE DEMO AT ID OFFICE

    0

    PROTESTERS dressed as barcoded robots to demonstrate against ID cards yesterday.

    Dozens of campaigners gathered at Edinburgh’s new passport interview centre to protest against plans to keep personal records on file.

    DavidMuxworthy, Edinburgh secretary of campaign group No2ID, branded plans to fingerprint applicants “sinister”.

    He said:”People from large areas of the Lothians and Fife needing a new passport will be forced to travel to Edinburgh to be interrogated and fingerprinted and to surrender 49 pieces of personal information for the database.”

    The centre, in the city’s Haymarket Terrace, is to open later this year and is one of 69 offices across the UK.

    AHome Office spokesman said: “By asking applicants to come and see us we will be able to make sure people are who they say they are.”

     

    Meanwhile, experts warned last night that terrorists could rig up a bomb that would only explode when a target’s ID card passed close to it.

     

    The Royal Academy of Engineering also warned the Government that unless information on ID cards and biometric passports was encoded, it could be read by criminals with the right antenna and other equipment.

     http://www.dailyrecord.co.uk/news/tm_headline=barcode-demo-at-id-office&method=full&objectid=18813667&siteid=66633-name_page.html

    FBI Used Inaccurate Info to Get Surveillance Warrants

    0

    Luke O’Brien

    The FBI, already taking flak for the abuse of national security letters used to spy on Americans, admitted to The Washington Post today that its agents “repeatedly provided inaccurate information to win secret court approval of surveillance warrants in terrorism and espionage cases.”

    Warrants issued by the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Court allow for physical and electronic surveillance and are some of the most secretive and loosely vetted investigative tools available to federal law enforcement. But time and time again the FBI supplied the court with bad data to obtain warrants, according to the Post and an internal bureau audit last year. FBI agents even used information from deactivated informants. The errors were bad enough that FISC’s chief judge complained to the Justice Department.

    The FBI has chalked its mishaps up mostly to sloppiness and lack of internal oversight. But the extent to which the FBI has violated civil liberties and run roughshod over the law — thousands of cases over several years — suggests the bureau’s problems go beyond mere incompetence.

    RINF Film Screening: A World Without Cancer

    2

    13 APRIL, 7.30PM, GREGSON ARTS AND COMMUNITY CENTRE, LANCASTER

    On Friday, 13 April, 2007, local events organiser RINF.COM will hold a screening of A WORLD WITHOUT CANCER: THE STORY OF VITAMIN B17. The film will be screened at 7.30pm at the Gregson Arts and Community Centre, Moor Lane, Lancaster.

    Edward Griffin in his book ‘A World Without Cancer’ gives eight detailed case studies of patients who took laetrile and recovered from cancer in the 1960s and 1970s (p11 9ff). Doctor Binzel in his book ‘Alive and Well’ sites 21 cases from the 1970s up to 1992 (p11 4ff) and compares his own results in his general practice to those of conventional treatment statistics.

    If patients started vitamin B17 and nutritional therapy when first diagnosed, and did not have chemotherapy or radiotherapy then Doctor Ernst T Krebs, Jr claimed a 98% success rate. The Del Rio Hospital of Tijuana claims a nearly 100% success rate with verging cases, i.e. with those who have not had chemotherapy or radiotherapy.

    Food such as wild blackberries and apricot seeds can contain high amounts of the B17 vitamin (above 500 mgs. Nitriloside per 100 grams food). There are isolated tribes and peoples around the world who do not have cancer. These include the Abkhazians, the Hopi and Navajo Indians, the Hunzas, Eskimos and the Karakorum. What they have in common is that their diet is rich in vitamin B17.

    With billions of pounds spent each year on research, with other billions taken in the sale of cancer related drugs, and with fundraising at an all time high, there are now more people making a living from cancer than dying from it.

    About RINF Events – Real World Action & Empowerment

    RINF events take place in the UK, usually free and always informative. RINF founder, Michael Meaney, often (but not always) works with a wide range of groups and people, to organise these events which include speakers and film screenings. Recent events include talks with Annie Machon and David Shayler (ex-MI5 whistleblowers), Ian R. Crane (chair of the British 9/11 Truth Campaign) and William Rodriguez (last man out of the Twin Towers). Funding, equipment, promotional material and room hire for events comes directly from the RINF.COM web site. If you’re interested in holding events in your area, please get in touch.

    US Soldiers Shoot Unarmed Civilians

    0

    I ask readers to please forward this video to mainstream media outlets and to those in government demanding that action be taken to investigate this apparent murder of innocent Iraqi civilians. We can not witness murder and not take action without being complicit in the crime! Brought to you from www.ichblog.eu

    New documents expose White House lies

    1

    New documents expose White House, Justice Department lies in firing of US attorneys

    Barry Grey

    A new batch of email messages and other documents released Friday by the Justice Department to congressional investigators provide conclusive evidence that Attorney General Alberto Gonzales lied about his involvement in the politically motivated firing of eight United States attorneys last year. The glaring contradictions between the documents and Gonzales’ statements earlier this month point to a systematic cover-up of the White House role in the purge of the federal prosecutors.

    Gonzales has had the closest ties to President Bush going back more than a decade, when he served as Bush’s counsel and then state supreme court judge during the latter’s stint as governor of Texas, continuing as Bush’s White House counsel and then as attorney general in Bush’s second term.

    Included in the 283 pages of records released Friday is a memorandum of an hour-long meeting between Gonzales and his senior aides on November 27, 2006 to review the plan to fire seven of the eight US attorneys. The eighth had already been fired earlier in the year.

    The meeting in the attorney general’s conference room included Gonzales, Deputy Attorney General Paul J. McNulty and four other senior Justice Department officials, including the aide who oversaw the firings, then-Chief of Staff D. Kyle Sampson. The firings went into effect on December 7, 2006, after they had been approved by Bush.

    The meeting flatly contradicts Gonzales’ statements at a March 13, 2007 press conference at which he denied having played any direct or significant role in the firings or having had any detailed knowledge of them. “I was not involved in seeing any memos,” Gonzales said at the news conference, “was not involved in any discussions about what was going on.”

    The attorney general claimed that the entire matter had been organized by Sampson and blamed his subordinate for misleading statements about the firings given by himself and other officials to Congress, claiming that Sampson had failed to properly keep the attorney general’s office informed. One day before the press conference, Sampson resigned his post as chief of staff.

    Prior to the release of the latest series of documents on Friday, Sampson announced that he had agreed to testify under oath before the Senate Judiciary Committee The hearing is set for Thursday, March 29. Sampson and his attorney have made it clear that they reject Gonzales’ version of events.

    In a further sign of disarray, the Justice Department announced Friday that Monica Goodling, a senior counselor to Gonzales who worked with Sampson on the firings, had taken an indefinite personal leave from her job.

    The crisis over the firings intensified last week with votes by the judiciary committees in both the House of Representatives and the Senate to authorize the issuing of subpoenas to compel Bush’s chief political aide Karl Rove, his former White House counsel Harriet Miers and other White House officials to testify under oath before the committees. Bush declared that he would refuse to allow them to testify under oath on the grounds of executive privilege.

    The Democratic-controlled committees have made no decision whether to actually issue the subpoenas, and Arlen Specter, the ranking Republican on the Senate Judiciary Committee, is seeking to broker a compromise along lines acceptable to the White House.

    At least four Republican lawmakers have joined a growing chorus of Democrats demanding Gonzales’ resignation. The purge of the US attorneys was the major topic on the Sunday television interview programs. But Bush continues to publicly back his long-time political crony. He used his weekly Saturday radio address to reassert his support for the firings and for his attorney general.

    Gonzales’ stonewalling and deception are aimed not only at saving his own position, but at protecting the White House and Bush himself. Last week it emerged that the thousands of pages of email messages and other documents turned over by the Justice Department to investigators contain a large gap. There is almost nothing from November 16 of last year to December 7, the day seven of the firings occurred.

    One of the last emails prior to this period was sent by Sampson to then-White House counsel Miers, and includes a request that the White House approve the plan. In other words, the gap covers precisely a period when top White House officials, possibly including Bush himself, would have likely been heavily involved.

    Justice Department officials initially claimed that the White House had little role in the plan to fire the prosecutors, merely approving it after it had been drawn up by Justice Department officials. But email messages and other documents released to Congress earlier this month showed that the plan had been hatched by White House officials, primarily Rove and Miers, soon after the beginning of Bush’s second term in 2005.

    Then administration officials claimed the dismissals were prompted by performance problems with the prosecutors and denied any political motivation. That ruse collapsed when it emerged that most of the attorneys had excellent performance ratings and that Republican legislators had pressed the Justice Department to fire the New Mexico US attorney, and a second prosecutor, in Arkansas, was dismissed to make room for a former aide to Rove.

    In fact, the firings reveal a calculated drive to eliminate US attorneys who balked at using their positions to protect corrupt Republican politicians, and pursue trumped-up, politically motivated prosecutions of Democrats, including some intended to reverse the results of elections.

    One of the fired prosecutors, Carol Lam of San Diego, California, had successfully prosecuted Republican Congressman Randy Cunningham, who was convicted and jailed for accepting $2.4 million in bribes from military contractors She was planning to extend her investigation to a second Republican congressman.

    Another fired prosecutor, David Iglesias of Albuquerque, New Mexico, was targeted after he refused to succumb to pressure from New Mexico’s Republican Senator Peter Domenici and Congresswoman Heather Wilson to file corruption charges against local Democratic politicians in advance of the November, 2006 elections. Wilson was facing a hotly contest race for reelection at the time.

    Appearing on NBC television’s “Meet the Press” program on Sunday, Iglesias was asked whether he believed he had been removed for political reasons. “Absolutely, yes,” he replied.

    John McKay of Seattle, Washington, another fired prosecutor, had resisted political pressure and concluded there was no basis for convening a federal grand jury to investigate vote fraud charges following the 2004 gubernatorial election, which was narrowly won by the Democratic candidate.

    Paul K. Charlton of Arizona had been on the “retain” list compiled by then-Justice Department Chief of Staff Sampson in February of 2005, but, according to a McClatchy newspaper report, “by September of 2006–after it became clear that Charlton had launched an investigation of Rep. Rick Renzi [an Arizona Republican]–Sampson included the Arizona prosecutor on another list of US attorneys ‘we now should consider pushing out.’”

    It is widely believed that US Attorney Margaret M. Chiara of Grand Rapids, Michigan was dismissed because of her personal opposition to the death penalty. The Bush administration and Gonzales have made a point of pursuing capital punishment in states, such as Michigan, with a history of opposition to the death penalty.

    This type of purge of US attorneys in the middle of a presidential term has no precedent in US politics. It constitutes a serious attack on democratic rights, because the aim is to directly and completely subordinate the judicial system to the right-wing political aims and agenda of the executive branch, eliminating any independence of the court system and turning it into an apparatus for the suppression of all opposition.

    It is a continuation and extension of the subversion of democratic processes seen in the attempt to reverse a presidential election through Independent Counsel Kenneth Starr’s trumped-up investigation and the ensuing impeachment of Bill Clinton, and the outright theft of the 2000 election.

    The purge of federal prosecutors is, moreover, only one aspect of a far broader process of subordinating the Justice Department to the right-wing, anti-democratic agenda of the Bush administration. Last week, several veterans of the Justice Department’s Civil Rights Division testified at a House Judiciary Subcommittee hearing on the administration’s perversion of that division for the purpose of suppressing voting rights and manipulating elections.

    “The political decision-making process that led to the dismissal of eight United States attorneys was standard practice in the Civil Rights Division years before these revelations,” said Joseph D. Rich, recently retired head of the division’s voting rights section. He and other witnesses testified that their superiors, who were political appointees, repeatedly blocked cases that might harm the electoral prospects of Republicans while prodding the staff to pursue cases that stood to damage Democrats’ prospects.

    They focused on major voting case decisions over the last six years that have benefited the Republican Party. In particular, they cited a 2005 Georgia law that required voters to provide photo identification. Staff attorneys warned that the law would disenfranchise large number of voters, mostly poor and black, who did not possess driver’s licenses or other prescribed forms of identification. The staff objections were ignored, they said, and the Justice Department approved the Georgia ID rule 24 hours after the staff report was filed.

    Rich and other witnesses also spoke of redistricting cases that bolstered the Republicans. Delays by political appointees in the Justice Department allowed “the Republican Party in Mississippi to obtain implementation of a congressional redistricting plan that had been drawn up at the party’s behest,” Rich said in congressional testimony.

    He also said that unanimous staff objections to the Texas redistricting plan engineered by the now-deposed and indicted House majority leader, Tom DeLay, were ignored and the plan was approved with the support of Republican officials in the department.

    In another major case, Bush loyalists in Attorney General Gonzales’ office intervened at the last minute to weaken a landmark racketeering lawsuit against tobacco companies and drastically reduce the financial penalties demanded by federal prosecutors. That was the testimony given last week by Sharon Y. Eubanks, the leader of the Justice Department team that prosecuted the 2005 case.

    She said that a supervisor demanded in the final stages of the trial that she drop recommendations that tobacco executives be removed from their corporate positions for lying to the public, and that she lower the proposed penalty from $130 billion to $10 billion. She added that the supervisor ordered her to tell key witnesses to change their testimony.

    To this point, Democratic leaders in Congress have assiduously avoided broaching more fundamental issues, such as the pervasive and illegal domestic spying conducted by the Bush administration and agencies such as the National Security Agency (NSA) and the Federal Bureau of Investigation, a unit of the Justice Department. Earlier this month, the Justice Department’s inspector general issued a report revealing that the FBI, since the passage of the 2001 Patriot Act, has issued well over 150,000 “national security letters,” which enable the federal police agency to obtain personal data on hundreds of thousands of US citizens and residents without a court warrant.

    The Democrats, who voted overwhelmingly to pass the Patriot Act and then supplied the needed votes to renew it, and who have rubber-stamped the domestic spying operations of the NSA, have no intention of conducting a serious struggle against the anti-democratic practices of the Justice Department, or pursuing those in the White House who have spearheaded its lawless actions.

    To a large extent, the Democrats have seized on the scandal surrounding the US attorney firings to divert public attention from their collusion in the continuation and escalation of the US slaughter in Iraq, and to cover up their complicity in the overall assault on democratic rights and the moves toward police state forms of rule.

    American raid and arrests set scene for capture of marines

    0

    Patrick Cockburn

    At 3am on 11 January US military forces raided the Iranian liaison office in the Kurdish capital Arbil and detained five Iranian officials who are still prisoners.

    The attack marked a significant escalation in the confrontation between the US and Iran.

    Britain is inevitably involved in this as America’s only important foreign ally in Iraq. In fact the US raid could have had even more significant consequences if the Americans had captured the Iranian official they were targeting. Fuad Hussein, the chief of staff of the Kurdish president Massoud Barzani, told The Independent that “they were after Mohammed Jafari, the deputy chairman of Iran’s National Security Council.”

    It is a measure of the difficulty America has in getting its close allies in Iraq, notably the Kurds, to join it in confronting Iran that Mr Jafari was in Arbil as part of an Iranian delegation. He had just visited Mr Barzani in his mountain-top headquarters at Salahudin and earlier he met with Iraqi President Jalal Talabani in Dokan in eastern Kurdistan.

    The political links between Iran and Iraq will be difficult to sever. Most Iraqi political leaders, Arab or Kurdish, were exiles in Iran or in Syria. They are also conscious that one day the US will withdraw from Iraq but Iran will always be there.

    Some businessmen in Arbil scent profitable opportunities as the UN tightens its embargo on trade with Iran, announced at the weekend by the UN. As official trade is squeezed, they foresee remunerative possibilities for smuggling goods in and out of Iran.

    Economically, northern Iraq needs Iran more than Iran needs it. Iranian petrol commands a premium price because it is considered pure and Kurdistan is eager to increase its supply of electricity, of which it is permanently short, from Iran.

    In terms of US domestic and international politics, an American confrontation with Iran on the nuclear issue probably makes sense. Washington can rally support against Iran in a way that it cannot do when it looks for support for its occupation of Iraq. Seeing the US bogged down in Iraq, the Iranians may have overplaying their hand in developing nuclear power.

    Inside Iraq, confrontation with Iran does not make much political sense. All America’s allies in Iraq have close ties with Iran. The only anti-Iranian community in Iraq is the five million Sunni who have been fighting the US for the past four years.

    The US raid on Arbil in January would have had far more serious consequences if Mr Jafari had been abducted. As it was, the seizure of five Iranian officials seems to have set the scene for the Iranian Revolutionary Guards seizing 15 British sailors and marines.

    Ex-Reagan official Stockman charged with fraud

    0

    David Stockman, a former top budget official in the Reagan White House, was charged Monday with overseeing a sweeping fraud at troubled a auto parts supplier he headed before it collapsed into bankruptcy.
    Stockman was the former chairman and CEO of Collins & Aikman (CKCRQ), which makes auto parts.

    David Stockman, former budget director during President Reagan's tenure, leaves Manhattan federal court followed by his attorney, Elkan Abramowitz.Stockman, 60, was one of four former Collins & Aikman executives named in the indictment unsealed Monday in U.S. District Court in Manhattan. Four other former company employees including a former treasurer have already pleaded guilty in the case, prosecutors said.

    The company, based in Southfield, Mich., cooperated in the investigation and was rewarded with a non-prosecution agreement calling for it to continue to help the government, prosecutors said.

    The indictment charged Stockman and three others with conspiracy to commit securities fraud, making false statements in annual and quarterly reports, making false entries in books and records, and lying to auditors as well as committing bank fraud, wire fraud and obstruction of an agency proceeding.

    The others charged in the indictment were J. Michael Stepp, 62, of Charlotte; David Cosgrove, 48, of Rochester, Mich.; and Paul Barnaba, 37, of Orion, Mich. All three pleaded not guilty and were released on $500,000 bail. They did not immediately comment.

    Four others faced charges related to the scandal in separate court papers and had pleaded guilty, prosecutors said.

    At a news conference, U.S. Attorney Michael Garcia said Stockman and his co-defendants “resorted to lies, tricks and fraud” to hide the truth about his failing company from investors and creditors.

    For Stockman, his personal investments were at risk, Garcia said. “His reputation was on the line as well,” he added.

    After he was freed on $1 million bail, Stockman walked out of the courthouse smiling.

    “I have done absolutely nothing wrong, except to help save this company from a very dire circumstance,” he told reporters. “All of my actions were motivated by an effort to save the company.”

    He said he had personally lost $13 million in the company’s collapse and a business he owned lost $360 million as he tried to rescue the company from a “brutal financial squeeze” by the three big domestic automakers.

    “This wasn’t any kind of a joy ride,” he said of his efforts to save Collins & Aikman, which included moving into a motel next to headquarters, working long hours without pay and spending millions of dollars of his own money on company expenses. “This was a disaster.”

    He added: “I didn’t line my pockets in any way.”

    Stockman’s attorney, Elkan Abramowitz, said the evidence would show there was no looting or phony transactions, only disputes over accounting transactions. “We think this is not a crime,” Abramowitz said.

    The indictment said the crimes occurred when Stockman served on the board of directors of Collins & Aikman from 2000 through May 2005. He was chairman of the board from August 2003 to May 2005. Stepp was vice chairman of the board of directors. Cosgrove and Barnaba also were employed by C&A.

    According to court papers, Stockman responded to a financial crisis at the company in 2005 by directing it to delay paying its bills as long as possible.

    Meanwhile, Stockman allowed the company’s employees to mislead creditors about the company’s revenue and the ability of Collins & Aikman to pay its bills, prosecutors said.

    The government said Stockman personally decided which of the company’s suppliers and creditors would get paid and personally managed all of C&A’s liquidity during the crisis.

    The indictment also accused Stockman of misleading investors, saying he wanted to hide his own and other senior management’s involvement in a fraudulent scheme to skew the company’s accounting to hide its troubles.

    Separately, the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission brought civil charges against Stockman and other individuals, as well as against the company.

    If convicted, the defendants could face up to 30 years in prison on the most serious charge.

    Stockman was Reagan’s budget director from 1981 to 1985. He created a storm early in his tenure when he told an interviewer that he thought Reaganomics were a “Trojan horse” for the rich, and predicted huge budget deficits. He said later he was summoned to the White House “woodshed” for his comments.

    Stockman apologized and kept his job until 1985, when he resigned and wrote a book of scathing criticism of Reagan and his top aides.

    Stockman became a private equity investor after leaving government. He joined Collins & Aikman in 2002, soon after Heartland Industrial Partners, a buyout fund that he co-founded in 1999, bought a controlling stake in the company. Stockman and Heartland lost hundreds of millions of dollars when Collins & Aikman sought bankruptcy protection.

    Stockman left the company five days before it filed for bankruptcy in 2005. Collins is now reorganizing and has put most of its assets up for sale.

    The company was one of the world’s largest auto parts suppliers. Its products included interiors, carpets, acoustics, fabrics and convertible tops.

    Guantanamo hearing begins for Hicks

    0

    An Australian detainee at Guatanamo Bay in Cuba has become the first prisoner held at the US military base to face prosecution under revised US military tribunal rules.

    Hicks, pictured above in Kosovo, has been detained in Guantanamo Bay since early 2002 [AP]David Hicks, who has been held for five years without trial, is charged with providing material support for terrorism by fighting for al-Qaeda in Afghanistan.

    The 31-year-old former kangaroo skinner and a convert to Islam is the first detainee to come before a revised military tribunal created by the US congress after the supreme court last year found the Pentagon’s earlier version unconstitutional.

    Hicks is accused of fighting for al-Qaeda in Afghanistan during the US-led invasion in late 2001.

    He was originally charged with war crimes and conspiracy to commit murder, but now faces the less specific charge of providing material support for terrorism.

    Human rights groups have criticised the tribunal saying the process lacks legal safeguards, while the crime with which Hicks is charged did not even exist when he was captured in 2001.

    Plea deal

    Appearing before the tribunal for the initial the arraignment part of his trial, Hicks deferred entering a plea.

    Earlier his Australian lawyer, David McLeod, said Hicks was convinced he would not get a fair trial and has not ruled a deal to plead guilty if it would get him home sooner.

    McLeod said there had been discussions about a potential plea agreement under which Hicks would plead guilty in return for a reduced sentence.

    Australia has agreed a deal with the US that would allow Hicks to serve his sentence in Australia if he is convicted.

    Hearing

    Hicks's father, Terry, was allowed to meet During Monday’s hearing Hicks, wearing a khaki prison jumpsuit, told judge he was satisfied with his Pentagon-appointed attorney but wanted more defence lawyers and paralegals “to get equality with the prosecution.”

    But instead the judge, Marine Col. Ralph Kohlmann, said two civilian lawyers, including a defence department attorney, were not authorised to represent him.

    The two were ordered to leave the defence table when Hicks said he would not settle for them being designated as legal consultants.

    One of the lawyers, Joshua Dratel, said he refused to sign an agreement to abide by tribunal rules because he was concerned the provisions do not allow him to meet with his client in private.

    The US military flew Hicks’ father and sister to the base and allowed them to meet privately with him in the court building before the hearing started.

    Hicks has previously appeared before an earlier military tribunal system created by a presidential order, which the US supreme court later ruled unconstitutional.

    Last year the US congress, then under a Republican majority, passed a law authorising a reconstituted tribunal regime with some adjustments but still operating outside of regular US courts or military courts-martial.

    The commission law permits hearsay, evidence obtained through “coercion”, to be admitted to the case, and bars detainees from appealing their detention in US courts.

    Coercion

    Hicks’ lawyers and human rights monitors observing the hearings say the trials are rigged to ensure convictions and allow the information obtained through coercion.

    Hicks is not accused of involvement in the September 11 attacks on New York and Washington DC and Human Rights Watch has said he could easily be tried in a regular US court.

    Speaking to reporters before Monday’s arraignment hearing, Air Force Colonel Morris Davis, the chief prosecutor for the tribunals, said prosecution planned to prove Hicks had provided “support for the al-Qaeda organisation”.

    Davis admitted critics had effectively turned public opinion against the Guantanamo tribunals but said he expected that to change once the military begins presenting evidence.

    “I recognize that around the world, ‘Guantanamo,’ when you say the word, has a negative connotation,” he said.

    “One thing I hope is that in the way we conduct these proceedings, maybe we can change some of those attitudes.”

    http://english.aljazeera.net/NR/exeres/ECF0AF19-25A5-448E-8EE7-750C03F4B95E.htm

    RINF Film Screening: 9/11 Press For Truth

    0

    11 APRIL, 7:30PM, FRIENDS MEETING HOUSE, LANCASTER, FREE ADMISSION

    On Wednesday, 11 April, 2007, local events organisers will host a screening of 9/11 PRESS FOR TRUTH. The film will be screened at 7:30 p.m. at Friends Meeting House, Meeting House Lane, Lancaster. Admission is free.

    Drawing from Paul Thompson’s exhaustive research, 9/11 PRESS FOR TRUTH documents how family members of 9/11 victims compelled the greatest powers in Washington to conduct an investigation, only to watch the 9/11 Commission fail to answer most of their questions. Featuring overlooked news clips, buried stories, and government press conferences, the documentary reveals a pattern of official lies, deception and spin that raises disturbing and important questions.

    In 9/11 PRESS FOR TRUTH, five of the most prominent members of the ‘Family Steering Committee’ tell their story for the first time, providing the most powerful argument yet for why 9/11 still needs investigation.

    About RINF Events – Real World Action & Empowerment

    RINF events take place in the UK, usually free and always informative. RINF founder, Michael Meaney, often (but not always) works with a wide range of groups and people, to organise these events which include speakers and film screenings. Recent events include talks with Annie Machon and David Shayler (ex-MI5 whistleblowers), Ian R. Crane (chair of the British 9/11 Truth Campaign) and William Rodriguez (last man out of the Twin Towers). Funding, equipment, promotional material and room hire for events comes directly from the RINF.COM web site. If you’re interested in holding events in your area, please get in touch.

    Iraq, PNAC, 911, Where do all the Roads Lead?

    0

    We know the war in Iraq was based on lies and we know where those lies came from and how the press has covered it up. We know those same people in the DOD wrote up PNAC which called for a the war and an attack like 911. The Mossad was caught filming 911 and living next door to hijackers. Israel has been busted 3 times spying on the US since 911. Let me tell you who really put the bombs in the towers.

    1,000 Pound Fines By ID Card Secret Police

    0

    JAMES SLACK

    A police force will be set up to issue £1,000 fines to anyone who fails to update their personal details on the Government’s new database, it has emerged.

    The unit, part of the Identity and Passport Service, is expected to send the penalties by post, after snooping through computer records.

    Potential pitfalls include forgetting to tell the Government of a change of address or name, failing to notify officials of an error on the National Identity Register and failing to hand in an ID card belonging to a relative who has died. All cash raised will go to the Treasury.

    It has also emerged the register will be used as a ‘population database’ to replace the historic census.

    From 2009, anybody applying for a passport must enrol on the register and hand over a raft of details, likely to include financial data and address lists, as well as have fingerprints and a facial scan taken.

    Shadow Home Secretary David Davis said: “This sinister force will be collecting money from UK citizens to go straight into the Treasury. There is a real danger this will be another stealth tax.”

    The Home Office insisted the £1,000 fine for not returning a dead relative’s ID card was designed to prevent misuse. Officials promise to handle the return of such cards ‘sensitively’.

    They refused to say how many civil servants would be needed to create the new police force, though scores are likely to monitor the records of all Britons.

    Flight 77 – Black Box Data Analysis

    2

    Calum Douglas is an engineering student at Oxford Brookes University. An active 911 Truth researcher and lecturer, he is working with pilotsfor911truth.org. In a recent breakthrough using the ‘Freedom of Information’ act he has gained access to raw Black Box data from the flight recorder of Flight 77, that allegedly struck the Pentagon. It has subsequently been decoded and analysed. Here Calum presents his findings.

    Canadian Professor disputes official representation on 9/11

    0

    Paul Chen

    David Ray Griffin is widely recognized as one of the leading spokespersons of the 9/11 truth movement. This is by virtue of his previous four books on the subject. Professor Griffin and a growing list of scholars, other researchers as well as diverse experts and activists, reject the official Islamist mastermind conspiracy theory about 9/11 advanced by Establishment interests.
    Although the 9/11 truth movement was long ignored by the U.S. government and the mainstream media, recent polls have shown that (as Time magazine has acknowledged) the rejection of the official theory has become “a mainstream political phenomenon.”

    It is not surprising, therefore, that the U.S. government and the Big Business controlled media have shifted tactics. No longer ignoring the 9/11 truth movement, they have released a flurry of stories and reports aimed at debunking it.

    In David Ray Griffin’s new book entitled Debunking 9/11, shows that these attempts can themselves be easily debunked.

    “Debunking 9/11 is a superb compendium of the strong body of evidence showing the official U.S. Government story of what happened on September 11, 2001 to be almost certainly a monstrous series of lies. Tragically, the entire course of U.S. foreign and domestic policies since that date has grown out of these almost certain falsehoods,” says Bill Christison, former senior official of the CIA.

    Mr. Christison further indicates that, “This single book could (and should) provide the basis for the United Nations International Court of Justice, or some specially constituted global body (independent of the U.S.) to investigate with highest priority, and publicly report its findings about, the charge that unknown elements within the U.S. Government, and possibly some individuals elsewhere closely allied to the U.S., caused or contributed to causing the events of September 11 to happen.”

    Besides demonstrating the pitiful failure of “Debunking 9/11 Myths” (published by Popular Mechanics and endorsed by Senator John McCain), Professor Griffin critically challenges recent reports and stories put out by the US Department of State, the National Institute of Standards and Technology, the New York Times, Vanity Fair, and Time magazine.

    Professor Griffin also responds to criticisms of these efforts by left-leaning and Christian publications — which one might have expected to be supportive.

    Throughout these critiques, Griffin shows that the charge that is regularly levelled against critics of the official theory — that they employ irrational and unscientific methods to defend conclusions based on faith — actually applies more fully to those who defend the official theory.

    “Considering how the 9/11 tragedy has been used by the Bush administration to propel us into immoral wars again and again, I believe that David Ray Griffin’s provocative questions about 9/11 deserve to be investigated and addressed,” says Howard Zinn, author of A People’s History of the United States.

    “Professor Griffin is the nemesis of the 9/11 cover-up. This new book destroys the credibility of the NIST and Popular Mechanics reports and annihilates his critics,” says Paul Craig Roberts, Assistant Secretary of the U.S. Treasury during the Reagan administration.

    “David Ray Griffin hits another one out of the park by taking on the left gatekeepers and the mass media for the lies and cover-up called ‘the official story of 9/11/01,’ which is the greatest conspiracy theory ever perpetrated on the American public. I highly recommend this book for all thinking Americans,” further indicates Meria Heller, Producer Host of the Meria Heller Show (www.meria.net).

    This book, by debunking the most prevalent attempts to refute the evidence cited by the 9/11 truth movement, shows that this movement’s central claim — that 9/11 was an inside job — remains the only explanation that fits the facts.

    About the Author

    David Ray Griffin is professor of philosophy of religion and theology, emeritus, at Claremont School of Theology and Claremont Graduate University in Claremont, California, where he remains a co-director of the Center for Process Studies. His 30 books include The New Pearl Harbor: Disturbing Questions about the Bush Administration and 9/11 (2004), The 9/11 Commission Report: Omissions and Distortions (2005), 9/11 and American Empire (2006, ed. with Peter Dale Scott), and Christian Faith and the Truth behind 9/11 (2006)

    Sailors admitted incursion – Iran

    0

    BBC

    Royal Navy personnel seized at gunpoint by Iran in the Gulf have admitted being in the country’s waters, an Iranian general has claimed.

    Gen Ali Reza Afshar told Iranian media the 15 personnel were being interrogated, but were in good health.

    Sailors admitted incursion - Iran

    The Foreign Office could not say where the group was being held. It insists they had not been in Iranian waters.

    Earlier, minister Lord Triesman met with the Iranian ambassador in London to demand their immediate release.

    In the hour-long meeting, Lord Triesman also sought assurances about the group’s welfare and asked that they are seen by consular staff.

    Britain’s UN ambassador, Sir Emyr Jones Parry, told BBC World TV that he had hoped to raise the matter with Iran’s foreign minister at the UN on Saturday, but was prevented by the Security Council’s debate over Iran’s nuclear programme.

    ‘Approach him’

    Sir Emyr said: “I would have wished very much to have had the opportunity to approach the foreign minister and simply ask for the release of those sailors.

    “Unfortunately, he allowed the debate to continue for 90 minutes before he joined us. He then assailed us for 40 minutes and then left before anyone else, and was shepherded out of the building.”

    Iran’s Fars news agency earlier said the group of sailors, which includes one woman, was flown to Tehran, arriving in the capital at 1200 local time (0830 GMT).

    But that report was later withdrawn from the agency’s website.

    Meanwhile, the German presidency of the European Union has demanded the immediate release of the personnel.

    The 15 were seized on Friday after boarding a boat in the Gulf.

    They were from HMS Cornwall, based in Plymouth – the flagship of the coalition-Iraqi force which patrols Iraqi territorial waters in the northern Gulf to combat smuggling.

    They had inspected an Iraqi boat before returning to their two small boats where they were seized before being moved along the Shatt al-Arab waterway to Iranian bases.

    The British task force commander, Commodore Nick Lambert, said there had been no evidence of fighting.

    Lord Triesman’s meeting with ambassador Rasoul Movahedian followed a meeting on Friday between Ibrahim Rahimpour, Iran’s director general for Western European affairs, and the UK’s charge d’affaires, Kate Smith, in Tehran.

    Former Royal Navy head Admiral Sir Alan West dismissed suggestions the British boats had strayed into Iranian waters.

    Sir Alan was first sea lord in 2004 when Iran detained eight British servicemen for three days after they allegedly strayed over the maritime border.

    The men were paraded blindfolded and made to apologise on Iranian TV before their release was agreed.

    Sir Alan told BBC News that tracking systems then had proven that the servicemen had been in Iraqi waters.

    “They can do lots of smokescreens and things like that but I am absolutely clear in my mind it would have been in our waters,” he said.

    The Ministry of Defence has been in contact with relatives of the group.

    The seizure follows claims that much of the violence against UK forces in Basra is being engineered by Iranian elements, which Tehran denies.

    FEMA was in New York the Night Before 9/11

    0

    In early 2001, at the start of Mr. Bush’s presidency, his Government’s Federal Emergency Management Agency (Fema) warned that a hurricane hitting New Orleans would be the deadliest of the three most likely catastrophes facing America; the others were a massive San Francisco earthquake and, prophetically, a terrorist attack on New York.

    Go here for the rest of the article…

    Gonzales, Cheney Blocked Appeals to Close Guantanamo

    0

    THOM SHANKER and DAVID E. SANGER 

    In his first weeks as defense secretary, Robert M. Gates repeatedly argued that the detention facility at Guantánamo Bay, Cuba, had become so tainted abroad that legal proceedings at Guantánamo would be viewed as illegitimate, according to senior administration officials. He told President Bush and others that it should be shut down as quickly as possible.

    Mr. Gates’s appeal was an effort to turn Mr. Bush’s publicly stated desire to close Guantánamo into a specific plan for action, the officials said. In particular, Mr. Gates urged that trials of terrorism suspects be moved to the United States, both to make them more credible and because Guantánamo’s continued existence hampered the broader war effort, administration officials said.

    Mr. Gates’s arguments were rejected after Attorney General Alberto R. Gonzales and some other government lawyers expressed strong objections to moving detainees to the United States, a stance that was backed by the office of Vice President Dick Cheney, administration officials said.

    As Mr. Gates was making his case, Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice joined him in urging that the detention facility be shut down, administration officials said. But the high-level discussions about closing Guantánamo came to a halt after Mr. Bush rejected the approach, although officials at the National Security Council, the Pentagon and the State Department continue to analyze options for the detention of terrorism suspects.

    The base at Guantánamo holds about 385 prisoners, among them 14 senior leaders of Al Qaeda, including Khalid Shaikh Mohammed, who were transferred to it last year from secret prisons run by the Central Intelligence Agency. Under the Pentagon’s current plans, some prisoners, including Mr. Mohammed, will face war crimes charges under military trials that could begin later this year.

    “The policy remains unchanged,” said Gordon D. Johndroe, a spokesman for the National Security Council.

    Even so, one senior administration official who favors the closing of the facility said the battle might be renewed.

    “Let’s see what happens to Gonzales,” that official said, referring to speculation that Mr. Gonzales will be forced to step down, or at least is significantly weakened, because of the political uproar over the dismissal of United States attorneys. “I suspect this one isn’t over yet.”

    Details of the internal discussions on Guantánamo were described by senior officials from three departments or agencies of the executive branch, including officials who support moving rapidly to close Guantánamo and those who do not. One official made it clear that he was willing to discuss the internal deliberations in part because of Mr. Gonzales’s current political weakness. The senior officials discussed the issue on ground rules of anonymity because it entailed confidential conversations.

    The officials said Mr. Gates and Ms. Rice expressed their concerns about Guantánamo in conversations with Mr. Bush and others, including Mr. Gonzales, beginning in January and onward. One widely discussed alternative would move the prisoners to military brigs in the United States, where they would remain in the custody of the Pentagon and would be subject to trial under military proceedings. There is widespread agreement, however, that moving any detainees or legal proceedings to American territory could bring significant complications.

    Some administration lawyers are deeply reluctant to move terrorism suspects to American soil because it could increase their constitutional and statutory rights – and invite an explosion of civil litigation. Guantánamo was chosen because it was an American military facility but not on American soil.

    Placing the detainees in military brigs on United States territory might fend off some of those challenges. The solution may eventually require a new act of Congress establishing legal standing for the detainees and new rules for their trial and incarceration if brought to the United States.

    Mr. Gates’s criticism of Guantánamo marks a sharply different approach than the one taken by his predecessor, Donald H. Rumsfeld. It also demonstrated a new dynamic in the administration, in which Mr. Gates was teaming up with Ms. Rice, who often was at loggerheads with Mr. Rumsfeld. The State Department has long been concerned about the adverse foreign-policy impact of housing prisoners at Guantánamo.

    In the end, Mr. Gates did succeed in killing plans to build a $100 million courthouse and detention complex at Guantánamo, after he argued that the large and expensive project would leave the impression of a long-lasting American detainee operation there and that the money could be more effectively spent elsewhere by the Pentagon. Mr. Gates approved a far more modest facility at one-tenth of the cost.

    The setback in his effort to close Guantánamo was described by senior Pentagon officials as Mr. Gates’s only significant failure during an effort in his first three months in office to shift course from policies pursued by Mr. Rumsfeld. The outcome suggests that Mr. Bush, Mr. Cheney and Mr. Gonzales remain committed to a detention plan that has become one of the most controversial elements of the administration’s counterterrorism program.

    Mr. Cheney’s spokeswoman, Lee Anne McBride, said via e-mail that “we don’t discuss internal deliberations.”

    Mr. Bush has repeatedly said he ultimately wants to shutter the detention operations at Guantánamo. But he has also said it is not possible to do so any time soon.

    State Department and Pentagon officials have said that even close allies are uncomfortable with American policies toward Guantánamo, making it more difficult in some cases to coordinate efforts in counterterrorism, intelligence and law enforcement.

    More than 390 detainees have been transferred abroad from the Guantánamo facility since it was opened amid global controversy in 2002. Last year, 111 detainees were transferred out, and 12 more have been this year. About 20 of those repatriated to home countries have been picked up again in sweeps of terrorism suspects or have been killed or captured in battle, Pentagon officials say.

    Many countries do not want to take back the detainees held at Guantánamo. Some home nations will not guarantee that returning detainees would be assured humane treatment and fair trials, while others will not guarantee that detainees viewed by American officials as still dangerous would not be set free.

    Mr. Gates’s challenge has sent a ripple through the White House, because it forced officials to confront the question of whether Mr. Bush was actually moving to fulfill his stated desire to close the detention facility. Officials who advocate shutting down Guantánamo, including some at the Pentagon and the State Department, said an underlying motivation of those who want to keep the center open is that closing it would be seen as a public admission of an incorrect policy – something the Bush administration is loath to do.

    Neither Mr. Gates nor Ms. Rice have made public their comments to Mr. Bush. “Nobody is going to be insubordinate with the president,” said one senior administration official involved in the discussions. “You know the saying: ‘One war, one team.’ ”

    But in a recent Pentagon news conference, Mr. Gates did speak about his concerns over Guantánamo in general terms.

    “I think that Guantánamo has become symbolic, whether we like it or not, for many around the world,” Mr. Gates said at the time. “The problem is that we have a certain number of the detainees there who often by their own confessions are people who if released would come back to attack the United States. There are others that we would like to turn back to their home countries, but their home countries don’t want them.”

    He said officials “are trying to address the problem of how do we reduce the numbers at Guantánamo and then what do you do with the relatively limited number that would be irresponsible to release.”

    “And I would tell you that we’re wrestling with those questions right now,” he continued.

    In an interview on Thursday, Gordon England, the deputy secretary of defense who is Mr. Gates’s point man on detention issues, suggested that the long-term answer to Guantánamo might be creating some new international legal structure or set of multilateral agreements to manage captured members of global terrorist organizations.

    “I don’t know the alternative unless the international community, frankly, develops an alternative,” Mr. England said. “It is not a U.S. problem. It is an international problem to be dealt with.”

    Mr. England said American government officials had “an extraordinarily high degree of confidence from the information available” that many Guantánamo detainees were “going to damage the country, so you just can’t let them go.”

    “So,” he added, “this is difficult. I know it’s onerous. I know there are a lot of questions about it. We deal with it the best we can. But at the end of the day, we are not going to put the country or our citizens in jeopardy.”

    Shssh! Don’t Tell Americans How We Treat “Enemy Combatants”

    0

    Jacob G. Hornberger

    The case of accused terrorist Jose Padilla is moving toward a jury trial on April 16 in U.S. District Court in Miami. It is still unclear whether the presiding judge in the case, Marcia Cooke, will order an evidentiary hearing on Padilla’s motion to dismiss the charges based on the government’s outrageous pre-trial conduct while Padilla was in military custody as an “enemy combatant” in the “war on terror.” (Under post-9/11 jurisprudence, the government has the option of treating accused terrorists either as “enemy combatants” or as federal-court defendants.)

    The government is doing everything it can to prevent the American people from learning what the U.S. military did to Padilla during his three years of pre-trial confinement. In fact, U.S. officials are doing the same thing with respect to “enemy combatants” that the CIA has been holding for years in its secret overseas prisons. They say the prisoners should not be permitted to reveal what the CIA has done to them because to do so would threaten “national security.”

    Meanwhile, the American people are walking through all this with an ambivalent numbness. Frightened after 9/11 over the prospect that “the terrorists” were coming to get them, many Americans were either silent or supportive when U.S. officials assumed the most powerful dictatorial tool possible — the power to arbitrarily take people into custody, torture them, and even execute them after a kangaroo proceeding. What never occurred to many Americans was that the military would have the authority to exercise this dictatorial power on them.

    Not surprisingly, federal officials now want to keep Americans from learning the full extent of the federal government’s post-9/11 power over them. That’s why they used their plea bargain with John Walker Lindh, the “American Taliban,” to prohibit him from revealing what they did to him while he was in pre-trial military custody. That’s why they’re fighting fiercely in the Padilla case to keep Americans from learning what they did to Padilla. That’s why they’re claiming “national security” to prevent accused terrorist Khalid Sheikh Mohammad and other CIA prisoners from describing the waterboarding and other “alternative” forms of interrogation to which they have been subjected.

    Unfortunately, all too many Americans still don’t want to know what U.S. officials don’t want to tell them. It’s much easier to continue walking in blind numbness and reassuring themselves with, “It can’t happen here. This is America.”

    As the late psychiatrist M. Scott Peck pointed out, mental health involves an unwavering commitment to reality at all costs. Any hope of restoring a healthy, balanced, and free society requires that Americans fully confront the revolutionary changes that 9/11 has wrought in our nation, including everything that the government now has the power to do to Americans.

    Reality is that the U.S. military now wields the power to take anyone, including American citizens, into custody as “enemy combatants” in the “war on terror” and to do everything to them that the CIA and the Pentagon have done to other “enemy combatants.”

    Reality is the power to subject American and foreign “enemy combatants” to extreme isolation and sensory deprivation over long periods of time. That’s what those eerie blacked-out goggles and earmuffs on Padilla were all about.

    Reality is the government’s power to subject “enemy combatants” to waterboarding and similar forms of “alternative-interrogation techniques.”

    Reality is the government’s power to inject substances into “enemy combatants.” (Padilla says it was LSD they injected into him while the military says it was actually an inoculation against the flu.)

    Reality is the government’s power to not account for “enemy combatants” who have disappeared after being taken into custody. As Human Rights Watch attorney Joanne Mariner recently wrote, there are many “enemy combatants” who are believed to have once been in CIA custody and who are now unaccounted for.

    President Bush recently said that to combat terrorism, the federal government needs to continue spreading freedom around the globe. What he obviously meant was the “freedom” of the CIA and the Pentagon to continue taking “enemy combatants,” both Americans and foreigners, into custody, treating them accordingly, and then keeping what they do to them secret from the American people and the world.

    Why CIA abuse is medieval madness

    0

    SINCE medieval times, water-boarding, or forcing water into captives’ lungs, has been used to compel prisoners to confess. During the Inquisition, water-boarded prisoners admitted to shape-shifting and cavorting with the devil.

    Today, terrorism suspects subjected to this medieval torture admit the wildest things too. Just ask 9/11 plotter, Khalid Shaikh Mohammed.
    KSM was bound to a stiff wooden plank at a secret CIA black-site prison. Interrogators tilted one end of the platform so that his head was several inches below his feet. A rag was fixed in his mouth and cellophane was firmly wrapped over his face.

    Slowly, water was poured over his mouth until he began to gag and lurch. Seconds before he blacked out, interrogators ripped off the plastic and pulled the rag from his mouth, allowing him to briefly catch his breath. After 2 1/2 minutes on the waterboard, CIA officials said he was “begging to confess”. He admitted to 31 different plots – nearly every act of terrorism against the US since the early 1990s.

    While his hand in 9/11 has been independently confirmed, his other claims are less believable. Former CIA field officer Robert Baer told Time: “(KSM) is making things up. I’m told by people involved in the investigation that KSM was present during Wall Street Journal correspondent Danny Pearl’s execution but was in fact not the person who killed him. There exists videotape footage of the execution that minimises KSM’s role. And if KSM did indeed exaggerate his role in the Pearl murder, it raises the question of just what else he has exaggerated, or outright fabricated.”

    Pearl’s father told ABC News in the US the facts “don’t match (KSM’s) story”. Asra Nomani, a former Wall Street Journal reporter who knew Pearl well, said: “Anyone who saw the tape of Danny’s murder could confess to those details.” She added: “From everyone I’ve talked to in Danny’s family there isn’t closure … there’s not convincing evidence that Khalid Shaikh Mohammed was the killer.”

    KSM has also confessed to attempting to bomb the US’s Plaza Bank headquarters prior to his arrest in March 2003. “I was responsible for planning, training, surveying, and financing for the new (or second) wave of attacks against … Plaza Bank, Washington state,” he said during his recent Guantanamo tribunal hearing. This claim is also dubious. Plaza Bank was founded in early 2006.

    Today, most of KSM’s “facts” are inseparable from fiction. Sadly this was avoidable. Rather than stripping him naked, holding him in a dark cold cell for months on end, blasting loud music and strobe lights at him, threatening violence against his two sons, and nearly drowning him, US officials should have used non-abusive techniques proven to build trust. These methods yield reliable evidence.

    The Federal Bureau of Investigation is the US domestic law enforcement agency that must obtain non-coerced evidence that stands up in US courts. Over time, the FBI has developed an array of non-violent interrogation techniques. FBI investigators methodically engage their suspects in conversation, supply incentives, then slowly vet and cross-check the information their suspects reveal. Rather than shave a Muslim’s beard and abuse his Koran, they give devout men sweet figs and allow them to pray.

    The FBI used rapport-building techniques before 9/11 to cultivate relationships with former al-Qa’ida operatives and unravel attacks such as the 1998 East African US embassy bombings.

    “FBI agents, as officers of the court, know what the rules are,” said former FBI interrogator Jack Cloonan to The American Prospect. “We have procedures to follow. We firmly believe in this thing called due process, and do not see it as something passe or something that should be seen as an impediment.”

    After 9/11, FBI methods were sidelined in favour of the CIA’s tougher techniques. The decision to drop FBI methods will haunt the US for decades. By using FBI rapport-building methods – not CIA tortures – officials could have come closer to unlocking the truth from suspects such as KSM. According to Yosri Fouda, the only journalist to interview KSM before his 2003 capture, he was a “a power-hungry mastermind” who lived for the spotlight. Likewise, the 9/11 Commission report described KSM as a flamboyant character prone to exaggeration. Given KSM’s boastful personality, officials should have known that torture – and its say-anything-to-stop-the-pain qualities – would be the worst way to get accurate intelligence.

    By torturing him, the Bush administration slammed shut what could have been a window into the al-Qa’ida terror network. Now, the truth will remain hidden from both the US Government and from KSM’s victims.

    Michael Otterman is a visiting scholar at the Centre for Peace and Conflict Studies at University of Sydney and author of American Torture: From the Cold War to Abu Ghraib (Melbourne University Press).

    Get on with it, said net audience as man hanged himself on webcam

    0

    Kevin Whitrick logged on to an internet chat room and announced that he was going to commit suicide. He then switched on his webcam, stood on a chair, smashed through his ceiling to expose a joist, tied a rope around his neck and hanged himself.

    Several visitors to the site thought that it was a hoax and egged him on, but one dialled 999. By the time police arrived at his flat, he was dead. The case is believed to be the first of its kind in Britain.

    Friends of the 42-year-old electrical engineer said that he had become lonely and depressed since splitting from his wife and had started drinking heavily. He had also suffered serious injuries in a car accident last year and was distraught at the loss of his father, who had died from a heart attack.

    Mr Whitrick is believed to have set up a chat room, Kels Friendly Chat, at paltalk.com and was logged on with about 50 other users to an “insult” chat room where people “have a go at each other”.

    Visitors to the site said that they thought he was joking when he told them of his suicide plan. One said: “He tied a rope around an uncovered ceiling joist and stood on the chair as he tied the rope around his neck. Some of us chat-room users, talking to Kevin over text chat, microphones and video, tried to convince him to stop, but others egged him on, telling him to get on with it.

    “We just couldn’t believe he was doing it – it was surreal. One chatter said, ‘F***ing do it, get on with it, get it round your neck. For f***’s sake, he can’t even do this properly.’ ” Another visitor to the site who did not wish to be named said: “When Kevin stepped off the chair and was left dangling, the mood in the chat room changed and people began to realise what they had seen. I think someone contacted the police, but sadly no one could get to him in time.”

    Moderators then closed the feed from his webcam.

    Mr Whitrick lived alone in a small flat on an estate in Wellington, near Telford, Shropshire. His former wife, Paula, and their 12-year-old twins live in less than a mile away.

    Police said that an internet surfer alerted them to the suicide on late Wednesday. Officers broke into Mr Whitrick’s flat but, despite attempts to revive him, he was declared dead just after 11.15pm. There were tributes to him in the chat room yesterday under the heading “RIP Kevin”. One, from icemaiden 71, said: “I’m a mate of his and I’m shocked.” But another posting said: “I’m on the phone to the News of the World. I’m going to make a buck on this.”

    Mr Whitrick’s former wife said in a statement: “Kevin was a loving father and family man. He was the life and soul of the party and an extremely considerate and kind person. He will be so sadly missed by us all.

    “Unfortunately Kevin had a serious car accident in 2006 and he never fully recovered.”

    Mr Whitrick was the brother of Mal Whitrick, an associate director and sponsor of Shrewsbury Town Football Club. They worked together at the family firm, RMW electrical services. Mal Whitrick was understood to be returning from holiday in India yesterday. Sharon Atwal, who works in a corner shop opposite Mr Whitrick’s flat, described him as “subdued” when she saw him on the night he died. She said: “Every night he’d take eight cans of Boddingtons bitter from the fridge and restock it with the cans from the shelf. He always seemed quite cheerful. On Wednesday night, though, he didn’t seem himself and it was the first night that he did not restock the fridge. It was as if he knew he wouldn’t be coming back.

    “He always struck me as very happy. He was friendly and had two perfect kids. I cannot believe he has done this.”

    Police said that they were investigating. A postmortem examination was carried out yesterday.

    The case appears to echo that of Brandon Vedas, 21, from Phoenix, Arizona, who committed suicide online in 2003 by overdosing on a mix of alcohol and prescription medication. Some people in the chat room egged him on while others tried desperately to find his address.

    Paltalk is the world’s largest online video chat community with more than four million members visiting chat rooms that allow them to see, hear and text each other.

    Spies to bug our baked beans

    0

    VIRGINIA WHEELER

    A COUNCIL is planning to catch residents who leave rubbish out on the wrong day – with cameras hidden in BAKED BEANS tins.

    Sneaky Ealing Council in West London will also put the tiny CCTV bugs inside house bricks to film offenders.

    Householders caught breaking strict new rubbish rules – dubbed “enviro-crimes” – will be fined up to £1,000.

    The surveillance plans have outraged residents who say it is the latest example of Big Brother Britain. It follows a £2million scheme adopted by six councils to put the devices in wheelie bins.

    A spokesman for Tory-controlled Ealing yesterday said the £200 movement-sensitive bugs – which may be placed on existing rubbish piles – would become a “vital tool” in catching wheelie bin mis-users and graffiti artists.

    He said: “To catch vandals and enviro-criminals, cameras disguised as anything from tin cans to house bricks will instantly email images to the council’s CCTV control centre.”

    He added that people who put their rubbish out at all times of the day and night will be targeted. The Ealing Tory councillor responsible for environment Will Brooks said anyone who broke the laws would be considered a fly-tipper.

    But local resident Danny Christie, 64, branded the scheme as “utterly insane”.

    He said: “I’ve lived here all my life and have never heard of anything so screwed-up. Since when did forgetting to put your rubbish out make you a criminal? James Bond is the sort of person to use spy cameras in bean tins – not the local council. Are we living in Soviet Russia or Korea these days?

    “It’s nuts. Big Brother gone mad.”

    And the plans were described as “bizarre” by Labour councillor Virendra Sharma. She said: “Educating people on rubbish collection times is a better long-term solution than spy cameras in baked bean tins.”

    A spokeswoman for human rights group Liberty said: “Let’s give people more opportunities to be clean and green rather than making criminals out of people who put their bins out at the wrong time.”

    In January last year British diplomats based in Moscow were accused of spying after hiding a data transmitter in a fake ROCK.

    Democrats pass “anti-war” bill that funds the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan

    0

    Barry Grey

    After weeks of public posturing and behind-the-scenes maneuvering, Democrats in the House of Representatives secured passage Friday of an emergency spending bill that grants the Bush administration’s request for over $100 billion in additional funds for the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan. In what amounts to a colossal political fraud, they presented their “Troop Readiness, Veterans Health and Iraq Accountability Act” as a measure to force an end to the war in Iraq by September 1, 2008.

    It does nothing of the kind. Even if a similar Democratic measure were to be passed in the Senate–and it will not–and the final bill were to survive a presidential veto–a political impossibility–the resulting law would do nothing to halt the current military escalation in both Iraq and Afghanistan, and would allow upwards of 75,000 US troops to remain in Iraq indefinitely.

    The bill is a labored attempt by the Democratic leadership to pose as opponents of the Iraq war, while in practice ensuring its continuation. The vote to authorize war funding flies in the face of the will of the electorate, which expressed its desire to end the war and its opposition to the policies of the Bush administration in last November’s congressional elections, overturning Republican control in both houses of Congress.

    In remarks following the vote, House Speaker Nancy Pelosi went out of her way to declare her party’s support for the US military and the so-called “war on terror,” calling the bill “a giant step to end the war and responsibly redeploy our troops out of Iraq” so they could concentrate on Afghanistan, “where the war on terrorism is.”

    The Bush administration has denounced the bill and promised to veto it, in line with the White House’s blanket opposition to any conditions, no matter how toothless, being placed on its war-making powers.

    The bill passed by the narrowest possible margin, with 218 votes in favor and 212 opposed. Only two Republicans voted for the bill and 14 Democrats voted against it.

    The conditions attached to US troop deployments by the bill are themselves so conditional as to be meaningless. Under the measure, Bush would be obliged to certify to Congress on July 1, 2007 and again on October 1, 2007 that the Iraqi government has made progress in meeting certain benchmarks, such as containing sectarian violence, reining in militias, and reforming the constitution. Should Bush fail to go through the motions of making such a certification, withdrawal of US combat troops would begin. Even if the government certified progress, US combat troops would be withdrawn by September 1, 2008.

    But this “final deadline” could be extended if the administration obtained approval from Congress. In any event, less than half of the 140,000 US troops currently in Iraq are designated as combat forces, meaning that 75,000 or more troops would remain after the “deadline” to conduct counterinsurgency operations, train Iraqi forces, police borders and protect US assets.

    As New York Senator Hillary Clinton, the front-runner for the 2008 Democratic presidential nomination, made clear in an interview with the New York Times last week, if elected she would keep a large force of American troops in Iraq indefinitely to secure “remaining vital national security interests” there. She elaborated on these “national security interests” by noting that Iraq is “right in the heart of the oil region.”

    Similarly, the House Democrats’ bill upholds the war aims of US imperialism by listing as one of the benchmarks the passage of an oil law that will open up Iraq’s vast reserves to exploitation by US energy conglomerates.

    The bill also requires the Pentagon to observe standards for training, equipping and resting troops before their deployment and limits the duration of Army tours of duty to 365 days. With the military already stretched to the limit, these provisions could actually create obstacles to the further escalation of the war under Bush’s so-called troop “surge” in Baghdad and Anbar Province. Consequently, the bill allows Bush to waive these requirements in the name of “national security,” giving him a free hand to send as many additional troops as he desires.

    In the weeks leading up to Friday’s vote on the floor of the House, the White House and congressional Republicans continually called the Democrats’ bluff, exposing their antiwar pretenses by challenging them to cut off war funding. This culminated last week in the passage, with overwhelming Democratic support, of a Republican-sponsored nonbinding Senate resolution vowing to never cut funds for “troops in the field.”

    For their part, Pelsoi and the rest of the Democratic leadership continually tacked to the right, readjusting their war spending bill to placate Blue Dog Democrats and other war supporters within the Democratic caucus by further watering down its nominal restrictions on Bush’s war powers. They secured the support of the party’s right wing by dropping language that would have required Bush to obtain congressional support before launching an attack on Iran.

    They loaded the bill with allocations for special projects targeted to win over specific congressmen. Thus the final result includes $25 million for spinach farmers in California, $75 million for peanut storage in Georgia, $15 million for Louisiana rice fields and $120 million for shrimp fishermen.

    As Pelosi and her subordinates scrambled to assemble the necessary 218 votes to secure passage, groups on the so-called liberal wing of the party declared their support, including the Congressional Black Caucus and MoveOn.org.

    The critical role was played by the misnamed “Out of Iraq Caucus” of House Democrats. This group of some 70 congressmen has postured as the most militant critics of the war. Their key leaders, such as Lynn Woolsey and Maxine Waters, both of California, have been paraded before antiwar demonstrators by protest organizers as living proof that the Democratic Party can be pressured to end the war.

    Pelosi dealt with them through a combination of threats and inducements. The house speaker reportedly warned California Rep. Barbara Lee, another leader of the Out of Iraq Caucus, that she would be stripped of her post on the powerful House Appropriations Committee if she sought to block passage of the bill.

    On Thursday, Lee, Woolsey, Waters and company insured passage of the bill at a closed-door session with Pelosi. The Washington Post reported on Friday:

    “As debate began on the bill yesterday, members of the antiwar caucus and party leaders held a backroom meeting in which House Speaker Nancy Pelosi made a final plea to the group, asking it to deliver at least four votes when the roll is called. The members promised ten.”

    Lee, the author of a bill that would supposedly withdraw US troops from Iraq by the end of 2007, said, “While I cannot betray my conscience, I cannot stand in the way of passing a measure that puts a concrete end date on this unnecessary war.”

    Waters said the leaders of the caucus had told their members, “We don’t want them to be in a position of undermining Nancy’s speakership.”

    In the debate on the floor of the House, supposedly antiwar liberals denounced the war, and proceeded to call for a vote to fund it. Typical were the remarks of Jim McDermott of Washington State, who declared, “The Iraq war is a fraud… Perpetuating it is a tragedy,” and then announced he would vote for the war funding measure.

    Virtually all of the Democratic speakers wrapped themselves in the flag and declared their unconditional “support for the troops.” According to one press report: “In the closing round of the debate, most Democrats focused on elements of the bill that they said would protect American troops by requiring better training and longer periods of rest between deployments.”

    Rep. Ike Skelton of Missouri, who heads the Armed Services Committee, said the bill would strengthen the US military, which has been strained by the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan. “I’m deeply concerned about the readiness of our forces,” he said.

    The legislative charade mounted by the Democratic Party has nothing to do with ending the war in Iraq. There are, in fact, no principled differences between the Democrats and Bush when it comes to the imperialist aims of the war. Both parties, the Democrats no less than the Republicans, serve the corporate interests–the oil conglomerates, the Wall Street banks, and the American financial oligarchy as a whole–that seek through military violence to establish US control of the resources and markets of the world.

    The differences between those within the political establishment who favor continued escalation of the war and those who seek to continue the colonial occupation with reduced US troops are purely tactical. They have to do with the best means of salvaging the US debacle in Iraq by killing and brutalizing more Iraqis, in order to secure US control of the Middle East.

    The real political purpose of the Democrats’ bill was indicated in an interview this week on the “Democracy Now” radio program with Robert Borosage, a long-time Democratic Party operative and contributing editor at the Nation magazine. Arguing in support of the war spending bill, he said, “The question is about, can you create a symbolic vote–because the president has vowed to veto it if it passes–a symbolic vote that unites the opponents of the war and shows that there’s a majority in the Congress now united about a date certain to get the troops out.”

    In other words, a measure that will have no effect on the war, but will promote the fiction that the Democratic Party is in some way a vehicle for the antiwar sentiments of the people, and thereby keep social opposition within the bounds of the two-party system.

    In this critical task for the American ruling elite, forces like the Out of Iraq Caucus and their “left” allies in the protest movement play a crucial role. They serve not to end the war, but to provide a right-wing, pro-war party with a left-wing, antiwar gloss, the better to block the emergence of an independent movement of working people against war, repression and social inequality.

    Four-and-a-half months after the election, in which the people expressed their opposition to the war, the result is the opposite of their wishes. Tens of thousands more troops are being deployed, the carnage and death are increasing, and US military spokesmen like Gen. David Petraeus are speaking of an escalation unlimited in both size and duration.

    Ending the catastrophe inflicted by American imperialism on Iraq, and preventing new wars in Iran and elsewhere, requires a complete political break with the Democratic Party and the two-party system. It requires the independent political mobilization of working people, both in the US and internationally, in a class-conscious socialist movement.

    We urge all those who agree with this perspective to make preparations to attend the Emergency Conference Against War sponsored by the World Socialist Web Site, the Socialist Equality Party and the International Students for Social Equality on the weekend of March 31-April 1.

    7/7 and 21/7 began at al-Qaida camp, court told

    0

    – Failed attack’s alleged chief admits Pakistan visit
    – QC claims direct link with London suicide bombings

    Sandra Laville

    Direct links were drawn for the first time yesterday between the July 7 suicide bombings that killed 52 people and the failed Islamist extremist attacks in London two weeks later.

    Using footage of the martyrdom videos left by July 7 bombers Mohammed Sidique Khan and Shehzad Tanweer to illustrate the point, a barrister produced what he said was evidence that the ringleader of the July 21 plot had planned a joint UK terror campaign with them while at an al-Qaida training camp in Pakistan months before the summer of 2005.

    The links were revealed to the jury in the trial of the July 21 suspects on Thursday, but a court order preventing their publication was only lifted yesterday.

    Stephen Kamlish QC, representing one of the six defendants, Manfo Asiedu, 33, told the court that Muktar Said Ibrahim, the alleged July 21 ringleader, was in Pakistan at the same time as Khan and Tanweer. He told the court that within two months of all three returning to the UK they had made almost identical bombs containing hydrogen peroxide and an organic substance, such as flour, which had never been used before in the UK.

    Mr Ibrahim denied knowing Khan and Tanweer but has told the court that the 7/7 attacks inspired him to do what he said was a “fake” copycat mission, because the bombs had been so successful in starting a debate in Britain about the Iraq war.

    The court has heard that Mr Ibrahim was in Pakistan between December 2004 and March 2005. The prosecution claims he was at a jihadi training camp, but Mr Ibrahim claims he was on a three-month holiday with two friends, in which he visited several mosques and the tomb of the founder of Pakistan; his two friends never returned to the UK and are believed to be dead, according to the prosecution.

    In cross-examination Mr Kamlish asked Mr Ibrahim whether he had met Tanweer and Khan in Pakistan. He replied: “I have never met any of these two people.”

    Referring to evidence given earlier by Clifford Todd, senior scientist at the forensic explosives laboratory at Fort Halstead, Kent, Mr Kamlish continued: “The only two occasions on which the authorities in this country had ever come across an improvised explosive device made with hydrogen peroxide and an organic substance is 7/7 and 21/7.

    “Had there been any discussion between you and them on how to make effective bombs, to start a bombing campaign in this country? The first was 7/7 and the second was going to be 21/7.”

    “No,” said Mr Ibrahim.

    “Do you know they were both in Pakistan the same time as you? When you were in Pakistan, so were they?” “Yes.”

    “They were in Pakistan from the end of 2004 into 2005. You were all there at the same time for about two months.” “I don’t know,” said Mr Ibrahim. “All I can say is, I was there for three months.”

    “You see the coincidence don’t you?” asked Mr Kamlish. The defendant replied: “From what you are saying is fact, yes.”

    The barrister asked: “It wasn’t the case that the plan to use hydrogen peroxide was devised between you and others in Pakistan?” “No,” said Mr Ibrahim, adding: “From what I know, this has been around; the Palestinians use them.”

    Jurors were shown martyrdom videos of Khan and Tanweer, both wearing red headscarves and speaking in northern accents, as they justified their suicide bomb attacks nearly two years ago.

    Mr Ibrahim stood facing a television screen to the right of the witness box at Woolwich crown court as Khan issued his threat to the west.

    “Your democratically elected governments continuously perpetuate atrocities against my people all over the world …” Khan said. “Until we feel security, you will be our targets. And until you stop the bombing, gassing, imprisonment and torture of my people we will not stop this fight. We are at war and I am a soldier. Now you too will taste the reality of this situation.”

    At the video’s end, Mr Kamlish pointed out Ayman Al-Zawahiri, al-Qaida number two, who referred to Khan and Tanweer having been on a camp in Pakistan.

    “They were at an al-Qaida training camp when you were in Pakistan, but you never met them?” he asked. “No.”

    “You had nothing to do with them about using hydrogen peroxide based explosives?” “No,” the defendant replied.

    Mr Ibrahim, Mr Asiedu, Hussain Osman, Ramzi Mohammed, Yassin Omar and Adel Yahya all deny conspiracy to murder and conspiracy to cause explosions likely to endanger life.

    9/11 Lie In Rough Shape

    0

    Recent media attacks – by people it has since been exposed are employed by the Bush/PNAC Regime – against American celebrities who support an investigation highlight the fear being created by the failure of the cover-up. Please, keep up the pressure.

    The most damning fact is that the War Criminals, Profiteers, and LIARS cannot present any hard evidence to support their own Conspiracy Theory, well over five years after the fact. Even their FBI Director admits there is no evidence linking “al Qaeda” to the attacks.


    There was a time, not long ago, when daring to question the official account of 9/11 was risky business. One was almost guaranteed to be attacked as a “crazy person” or a “traitor” or a “terrorist sympathizer.” Times have changed. At this point, less than 20% of the population believes they were given the full truth regarding 9/11. Logically one might ask: “Why is that?”

    It wasn’t for lack of trying that the government failed in its propaganda campaign. It wasn’t for lack of “helping hands” in the mainstream media. (Though even that support has begun to fall apart.) No, it was one thing and one thing only that caused hundreds of millions of American citizens to openly question the official account of 9/11; the evidence.

    In short, the evidence that we have been shamelessly lied to regarding the events of 9/11 is irrefutable. There is an enormous body of circumstantial evidence, there is an enormous body of physical evidence, and there is an enormous body of historical evidence. Perhaps most damning (at this point) is the ongoing cover up itself. -The deliberate attempt to obstruct an open discussion of the facts. Evidence of that grows by the hour, but not to worry…

    If you want to see how the investigation into the attacks of 9/11 was obstructed at every turn; simply watch 9/11 Press for Truth.

    If you want to learn the history of government sponsored “false flag” terrorism, simply watch Terrorstorm.

    If you want to see the evidence of controlled demolition (all of which has been completely ignored by the mainstream media and government talking heads) check out September 11 Revisited, or this segment of 911 Mysteries, or this segment from Rise of the Police State.

    If you want to know what an absolute fraud the “investigation” we finally got was, you can get started with just a handful of issues. Like:

    1. One of the most damning pieces of physical evidence regarding the events of 9/11 (the collapse of WTC 7) wasn’t even mentioned in the 9/11 Commission Report. How could any report claiming to provide “the fullest possible account” of the events of 9/11 ignore the unexpected free-fall collapse of a 47 story office tower? Is it because, to this day, nobody can explain how it fell? Is it because it wasn’t struck by any planes or burned with any jet fuel (the magic formula that supposedly brought down the twin towers?) Is it because pools of molten metal remained in its basement for weeks and partially evaporated steel beams were found in its wreckage? (It is physically impossible for burning office materials and diesel fuel to liquefy structural steel; let alone evaporate it into a gas.) How did “The Commission” deal with these smoking gun issues that clearly contradict the official account? Simple; they ignored them.

    2. How about those towers? You know, the two 110 story buildings constructed with an outer shell of perimeter columns and an ENORMOUS inner array of core columns that supported the buildings’ vertical loads. Of those towers, the commission report claimed “exterior walls bore most of the weight of the building. The interior core of the buildings was a hollow steel shaft.” This is an inexcusable inaccuracy that any “investigator” with an Internet connection and 5 minutes can easily prove wrong. And it should be noted; any claim or “theory” of how the towers collapsed based on this erroneous “hollow shaft” model is fatally flawed. Who in their right mind can take an “official report” like this seriously? If they got something this simple wrong, what else did they miss?

    3. Lets not forget “The Commission” said there was “no credible evidence that any person in the United States gave the hijackers substantial financial assistance. Similarly, we have seen no evidence that any foreign government-or foreign government official-supplied any funding.” Hmm, interesting. How about the Pakistani ISI chief who wired $100,000 to the alleged “lead hijacker” Mohamed Atta? Indian intelligence has verified this. And there has been no evidence to refute it. Is that worth looking into? -And how about Sibel Edmonds? Why was she ignored and then gagged under the veil of “National Security.” Better yet, how about we just have her testify in open hearings about “money trails” and where they lead to in our government?

    And if all this isn’t enough, maybe the few remaining skeptics would like to hear from some Senior Military, Intelligence, Law Enforcement, and Government Officials who question the validity of the 9/11 Commission Report. No problem. Start here.

    -So it’s true. Times have changed and the people (for good reason) no longer believe the lies they’ve been fed about 9/11. We’ve woken up to the level of corruption in our government and the official lie (by all practical means of determination) is in critical condition and not expected to recover.

    This can only mean one thing. An Independent investigation into the attacks of 9/11 WILL BE conducted. And this time, it isn’t going to be handful of citizens asking questions and demanding answers; it’s going to be 80% of the country. And this time, you won’t so easily ignore and whitewash the sensitive issues, because an educated citizenry is not so easily fooled. And this time, those who have stonewalled, lied, manipulated, covered up and acted in a criminally negligent manner will be held accountable for their actions.

    To those in power who’ve forgotten the reality of their position in government, YOU SERVE AT THE PLEASURE OF THE CITIZENS OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. Once again, you’re on notice to stop ignoring our demands for a new investigation. This issue isn’t going to go away, and your refusal to address it will cost you dearly.

    And to those of you with something to hide; perhaps now would be a good time to “lawyer up” and “cut a deal.” The game is over.

    J. Plummer 3.23.07

    The original story contains links to source material behind many of the author’s claims. They can be found here: 

    http://stopthelie.com/the_911_lie_is_in_critical_condition.html

    What Bush is hiding

    0

    In the U.S. attorney scandal, Alberto Gonzales gave orders, but he also took them — from Karl Rove, who plotted to turn the federal criminal justice system into the Republican Holy Office of the Inquisition.

    By Sidney Blumenthal

    Leave aside the unintentional irony of President Bush asserting executive privilege to shield his aides from testifying before the Congress in the summary firings of eight U.S. attorneys because the precedent would prevent him from receiving “good advice.” Leave aside also his denunciation of the Congress for the impertinence of requesting such testimony as “partisan” and “demanding show trials,” despite calls from Republicans for the dismissal of Attorney General Alberto Gonzales. Ignore as well Bush’s adamant defense of Gonzales.

    The man Bush has nicknamed “Fredo,” the weak and betraying brother of the Corleone family, is, unlike Fredo, a blind loyalist, and will not be dispatched with a shot to the back of the head in a rowboat on the lake while reciting his Ave Maria. (Is Bush aware that Colin Powell refers to him as “Sonny,” after the hothead oldest son?) But saving “Fredo” doesn’t explain why Bush is willing to risk a constitutional crisis. Why is Bush going to the mattresses against the Congress? What doesn’t he want known?

    British troops kill Afghan boy

    0

    A funeral has been held for a 12-year-old boy shot dead by British soldiers while he was travelling in a car with his family.

    Nato officials have told Al Jazeera they “deeply regretted the loss of life” and had launched an investigation into the incident in the capital Kabul on Thursday.

    British troops opened fire on the car as the boy and his family were driving home from a family gathering, James Bays, Al Jazeera’s correspondent in Afghanistan, said.

    Cradling the body of his dead son, the boy’s father, Zemarai, said: “They killed my son – I can never get him back.”

    The boy died after the vehicle in which he was travelling was hit by arms fire [Al Jazeera]

    ‘Innocent victim’

    Zemarai said he was driving seven of his relatives home and was several hundreds metres away from the soldiers’ vehicles when they opened fire.

    Speaking from his home before the burial of his son Zaryalai on Friday, he said: “All of a sudden they opened fire at our vehicle.

    “The first three bullets hit my car and the fourth one hit my 12-year old son in the side of his head.”

    The Afghan interior ministry said Nato troops had opened fire on a minivan “which apparently tried to overtake the troops or maybe the car was too close to the troops”.

    Zemarai has denied trying to overtake the convoy and said he was unaware of any warning shots.

    Bays said he later counted four bullet holes in the bodywork of the damaged vehicle.

    “The boy is the latest innocent victim of a Nato mistake and his father has said he would join the Taliban or any other group that would force foreign troops from his country,” Bays said.

    ‘Deeply disturbed’

    The area’s police chief told Al Jazeera he was “deeply disturbed” by the incident involving International Security Assistance Force (Isaf) troops.

    He said: “We’ve had this sort of problem all over Afghanistan.

    “I hope the Afghan government deal with this seriously.”

    Bays said the police chief was later threatened with dismissal for speaking out over the killing.

    A child was also hit and killed by a Nato vehicle in a convoy in the eastern province of Khost after he ran out from the side of the road, Isaf said in a statement late on Thursday.

    The Precious Freedom of Association

    0

    by Fred Reed

    Explain it to me, diversity. I don’t get it. Everyone in the feddle gummint and all the news weasels and the academia nuts and assorted distasteful do-gooders with goiterous self-admiration are always honking and blowing about how we need diversity. Why? What is it good for?

    I think we need homogeneity. Probably the greatest desire of humanity other than getting sex is avoiding diversity. Mostly, people can’t stand each other. I respect their judgement.

    Diversity causes nothing but trouble. Think about it. Do old people want to hang around young people? No. Do young people want to hang around old people? Generally they would rather take poison. Do liberals and conservatives want to get within rifle range of each other? No. Except conservatives, because they have rifles. Southerners and damyanks cordially detest each other, except after a few beers, when they stop being cordial. Urban folk and country folk loathe each other. Management and labor, Marine boneheads and army pukes, dogs and cats, on and on, don’t nobody much like nobody.

    So why do we spend so much sweat and money trying to force people to do what they don’t want to do? It’s all bass-ackwards. What if we tried…well…freedom? What if the gummint just left people the hell alone?

    Naahhhh.

    Especially nobody wants racial togetherness. Shoving races together just makes them mad at each other. If they had any desire to be together, you wouldn’t have to shove them, would you?

    In any city I’ve been in, blacks and whites work together because they have to by law, and then they go home and complain about each other. Blacks live in black neighborhoods because they want to, and whites do the same if allowed. As soon as black kids get to college, they want black dorms. The whites already have white dorms, and they think that’s just fine. Night clubs in Washington aren’t racially opposed to either race, but you find very few of one in the clubs of the other.

    What happens when a gang of Chinese come to America? They go live in Chinatown because they want to be among their own. They don’t hate everybody else and everybody else doesn’t hate them. They just aren’t comfortable mixing. The second generation moves out, but that’s because they aren’t really Chinese but Chinese-shaped Americans, eat Big Macs and listen to wretched music. By the third generation they’ll be counting on their fingers like whites, maybe.

    Fact is, men and women don’t want to be together more than some. Men think that women are slightly nuts and they’re certainly explosive and you always have to be careful not to set them off and they get ornery if you talk dirty around them, although they do it with each other. God knows what women think about men. Probably that we’re crude and watch football and aren’t in touch with our inner slug and don’t care about feelings. It’s all true.

    When I was a kid in the South, at dinner parties everybody would eat together. Then the women went into the living room to talk, and the men stood in the kitchen and drank bourbon and told off-color jokes. It seemed to work. It was nice being around the women because they were more civilized than we were, or at least acted it. But there’s such a thing as too much civilization.

    Now, if you look around the world, nearly all the trouble we have is because of diversity getting stuck together with other kinds of diversity. It just isn’t a good idea. In Gay Pair-Eee, (which in fact is probably less than half gay) the North Africans burn everything the French own. The French Canadians hate the rest of the country. The Hutsis and Tutus in Burundi or wherever butcher each other with abandon and machetes. Moslems and Hindus go at it in Kashmir. It isn’t even a good idea to let Redskins fans and Cowboys fans get too close together if ethylated.

    What do you think would happen in the United States if all the stuff ’em-together laws were dropped? I’ll tell you. In about ten minutes the races would resegregate like whiskey and diesel oil. I’ll bet offices and companies would get to be mostly women or mostly men before long because most of each flavor don’t know how to get along with the other real well. It’s more of an effort than with just one or the other.

    In at least three ways, what diversity does besides irritate everybody is to Sovietize the country. One way is that the gummint has to make hundreds, nay thousands of stupid laws to intrude where it’s got no business because if it doesn’t, people will find a way not to mix. You got to watch them like a hawk. If you say they’ve got to hire twenty percent minorities, they’ll hire the minorities best at whatever their business is. The others won’t get hired. So the gummint has to make detailed laws and make everybody fill out brainless forms and be watched by bureaucrats, probably affirmative-action hires themselves, who bungle everything because that’s what government does.

    The second way compulsory mixing Russifies things is that it makes everybody worry about being informed on. Since different groups don’t much like each other, at least lots of the time, the gummint, or management, has to make saying so a crime punishable by firing. Otherwise folks would get mad and say what they thought of each other. You’d have the equivalent of bar-room brawls every whichawhere. So people are very careful who they talk to at the water cooler. The OGPU is listening.

    Finally, mandatory diversity gelds the press. When by law or policy a newspaper has to hire homosexuals, women, blacks, browns and what have you, it loses the ability to offend any of them. In effect this is censorship. It doesn’t have to be imposed. Practically speaking, you can’t point out very pointedly that eighty-five percent of some sordid behavior is committed by people like your boss. Or even the next reporter over. You have to live with them. So you write correct pabulum.

    Sez me, we’d be better off if we had newspapers peopled exclusively by everything from loon commies singing the Internationale to bomb-everybody conservatives to race-based papers edited by Al Sharpton and David Duke. They could all fight with each other and keep each other straight. Fact is, with a diverse staff you don’t get diverse published opinion. Homogeneous staffs would give you diverse newspapers. Then maybe readers wouldn’t jump to the internet, the only diverse press we have.

    December 14, 2005

    Fred Reed is author of Nekkid in Austin: Drop Your Inner Child Down a Well.

    Copyright © 2005 Fred Reed

    Fred Reed Archives

    All Hail Google

    0

    Target: Google

    by William Anderson

    [Posted on Tuesday, December 13, 2005] [To receive the Daily Article in your inbox, go to email services, and tell others too!]

    It was only a decade ago that the Clinton Administration had decided that Microsoft was an Enemy of the People and tried (mostly unsuccessfully) to litigate the company into oblivion. While the principals in that set of lawsuits have gone on to other things, the “anti-monopoly” propaganda machines are turning their sights elsewhere. It seems that Google, the powerful and innovative Internet search engine, now enjoys the title of “Most Hated Company.”

    Now, if this were an article criticizing the 6.7 million “Hate Google” links that have sprung up (yes, you can use Google to find anti-Google sites ), it would be quite short. Those people who don’t like Google can use Alta Vista, Yahoo, or some other search engine, and that should be the end of it. And if they wish to spend a good part of their day blasting Google on blogs or in emails, that is their business.

    Google is no longer just a search engine of course. It offers premium email, instant messageing with voice, online books and media, maps and directions, web-use analytics, advertising programs, among a hundred other fast-changing, super-innovative ideas. For years now, it has been on the cutting edge, and the company shows no sign of slowing down. The competition seems constantly on the defensive. Many people believe that if the Windows OS is ever taken down a peg or two, it will be because of some Google innovation.

    Its success is driven entirely by the consumer’s evaluation of its quality. Google innovates but it is the market that renders the verdict.

    When it comes to the law, however, I fear that we are not at the end, but rather the beginning, and the people at Google should be worried. If Microsoft’s error was not being politically astute when the Clinton Administration took aim at the software company, then perhaps Google’s big “mistake” is being aligned closely with the political party that happens to be out of power.

    According to CNN, 98 percent of political contributions from Google employees went to candidates who were Democrats, and Google’s search policies are decidedly left-wing. (For example, Google refused to run an advertisement for Candice E. Jackson’s book Their Lives, which is critical of Bill Clinton’s behavior toward women.)

    In the libertarian view of things, Google has (and should have) the right to run those things they wish to run and extend its right of refusal to whatever it chooses. The politics of Google, its CEO, and its employees are irrelevant in the larger scheme of things and are private matters. However, politicians are not the sort of people to permit individuals to live and work as their conscience dictates, and I would not be surprised if the Bush Administration decides to use antitrust law (a term that in my view is an oxymoron) to punish the company.

    Granted, the suit would have no legal or economic merit (although one can say that about any antitrust case), but searching 90-year-old grandmothers in wheelchairs who are trying to board planes has no merit, either, yet the government does it.

    The vindictiveness against Google stems from the fact that people choose to use that particular search engine more than they do other searchers. Other people don’t like the way that Google ranks websites, which means that a site that someone may think is the Most Important Website in the World is buried deep among the many other sites on the same subject.

    But the biggest current complaint against Google is that it is just “too big.” We hear things like “Google controls 80 percent of the market” for search engines, yet that statement is nonsense. Google does not “control” anything on the Internet. People have to choose to avail themselves of Google’s services. No one is forced to use the Internet at all and, thus, can avoid Google altogether if that is their choice.

    These things should be obvious to anyone, yet antitrust law is not based upon what is obvious. In fact, antitrust law does not even constitute good law, since the violations of the law, such as “restraint of trade” or “monopolizing a market” are not readily defined. “Recognizing” a “monopoly” depends upon how one chooses to delineate the term.[1] That fact alone should make one recognize the political nature of antitrust “enforcement.”

    The vagueness of antitrust law makes it easy for government to heap abuse upon those firms that are out of favor at any given time, as no real legal proof is needed for the courts to act against the alleged “monopolist.” All that is needed is an allegation and a friendly judge, and prosecutors and the news media will perform the rest of the job.

    As Dominick Armentano, one of the world’s best experts on the subject of antitrust, writes:

    There is much historical evidence (especially at the state level) to suggest that the laws were intended by business and agricultural interests to restrict and restrain efficient competition, much like tariffs and quotas still do in international trade.

    But regardless of original intent, any objective study of antitrust cases would reveal that the laws have never been used to protect consumers from monopoly power. On the contrary, they have been used by government and private plaintiffs (90% of all antitrust cases are private) to attack and destroy successful companies while protecting their inefficient competitors.

    He continues:

    It’s no accident that in all of the classic antitrust cases in business history, the indicted firms were expanding output, innovating rapidly, and lowering their prices. Antitrust has never been consumer friendly and the antitrust establishment’s protestations to the contrary simply won’t wash with the facts.

    Thus, if antitrust cases brought on by the government are overtly political, then it would seem that Google could have problems. First, as I already have pointed out, Republicans — who hold both the White House and a majority of both houses in Congress — are not particularly fond of Google.

    Second, despite the millions of dollars that the company’s leaders and employees have raised for the Democrats, it is doubtful that many Democrats would be willing to stand up for a firm that is accused of being a “monopolist.” After all, Bill Gates is rumored to be a Democrat and Microsoft is located in the Seattle area, which is a Democratic stronghold. Even though that was the case, no Democrat having real political influence was willing to speak out against the Clinton Administration’s jihad against Microsoft and Gates.

    Further evidence of Democratic cowardice in protecting business figures accused of wrongdoing was the lack of support by politicians for Martha Stewart. While Stewart has been a stalwart contributor to the Democrats, no one from that party stood up for her when the Bush Department of Justice tried and convicted her in federal court on very flimsy charges. (Hillary Clinton even sent back a $1,000 contribution that Stewart had sent her during her 2000 U.S. Senate campaign.)

    On the Republican side, no one with influence has stood up for Kenneth Lay, who was indicted last year on charges of “securities fraud,” despite the lack of real criminal evidence. Republicans might have sought Enron money when it was a hot company, but it seems that everyone headed for the exits when the firm financially unraveled.

      Big is not bad: $10

    Yet, while Lay and Enron might be considered politically radioactive, one must remember that it was politics, not law that drove the indictments and prosecution of Lay and others with Enron. That is why I am concerned about Google. Should the government decide to go after Google for antitrust “violations,” it will do so for purely political reasons.

    At the same time, however, Google will find that any political capital it has tried to establish with the Democrats will come to naught, as no self-respecting Democrat is going to stand up for a “monopoly.” (Remember that Enron also made large contributions to the Democratic Party during the years of the Clinton Administration, but when the company fell from grace, it suddenly was described as a “Republican” firm.)

    Such is the world of antitrust law. Because the law can be applied only on a political basis, all government prosecutions of firms accused of violating antitrust statutes are political by definition. While I hope this is not the case, I do know that there exists almost no political downside for an administration that pursues civil and criminal cases against firms and business owners. Although the Bush Administration is unpopular with large segments of the population (mostly for the failure of war in Iraq), any action it takes against Google will win praise from all sides — and the Bushies could use some political popularity at the current time.


    William Anderson, an adjunct scholar of the Mises Institute, teaches economics at Frostburg State University. Send him MAIL. See his Mises.org Articles Archive. Comment on the blog.

    [1] Former U.S. Supreme Court Justice Potter Stewart, in writing an opinion about an obscenity case, said that while he could not define obscenity, he would know it when he saw it. Things like “restraint of trade” and “monopolizing markets” are even more vague than obscenity in Potterland.

    The Deaths of Children

    0

    The recent death of my grandson, just days before he was to be born into this world, has reinforced a long-held personal sentiment on behalf of the inviolate nature of life itself. The death of our fourth daughter, some three decades ago, was an earlier, painful reminder that life — particularly of young children — is both resilient and fragile. The grief that all of us feel in the death of a loved one — even of one we had not yet come to know — is an expression of the very best of what it means to be a human being: it is not irrelevant to us that others have died; it is not a matter of indifference to be hidden in statistics. We cry because we love; because we can love.

    For all the many reasons I hold political systems in utter contempt, this is by far the most dominant: the state is in a constant war with all of life. It always has been and it always will be, and no mouthing by politicians of empty bromides about “caring” will ever change this fundamental fact. Political systems war against the spontaneous and self-directed nature of all living systems, using violence as a weapon to force life to go in directions it does not choose. The state is the most fundamentally indecent of all human inventions, a fact that most of us prefer to keep from our conscious mind, which we obfuscate with lies and rationalizations; anesthetize with drugs or alcohol; or trivialize with entertainment-as-news.

    The most contemptible expression of the state’s war against life is found in its abuse, maiming, and slaughter of children. I have long opposed abortions, knowing that a “person” — with a unique DNA — comes into being at the moment of conception. (Although I once had a feminist try to convince me that one did not acquire DNA until after he or she was born, a mysterious process she was never able to explain to me!) As one who rejects the state in any form, I am likewise opposed to governments intervening to prevent a woman from having an abortion. “Does this mean,” I am sometimes asked, “that in a free society people are at liberty to kill others?” Of course, I reply, but this is equally true in the most tyrannical of societies. To one who regards liberty and responsibility as inseparable, the question always comes down to this: how will you exercise your liberty so as not to inflict harm on others? Whether a society is to be peaceful or destructive will — as Carl Jung and others have expressed it — always be determined by the nature of the inner lives of those who comprise it.

    While the war system has long plagued mankind with its organized insanities, it has been in recent centuries that destructive technologies have made all of humanity a target for attack. This is a fact that has still not sunk into the consciousness of most Americans, who do not understand the atrocities of 9/11 as the playing out of war games on a world — rather than regional — stage. Wars are supposed to be conducted “over there:” we even have popular war songs to remind us of this. But to those long victimized by American or British militarism in their lands, New York City and London have become the “over there” battlefields.

    All of humanity has become the target of state warfare, and children are now part of a homogenized “enemy” force to be destroyed along with all other members of “them.” Frankly, I have no problem with a bunch of lunatics choosing, voluntarily, to engage in mutual head-bashing rituals. If gladiators or knights-in-armor wish to contend with one another out of some twisted sense of “honor,” let them do so, as long as there are no spillover effects — what economists refer to as “socializing costs” — and non-combatants are not bound by the outcomes. I would regard such foolishness with the same indifference I have to professional wrestling, pursuits that seem to attract the same nitwitted following of fans.

    But I draw the line at dragging non-belligerents into this insane game, particularly when children are affected. If there is any activity that is more of an abomination to even the most meager sense of decency among humans, it is to be found in the systematic and unapologetic slaughter of children. If one chose to personify such a depraved disposition, one could find no more fitting paragon than former Secretary of State Madeleine Albright who, when asked in 1996, if American economic sanctions against Iraq were worth the deaths of half a million Iraqi children, replied “we think the price is worth it.” Her arrogance and contempt for the lives of the most innocent of human beings is reflected in the sneering lips through which she speaks.

    This is what not only America, but other statist regimes, have come to represent. That there were no adverse political or criminal consequences to such actions — just as there are none attaching to President Bush’s slaughter of Iraqi innocents — is an indictment of a society that has lost its very soul. The conservatives who answer that “other societies are just as bad” reveal their own moral bankruptcy, as do those who charge critics of governmental policy as “America-haters.” I have a great love for this country, but not for the political system — or those in control of it — who seem intent on flushing the country into the same moral swamp that destroyed earlier civilizations.

    When societies organize themselves into war systems — which is the nature of all political entities — and purposefully destroy each other’s children — be they soldiers or non-combatants contemptuously dismissed as “collateral damage” — they are placing themselves in a state of war with the very future of mankind. The casualties of such a war are not to be measured just in the calculus of young persons destroyed in the process, but in the general diminution of respect for life itself; for the sense of truth and reality upon which life depends; and for the value that is fundamental to any vibrant and decent social system, namely, that neither the dignity nor the will of harmless people shall be violated.

    We may not always be able to protect our children and grandchildren from biological forces we do not understand, but we can — and ought to — protect them from the dangers of our thinking, and from the destructive systems that our thinking creates. Right now, there is a tug-of-war taking place for the soul of Americans. We can personify this struggle as one between two mothers, although all of us are contestants. One mother is Cindy Sheehan, who continues to ask President Bush the question he regards it as irrelevant for any American to even ask: “what was the noble cause for which my son died?” The other is Bush’s own mother, Barbara, who declared: “Why should we hear about body bags and deaths? Oh, I mean, it’s not relevant. So why should I waste my beautiful mind on something like that?”

    It is easy to understand the different perspectives of these two women. Cindy’s son died because of the cascade of lies, forged documents, and other deceptions employed by Mrs. Bush’s son to send Casey Sheehan to Iraq. Unlike Cindy, Mrs. Bush never had to “waste” her “beautiful mind” waiting for the knock on the door that informed her of her son’s death. During the Vietnam War, Mrs. Bush’s son enjoyed the immunity from personal harm that attaches to members of the politically privileged classes: he safely manned a bullet-proof desk at air national guard facilities in Texas and Alabama. This is what is at the heart of our difficulties. As long as it is other people’s children who are dying, many of us have a calloused indifference to the suffering.

    Which mother’s question is central to the future, not just of this country, but to mankind itself? If Barbara Bush — like Madeleine Albright — regards the systematic, politically-driven slaying of children as “not relevant” to her “beautiful mind,” what prognosis are we to make for humanity? And does the answer to that question matter to you?

    The War Against Strawmen

    0

    by Harry Browne
    by Harry Browne

    The Bush Administration continues to maintain that its war in Iraq, and its adventures anywhere else, are aimed at ending worldwide terrorism.

    But such a feat is not only impossible, it is absurd.

    Terrorism is a crime, not a war. Terrorism is committed by gangs of criminals – not soldiers representing a sovereign government. And no one in his right mind can believe that our government can eliminate every criminal gang in the world.

    If our government could do that, why wouldn’t it start with the drug gangs that terrorize areas of Washington, D.C.? What a perfect opportunity for the politicians to demonstrate their crime-fighting abilities.

    On October 4, 2001, I wrote:

    Because the September attacks were a crime, the government’s job is to locate and bring to trial any perpetrators who didn’t die in the attacks. If some of them are located in foreign countries, our government should request extradition – not threaten to bomb the foreign country if we don’t get our way.

    I was criticized by some people, who asked, “But what if all the ‘criminals’ aren’t caught”

    And yet, here we are four years later, tens of thousands of people have died, and still not all the criminals have been caught regardless. Osama Bin Laden not only hasn’t been apprehended, he isn’t even talked about anymore. As I said in 2001:

    If not all the criminals are found and brought to trial, it doesn’t mean that bombing innocent people would have brought the criminals to justice.

    So why do the politicians talk about a War on Terrorism that makes no sense?

    Because it opens the door to all sorts of aggressions against foreigners and Americans.

    And it allows the politicians – most notably the leading members of the Bush administration – to pose as noble warriors against enemies that are really only Strawmen.

    Charley Reese, in a recent LewRockwell.com article, quoted Dick Cheney as claiming a U.S. pullout from Iraq would leave it in the hands of Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, Osama Bin Laden, and/or Ayman al-Zawahiri.

    Charley points out that “Zarqawi is a Jordanian, not an Iraqi; he has been denounced by his tribe and his family; and he has killed more Iraqis than Americans. It is just a matter of time before some Iraqi drops a dime on him and he’s packed off to Islamic hell.”

    But he’s a worthy Strawman, a bogey man, whose name is worth a hundred million dollars or more in Congressional appropriations.

    Charley goes on, “As for bin Laden and his Egyptian adviser, they are – assuming they’re still alive – hiding out in some cave or rat-infested village in the mountains between Afghanistan and Pakistan. They could not control a small town, much less a country of 25 million people of which neither of them is a native.”

    As we all know, the U.S. government has since World War II been financing and arming various foreign dictators – such as Saddam Hussein, Manuel Noriega, the Shah of Iran, and others – only to denounce and attack them once they become wealthy and aggressive enough to be worthy Strawmen.

    It’s also true that the U.S. government has financed and armed various opposition groups that supposedly represent the opportunity to topple the mean old dictators. Often these groups oppose each other, and engage in violence against one another. But no matter, the object of our government is to be doing something to fight a Strawman.

    Robert Dreyfuss, in another excellent LewRockwell.com article, catalogs a number of the groups that opposed Saddam Hussein and are now battling for control of Iraq. There is far more than the Iraqi National Congress. The strongest groups are SCIRI (the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution), Al Dawa (The Islamic Call), SCIRI’s paramilitary arm, the Badr Brigade, the Muslim Brotherhood , represented by IIP (the Iraqi Islamic Party) – not to mention Al-Qaeda. The first three originated and are based in – guess where – Iran. In fact, SCIRI was founded in 1982 by Ayatollah Khomeini.

    Today these groups are fighting each other as much as they’re fighting Iraqi insurgents, Americans, or Iraqi civilians. They regularly practice torture, assassinations, and other dastardly deeds upon one another. They are fighting to become the rulers of the new Iraq – the “democracy” that George Bush claims to be creating.

    Is this what 2,000 Americans and tens of thousands of Iraqis have died for? Is this what $200 billion dollars has financed? Is this why we have given up so much of our freedom?

    And whoever wins the battle to rule Iraq will eventually become Strawmen against whom the Bush administration can get on its horses and ride off to protect us.

    There is no War on Terrorism. There is only a War on Strawmen, a War on Shadows, a War on Fantasies – allowing George Bush to do whatever he, or his advisors, choose to do.

    It is time to quit pretending that the War in Iraq serves any purpose relating to world peace, democracy in the Middle East, the first line against terrorism, or any other salutary goal.

    It is simply part of the War on Strawmen.

    December 14 , 2005

    Harry Browne [send him mail], the author of Why Government Doesn’t Work and many other books, was the Libertarian presidential candidate in 1996 and 2000. See his website.

    Copyright © 2005 Harry Browne

    Harry Browne Archives

    FBI Surrounds Saudi Student’s House After Neighbors See Him with Pressure Cooker

    0

    Infowars.com
    May 12, 2013

    A Saudi student with what a neighbor described as a “bullet colored” pressure cooker was questioned by the FBI after the Boston bombing, according to Oukaz, a Saudi newspaper.

    Armed FBI agents surrounded the apartment block in Michigan where Talal al-Rouki lives.

    It turned out the student was cooking a traditional Saudi rice dish called kabsah. He was carrying it in a pressure cooker to a friend’s house when the neighbor saw him and called the authorities.

    “You need to be more careful moving around with such things,” an FBI agent told the nervous student, the Daily Mail quotes the Arabic newspaper.

    On April 16, the day after the Boston bombing, the FBI and the Department of Homeland Security released an unclassified bulletin warning that terrorists “can exploit the innocuous appearance and transportability of pressure cookers to conceal IED components.”

    “Suspicious activity reports (SARs) will be forwarded to the appropriate fusion center and FBI Joint Terrorism Task Force for further action.”

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Sunday, May 12, 2013 at 10:01 am

    Tags: , ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Establishment Media Attacks Rand Paul for Saying Globalists Plotting Against Constitution

    0

    Kurt Nimmo
    Infowarfs.com
    May 12, 2013

    Photo: Rand Paul for U.S. Senate 2010

    The Washington Post has attempted to write-off Kentucky Senator Rand Paul as a fringe kook for opposing the United Nations’ Small Arms Treaty.

    Ezra Klein, who spends a lot of time over at MSNBC with Rachel Maddow and has also appeared with Bill Maher – who has called the Second Amendment “bullshit” – bases his claim on research conducted by Snopes.com, the website specializing in debunking myths.

    Klein says the treaty does not pose a threat to gun owners in the United States. He dismisses the email below as “black helicopter stuff from Paul.”

    For the real deal on the treaty, see Larry Bell.

    The Washington Post is the crown jewel of Operation Mockingbird. MSNBC is a faltering propaganda network owned by the war pigs (it is a partnership between Microsoft and General Electric, the latter specializing in manufacturing war materiel). MSNBC and CNN habitually attack the Constitution (see the globalist Fareed Zakaria on “updating” the Constitution). They also act as a conduit for propaganda disseminated by the Southern Poverty Law Center, a “civil rights organization” specializing in hysterical propaganda about constitutionalists the SPLC insists are about to blow up federal buildings.

    It is interesting the Post and MSNBC bother with stuff they consider “black helicopter.” Klein’s facile attack is simply more evidence that the establishment is desperate to shut down the alternative media, now the preferred source of news for millions of Americans.

    Here is Paul’s email:

    Dear fellow Patriot,

    Gun-grabbers around the globe believe they have it made.

    You see, only hours after re-election, Barack Obama immediately made a move for gun control…

    On November 7th, his administration gleefully voted at the UN for a renewed effort to pass the “Small Arms Treaty.”

    But after the tragedy in Newtown, Connecticut – and anti-gun hysteria in the national media reaching a fever pitch – there’s no doubt President Obama and his anti-gun pals believe the timing has never been better to ram through the U.N.’s global gun control crown jewel.

    I don’t know about you, but watching anti-American globalists plot against our Constitution makes me sick.

    This Spring, the United Nations went back into session to finalize their radical so-called “Small Arms Treaty.”

    With the treaty finalized, a full U.S. Senate ratification showdown could come any time President

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Bill Gates, Jeb Bush, Oprah and Warren Buffett Meeting on South Carolina Island

    0

    wbtw.com
    May 12, 2013

    Bill Gates, Chairman of Microsoft and one of the richest people in the world, is spending time in the Lowcountry.

    WCBD confirmed the American business magnate is at the Sanctuary on Kiawah Island.

    Suspicion was raised when nearly 20 very expensive jets were seen lined up at the Charleston International Airport on Johns Island.

    Read more

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Sunday, May 12, 2013 at 8:40 am

    Tags:






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Why a government-orchestrated distraction event is highly likely to occur in the next 7 days

    0

    False Flag-O-Meter reaches the red zone

    Mike Adams
    NaturalNews
    May 12, 2013

    This is a short but urgent warning: A false flag event, an act of war, a bombing or some other headlines-grabbing orchestrated event is very likely to occur in the next seven days precisely because the Obama administration is under intense fire right now and needs a quick distraction. In stage magic, it’s called the “art of misdirection.” In politics, it’s called the “Clinton method.”

    This is exactly what Bill Clinton did over and over again during his administration: Any time he was about to be raked over the coals for some political scandal, he would simply order the bombing of another “terrorist factory” somewhere around the globe. Magically, the Clinton News Network (CNN) would shift coverage to this heroic act of “national defense” and stop asking questions about his scandal back at home. That would give the Clinton administration enough time to intimidate, threaten or murder whoever might have been involved. (Vince Foster, remember?)

    Right now, Hilary Clinton and President Obama are facing the possible downfall of their political careers over the Benghazi cover-up. Thanks to recent testimony, we now know that the Obama administration actually ordered the stand-down of U.S. military forces, directly causing the death of a U.S. ambassador as well as those in the embassy who attempted to save his life.

    This is a scandal many times more explosive than Watergate. As the Benghazi investigation unfolds, it may very well end up in the forced resignation of Obama himself.

    “Greenlighting” a pre-planned operation

    To avoid that from happening, Clinton, Obama and all the other globalist minions in Washington D.C. are trying to figure out what false flag scheme they have ready to go right now. They desperately need to pull the trigger on something: a bombing, a mass shooting, a hundred dead kids bleeding out on public sidewalks or something that can distract the media (and the public) from asking too many questions on Benghazi.

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    Hence the red zone of the False Flag-O-Meter. It’s now sitting in very dangerous territory, and the worse the scrutiny gets over Benghazi or the recent revelations that the IRS targeted conservative groups and Jews for punitive scrutiny during the 2012 elections, the more likely a false flag event becomes.

    Just

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Why Are Police Simulating Armed “Angry Parents” Laying Siege to Schools?

    0

    Mac Slavo
    SHTFplan.com
    May 12, 2013

    There is a new national threat that has, apparently, been making headline news all over the country in recent years. According to law enforcement officials in Washington that domestic terror threat involves armed and angry parents acting in concert to take over a school.

    It’s an active shooter situation that police officers, SWAT and emergency response personnel are currently simulating in training exercises.

    The question is, why?

    Two shooters went on a simulated rampage… they pretended to be angry parents at a school.

    The idea was to test the response of police and firefighters to  a situation that was right out of the news headlines.

    “We’ve been dealing with this cross-country for years.”

    While we understand that police require simulated training exercises for active shooter situations, especially given the events of the last year, why was this particular scenario chosen?

    When was the last time a coordinated attack on a school by angry parents made headlines?

    What news headlines?

    I read a lot of news every day and these “angry parents” taking over a school at gunpoint, requiring SWAT intervention, somehow completely escaped my notice!

    Well, it must be true, because the police officer in charge said, “We’ve been dealing with this across the country for years.”

    Where?  When?

    Once upon a time, police were there to protect people like parents, children, the elderly, and pregnant ladies.  But the lines are being drawn and great effort is being undertaken to create a new breed of villains for the “authorities” to fight — and those villains are us.

    Via The Organic Prepper

    Let’s consider the circumstances that would have to occur for not one, but two or more parents to lay armed siege to a school.

    There’s only one real scenario that comes to mind, and you’d more than likely have to be a prepper or conspiracy theorist to even contemplate the possibility.

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    The schools which our kids attend have “shelter-in-place” emergency procedures that would be enacted in the event of an emergency such as a nuclear, chemical or biological attack. During these emergencies schools are to be locked down with no unofficial access into the buildings until the all-clear has been given. It’s unclear based on district procedures just what the shelter-in-place order means and what steps parents would need to take

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    NYC Mock Posters Detail Police Terror Drills, Nuclear Threats (Photos)

    0
    nyc-gas-drill-poster

    Anthony Gucciardi
    Infowars.com
    May 12, 2013

    A number of mock posters have been popping up in New York City subways which effectively bring awareness to very real events like the recent odorless gas ‘terror drill’ by the NYPD as well as existing nuclear threats to the city.

    I was first alerted to these posters via news tips, where readers were wondering what the deal was with the strange and Orwellian posters. Well as the hashtag  ’#Greywater’ reveals, which is placed at the bottom of the poster, these posters are definitely not ‘official’ posters placed by the NYPD or the city itself. Instead, they are likely marketing tools for the Greywater alternative energy company (finding their website was pretty simple), but they are also quite informative. Checkout one of the posters warning of a terror drill involving odorless and ‘harmless’ gas, which is actually based on a real police test as reported on by RT.

    One of the mock posters found in the NYC subway warning of a future terror drill based on a real previous test.

    What’s great about these posters is that they turn on the brain of the average passerby who would have otherwise continued on without a single thought on the subject. I would even imagine that many citizens of the city had no idea that the NYPD announced the real drill back in April of this year. The best part is that the poster isn’t much different from the real announcement. Citizens were basically told very few details beyond the fact that the police will be releasing odorless and ‘harmless’ gas throughout the city on 3 non-consecutive days in order to conduct a terror test.

    There’s also a poster centered around nuclear concerns that plays on New York City’s close vicinity to nuclear power plants, which the Physicians For Social Responsibility website shows could lead to the emergency evacuation of over 17 million people in the event of a major plant incident that allowed for evacuations. A scenario that would quickly turn chaotic in a major city where citizens are entirely unprepared for any major event. You can see this one below:

    While these posters are obviously created by entities outside of the New York City government, and most likely printed up by the Greywater company to perhaps generate awareness and create a viral marketing campaign, I think they’re

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Montgomery County asks residents to hand over their guns

    0

    Rachel Baye
    The Examiner
    May 12, 2013

    Montgomery County residents handed over 111 guns, 11 BB guns, 10,000 rounds of ammunition and a grenade at Saturday’s statewide gun turn-in day, according to county police spokeswoman Lucille Baur.

    Among the 111 guns were 68 hand guns, 27 rifles – including at least one AK-47 – 15 shot guns and a tiny pen gun, Baur said. In addition to the guns, police also received a sword and two canisters of tear gas, which were turned in by a former D.C. police officer who told police they left over from riots in 1968.

    “A successful day,” Baur said.

    Organized by state Attorney General Doug Gansler in coordination with local police departments, the event included 24 stations across the state where residents could anonymously hand over their unwanted firearms and ammunition.

    All of the weapons collected will be inspected to see if they have been reported stolen or can be linked to a crime before being destroyed by the police, said David Paulson, spokesman for Gansler.

    Full story here.

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Sunday, May 12, 2013 at 4:25 am

    Tags: ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Guess What’s Hidden in the Immigration Bill? A National Biometric Database for Citizens

    0

    Michael Krieger
    Liberty Blitzkrieg
    May 12, 2013

    Oh just another eight hundred page “bipartisan” bill that nobody will read,  mainstream media will refuse to cover, and that will merely further destroy any remnants of freedom left in these United States.  Never forget the George Carlin quote on bipartisanship:

    “Bipartisan usually means that a larger-than-usual deception is being carried out.”

    From Wired:

    The immigration reform measure the Senate began debating yesterday would create a national biometric database of virtually every adult in the U.S., in what privacy groups fear could be the first step to a ubiquitous national identification system.

    Buried in the more than 800 pages of the bipartisan legislation (.pdf) is language mandating the creation of the innocuously-named “photo tool,” a massive federal database administered by the Department of Homeland Security and containing names, ages, Social Security numbers and photographs of everyone in the country with a driver’s license or other state-issued photo ID.

    This piece of the Border Security, Economic Opportunity, and Immigration Modernization Act is aimed at curbing employment of undocumented immigrants. But privacy advocates fear the inevitable mission creep, ending with the proof of self being required at polling places, to rent a house, buy a gun, open a bank account, acquire credit, board a plane or even attend a sporting event or log on the internet. Think of it as a government version of Foursquare, with Big Brother cataloging every check-in.

    “It starts to change the relationship between the citizen and state, you do have to get permission to do things,” said Chris Calabrese, a congressional lobbyist with the American Civil Liberties Union. “More fundamentally, it could be the start of keeping a record of all things.”

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    David Bier, an analyst with the Competitive Enterprise Institute, agrees with the ACLU’s fears.

    “The most worrying aspect is that this creates a principle of permission basically to do certain activities and it can be used to restrict activities,” he said. “It’s like a national ID system without the card.”

    Good thing the terrorists aren’t winning or anything.

    Full article here.

    <!–

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Another Syrian Insurgent Provocation?

    0

    Daniel McAdams
    The LRC Blog
    May 12, 2013

    It appears that two powerful car bombs have gone off in Reyhanli, a Turkish town on the Syrian border, with early reports suggesting at least four dead. It is a dangerous turn of events – particularly as Turkish Prime Minister Erdogan has dug a deep hole for himself through his support for the insurgents in Syria and has, as his strategy has collapsed, gone into full panic mode. Erdogan may hope to salvage some of his policy by accusing the Syrian government of bombing Turkey, internationalizing the conflict, and thereby inviting a Turkish military response.

    There is one problem: As the MoA blog has pointed out, Reyhanli is a town mostly populated by pro-Assad Alawites.

    As with the illogical sarin gas claims, why would the Syrian government bomb a town full of its supporters in Turkey thereby giving Erdogan the excuse he has been looking for to begin international military action against Syria? Does it make sense?

    However, the insurgents have a long history of provocations in attempt to draw neighboring countries and beyond into their fight to overthrow the Syrian government. Also, car bombs are the insurgents stock in trade.

    This is a serious development, as already no mainstream corporate media outlet is reporting that Reyhanli is a pro-Assad village. Such reporting would weaken claims that the Syrian government is behind the car bombs.

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Sunday, May 12, 2013 at 4:22 am

    Tags:






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    A Drive Around the Bilderberg Hotel

    0

    Infowars.com
    May 12, 2013

    The Grove Hotel, site of the 2013 Bilderberg Group conference, is an ideal spot for a clandestine meeting because it is secluded by huge driveways and hundreds of acres of land. Access for protesters to congregate is virtually non-existent, meaning journalists and activists will be kept far from the actual hotel.

    The back exit at the Grove Hotel, site of the clandestine 2013 Bilderberg Group meeting, is not as long as the front entrance, but there’s nowhere for protesters to gather nearby!

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Sunday, May 12, 2013 at 4:27 am

    Tags:






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Watford Mayor: Bilderberg Protesters “Can And Do Cause Violence And Disturbance”

    0

    Jurriaan Maessen
    Infowars.Com
    May 11, 2013

    Dorothy Thornhill is the political leader of Watford Borough Council and the borough’s first Directly Elected Mayor.

    The mayor of Watford, Dorothy Thornhill, told the local newspaper today she fears violent protests at the upcoming Bilderberg conference. The mayor would be wise to consider signing up for a crash-course on how not to escalate an event before it even takes place.

    “I have my concerns about it because it does attract people who can and do cause violence and disturbance.”, Thornhill told the Watford Observer. Although she added she is “confident the police will be able to minimise that”, she appears to suck up to the global elite by stating “it is very good the Grove has been deemed a prestigious enough venue.”

    The Watford observer ran another article today, noting that close to a thousand protesters may be present around the cordoned-off area of the Grove Hotel and its immediate surroundings.

    “Most of The Grove’s grounds will be closed to the public while the conference takes place and Hertfordshire Constabulary will be given the job of keeping the crowds out.”, the report reads.

    The local newspaper insists on describing the expected demonstrators as “crowds” of conspiracy theorists, ready to run over the gates and storm the Grove Hotel. It doesn’t mention that the annual confab usually attracts peaceful but critical protesters. Talking about last year’s conference in the US, the reporter for the Watford observer implicitly expresses doubt that the protesters will abide by the law:

    “In the main the crowds (at Bilderberg 2012) were kept confined to the lawns outside the hotel, and although the barriers were strictly enforced, there were no reported arrests. Whether Watford can expect the same crowds is yet to be seen.”

    These passive-aggressive words by an uninformed local reporter, and the foolish statements made by mayor Thornhill, seem to echo some feeling of discomfort on the part of the local establishment at the prospect of their area filling up with critical people trying to make sure the media blackout on Bilderberg does not endure. This feeling of discomfort is understandable. But, like any vague disturbance of the mind, it would be wise for them to reach for the roots of their discomfort. It is not the protesters that should be their main concern. It is the fact

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Homeland Security Funded Exercise Portrayed Homeschoolers as Terrorists

    0

    Kurt Nimmo
    Infowars.com
    May 11, 2013

    Taken on its own, the KOMO 4 News report below out of Seattle paints a stark and frightening picture of police battling “angry parents” in a simulated shooting at a school. The practice of police training to take on everything from homeschoolers to patriots and constitutionalists — “rightwing extremists” in government parlance — is anything but a rarity. Such exercises are now a prominent feature of the expanding police state.

    In 2002, Alex Jones covered school shooting police exercises targeting homeschoolers, a topic included in his film, Police State Trilogy. Since that time, the effort to malign homeschooling parents as extremists and terrorists has only increased.

    Police State Exercises Now Part of Public Education Landscape

    In 2004, cops in Muskegon, Michigan conducted a “mock attack” on a school bus as part of a terrorism response exercise. The terrorists portrayed in the exercise were not fanatical Muslims or even phantom rightwing extremists — they were said to be fanatical homeschoolers.

    According to the Muskegon Chronicle, the exercise was a simulated “attack by a fictitious radical group called Wackos Against Schools and Education who believe everyone should be homeschooled,” Homeschool World reported in September, 2004.

    The simulated attack was funded by the Department of Homeland Security.

    Prison Planet.com reported:

    The mock attack was funded by a Homeland Security grant and required the participation of students to act bloody and injured, also involving hospitals, morgues and mannequins painted up to look like dead children, as parents were ordered to dash to emergency rooms frantic in the belief that their child had perished.

    The Muskegon Area Intermediate School District later had to apologize for characterizing homeschoolers as terrorists after hundreds of complaints poured in.

    Stereotypes consistently propped-up by the media demonize homeschoolers as hicks, retards and extremists, despite the fact the local and national spelling bees are routinely won by homeschooled children.

    The ceaseless attack on homeschooling is an attempt to neutralize any alternatives parents have to placing their children in the state run re-education gulags known as the “public school system.”

    “Michigan is the epicenter of the agenda to mould all schools into youth internment centers, indoctrinating all children to accept the presence of surveillance cameras, biometric scanning to access buildings and buy food, ID tracking cards and men in uniforms pointing guns at

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    U.S. Currently Fighting 74 Different Wars … That It Will Publicly Admit

    0

    Washington’s Blog
    May 11, 2013

    And Many More Covert Wars Without Congressional Oversight … Let Alone Public Knowledge

    Fire Dog Lake’s Kevin Gosztola notes:

    Linda J. Bilmes and Michael D. Intriligator, ask in a recent paper, “How many wars is the US fighting today?”

    Today US military operations are involved in scores of countries across all the five continents. The US military is the world’s largest landlord, with significant military facilities in nations around the world, and with a significant presence in Bahrain, Djibouti,Turkey, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Kuwait, Iraq, Afghanistan, Kosovo, and Kyrgyzstan, in addition to long-established bases in Germany, Japan, South Korea, Italy, and the UK. Some of these are vast, such as the Al Udeid Air Force Base in Qatar, the forward headquarters of the United States Central Command, which has recently been expanded to accommodate up to 10,000 troops and 120 aircraft.

    Citing a page at US Central Command’s (CENTCOM) website, they highlight the “areas of responsibility” publicly listed:

    The US Central Command (CENTCOM) is active in 20 countries across the Middle Eastern region, and is actively ramping-up military training, counterterrorism programs, logistical support, and funding to the military in various nations. At this point, the US has some kind of military presence in Afghanistan, Bahrain, Egypt, Iran, Iraq, Jordan, Kazakhstan, Kuwait, Kyrgyzstan, Lebanon, Oman, Pakistan, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Syria, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, U.A.E., Uzbekistan, and Yemen.

    US Africa Command (AFRICOM), according to the paper, “supports military-to-military relationships with 54 African nations.”

    [Gosztola points out that the U.S. military is also conducting operations of one kind or another in Syrian, Jordan, South Sudan, Kosovo, Libya, Yemen, the Congo, Uganda, Mali, Niger and other countries.]

    Altogether, that makes 74 nations where the US is fighting or “helping” some force in some proxy struggle that has been deemed beneficial by the nation’s masters of war.

    ***

    A Congressional Research Service (CRS) provides an accounting of all the publicly acknowledged deployments of US military forces

    But those are just the public operations.

    Gosztola notes that the covert operations are uncountable:

    Beyond that, there are Special Operations forces in countries. Jeremy Scahill in Dirty Wars: The World is a Battlefield, writes, “By mid-2010, the Obama administration had increased the presence of Special Operations forces from sixty countries to seventy-five countries.

    ***

    Scahill also reports, based on his own “well-placed special operations sources”:

    …[A]mong the countries where [Joint Special Operations Command] teams had been deployed under the Obama administration were: Iran,

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    The War on 3D Printing Begins

    0

    Tony Cartalucci
    Infowars.com
    May 11, 2013

    May 11, 2013 (LocalOrg) — It was inevitable. A technology like 3D printing that essentially puts cheap labor, manufacturing, and retail all in the same place — upon one’s desktop — spells the absolute, utter and permanent end to the monopolies and unwarranted power and influence of the corporate-financier elite who have lorded over humanity since human civilization began — a permanent end the elite will fight against with the total summation of their ill-gotten power and influence.

    The pretext being used to begin this war, is a 3D printed gun built and demonstrated by Defense Distributed in Austin, Texas. After designing, printing out, and firing the 3D printed gun, the US State Department demanded that the designs, distributed for free on the Internet, be taken down — claiming tenuously that by posting the designs on the Internet, arms export bans may have been violated — this the same government that is on record, openly shipping arms, cash, and military equipment to its own listed terrorist organizations from the Mujahedeen e-Khalq (MEK or MKO) in Iraq and Iran, to the Libyan Islamic Fighting Group (LIFG) in Libya, to Al Qaeda’s Syrian franchise,Jabhat al-Nusra.

    In the Independent’s article, “US government orders Cody Wilson and Defense Distributed to remove blueprint for 3D-printed handgun from the web,” it’s reported that:

    The US government has demanded the removal of online files which allow users to 3D-print their own unregistered gun at home.

    The blueprint has so far been downloaded more than 100,000 times since Defense Distributed — which spent a year designing the “Liberator” handgun — made it available online.

    Last week Defense Distributed built the gun from plastic on an industrial 3D printer bought on eBay for $8,000 (£5,140), and fired it.

    The Office of Defense Trade Controls Compliance wrote to the company’s founder Cody Wilson demanding the designs be “removed from public access” until he could prove he had not broken laws governing shipping weapons overseas.

    3D Printing: The Sum of All Corporate-Fascist Fears 

    For several years now, buzz has been growing about 3D printing. Small companies have begun opening up around the world, selling 3D printers, or using 3D printers for small run production, filling niches, or shifting markets from large corporations and their globalized supply chains, to local, decentralized business models. While governments like those in China have embraced the technology and

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    The New European Revolt

    0

    Some young Europeans have given up on change. They just want to leave.

    Populyst blog
    zerohedge.com
    May 11, 2013

    One of the main benefits of forecasts based on demographics is the fact that they can be more precise and therefore more reliable than others. For example, the number of people aged 40 in the United States twenty years from now is roughly the same number of people aged 20 today, minus premature deaths plus new immigrants. A prediction that enjoys a similar inevitability is that welfare programs as currently defined will certainly be unaffordable a few years from now, given the aging of the population and concomitant rising dependency ratio.

    It is a fair bet that one way or another, the current generation of young people will be unwilling and/or unable to pay for Social Security and Medicare as they presently stand. Of course, Western Europe has the same problem and President Hollande of France recently got a whiff of what is coming from an open letter addressed to him by a 20-year old student* named Clara G. and published in the magazine Le Point.

    In summary, Clara does not believe it fair that she and her generation should be saddled with the enormous debt accumulated by Mr. Hollande’s generation. As a remedy, she is considering leaving France for friendlier pastures. She says she is not alone and cites a recent poll by Viavoice which found that a shocking 50% of respondents aged 18-34 answered ‘yes’ to the question “if given the opportunity, would you like to leave France to live in another country?”. Forty-five years after the upheavals of Mai 68, an important segment of the young are more interested in exile than in change.

    Addressing the President directly, she writes:

    “This will probably shock you, but it is mainly for fiscal reasons,… simply because I do not feel like working all my life to pay taxes, a large part of which will only service the 1.9 trillion Euros of debt that your generation has kindly left us. If these borrowings had at least been invested to prepare the future of the country, if I was getting a small benefit from them, it would not be a problem for me to help repay them. But this debt only helped your generation live above its means, and assure

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Senior IRS official: ‘I’m not good at math’ — yeah, we know

    0

    Mike Adams
    Natural News
    May 11, 2013

    (NaturalNews) During a conference call with reporters, senior IRS official Lois Lerner uttered words that are now reverberating across the blogosphere: “I’m not good at math.”

    Don’t worry, Lois, neither is anyone else. And the less you can do math, the happier you’ll be at the IRS where, let’s face it, no two people ever come up with the same answer for any given tax return.

    This utterance bubbled out of Lois’s mouth in the middle of a conference call concerning the stunning revelations that the IRS targeted conservative groups for punitive audits during the 2012 elections. Yep, when you’re not a gung-ho supporter for the socialist agenda, IRS agents just happen to come knocking on your door. The IRS apologized for the punitive targeting, but that’s hardly enough. People should be going to jail over this. This is political witch hunting at its worst.

    But don’t worry. Nobody involved in this can do math, either. In fact, most journalists can’t do math and hardly any taxpayers understand math at all. If they did, they would be impeaching Obama faster than an AR-15 being raffled off at a Tea Party rally for his outrageous explosion in government debt spending that has ballooned the national debt more than all the other presidents in U.S. history… combined! See www.USdebtclock.org

    Obama has set America on course for an apocalyptic financial blowout, but no one seems to notice because they can’t do math. After all, sixteen trillion in debt sounds a whole lot like sixteen million. It’s only one letter off. How big of a difference could that be, after all?

    If you could do math, you would realize the IRS has no purpose other than social engineering

    But here’s the real kicker in all this: Anyone who can do math realizes the entire “take” from taxpayers by the IRS each year is only about $1.2 trillion (this is personal income tax, not corporate). And yet, as we’ve seen over and over again, the U.S. government can conjure up a trillion dollars anytime it wants! Especially for bankster bailouts, stimulus spending or anything else it’s trying to push.

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    Why is this a big deal? Because it means the government doesn’t need an IRS to raise the money to fund itself. The IRS exists

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Police Practice for Gunbattle with… ‘Angry Parents at a School’

    0

    Komo News
    May 11, 2013

    Police train to battle “angry parents” engaged in an armed siege against a school.

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Saturday, May 11, 2013 at 7:26 am

    Tags:






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Mayor of Watford Fears Violence at Bilderberg 2013

    0

    Ben Endley
    Watford Observer
    May 11, 2013

    Watford’s elected mayor, Dorothy Thornhill, said she had mixed feelings about whether the summit was a good thing for the town.

    She said: “I have my concerns about it because it does attract people who can and do cause violence and disturbance.

    “But I am confident the police will be able to minimise that and give them their right to protest.

    “I am ambivalent about whether this is a good thing. It’s potentially a positive thing as long as things don’t kick off.

    “I am concerned about the use of police resource but it is very good The Grove has been deemed a prestigious enough venue.”

    Full story here.

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Saturday, May 11, 2013 at 7:26 am

    Tags:






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Groundbreaking New Bilderberg Revelations Coming Soon

    0

    Key intelligence uncovered: Transformation of Bilderberg into new breed of technocratic elite

    Paul Joseph Watson
    Infowars.com
    May 11, 2013

    Major new revelations concerning the secretive Bilderberg Group have been uncovered by Infowars reporters who visited the Grove Hotel in Watford, UK — site of the elitist confab’s 2013 get-together.

    With international policy having been set by Bilderberg for decades behind closed doors with complete contempt for transparency and the democratic process, the organization is in the process of merging with a new breed of technocrats under the umbrella of Google — with the behemoth corporation being handed the baton by Bilderberg to implement policies in a variety of different fields, both technology-related and geopolitical.

    Infowars reporters who visited the Grove were able to document how the site is being used as an outpost for social media-driven regime change under the auspices of the “Arab Spring”.

    The information set to be released is a game changer and will highlight how Bilderberg is transforming itself into a new technocratic elite, with Google at the helm.

    Infowars was also able to fully document the layout of the hotel and the sprawling grounds which surround the complex outside of which will gather hundreds of protesters when the clandestine group meets from June 6-9.

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    Visit Infowars.com on Monday to uncover the true agenda behind “Googleberg” as well as the Bilderberg Group’s talking points and political agenda for 2013.

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Saturday, May 11, 2013 at 11:28 am

    Tags:






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    Fabrication power to the People! Why no government can stop the 3D printing revolution

    0

    Mike Adams
    naturalnews.com
    May 11, 2013

    The 3D printing revolution has arrived, and it’s freaking out governments around the world because distributed, non-centralized fabrication technology threatens their monopolistic controls over physical objects. For a few thousand dollars, anyone can purchase a 3D printer (an “additive” desktop fabrication device) and print out physical objects using ABS plastic. (See list of manufacturers, below.) 3D plans are freely available to download online, and the printers are on the verge of flooding into the marketplace with a wide range of affordable, easy to use models from a large number of manufacturers.

    Being able to print your own objects sounds amazing to the average citizen. Need a hose mender for your garden hose? Don’t drive to Home Depot to get it – just print it! Need a replacement part for your child’s toy? Just design it in 3D software and print it! Any object you can imagine can be printed in ABS plastic, including complex gears and objects with intricate details. Many printers can print in multiple colors, too.

    Cody Wilson from Defense Distributed famously designed and tested a printable gun that fires a single round of .380 auto ammo. Pistols, it turns out, aren’t that complicated. They essentially need nothing more than a trigger, a firing pin, a chamber to hold the round and a barrel to allow it to accelerate out when fired. Wilson’s innovation was making a gun work out of plastic.

    Once he accomplished that, the U.S. government freaked out and sent him a threatening letter that forced him to remove all the 3D designs from his website. He complied, but not before the gun was downloaded over 100,000 times. It now appears on The Pirate Bay – just search for “DefDist Defcad Liberator” and you’ll easily find it available for download via bittorrent.

    In fact, at this point it’s laughable that the U.S. government is trying to restrict the information from “export.” Information travels at the speed of light, and within seconds of the plans being posted on the Defcad website, they were already spreading across the globe.

    And that’s my point in all this: Governments cannot stop the flow of information, and because information now equals objects (thanks to 3D printing), governments cannot stop the sharing of physical objects.

    Defcad, by the way, could be back online and fully compliant with ITAR by simply restricting their downloads to

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Desperation: Police Chief Turns to Town Citizens for Ammunition Amid Nationwide Shortages

    0

    Mac Slavo
    SHTFplan.com

    May 11th, 2013

    The Department of Homeland Security may be in possession of nearly two billion rounds of ammunition, but despite claiming it’s being stockpiled for the safety of Americans, they’re not sharing.

    The shortages of popular ammunition rounds has made it difficult for average citizens to acquire most calibers of ammunition through regular retail channels, but the empty shelves don’t stop there.

    Police departments across the country are scarmbling to find ammunition for training and enforcement, and they’re being told that the delays for delivery are 6 — 8 months.

    This prompted Proctor, Minnesota police chief Walt Wobig to send out a call for help:

    The Chief says he was told he’d have to wait months, even a year to get more ammo.

    “I was really surprised, let’s just put it that way,” said Chief Walt Wobig of the difficulty getting ammunition.

    Woberg says that when he asked suppliers for the 1,000 rounds of ammo his officers needed for training, he was told he’d have to wait months.

    “I go, ‘Do you have 40—caliber qualification rounds?’ And they go, ‘Well, no. It’s going to take six to eight months [to get them],’” said Wobig of a conversation with a manufacturer.

    Retailers say the nationwide shortage is due in part to people stockpiling ammunition in response to recently proposed gun legislation.

    “It was getting a little short last fall, so they were already behind, but there definitely is panic,” said Superior Shooters Supply owner, Pat Kukull of the shortage, “We’ve [the store] been here for 35 years and I’ve never seen anything like it.”

    With the Proctor Police Department in need of ammunition, the Chief sent out a call asking for help. Who answered? The very people his officers are sworn to protect.

    “The citizens were like, ‘If you need something, we got plenty here,’” said Wobig.

    A citizen and a Proctor police officer loaned their personal ammunition to the Department, a total of 1,500 rounds. The Chief says others were willing to help too.

    “I had several other calls from other citizens that said, ‘Hey, if you need more ammunition we have plenty,’” said Woberg, “I know that if I need ammunition I have citizens out there that will gladly come forward.”

    Ammunition shortages are nothing new since gun control proponents have threatened the Second Amendment with multi-faceted legislation on state and federal levels that aims

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Democrats Dream of Permanent Obama White House

    0

    Military dictatorship more likely than Democrats repealing 22nd Amendment

    Kurt Nimmo
    Infowars.com
    May 11, 2013

    Now that Benghazi appears to be destroying the political career of Hillary Clinton and taking air out of the Clinton dynasty, we are beginning to hear rumblings once again about a third Obama term.

    Liberals unabashedly throw this prospect out every couple years. They try to get traction on the effort to repeal the Twenty-second Amendment limiting the president to two terms. Democrats pine for the days of FDR and his interminable presidency. If not for a cerebral hemorrhage, Roosevelt would have served an unprecedented fourth term. Republican nominee Thomas Dewey announced support of an amendment in 1944 limiting future presidents to two terms. The Twenty-second Amendment was passed in 1947 and ratified by the states in 1951.

    George Washington did not seek a third term — he saw term limitation as a bulwark against monarchy — and Thomas Jefferson railed against the prospect of life-long presidents. In 1807 he wrote, “if some termination to the services of the chief Magistrate be not fixed by the Constitution, or supplied by practice, his office, nominally four years, will in fact become for life.” Madison and Monroe followed the two term limit, although later presidents, including Ulysses S. Grant and Woodrow Wilson, flirted with the idea.

    New York Democrat Rep. Jose Serrano has once again floated an effort to kill the Twenty-second Amendment, undeterred by past failures stretching back to 1997. His bill has zero sponsors and is unlikely to go forward, but it reveals a dogged determination by Democrats and some Republicans — including one sold as a libertarian, Ronald Reagan — to install a president for life.

    Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid and former House Majority Leader Steny Hoyer back the idea. Former president Bill Clinton believes in a third, non-consecutive term. “I’ve always thought that should be the rule,” Clinton told MSNBC’s Morning Joe last November. “I think as a practical matter, you couldn’t apply this to anyone who has already served, but going forward, I personally believe that should be the rule.”

    Fortunately, repealing the amendment will not be easy. It requires a vote by both houses of Congress and approval by three-fourths of the 50 states.

    “America is certifiably insane, but that doesn’t make ‘we the people’ agree on much, and at least 48%

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Paul: Hillary Clinton ‘should never hold high office again’

    0

    Alexis Levinson
    dailycaller.com
    May 10, 2013

    Kentucky Sen. Rand Paul wrote Friday that former Secretary of State Hillary Clinton “should never hold high office again” in the wake of criticism over the administration’s handling of the lead up and aftermath of the attacks on the U.S. Consulate in Benghazi, Libya.

    Paul made the comments in an op-ed Friday in The Washington Times.

    Testimony from several whistle-blowers at at hearing before the House Oversight Committee on Wednesday contradicted Clinton’s account of the events surrounding the Sept. 11 attack in Benghazi, as well as the version of events put forward by the administration. Republicans have seized on the testimony and are demanding further answers from the administration. Sen. Lindsey Graham and former Vice President Dick Cheney said Thursday that Clinton, who no longer holds the post of secretary of state, should be brought back before Congress to testify again in light of the new information, and subpoenaed if necessary.

    Read more

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 9:31 pm

    Tags:






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Greece’s youth unemployment hits 60%

    0

    dailymail.co.uk
    May 10, 2013

    Greek youth unemployment rose above 60 per cent for the first time in February, reflecting the pain caused by the country’s crippling recession after years of austerity under its international bailout.

    Greece’s jobless rate has almost tripled since the country’s debt crisis emerged in 2009 and was more than twice the euro zone’s average unemployment reading of 12.1 percent in March.

    While the overall unemployment rate rose to 27 per cent, according to statistics service data released on Thursday, joblessness among those aged between 15 and 24 jumped to 64.2 percent in February from 59.3 percent in January.

    Read more

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 4:30 pm

    Tags: ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Greece’s youth unemployment hits 60%

    0

    dailymail.co.uk
    May 10, 2013

    Greek youth unemployment rose above 60 per cent for the first time in February, reflecting the pain caused by the country’s crippling recession after years of austerity under its international bailout.

    Greece’s jobless rate has almost tripled since the country’s debt crisis emerged in 2009 and was more than twice the euro zone’s average unemployment reading of 12.1 percent in March.

    While the overall unemployment rate rose to 27 per cent, according to statistics service data released on Thursday, joblessness among those aged between 15 and 24 jumped to 64.2 percent in February from 59.3 percent in January.

    Read more

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 4:30 pm

    Tags: ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Apple Deluged by Police Demands to Decrypt iPhones

    0

    Declan McCullagh
    CNET
    May 10, 2013

    Apple receives so many police demands to decrypt seized iPhones that it has created a “waiting list” to handle the deluge of requests, CNET has learned.

    Court documents show that federal agents were so stymied by the encrypted iPhone 4S of a Kentucky man accused of distributing crack cocaine that they turned to Apple for decryption help last year.

    An agent at the ATF, the federal Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives, “contacted Apple to obtain assistance in unlocking the device,” U.S. District Judge Karen Caldwell wrote in a recent opinion. But, she wrote, the ATF was “placed on a waiting list by the company.”

    Read full article

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 4:22 pm

    Tags: , , ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Apple Deluged by Police Demands to Decrypt iPhones

    0

    Declan McCullagh
    CNET
    May 10, 2013

    Apple receives so many police demands to decrypt seized iPhones that it has created a “waiting list” to handle the deluge of requests, CNET has learned.

    Court documents show that federal agents were so stymied by the encrypted iPhone 4S of a Kentucky man accused of distributing crack cocaine that they turned to Apple for decryption help last year.

    An agent at the ATF, the federal Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives, “contacted Apple to obtain assistance in unlocking the device,” U.S. District Judge Karen Caldwell wrote in a recent opinion. But, she wrote, the ATF was “placed on a waiting list by the company.”

    Read full article

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 4:22 pm

    Tags: , , ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Pirate Bay Takes Over Distribution of Censored 3D Printable Gun

    0

    Torrent Freak
    May 10, 2013

    A few days after the blueprints for the world’s first printable gun were published online, Defense Distributed has been asked by the State Department to pull them down, citing possible arms trafficking violations. The blueprints, however, are still available on The Pirate Bay and many other file-sharing sites, which adds a 3D chapter to the IP enforcement debate. The Pirate Bay says it welcomes the blueprints and has no intention of taking the files down.

    In late 2012 the 3D blueprint website Thingiverse decided to ban 3D gun designs, citing their terms of service which clearly prohibit files used to make weapons.

    Enter DEFCAD, a site dedicated to hosting designs that have been banned at Thingiverse. Namely, the entirely printable 3D gun design which clocked up more than 100,000 downloads within its first two days of release.

    Read full article

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 3:40 pm

    Tags: , , , ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    1/3 Population of Puerto Rico Gets Food Stamps from U.S. Gov’t – $2 Billion in 2012

    0

    Elizabeth Harrington
    cnsnews.com
    May 10, 2013

    The federal government spent more than $2 billion to provide food stamps to Puerto Rico in 2012, up to 25 percent of which is untraceable because it is distributed in cash and there is “no way to verify that funds are spent on food,” according to the U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA).

    The funds are used to supply more than one-third of the population of Puerto Rico with food stamps.

    According to the U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA), the Nutrition Assistance Program (NAP) for Puerto Rico, an unincorporated territory of the United States, received $2 billion in Nutrition Assistance Block Grants in fiscal year 2012.

    Read more

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 3:40 pm

    Tags: ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Deepening Economic Crisis: Austerity Policies Heighten National Divisions throughout Europe

    0

    Stefan Steinberg
    globalresearch.ca
    May 10, 2013

    In recent weeks, debate has been raging in political circles and the media over the merits of implementing austerity measures in Europe. The background to the polemics is the rapidly worsening economic crisis in Europe and the emergence of mass opposition to austerity policies in Europe.

    The Italian election in February was the most recent and clearest expression of the mounting hostility to austerity. The unelected technocrat regime of Mario Monti, which had carried out a series of swingeing spending cuts at the behest of the EU and the banks, suffered a devastating defeat. The right-wing populist comedian Beppo Grillo was the initial beneficiary of the broad anti-government sentiment, which exposed the alienation of millions not only from the Monti government, but all of the established parties.

    The revolt against austerity in Italy, which could not find progressive expression due to the bankruptcy of the country’s so-called left, is mirrored in other European countries, notably Greece, Spain and Portugal, where millions have taken to the streets in recent months to defend jobs, basic rights and living standards.

    Staring economic disaster in the face, the European political elite demonstrates increasing disorientation. Conflicts between individual national bourgeoisies are proving increasingly impossible to resolve and criticism is growing of the German government in particular, which has played the leading role in devising austerity policies since the 2008-09 crash.

    In a discussion on the implications of the EU’s austerity policy in Brussels on April 22, European Commission President Manuel Barroso admitted: “I am deeply concerned about the divisions that we see emerging: political extremes and populism tearing apart the political support and the social fabric that we need to deal with the crisis; disunion emerging between the centre and the periphery of Europe; a renewed demarcation line being drawn between the North and the South of Europe; prejudices re-emerging and again dividing our citizens, sometimes national prejudices that are simply unacceptable also from an ethical point of view.”

    Barroso’s comments on the escalating tensions in Europe provoked by brutal austerity policies constitute a devastating indictment of the policies pursued by the European Commission which he heads.

    Barroso’s warnings of social division and upheaval in Europe have been echoed throughout the European press. In a recent analysis of mass unemployment in Europe titled “And suddenly there’s a Bang,” the Süddeutsche Zeitung cited a sociologist who

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Could U.S. Immigration Reform Include a National Biometric Database?

    0

    Adam Vrankuli
    BioMetric Update
    May 10, 2013

    Reports are emerging today regarding the possibility of a national biometric database of U.S. adults, following references to a “photo tool” administered by the Department of Homeland Security in immigration reform measures currently in front of the U.S. Senate.

    According to a report in Wired published this morning, buried in the legislation — called Border Security, Economic Opportunity, and Immigration Modernization Act — is “language mandating the creation of an innocuously-named ‘photo tool,’ a massive federal database administered by the Department of Homeland Security and containing names, ages, Social Security numbers and photographs of everyone in the country with a driver’s license of other state-issued photo ID.”

    Under the new system, employers would have to cross-reference new hires in the database to ensure they really are who they claim to be.

    Read full article

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 3:28 pm

    Tags: , ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Lindsey Graham blames immigration woes on south-of-the-border ‘hell holes’

    0

    latimes.com
    May 10, 2013

    The GOP’s effort to woo Latinos may have suffered a minor setback Thursday, thanks to Sen. Lindsey Graham (R-S.C.). Republicans have been trying to improve their standing with the fastest-growing voting bloc ever since last year’s election, when Latinos overwhelmingly cast their ballots for President Obama.

    Graham, a member of the Senate Judiciary Committee, decided that Thursday’s “mark-up” of a bipartisan immigration reform bill was a good moment to review the differences between the situation on the U.S.-Mexico border and on the U.S.-Canada border. His conclusion: Canada is nice. Mexico isn’t.

    “We have a Canadian border…. Why are we OK up there and not OK to the south?… Why is one a problem and the other is not? Because Canada is a place where people like to stay. They like Canada. We like Canada. We love to have them visit. They want to go home because it’s a nice place,” said Graham. “The people coming across the southern border live in hell holes. They don’t like that. They want to come here. Our problem is we can’t have everybody in the world who lives in a hell hole coming to America.”

    Read more

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 3:23 pm

    Tags:






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Hanford Nuclear Waste Cleanup Plant May Be Too Dangerous

    0

    Valerie Brown
    Scientific American
    May 10, 2013

    The most toxic and voluminous nuclear waste in the U.S.–208 million liters –sits in decaying underground tanks at the Hanford Site (a nuclear reservation) in southeastern Washington State. It accumulated there from the middle of World War II, when the Manhattan Project invented the first nuclear weapon, to 1987, when the last reactor shut down. The federal government’s current attempt at a permanent solution for safely storing that waste for centuries–the Waste Treatment and Immobilization Plant here–has hit a major snag in the form of potential chain reactions, hydrogen explosions and leaks from metal corrosion. And the revelation last February that six more of the storage tanks are currently leaking has further ramped up the pressure for resolution.

    After decades of research, experimentation and political inertia, the U.S. Department of Energy (DoE) started building the “Vit Plant” at Hanford in 2000. It’s intended to sequester the waste in stainless steel—encased glass logs, a process known as vitrification (hence “Vit”), so it cannot escape into the environment, barring natural disasters like earthquakes or catastrophic fires. But progress on the plant slowed to a crawl last August, when numerous interested parties acknowledged that the plant’s design might present serious safety risks. In response, then-Energy Secretary Steven Chu appointed an expert panel to find a way forward. Because 60 of the 177 underground tanks have already leaked and all are at increasing risk to do so, solving the problem is urgent.

    Vitrification prep 101: Some tough homework

    The plant’s construction, currently contracted by the DoE to Bechtel National, Inc., may be the most complicated engineering project underway in the U.S. But back in 2000 the DoE and Bechtel decided to save time and money by starting construction before crucial structures and processes had been designed and properly tested at a scale comparable to full operation. This wasn’t such a good idea, says Dirk Dunning, nuclear material specialist with the Oregon Department of Energy. “The worst possible time to save money is at the beginning. You’re better off to be very nearly complete on design before you begin construction.”

    Read full article

    <!–

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Cyprus considered exiting the euro zone in March

    0

    Howard Schneider
    washingtonpost.com
    May 10, 2013

    Cyprus seriously considered dropping out of the euro zone at the peak of its financial crisis in March as it faced a standoff over the terms of an international bailout, Cyprus Foreign Minister Ioannis Kasoulides said in an interview in Washington on Thursday.

    The country’s leaders discussed severing ties with the 17-nation currency union for “24 to 48 hours,” after the parliament rejected an initial bailout plan, throwing the country’s economic future into doubt, Kasoulides said. “It was an internal reflection” about how the country should proceed, he said. “We had to think of all the plans B or C that existed.”

    The exit idea was shelved after it was estimated that reinstating the Cypriot pound would have caused an immediate 40 percent drop in the value of the new currency, devastating a small island that relies heavily on imports.

    Read more

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 3:14 pm

    Tags: ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Judge Refuses to Drop Order on Contraceptive Pill Without Regard to Age

    0

    MICHAEL D. SHEAR
    nytimes.com
    May 10, 2013

    In the latest skirmish between the courts and the Obama administration over contraception, a federal judge on Friday refused to suspend his order requiring that the morning-after emergency contraceptive pill be made available to all ages without a prescription.

    The Justice Department last week requested suspension of the April 5 order by Judge Edward R. Korman of the Eastern District of New York pending an appeal on behalf of the Food and Drug Administration.

    On Friday, Judge Korman refused to suspend his order during the government’s appeal, calling it a “frivolous” attempt to delay the legal proceedings. But he postponed the enforcement until Monday to allow lawyers for the Justice Department to pursue further appeals of that decision.

    Read more

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 2:55 pm

    Tags: , , ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Newly Designed Chinese Drone Ready for its First Flight Test

    0

    WantChinaTimes
    May 10, 2013

    A newly designed Chinese drone is ready for its first flight test after completing its taxi test last December at an unknown airfield in the southeastern province of Jiangxi, reports Duowei News, an outlet operated by overseas Chinese.

    Designed jointly by the Hongdu Aviation Industry Group and Shenyang Aviation Corporation, the Lijian (“sharp sword”) is China’s first stealth drone and the third in the world after the X-47 designed by the United States and France’s nEUROn. The Lijian program was launched in 2009 and the drone’s ground test was conducted on Dec. 13 last year.

    China Aviation News reports that the Lijian is now ready for flight testing. The drone is set to be used by the PLA Air Force and Navy Air Force for combat missions, but also for tracking and reconnaissance purposes.

    Read full article

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 2:21 pm

    Tags: ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    US Sending $100mln Aid Package to Syria

    0

    RT
    May 10, 2013

    The US has announced that it will provide an additional $100 million in humanitarian aid for Syria, which will bring the total provided aid to $510 million.

    US Secretary of State John F. Kerry announced the new aid during his visit to Rome on Thursday, detailing that the funds will be used to support 1.4 million Syrian refugees that have been displaced during the civil war.

    Much of the aid will be given to countries that are now home to refugee camps, including Jordan, Lebanon and Turkey. Jordan will receive $43 million to support the country’s United Nations humanitarian programs.

    While meeting with Jordanian Foreign Minister Nasser Judeth in Rome, Kerry detailed that Jordan’s fourth-largest city is a ‘tent city’ made up of Syrian refugees.

    “Jordan feels the impact of what is happening more than any other country,” Kerry said. There are about 525,000 Syrian refugees in Jordan, which now make up 10 percent of the country’s population, the foreign minister added, explaining that the numbers are expected to rise to make up 20 to 25 percent of the country’s population by the end of 2013.

    “No country can cope with the numbers that are as huge as I described,” he said.  Jordan is currently building a new refugee camp at Azraq, and the aid money will be used to provide food, shelter and health programs.

    About $32 million in humanitarian aid will also be given to Lebanon, and about $9.5 will go to programs in Turkey. The remaining $16 million will be used to provide Syrians in their own country with basic necessities, including blankets, clothing, healthcare, cash assistance, and hygiene kits, the Associated Press reports, based on interviews with unnamed officials.

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    The Obama administration has long maintained its opposition to direct involvement in the Syrian conflict, but has become the number one provider of humanitarian aid in Syria. While Kerry’s announcement focused on this type of assistance, rather than direct intervention, the Obama administration is allegedly considering providing weapons to the Syrian rebels.

    This week, Sen. Robert Menendez introduced a bill to directly arm Syrian rebels, writing that “the Assad regime has crossed a red line that forces us to consider all options.”

    Earlier this week, Kerry met for more than five

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Boston Bombing: What You Aren’t Told

    0

    Infowars.com
    May 10, 2013

    Triggers pulled on 4th, 2nd & 1st Amendments distracted by flag waving; clunky FBI propaganda; and unleash the War on Bathtubs. Seek truth from facts with former Marine Corps officer James Fetzer, editor of Storyleak Anthony Gucciardi, the Corbett Report’s James Corbett, Questioning the War on Terror author Kevin Barrett, Boston eyewitnesses, and Fmr. Rep. Ron Paul.

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 2:13 pm

    Tags: ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    The US government might be the biggest hacker in the world

    0

    rt.com
    May 10, 2013

    The United States government is investing tens of millions of dollars each year on offensive hacking operations in order to exploit vulnerabilities in the computers of its adversaries, Reuters reports.

    According to an in-depth article published Friday by journalist Joseph Menn, the US and its Department of Defense contractors are increasingly pursuing efforts to hack the computers of foreign competitors, in turn exposing a rarely discussed aspect of the nation’s clandestine cyber operations.

    In a time when the government continues to prosecute alleged domestic computer criminals – so much so that demands for technology law reform have been rampant as of late – Menn says the US is guilty of spending millions on discovering, identifying and exploiting previously unknown security flaws, often gaining unfettered access to the systems and networks of international targets.

    As a result, the US has become one of the world’s top players in regards to wreaking havoc over the Internet – even as calls to investigate foreign hackers increase in Congress.

    On Tuesday, a bipartisan supported proposal was introduced in Congress specifically to protect US commercial data from being compromised by foreign hackers. According to Menn, however, the American government is just as guilty of cybercrimes as the countries it warns against in introducing the “Deter Cyber Theft Act.”

    Even as the US government confronts rival powers over widespread Internet espionage, it has become the biggest buyer in a burgeoning gray market where hackers and security firms sell tools for breaking into computers,” Menn wrote.

    In his report, Menn explained that a large chunk of the country’s current cyber endeavors does not rely on defensive strategy as one might imagine, but instead involves offensive operations launched with the intent of causing harm on the computers of adversaries.

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    Menn wrote defense contractors “spend at least tens of millions of dollars a year” on simply researching exploits that, if pursued, could put the eyes and ears of the American intelligence company essentially anywhere in the world.

    And although the US has not officially gone on the record to acknowledge these shadowy operations, Menn wrote that the nation’s most well-known cyber endeavor – the Stuxnet worm that targeted Iranian nuclear plants – is just one example of the budding attempts

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Benghazi Memo Edits Show State, White House Involvement

    0

    Tory Hargro and Janet Loehrke
    USA Today
    May 10, 2013

    A top State Department official pressed the CIA and the White House to delete any mention of terrorism in public statements on the Benghazi terror attack to prevent critics from blaming lax security at the consulate, according to documents obtained by ABC News.

    The information “goes right to the heart of what the White House continues to deny,” Rep. Jason Chaffetz, R-Utah, told USA TODAY. “For eight months they denied there’s any manipulation, but this continues to shed light on something that was never true.”

    State Department spokeswoman Jen Psaki said in a statement to USA TODAY on Friday that the changes were made to prevent members of Congress from “providing more guidance to the public than the administration.”

    Read full article

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 1:51 pm

    Tags: ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Texas launches criminal probe into plant explosion; paramedic arrested

    0

    Sarah Mervosh, Brandon Formby and Christina Rosales
    DallasNews.com
    May 10, 2013

    Hours after a West paramedic was arrested for possessing a destructive device Friday, the Texas Rangers and McLennan County Sheriff’s office launched a criminal investigation into the fatal fertilizer plant explosion that he responded to last month.

    But authorities have yet to say whether the arrest of 31-year-old Bryce Reed was related to the April 17 explosion at West Fertilizer Co. that killed 15 people, including 12 men who were responding to the fire. Reed made an initial appearance in federal court in Waco on Friday but did not enter a plea. Assistant U.S. Attorney Mark Frazier would not release further details about the charge.

    The State Fire Marshal’s office has not determined — or ruled out — whether the fire was a criminal act or accidental. The agency also has not determined the cause of the fire that preceded the deadly explosion, believed to have been fueled largely by ammonium nitrate kept at the plant. Rachel Moreno, a spokeswoman for the agency, said Friday she could not comment on Reed’s arrest.

    Read full article

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 1:36 pm

    Tags: ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Germany arrests two Dutch citizens in cyber bank heist

    0

    Reuters
    May 10, 2013

    German prosecutors said on Friday they had arrested two Dutch citizens suspected of involvement in a $45 million global cyber heist unveiled the previous day by U.S. authorities.

    A 35-year-old man and a 56-year-old woman were caught on February 19 withdrawing 170,000 euros ($220,500) in Düsseldorf using Bank of Muscat credit cards. In total, $2.4 million dollars had been withdrawn in seven German cities, the prosecutors said.

    On Thursday, U.S. prosecutors said a criminal gang had stolen a total of $45 million from two Middle Eastern banks by hacking into credit card processing firms and withdrawing money from cash machines in 27 countries.

    Read full article

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 1:28 pm

    Tags: ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Man Who Stripped at Portland Airport Fights $1G TSA Fine

    0

    Fox News
    May 10, 2013

    An Oregon man who stripped naked during a security check at Portland International Airport says he expects the Transportation Administration Security Administration to uphold its $1,000 fine at a hearing Tuesday,

    John Brennan, of Portland says he plans to appeal in federal court to force a review of the constitutionality of TSA searches and inspections.

    Brennan, 50, made headlines last year when photos showing him standing near a metal detector without any clothes on went viral.

    Read full article

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 1:12 pm

    Tags: , ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Infowars Exclusive Interview with 3D Gunsmith: ‘Information Will Be Free, and It Wants To Be’

    0

    “I think information will be free, and it wants to be.”

    Adan Salazar
    Infowars.com
    May 10, 2013

    Yesterday, Infowars.com broke news that the State Department’s Office of Defense Trade Controls Compliance (DTCC) Enforcement Division had issued a take down notice to Austin-based 3D gun printing company Defense Distributed declaring the group’s open distribution of 3D gun part files on the Internet potentially violated export laws explicit in the International Traffic in Arms Regulations, or ITAR.

    The notice came just days after the group finally managed a fully-functional gun using mainly parts printed from a 3D printer, and aimed to have Defense Distributed cite their “procedures for determining proper jurisdiction of technical data,” data which, at this point the DTCC says, could be in violation of § 120.17 of the ITAR.

    Not Entirely Unexpected

    In an interview with Infowars Nightly News, the group’s founder Cody Wilson explained the order was not at all unexpected, and that for months the group had been cautiously optimistic they would bypass the trade regulations, which they were fully aware of and believed they were in full compliance with.

    “Back in December, when we started the project, we knew ITAR would be an issue,” Wilson told Infowars Nightly News. “As an arms manufacturer, we registered ITAR, but we thought since Defense Distributed would be a non-profit software company; we could not have to register for ITAR because we were just a software company and not interested in actual trade of arms, and then number 2, we could basically claim a public domain exemption from the ITAR and we wouldn’t have to ask permission to put the files up for download.”

    Gun-related files, Wilson claims, are already regulated and must be permitted before they can be distributed online, but since the beginning, the group has tried to avoid asking government for permission, not to flout the laws, but because they believed they met public domain exemptions.

    Indeed, early in the project’s development, Wilson explained to Infowars.com Defense Distributed would have to apply for a license with the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives because of the sketchy categorization of the firearms that could potentially be produced and the laws governing Title I and Title II weapons.

    “We’re gonna have to do the license because that’s the world we live in, apparently. And I think that’s unfortunate and I

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Wisconsin lawmaker set to unveil drone legislation

    0

    gazettextra.com
    May 10, 2013

    A bipartisan group of Wisconsin lawmakers is scheduled to unveil legislation that would ban the use of drones in Wisconsin.

    Rep. Tyler August is a Republican from Lake Geneva. His proposal would prohibit a law enforcement agency or any individual from using a drone equipped with video or audio equipment, or one that uses a weapon.

    Read more

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 11:54 am

    Tags: , , , ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    U.S. Postal Service posts $1.9 billion loss, despite efficiency efforts

    0

    Eric Yoder
    washingtonpost.com
    May 10, 2013

    Savings from efficiency efforts and increased revenues from some categories of business were not enough to prevent the U.S. Postal Service from posting a loss of $1.9 billion in its second fiscal quarter, postal officials announced Friday.

    The loss, following one of $1.5 billion in the first quarter, spurred officials to once again call on Congress to enact changes the Postal Service has proposed, including switching to five-day delivery of mail while continuing six-day delivery of packages, and savings on employee health insurance, retirement and other costs.

    Revenue from shipping and packages rose in the second quarter by $267 million, or 9.3 percent, compared with the prior year, while advertising mail revenues were up $96 million, or 2.4 percent. However, revenue from first-class mail, the Postal Service’s most profitable category, decreased $198 million, or 2.7 percent. Total mail volume fell to 38.8 billion pieces from 39.4 billion pieces.

    Read more

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 11:44 am

    Tags: , ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    IRS Admits Harassing Patriot Groups

    0

    Infowars.com
    May 10, 2013

    The Internal Revenue Service has “apologized” for harassing patriot and Tea Party groups, the Associated Press reports today.

    The political groups were inappropriately flagged for additional reviews during the 2012 election to determine if they were in violation of their tax-exempt status. The IRS searched for the words “patriot” and “tea party” in applications.

    Lois Lerner, who oversees the IRS unit on tax-exempt groups, said the federal government tax agency had singled out patriot groups for special treatment after complaints the agency asked the groups an inordinate number of questions to justify their tax-exempt status.

    The harassment is reminiscent of COINTELPRO tactics used by the government. Beginning in the late 1950s, the FBI enlisted the IRS to conduct selective tax audits of political organizations and individuals, including civil rights leader Martin Luther King.

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 11:01 am

    Tags: , ,






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    0

    [unable to retrieve full-text content]

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    “Politics” behind Defense Department threatening legal action against 3D printed gun?

    0

    John Lott
    johnrlott.blogspot.com
    May 10, 2013

    Will these 3D printed guns be used in the commission of crime?  Undoubtedly.  But will they also be used for self-defense?  Equally surely.  If you ban 3D printed guns, how does this change?  With law-abiding citizens obeying the law, only criminals will be the ones who get these relatively inexpensive guns.

    Is this a civil liberties issue?  To me this is a way to lower the cost of people obtaining guns – a big benefit given that it is poor minorities who live in high crime urban areas who benefit the most from owning guns.  Yet, it looks as if the Obama administration is using threats, without a legal basis, to stifle people obtaining these guns.

    From Fox News:

    . . . Plans for the working handgun were posted online Monday by Cody Wilson, founder of Defense Distributed, potentially allowing anyone with access to a 3D printer to make a firearm from plastic. The plans, which had been in the works for months, caused alarm among gun control advocates but were seen by some Second Amendment advocates as a breakthrough. More than 100,000 copies of the plans were downloaded before the federal government took the files.

    “[Defense Distributed’s] files are being removed from public access at the request of the U.S. Department of Defense Trade Controls,” read a banner atop the website. “Until further notice, the United States government claims control of the information.”

    Wilson tells FoxNews.com that he decided to comply to a request by the Pentagon to take down the gun specs from his website while he weighs his legal options. . . .

    Wilson says he has complied to most laws on the books and feels that the D.O.D.’s request may be more politically motivated.

    “If this is an attempt to control the info from getting out there, it’s clearly a weak one,” he said, adding that the CAD design for the weapon has already spread across the Internet at downloading sites like the Pirate Bay. . . .

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 10:06

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    The Damning Dozen: Twelve Revelations from the Benghazi Hearings

    0

    Guy Benson
    townhall.com
    May 10, 2013

    Much of the media and liberal establishment simply ignored yesterday’s Benghazi hearings. They were content to see, hear, and speak no evil – which is typically the fastest way to kill a story in Washington. Others framed the proceedings as just another quixotic, partisan effort to hype a long-resolved story. Selling that template requires adherence to two fallacious assertions: First, that no major questions remain regarding the 9/11 terrorist assault on our consulate in Benghazi, Libya – and second, that no new information emerged from the whistle-blowers’ hours-long testimony. The former claim is outright insulting. The latter betrays either aggressive ignorance or wishful thinking. House Oversight Committee Republicans’ focused questioning extracted quite a few nuggets of relevant information. For their part, many committee Democrats were focused on unseemly efforts to attack, distract and smear – all employed as they cynically groused about Republicans “politicizing” the investigation. Cutting through the nonsense and dissembling, here’s what we now know:

    (1) Murdered US Ambassador Chris Stevens’ second in command, Gregory Hicks, was instructed not to speak with a Congressional investigator by Sec. Hillary Clinton’s chief of staff, Cheryl Mills. Hicks said he’d “never” faced a similar demand at any point during his distinguished 22-year diplomatic career. When he refused to comply with this request, the State Department dispatched an attorney to act as a “minder,” who insisted on sitting in on all of Hicks’ discussions with members of Congress (higher quality video is available here):

    Read more

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 9:54 am






    Anthony Gucciardi
    Infowars.com
    May 10, 2013

    Countless individuals will soon assemble in small and large groups around the nation and the globe alike in protest against Monsanto’s genetic manipulation of the food supply. Organized under the May 25th movement known as the ‘March on Monsanto’, the massive new rally reveals how the grassroots public has truly had enough of Monsanto’s monopoly on the many staple crops that have quickly been sucked into Monsanto’s genetically modified tycoon.

    It’s virtually impossible these days to enter a grocery store, even one bearing the title of ‘natural’, and not encounter at least a few items that contain genetically modified ingredients. And for quite some time, this fact was not even known to the large majority of the United States public. Many simply did not even know what a GMO was, or what it could potentially do to their bodies (or the bodies of the children who they were feeding with genetically engineered processed food).

    This, of course, stems from the fact that the FDA and Monsanto have decided that you aren’t allowed to know if your food contains GMOs. Even despite the fact that peer-reviewed research has pegged Monsanto’s best selling herbicide Roundup (which is a key part of Monsanto’s Roundup-ready GMO crops) to around 37 associated diseases, the FDA says it’s perfectly safe. So safe that it’s not even necessary to label in your food. So very safe that the only study that ever examined how Roundup and GMOs affect rats throughout their lifetime found that the rats developed tumors so large that it impacted their very ability to move.

    It’s madness that has been identified for a long time by alternative news writers and readers, but thanks to the success of Prop 37 and other initiatives it has now hit the general public – and they’re not happy.

    The Grassroots Will End Monsanto

    Now enter campaigns like the March on Monsanto, which is slated to happen around the world on May 25th. It’s a grassroots event that has turned into a major organized movement thanks to countless local activists. The event is going on in major cities like San Diego and New York City, to small towns and even rural areas. It’s all being organized online via an open Google Document, where you can find the protest nearest to you and be a

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Will Bilderberg Summon Obama’s New Trade Representative To The Table?

    0

    Jurriaan Maessen
    Infowars.com
    May 10, 2013

    Assistant to the President of the United States and Deputy National Security Advisor for International Economic Affairs, Michael Froman / Photo by World Economic Forum, via Wikimedia Commons

    President Obama recently nominated current Deputy National Security Advisor for International Economic Affairs, Michael Froman, for the post of US Trade Representative. Although the nomination requires Senate approval, it is expected Froman will soon start at his new job, not only overseeing US trade policy but to advance the “global trade agenda” pursued by the Obama administration. As member of the Council on Foreign Relations, Froman has an impressive résumé, making him a likely participant for the upcoming Bilderberg meeting near Watford in the UK.

    Froman, whose career was given a boost by his former classmate and associate on the Harvard Law Review Barack Obama, will likely be further advanced by a possible participation at the coming Bilderberg conference. I would submit that the likelihood of Froman attending the coming conference is just about 90 percent. We find Froman’s predecessors attending Bilderberg and the Trilateral Commission on a regular basis. For example, Obama’s last appointee, Ron Kirk, has moved in- and out of Bilderberg-related entities on a regular basis. Former US trade Representative Susan Schwab is a member of the Trilateral Commission. The other former Trade Rep (under George W. Bush) enjoying key globalist conferences, Mr. Robert Zoellick, is a Bilderberg regular, visiting the confab so many times he must have lost count by now.

    The other reason I’m speculating Froman will be present at Bilderberg 2013 is the ongoing effort to merge the two major world blocks, such as the United States and the European Union, into one overarching power-monolith. Quite recently both Froman and Kirk (his direct predecessor) admitted to the fact Barack Obama is negotiating with the EU “toward a transatlantic trade and investment partnership”. During a conference call, Kirk stated that that the US and the EU should “seize the opportunity to develop new disciplines in emerging areas that have confronted trade, such as the involvement of state-owned enterprises and increasing use of localization measures as barriers to trade.”

    Froman, who also made remarks at this particular conference call, pointed out that “this is potentially a very big deal. Between the U.S. and the EU, we account

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Science will destroy humanity, says team of scientists

    0

    J. D. Heyes
    Natural News
    May 10, 2013

    (NaturalNews) One of the primary goals of science is to advance knowledge and understanding to improve the human condition, but all too often this noble field of study has devolved into a profit-seeking quest for power, at the expense of mankind.

    Indeed, the science of technology is perhaps the worst culprit, a team of mathematicians, philosophers and scientists at Oxford University’s Future of Humanity Institute is warning.

    The team, in a forthcoming paper titled, Existential Risk Prevention as Global Priority, says humankind’s over-reliance on technology could lead to its demise, and that human beings are facing a risk to our own existence.

    What’s more, the team says humankind’s demise is not far off; it could come as soon as the next century.

    ‘Threats we have no track record of surviving…

    “There is a great race on between humanity’s technological powers and our wisdom to use those powers well,” institute director Nick Bostrom told MSN. “I’m worried that the former will pull too far ahead.”

    Since our existence on this planet there have been those who have predicted the end of world as we know it, the latest “fad” in this realm being the hoopla surrounding the now-disproven 2012 Mayan prophesies. Still, folks can’t seem to let go of the notion that, at some point in our future, life on Earth will cease to exist.

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    From Bostrom’s paper:

    Humanity has survived what we might call natural existential risks for hundreds of thousands of years; thus it is prima facie unlikely that any of them will do us in within the next hundred. This conclusion is buttressed when we analyze specific risks from nature, such as asteroid impacts, supervolcanic eruptions, earthquakes, gamma-ray bursts, and so forth: Empirical impact distributions and scientific models suggest that the likelihood of extinctionbecause of these kinds of risk is extremely small on a time scale of a century or so.

    In contrast, our species is introducing entirely new kinds of existential risk — threats we have no track record of surviving. Our longevity as a species therefore offers no strong prior grounds for confident optimism. Consideration of specific existential — risk scenarios bears out the suspicion that the great bulk of existential risk in the foreseeable future consists

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Roger Stone: LBJ had Kennedy killed

    0

    Patrick Howley
    Daily Caller
    May 10, 2013

    Legendary Republican operative Roger Stone claims in his new book that Lyndon Johnson arranged John F. Kennedy’s assassination, and that Richard Nixon and Johnson had a documented relationship with Lee Harvey Oswald’s killer, Jack Ruby, years before Ruby shot Oswald in the basement of Dallas police headquarters in 1963.

    Stone, who worked for Richard Nixon’s Committee to Re-elect the President in 1972 and later served in the Nixon administration, claims in his forthcoming book that Johnson, then a senator, instructed Richard Nixon, then a congressman, to hire Ruby on the House of Representatives payroll in 1947.

    Stone also claimed that Johnson “micro-managed” Kennedy’s Dallas motorcade, demanding that it pass through Dealy Plaza on November 22, 1963, when Oswald, from his perch in an overlooking book depository building, shot Kennedy.

    “Nixon knew Jack Ruby, hired him on House payroll in 1947 at request of … Lyndon Johnson. Newly released documents prove it. in my upcoming book ‘The Man who killed Kennedy- the case against LBJ’ Out Oct 1—order yours today,” Stone wrote on Facebook Thursday night.

    Full story here.

    <!–

    –>

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 5:22 am

    Tags:






    <!– this is where we need to show the related articles

    –>

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Obama’s Science Czar John P. Holdren Confronted on Population Control

    0

    WeAreChange
    May 10, 2013

    During a Q&A segment at a science & technology speech given by President Obama’s Science Czar, John P. Holdren, Luke Rudkowski asked him about the statements made in his 1977 book, Ecoscience. In this book, Holdren outlined ways to handle “overpopulation” which included forced abortions and sterilization. Despite co-authoring this book and telling Congress that his beliefs in depopulation has changed, Holdren claimed that he never held those beliefs in the first place.

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 5:23 am

    Tags: ,






    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Not even good enough for dog food: Imported food from China loaded with chemicals, dyes, pesticides and fake ingredients

    0

    Mike Adams
    Natural News
    May 10, 2013

    (NaturalNews) Do you really know what’s in all the food you’re eating that’s imported from China? If you don’t, you’re actually in good company: The FDA only inspects 1% — 2% of all the food imported from China, so they don’t know either. Even when they inspect a shipment, they rarely test it for heavy metals, pesticides, PCBs or other toxic contaminants.

    Mark A. Kastel, Senior Farm Policy Analyst at The Cornucopia Institute, added emphasis to this point as he testified this week in The House Committee on Foreign Affairs Subcommittee on Europe, Eurasia and Emerging Threats, saying, “We don’t trust, for good reason, the Chinese to supply ingredients for our dog and cat food. Why should we trust Chinese exporters for the food that we are feeding our children and families?”

    It’s a good question. Especially when, as Kastel adds, Chinese food is being routinely found to contain “unapproved chemicals, dyes, pesticides and outright fraud (fake food).”

    Heavily contaminated food from China

    As Natural News has already reported, food from China is frequently found to contain alarming levels of heavy metals (arsenic, cadmium, lead, mercury) and other contaminants. Politically, China is a communist dictatorship where freedom of speech is completely outlawed. Environmental regulations are virtually never enforced. The culture is one of total deception where lying, cheating, stealing or committing fraud to get ahead is considered completely acceptable – because that’s how government is operated there. The moral decay of China is directly reflected in the alarming dishonesty of the food supply. (Yes, a country’s food exports will reflect its cultural and political philosophies. Freedom produces healthy food. Oppression and communism produces deceptive, deadly food.)

    And yet, even with all this being widely known, Chinese farms are rarely inspected by organic certifiers. “U.S. certifiers are unable to independently inspect farms and assure compliance to the USDA organic food and agriculture standards that are required for export to the U.S.” explained Kastel in testimony. “These imports should not be allowed to reach our shore until and unless we have a system in place to assure consumers they are getting what they pay for. Just like U.S. grown organic commodities, the safety of these products must be rigorously overseen by independent inspectors.”

    Read Kastel’s full testimony here.

    • A d v e r t

      This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Missouri Legislature Bans UN Agenda 21

    0

    Alex Newman
    The New American
    May 10, 2013

    With a veto-proof majority, the Missouri legislature approved a popular bill protecting private property and due process rights by banning a deeply controversial United Nations “sustainability” scheme known as UN Agenda 21. The legislation, SB 265, now heads to Democrat Governor Jay Nixon, who has not yet taken a public position on the issue.

    The effort to ban Agenda 21 in Missouri, widely celebrated by activists from across the political spectrum, comes in the wake of similar moves to stop the UN plan across America. In Alabama, for example, lawmakers in both houses unanimously approved a law last year prohibiting the international “sustainable development” agenda within the state. Numerous other states are working to do the same, and multiple legislatures have adopted strongly worded resolutions blasting the program.

    In Missouri, the legislation was approved 24 to 9 in the GOP-controlled Senate last month. The Republican-dominated state House of Representatives, meanwhile, approved the bill 131 to 42 on May 8, also with a slight veto-proof majority. It remains unclear whether the governor will try to stop the legislation, sign it, or simply do nothing and let it quietly become law, according to news reports.

    Read full article

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 8:56 am

    Tags: ,






    Outraged New Yorkers, government bring wrath of the law down on father

    Kurt Nimmo
    Infowars.com
    May 10, 2013

    The hysterical response of New Yorkers to anything remotely resembling a firearm resulted in a man’s arrest earlier this week.

    Jack Pawlowski was playing with his son when he was confronted by people outraged by his toy gun.

    “At first I thought I was hallucinating,” Maria Smilios of Astoria told CBS News. “He pulled out this gun… The next thing, he took his son, who is 3, and showed him how to use it, and then the family took turns shooting the gun. He gave it to his daughter, who took off on the bicycle and started racing around the park with the gun pointing this way and just started pointing it at the kids,” a stunned Smilios said.

    “I don’t tend to take things lying down, so I went past the parents, and so I walked straight over and I confronted him,” said Leni Calas. “I mean, he’s brandishing a firearm and I don’t care if that firearm is plastic. That’s unacceptable.”

    Following the Department of Homeland Security’s “see something, say something” rule, Calas immediately called the cops. She also called her local city councilman and posted a cell phone photo of Pawlowski on her website in an attempt to publicly humiliate him for the crime of playing with a toy gun.

    Pawlowski was led off in handcuffs as the news media gathered around to record his arrest. He was charged with reckless endangerment, endangering the welfare of a minor, resisting arrest, and possession of an illegal BB gun.

    Remarkably, BB guns are outlawed in New York City, Washington, D.C., Chicago, San Francisco, and other parts of the country.

    “This is really a way to educate people,” declared councilman Peter Vallone Jr., a Democrat. You cannot run around with a realistic looking gun. It’s against the law, and you could get arrested and actually go to jail.”

    The incident reveals the effectiveness of decades of non-stop anti-gun propaganda. New York’s mayor, Michael Bloomberg, is one of America’s leading enemies of the Second Amendment. New York has the most restrictive gun laws in the nation.

    Earlier this year, the government passed the NY SAFE Act, which will, of course, make millions of New Yorkers less safe. Bloomberg and officialdom have

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Congresswoman: Obama Gave Benghazi Stand Down Order

    0

    US Special forces blocked from protecting consulate

    Paul Joseph Watson
    Infowars.com
    May 10, 2013

    In comments that went largely unnoticed, Missouri Congresswoman Ann Wagner (R) directly blamed President Obama for ordering the stand down which facilitated the assault on the US consulate in Benghazi.

    Wagner was asked by talk show host Dana Loesch, “Because you have been an ambassador, you have been overseas with similar responsibilities and similar missions — who gives such an order to stand down? Where does that come from?”

    “The President of the United States,” responded Wagner.

    The White House has been scrambling to avoid the question of who gave the stand down order ever since whistleblower Greg Hicks, who was number two to Ambassador Chris Stevens, testified that US special forces were ready to board a plane in Tripoli but were prevented from coming to the aid of those under assault inside the consulate.

    Hicks revealed that after Stevens had been killed but while the attack was still ongoing, “The Libyan military agreed to fly their C-130 to Benghazi and carry additional personnel to Benghazi as reinforcements,” including US Special Forces, but that a call came through from Special Operations Command Africa saying, “you can’t go now; you don’t have authority to go now.”

    “They were told not to board the flight, so they missed it.” Hicks said.

    In the hours after the stand down order was given, three more American diplomats were killed by terrorists who laid siege to the consulate.

    The Obama administration denies that any kind of stand down order was given, a claim that rings hollow given the White House’s attempt to cover up the nature of what happened in the days after the attack, claiming instead that it was a “protest” sparked by a YouTube video.

    It was also recently revealed that the State Department hired Al-Qaeda-linked militants to “defend” the diplomatic mission in Benghazi that was later attacked. State Department officials who blocked efforts to help Americans under assault later tried to hide Al-Qaeda’s involvement in the attack.

    As we have exhaustively documented, the Obama administration’s support for Al-Qaeda-linked militants in Libya, which led to the toppling of Colonel Gaddafi, directly contributed to the attack on the consulate and the death of Ambassador Stevens. The very hospital that Stevens was taken to in the last moments of his life was run by

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    America’s Roads Have Been Turned Into A Revenue Generating Surveillance Grid

    0

    Michael Snyder
    The Economic Collapse
    May 10, 2013

    What do speed traps, parking tickets, toll roads, speed cameras and red light cameras all have in common? They are all major revenue sources for state and local governments. All over America today there are state and local governments that are drowning in debt. Many have chosen to use “traffic enforcement” as a way to raise desperately needed revenue. According to the National Motorist Association, issuing speeding tickets raises somewhere between 4.5 billion and 6 billion dollars in the United States each year. And the average price of a speeding ticket just keeps going up.

    Today, the national average is about $150, but in many jurisdictions it is far higher. For example, more than 16 million traffic tickets are issued in the state of California each year, and the average fine is approximately $250. If you are wealthy that may not be much of a problem, but if you are a family that is barely scraping by every month that can be a major financial setback. Meanwhile, America’s roads are also being systematically transformed into a surveillance grid.

    The number of cameras watching our roads is absolutely exploding, and automated license plate readers are capturing hundreds of millions of data points on all of us. As you drive down the highway, a police vehicle coming up behind you can instantly read your license plate and pull up a whole host of information about you. This happened to me a few years ago. I had pulled on to a very crowded highway in Virginia and within less than a minute a cop car had scanned me and was pulling me over because one of my stickers had expired. But these automated license plate readers are being used for far more than just traffic enforcement now. For example, officials in Washington D.C. are now using automated license plate readers to track the movements of every single vehicle that enters the city. They know when you enter Washington, and they know when you leave. So where is all of this headed? Do we really want to live in a “Big Brother” society where the government constantly tracks all of our movements?

    Back in the old days, the highways of America were great examples

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Tornado activity hits 60-year low

    0
    Print

    Doyle Rice
    USA TODAY
    May 10, 2013

    The USA in the past 12 months has seen the fewest number of tornadoes since at least 1954, and the death tolls from the dangerous storms have dropped dramatically since 2011.

    Just two years after a ferocious series of tornado outbreaks killed hundreds of Americans, the USA so far this year is enjoying one of the calmest years on record for twisters. Through Thursday, tornadoes have killed only three Americans in 2013; by the end of May 2011, 543 Americans had died.

    The seven people killed from May 2012 to April 2013 is the fewest in a 12-month period since five people died in September 1899-August 1900, according to Harold Brooks, research meteorologist with the National Severe Storms Laboratory in Norman, Okla.

    The year-to-date count of tornadoes is probably approaching the lower 10% of all years on record, said Greg Carbin, warning coordination meteorologist with the Storm Prediction Center in Norman.

    Full story here.

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 7:49 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Rand Paul Clears Path For 2016 Presidential Run

    0
    Print

    ALEXANDER BURNS
    Politico
    May 10, 2013

    When Rand Paul touches down in Iowa Friday, it will be almost exactly three years to the day after his landslide 2010 Senate primary victory — an unlikely and decisive triumph over the Republican establishment that instantly transformed Paul into a national political phenomenon.

    Now, as Paul weighs a 2016 presidential bid, a different kind of challenge confronts him: Can the plain-spoken former Bowling Green ophthalmologist build a campaign to back up his popular appeal?

    For all Paul’s success as a media brand and a mobilizer of the conservative grassroots, the Kentucky senator has done relatively little since 2010 to assemble a political machine around his own personality. For now, the Rand Paul project is a high-wire act that works largely without a net.

    Paul’s political action committee, RAND PAC, has only just now hired a spokesman, sources said: former Michele Bachmann aide Sergio Gor. While Paul has reached out to key figures in the GOP donor community, much of his fundraising still happens over the Internet — though he’ll court Silicon Valley moguls at multiple meet-and-greet events later this month in California, according to a top aide.

    Full story here.

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 7:47 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Benghazi Talking Points Underwent 12 Revisions, Scrubbed of Terror Reference

    0
    Print

    Jonathan Karl
    ABC News
    May 10, 2013

    When it became clear last fall that the CIA’s now discredited Benghazi talking points were flawed, the White House said repeatedly the documents were put together almost entirely by the intelligence community, but White House documents reviewed by Congress suggest a different story.

    ABC News has obtained 12 different versions of the talking points that show they were extensively edited as they evolved from the drafts first written entirely by the CIA to the final version distributed to Congress and to U.S. Ambassador to the U.N. Susan Rice before she appeared on five talk shows the Sunday after that attack.

    White House emails reviewed by ABC News suggest the edits were made with extensive input from the State Department. The edits included requests from the State Department that references to the Al Qaeda-affiliated group Ansar al-Sharia be deleted as well references to CIA warnings about terrorist threats in Benghazi in the months preceding the attack.

    That would appear to directly contradict what White House Press Secretary Jay Carney said about the talking points in November.

    Full story here.

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 7:51 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Congresswoman: Obama Gave Benghazi Stand Down Order

    0
    Print

    US Special forces blocked from protecting consulate

    Paul Joseph Watson
    Prison Planet.com
    May 10, 2013

    In comments that went largely unnoticed, Missouri Congresswoman Ann Wagner (R) directly blamed President Obama for ordering the stand down which facilitated the assault on the US consulate in Benghazi.

    Wagner was asked by talk show host Dana Loesch, “Because you have been an ambassador, you have been overseas with similar responsibilities and similar missions — who gives such an order to stand down? Where does that come from?”

    “The President of the United States,” responded Wagner.

    The White House has been scrambling to avoid the question of who gave the stand down order ever since whistleblower Greg Hicks, who was number two to Ambassador Chris Stevens, testified that US special forces were ready to board a plane in Tripoli but were prevented from coming to the aid of those under assault inside the consulate.

    Hicks revealed that after Stevens had been killed but while the attack was still ongoing, “The Libyan military agreed to fly their C-130 to Benghazi and carry additional personnel to Benghazi as reinforcements,” including US Special Forces, but that a call came through from Special Operations Command Africa saying, “you can’t go now; you don’t have authority to go now.”

    “They were told not to board the flight, so they missed it.” Hicks said.

    In the hours after the stand down order was given, three more American diplomats were killed by terrorists who laid siege to the consulate.

    The Obama administration denies that any kind of stand down order was given, a claim that rings hollow given the White House’s attempt to cover up the nature of what happened in the days after the attack, claiming instead that it was a “protest” sparked by a YouTube video.

    It was also recently revealed that the State Department hired Al-Qaeda-linked militants to “defend” the diplomatic mission in Benghazi that was later attacked. State Department officials who blocked efforts to help Americans under assault later tried to hide Al-Qaeda’s involvement in the attack.

    As we have exhaustively documented, the Obama administration’s support for Al-Qaeda-linked militants in Libya, which led to the toppling of Colonel Gaddafi, directly contributed to the attack on the consulate and the death of Ambassador Stevens. The very hospital that Stevens was taken to in the last moments of his life was run by the

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    UK says no evidence Syrian rebels used chemical weapons despite UN probe

    0
    Print

    Russia Today
    May 10, 2013

    UK PM David Cameron claims there is no evidence the Syrian opposition used chemical weapons. This comes after a UN representative voiced ‘concrete suspicions’ that the rebels used nerve gas, even as the world powers were trying to resolve the conflict.

    “Our assessment is that chemical weapons use in Syria is very likely to have been initiated by the regime. We have no evidence to date of opposition use,” Cameron said on the eve of his trip to the Russian city of Sochi for talks with President Vladimir Putin. Syria is expected to be at the forefront of the meeting.

    The statement by the British Prime Minister comes shortly after a United Nations inquiry into human rights abuses in Syria found evidence that the opposition forces may have used chemical weapons. Investigators spoke with the victims of the ongoing bloody conflict and gathered medical testimonies which indicated that Syrians rebels used sarin nerve agent.

    “There are strong, concrete suspicions but not yet incontrovertible proof of the use of sarin gas, from the way the victims were treated,” Carla Del Ponte, a leading member of the UN Independent Commission of Inquiry on Syria, told Swiss TV.

    London, along with Paris, have also been pushing to ease EU ban on weapons supplies to Syria. Earlier in May, the UK sent a draft proposal to EU diplomats lift the arms embargo on Syria so that weapons could be sent to the rebels.

    Citing the “rapidly deteriorating” situation in the country, the six-page document calls for the Syrian opposition to be exempt from the arms embargo and for the phrase “non-lethal aid” to be removed from the wording of the sanctions currently in place.

    But with Moscow and Washington having recently agreed to join efforts in a bid to mediate peace in Syria, London is now hard-pressed to reconsider its support for the Syrian insurgency, according to RT contributor Afshin Rattansi.

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    “The fact that David Cameron can do this shows he is completely out of step — after all, it was he who has been trying to lift the arms embargo for the rebels,” Rattansi said. “The very rebels that are being sent this so-called non-lethal force, and equipment, and materiel, they are defecting to al-Nusra, according to a report in British papers. If Britain has been exporting, say, night-vision goggles to the

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Tests for new chemical guns in late stages

    0
    Print

    Claire Carter
    London Telegraph
    May 10, 2013

    The Home Office is testing a new form of chemical gun, which could be used to control rioters and can be fired from more than 100 feet away.

    Tests of the Discriminating Irritant Projectile (DIP) — a form of gun that will fire an irritant substance like CS gas or pepper spray — are believed to be in the late stages.

    The gun has a far greater range than a Taser, which can be fired from 21 feet.

    It was put forward for testing along with ideas to use skunk oil pellets and anti-laser technology by Government scientists as a method for controlling future protesters in the wake of the 2011 riots, which took place across the country.

    Full story here.

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 4:30 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Roger Stone: LBJ had Kennedy killed

    0
    Print

    Patrick Howley
    Daily Caller
    May 10, 2013

    Legendary Republican operative Roger Stone claims in his new book that Lyndon Johnson arranged John F. Kennedy’s assassination, and that Richard Nixon and Johnson had a documented relationship with Lee Harvey Oswald’s killer, Jack Ruby, years before Ruby shot Oswald in the basement of Dallas police headquarters in 1963.

    Stone, who worked for Richard Nixon’s Committee to Re-elect the President in 1972 and later served in the Nixon administration, claims in his forthcoming book that Johnson, then a senator, instructed Richard Nixon, then a congressman, to hire Ruby on the House of Representatives payroll in 1947.

    Stone also claimed that Johnson “micro-managed” Kennedy’s Dallas motorcade, demanding that it pass through Dealy Plaza on November 22, 1963, when Oswald, from his perch in an overlooking book depository building, shot Kennedy.

    “Nixon knew Jack Ruby, hired him on House payroll in 1947 at request of … Lyndon Johnson. Newly released documents prove it. in my upcoming book ‘The Man who killed Kennedy- the case against LBJ’ Out Oct 1—order yours today,” Stone wrote on Facebook Thursday night.

    Full story here.

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 4:34 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Pyongyang Calls South Korean President’s US Trip ‘Prelude to War’

    0
    Print

    RIA Novosti
    May 10, 2013

    SEOUL, May 10 (RIA Novosti) — North Korea has called the South Korean President’s recent visit to the United States a “prelude to war,” Yonhap reported on Friday citing North Korean media sources.

    “It is a curtain-raiser to a dangerous war to invade” a North Korean official was cited as saying, Yonhap reported.

    South Korea’s President Park Geun-hye took office in February, and the visit to the United States was her first official foreign trip as President.

    North Korea was a key point on the agenda for her meetings with US President Barack Obama, given the worrying escalation of tensions on the Korean peninsula following the isolated state’sthird nuclear test in February.

    Full story here.

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 4:25 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Jim Grant On Gold’s Recent Drop: “Confidence In Bernanke Is Utterly Misplaced”

    0
    Print

    Zero Hedge
    May 10, 2013

    “Inflation is a state of affairs in which there is too much money,” Jim Grant notes in this Bloomberg TV interview, however, “It’s not too much money chasing too few goods,” he corrects the misnomer, “the thing this money chases is variable.” Whether it is Iowa farmland, housing, stocks, or bonds, central banks are stuffing us with it. Yes, equities are high, but Grant explains, “beneath the surface of things or not so far beneath the surface of things,” it is not at all good, adding that, “Central bank ‘original sin’,” is akin to Revolutionary France, and he shows no concerns over Gold’s recent dip, noting “a general fatigue animus towards gold,” that seems predicated on more confidence in central bankers; to Grant, “that confidence is utterly misplaced!”

    On Inflation:

    Inflation is a state of affairs in which there is too much money. It’s not too much money chasing too few goods. It’s too much money, the thing that this money chases is variable. And in this particular cycle and for some time, it has chased commercial real estate, bonds, stocks, financial assets of all kinds. Iowa farm land. There is a huge excess of liquidity in the world. Central banks furnish this, they stuff us with it. In the interest of levitating markets that will, they think

    On the Equity rally:

    Yes there are terrific companies generating terrific cash flows. That is certainly true. But beneath the surface of things or not so far beneath the surface of things, as far as central banks, practicing not original policies but original sin. This is these policies are not so original. They go back to the time of Revolutionary France. You know the idea of creating currency with which to create human happiness is as old as the hills.

    On Gold:

    Gold has been in a bull market for 12 years. Gold is this rare thing in which you can be bullish and yet contrary and also with the trend. There is I think a general fatigue animus towards gold. The gold prices are reciprocal of the world’s view of the competence of central banks. The greater the world’s confidence in the Ben Bernanke’s of the world, the weaker the gold market. The less the world holds confidence in the institution of managed currencies, the stronger the gold market. And to me the confidence is utterly misplaced.

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 4:23 am

    <hr

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Boston officials say FBI failed to warn them about bombers

    0
    Print

    Susan Ferrechio
    Washington Examiner
    May 10, 2013

    Boston authorities could have prevented last month’s deadly Boston Marathon bombings if federal law enforcement agencies had adequately shared information and followed through on warnings about accused bombers Tamerlan and Dzhokhar Tsarnaev, witnesses told Congress Thursday.

    “I believe that though it would not have been easy, it was possible to have prevented the terrorist attacks in Boston,” former Sen. Joseph Lieberman, I-Conn., told the House Homeland Security Committee. “In a literal sense, the homeland security system we must acknowledge that we built after 9-11 to protect the American people from terrorist attacks failed to stop the Tsarnaev brothers.”

    In the first congressional hearing into the April 15 bombing that killed three and injured more than 200, Lieberman and other witnesses testified about a lack of information sharing between federal agencies and between federal authorities and local police. Republicans and Democrats alike joined in the criticisms.

    “We cannot ignore that once again it has taken a tragedy to reveal problems in our vast, varied and numerous federal databases,” said Rep. Bennie Thompson, of Mississippi, the committee’s top Democrat.

    Full story here.

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 4:35 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Worldwide ‘March Against Monsanto’ Protests Planned for May 25th

    0
    Print

    Anthony Gucciardi
    Prison Planet.com
    May 10, 2013

    Countless individuals will soon assemble in small and large groups around the nation and the globe alike in protest against Monsanto’s genetic manipulation of the food supply. Organized under the May 25th movement known as the ‘March on Monsanto’, the massive new rally reveals how the grassroots public has truly had enough of Monsanto’s monopoly on the many staple crops that have quickly been sucked into Monsanto’s genetically modified tycoon.

    It’s virtually impossible these days to enter a grocery store, even one bearing the title of ‘natural’, and not encounter at least a few items that contain genetically modified ingredients. And for quite some time, this fact was not even known to the large majority of the United States public. Many simply did not even know what a GMO was, or what it could potentially do to their bodies (or the bodies of the children who they were feeding with genetically engineered processed food).

    This, of course, stems from the fact that the FDA and Monsanto have decided that you aren’t allowed to know if your food contains GMOs. Even despite the fact that peer-reviewed research has pegged Monsanto’s best selling herbicide Roundup (which is a key part of Monsanto’s Roundup-ready GMO crops) to around 37 associated diseases, the FDA says it’s perfectly safe. So safe that it’s not even necessary to label in your food. So very safe that the only study that ever examined how Roundup and GMOs affect rats throughout their lifetime found that the rats developed tumors so large that it impacted their very ability to move.

    It’s madness that has been identified for a long time by alternative news writers and readers, but thanks to the success of Prop 37 and other initiatives it has now hit the general public – and they’re not happy.

    The Grassroots Will End Monsanto

    Now enter campaigns like the March on Monsanto, which is slated to happen around the world on May 25th. It’s a grassroots event that has turned into a major organized movement thanks to countless local activists. The event is going on in major cities like San Diego and New York City, to small towns and even rural areas. It’s all being organized online via an open Google Document, where you can find the protest nearest to you and be a part of it. There’s also many open slots for organizers and speakers, so if

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Three Huge Breakthroughs for Bitcoin

    0
    Print

    Washington’s Blog
    May 10, 2013

    There were three big stories regarding Bitcoin this week.

    Business Insider notes:

    Union Square Ventures [an early investor in Twitter, Tumblr, Foursquare, Zynga and other huge Web successes] principal Fred Wilson just led his first startup deal in nearly two years.

    Wilson led a $5 million round in Coinbase, a startup for buying, selling, and accepting Bitcoins.

    ***

    “We believe that Bitcoin represents something fundamental and powerful, an open and distributed Internet peer to peer protocol for transferring purchasing power,” Wilsonwrote on the USV blog.

    Tech Crunch reports:

    Today, mobile gift card company Gyft has partnered with BitPay to start accepting bitcoins within its app.

    ***

    Gyft allows you to purchase gift cards at more than 50,000 retail locations in the U.S., including Brookstone, Lowe’s, GAP, Sephora, Gamestop, American Eagle, Nike, Marriott, Burger King and Fandango. So, technically, you’ll now be able to use bitcoin to pay for a Whopper.

    ***

    The new bitcoin payment option is only available on the Android version of Gyft, but is as easy as choosing your choice of payment once you’ve chosen the gift card that you want to buy. Simply pick bitcoin and then use your wallet to pay for it.

    ***

    TC: How long do you suspect it will take until the average consumer gets educated on bitcoin and uses it?

    Gallippi: Bitcoin is hard to use today, and that’s a good thing. There are still bugs and it is too risky for the average consumer. The infrastructure of bitcoin cannot handle hundreds of millions of users at this time, so a gradual adoption is better.

    ***

    TC: Since this lets you convert into a gift card, how long do you think it will take to be able to make direct purchases using bitcoin?

    Gallippi: E-commerce will adopt new direct bitcoin payments faster than retail, since e-commerce already has payment gateways in place for software-only payments.

    TC: How do you feel about the recent stories of DDOS attacks that have affected bitcoin and how that’s perhaps scared some people away from the currency?

    Gallippi: Bitcoin companies suffer from DDOS like all banks do. However consumers actually are inconvenienced less with a bitcoin wallet DDOS. With your online banking, if your bank is down, you cannot access your money. However with bitcoin, if you are in control of your

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Science will destroy humanity, says team of scientists

    0
    Print

    J. D. Heyes
    Natural News
    May 10, 2013

    (NaturalNews) One of the primary goals of science is to advance knowledge and understanding to improve the human condition, but all too often this noble field of study has devolved into a profit-seeking quest for power, at the expense of mankind.

    Indeed, the science of technology is perhaps the worst culprit, a team of mathematicians, philosophers and scientists at Oxford University’s Future of Humanity Institute is warning.

    The team, in a forthcoming paper titled, Existential Risk Prevention as Global Priority, says humankind’s over-reliance on technology could lead to its demise, and that human beings are facing a risk to our own existence.

    What’s more, the team says humankind’s demise is not far off; it could come as soon as the next century.

    ‘Threats we have no track record of surviving…

    “There is a great race on between humanity’s technological powers and our wisdom to use those powers well,” institute director Nick Bostrom told MSN. “I’m worried that the former will pull too far ahead.”

    Since our existence on this planet there have been those who have predicted the end of world as we know it, the latest “fad” in this realm being the hoopla surrounding the now-disproven 2012 Mayan prophesies. Still, folks can’t seem to let go of the notion that, at some point in our future, life on Earth will cease to exist.

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    From Bostrom’s paper:

    Humanity has survived what we might call natural existential risks for hundreds of thousands of years; thus it is prima facie unlikely that any of them will do us in within the next hundred. This conclusion is buttressed when we analyze specific risks from nature, such as asteroid impacts, supervolcanic eruptions, earthquakes, gamma-ray bursts, and so forth: Empirical impact distributions and scientific models suggest that the likelihood of extinctionbecause of these kinds of risk is extremely small on a time scale of a century or so.

    In contrast, our species is introducing entirely new kinds of existential risk — threats we have no track record of surviving. Our longevity as a species therefore offers no strong prior grounds for confident optimism. Consideration of specific existential — risk scenarios bears out the suspicion that the great bulk of existential risk in the foreseeable future consists of anthropogenic existential risks — that is, those arising from human activity.

    Continuing, Bostrom predicts that future technological breakthroughs

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Are children being zombified?

    0
    Print

    Michael A. Bedar, MA
    Natural News
    May 10, 2013

    (NaturalNews) A conscious parent may be described as one who would like to raise a child who is fully alive to their choices to live free, intelligent, healthy lives, in tune with themselves and connected to nature.

    Compare that conscious parental aspiration to these proven facts about behavior in youth in relation to using and viewing media:

    • Heavy media use causes worsening grades and less contentment
    • Viewing violence can lead to antisocial behavior
    • Watching certain rap videos can cause higher incidence of drinking and drugs
    • Watching certain videos leads kids to drink earlier

    This powerful infographic, “The Repercussions of Growing Up on Screens,” from Healing the World, Healing Ourselves tells more in a colorful way.

    Vigilance against the zombie-war on children

    Children of any age can succumb to the forces of “zombification.” Zombifying factors on the loose include glorification of addiction, vaccines, propaganda-filled education, pesticides, overmedication, and of course, the mind-hooking programming of the media, which children and youth view and use for 7 to 10 hours per day!

    Just recently, for example, professional basketball announcers across the country promoted how “cool” it is to be a “zombie.” Nationwide, broadcasters described the Boston Celtics, who had just won an elimination game, as “zombies” who the New York Knicks “just couldn’t bury.” The seeds were planted for how “cool” it is to be in a state of the living-dead, in a semi-waking sleep. In a “cool minute,” the media had produced more zombie-slaves in the next generation.

    Alternately, what type of media could lift up our children’s consciousness, strengthen their life-force which is eternally under attack, and support their sovereignty, inspiring self-knowledge, health, and connection to nature?

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    Discover a revolutionary new dance video

    Aaron Ableman is an acclaimed entertainer and visionary behind Heal the World, Heal Ourselves, a platform seeking an increase of positive entertainment alternatives for children and families. With the backing of hundreds of major orgs and celebs (including one of the campaign supporters being the company that brought us “Food Fight”, reviewed by Mike Adams here), Ableman has led the creation of a showcase video called“I Heart Nature.“See this amazing new video onYOUTUBE.

    Ableman says, “Unprecedented child and youth media consumption influences mass behavior is causing a myriad of health, social, and environmental crises. Children’s behavior isdisproportionatelyinfluenced by popular media like music and television. We’ve

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    America’s Roads Have Been Turned Into A Revenue Generating Surveillance Grid

    0
    Print

    Michael Snyder
    The Economic Collapse
    May 10, 2013

    What do speed traps, parking tickets, toll roads, speed cameras and red light cameras all have in common? They are all major revenue sources for state and local governments. All over America today there are state and local governments that are drowning in debt. Many have chosen to use “traffic enforcement” as a way to raise desperately needed revenue. According to the National Motorist Association, issuing speeding tickets raises somewhere between 4.5 billion and 6 billion dollars in the United States each year. And the average price of a speeding ticket just keeps going up.

    Today, the national average is about $150, but in many jurisdictions it is far higher. For example, more than 16 million traffic tickets are issued in the state of California each year, and the average fine is approximately $250. If you are wealthy that may not be much of a problem, but if you are a family that is barely scraping by every month that can be a major financial setback. Meanwhile, America’s roads are also being systematically transformed into a surveillance grid.

    The number of cameras watching our roads is absolutely exploding, and automated license plate readers are capturing hundreds of millions of data points on all of us. As you drive down the highway, a police vehicle coming up behind you can instantly read your license plate and pull up a whole host of information about you. This happened to me a few years ago. I had pulled on to a very crowded highway in Virginia and within less than a minute a cop car had scanned me and was pulling me over because one of my stickers had expired. But these automated license plate readers are being used for far more than just traffic enforcement now. For example, officials in Washington D.C. are now using automated license plate readers to track the movements of every single vehicle that enters the city. They know when you enter Washington, and they know when you leave. So where is all of this headed? Do we really want to live in a “Big Brother” society where the government constantly tracks all of our movements?

    Back in the old days, the highways of America were great examples to the rest of the world of the tremendous liberties and freedoms that we enjoyed. Americans loved to hop into their vehicles and take

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Academic Cesspools and Cultural Marxists (Or Do I Repeat Myself?)

    0
    Print

    Thomas DiLorenzo
    Lew Rockwell Blog
    May 10, 2013

    The insightful article by Walter Williams today pinpoints how cultural Marxists have essentially destroyed academic freedom at most American universities while pursuing an agenda of the infantilization of college students. In the old days the Marxists rarely, if ever, debated their intellectual opponents. Instead, they simply resorted to name calling and personal attacks (“Capitalist Tool!!”). After the worldwide collapse of socialism the academic Marxists gave up on the capitalist-working class exploitation story and reinvented themselves by inventing a new class of alleged exploiters: white heterosexual males. All other groups are, by definition, “oppressed” by what they call “white male privilege.” The poorest, least educated white redneck living in an old bus down by the river in Mississippi is said to be, by definition, an “oppressor” of Oprah Winfrey, Tiger Woods, all women, gays, lesbians, the transgendered, and all the other mascot groups of the academic left.

    Like the old Marxists, the cultural Marxists do not debate their intellectual opponents; they simply call them vile names. As the Walter Williams article pointed out, a potential donor to Bowdoin College was publicly labeled a “racist” by the college president because he suggested that Bowdoin should teach courses about American history and cool it with the obsession with “diversity” (a.k.a. institutionalized discrimination against white heterosexual males) as the sole purpose of higher education. This is why we observe such spectacles as when Walter Block gave a state-of-the-art public lecture at Loyola University Maryland on the economics of discrimination, a field pioneered by Professor Block’s Columbia University dissertation advisor, the Nobel laureate Gary Becker, he was libeled by the university president, Brian Linnane, as a racist and a sexist. (Linnane wasn’t even at the lecture; it was enough for him to hear that someone had criticized one of the superstitions of academic feminism, that sex discrimination is the one-and-only-cause of male/female wage differences). There are dozens – probably hundreds – of other similar examples in academe, which is why it has indeed become an academic cesspool, as Walter Williams describes.

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 4:10 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Obama’s Science Czar John P. Holdren Confronted on Population Control

    0
    Print

    WeAreChange
    May 10, 2013

    During a Q&A segment at a science & technology speech given by President Obama’s Science Czar, John P. Holdren, Luke Rudkowski asked him about the statements made in his 1977 book, Ecoscience. In this book, Holdren outlined ways to handle “overpopulation” which included forced abortions and sterilization. Despite co-authoring this book and telling Congress that his beliefs in depopulation has changed, Holdren claimed that he never held those beliefs in the first place.

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 3:33 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Gosnell Horrors “Standard Operating Procedure” in Abortion Industry

    0
    Print

    Dave Bohon
    The New American
    May 10, 2013

    As the public awaits the verdict in “House of Horrors” abortionist Kermit Gosnell’s murder trial, pro-life leaders say that the “post abortion” killings of babies born alive may not be all that unusual in the abortion industry. Gosnell is charged with the murders of four babies born alive at his Philadelphia clinic, and investigators speculate hundreds of babies may have been killed in similar manner by him or co-workers, having their spinal cords snipped with a surgical scissors after being delivered alive. Abortion industry observers say the mindset of death and disregard for babies that permeated Gosnell’s Women’s Medical Society has been on display at other clinics around the nation.

    In 2008, Operation Rescue reported that a nurse working with George Tiller associate Shelley Sella, a circuit-riding late-term abortionist, allegedly witnessed Sella stab to death a baby born alive during a late-term abortion at Tiller’s Women’s Health Care Services abortion clinic in Wichita, Kansas. The nurse, identified as Tina David, a Tiller employee, “gave us a very specific eye-witness account about the incident,” said Operation Rescue President Troy Newman. “We were told that the baby was 35 weeks gestation at the time of the abortion. The baby came out and was moving. Sella looked up at Ms. David, then picked up a utensil and stabbed the baby in the left ribcage, twisting the utensil until the baby quit moving. At 35 weeks, there is no doubt about viability. This is murder in anybody’s book.”

    In March 2008, Students for Life in America released an undercover video in which Tiller, who was himself murdered in 2009, can be seen and heard saying that if a baby is born alive during an abortion, “it’s just sloppy technique. It is just technique that is reprehensible. The guy that did that ought to have his head beat up.”

    And on May 7, Sarah Terzo, a pro-life activist who runs a website devoted to exposing the abortion industry, published an articlerecalling a 2005 case in which a woman gave birth to a live baby during a late-term abortion at a Florida clinic. The abortion, performed by the Orlando’s Women’s Center, was a two-day affair, and after the first day, the woman, identified as Angele, could feel the baby kick as she waited the night in her motel room. The next morning Angele took

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    3D Printer Liberator Gun Downloaded 100,000 Times Amid Govt Crackdown

    0
    Print

    Anthony Gucciardi
    Prison Planet.com
    May 10, 2013

    While the government was demanding that the blueprints for the printable 3D plastic weapon known as the Liberator be removed from the internet, around 100,000 or more were quickly downloading it to their own hard drives.

    And just like the previous celebrities and corporations who have demanded that an image or article be ‘removed from the internet’, this out-of-touch request will be met with the exact opposite. Even if only a few people were downloading the blueprints before they were being yanked from the official Defense Distributed website, they would still spread like wildfire through torrent websites and others. In fact, multiple alternative news websites and gun forums would (and will) most likely host the file – or at least be blasted with links in the comments.

    But now, Forbes reports that more than 100,000 people in the last week have downloaded the blueprint files for the Liberator gun – a lot more than just a few.

    What this means is that, no matter how hard the government tries, they will never be able to wipe away the files from the thousands who have them protected on their hard drives. Even if they shut down the web and shut down every website hosting the files, the files would still remain on the physical hard drives of those who downloaded the blueprints. In other words, they’re out of luck. And in the event that legislation or some form of regulation from the federal government is introduced to attempt a halt on the file itself, it will be absolutely ineffective at curbing the distribution and existence of the file.

    Read2.5 Times More Americans Killed in Chicago Than Afghanistan

    Steve Israel and Chuck Schumer are already pushing bills to add 3D print weapons to the US Undetectable Firearms Act in order to combat the popularity of the blueprints.

    Despite the political uproar over the new Liberator weapon, which is the result of 8 months work and can be printed via plastic using any 3D printer that meets the requirements, we are seeing sweeping victories when it comes to gun freedom. From the recent Texas House decision to block federal gun bans from affecting Texas citizens, to the growing number of people who have realized that gun control is not the solution. Overall, it appears a few politicians who are advocates of people control (not gun control) are really quite upset over these 3D gun

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    12 Year Old Boy Puts Cop in His Place

    0
    Print

    Prison Planet.com
    May 10, 2013

    A video that has gone viral since it appeared on Youtube features 12-year-old Jeremy Drew, a Las Vegas resident, calling out a cop for parking on the sidewalk.

    This article was posted: Friday, May 10, 2013 at 3:43 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    BREAKING: 3D printable gun ordered to shut down by government

    0
    BREAKING: 3D printable gun ordered to shut down by government tradecompliance3

    Defense Distributed is complying, DefCad.org has gone dark

    Adan Salazar
    Infowars.com
    May 9, 2013

    On the Thusday, May 9 edition of the Alex Jones Show, 3D printing guru Cody Wilson of Defense Distributed announced that the US Office of Defense Trade Controls Compliance, Enforcement Division (DTCC/END) has sent him a letter requesting the group remove all data from public access immediately.

    The letter, sent by the US Department of State, states:

    “DTCC/END is conducting a review of technical data made publicly available by Defense Distributed through its 3D printing website, DEFCAD.org, the majority of which appear to be related to items in Category I of the USML. Defense Distributed may have released ITAR-controlled technical data without required prior authorization from the Directorate of Defense Trade Controls (DDTC), a violation of the ITAR.”

    USML stands for United States Munitions List, and ITAR stands for the International Traffic in Arms Regulations.

    According to the letter, “Pursuant to § 127.1 of the ITAR it is unlawful to export any defense article or technical data for which a license or written approval is required without first obtaining the required authorization from the DTCC.

    Further in the letter, it lists the 3D printable gun files available through DEFCAD.org that the DTCC says violate the ITAR.

    “The Department believes Defense Distributed may not have established the proper jurisdiction of the subject technical data. To resolve this matter officially, we request that Defense Distributed submit Commodity Jurisdiction (CJ) determination requests for the following selection of data files available on DEFCAD.org, and any other technical data for which Defense Distributed is unable to determine proper jurisdiction:

    1. Defense Distributed Liberator pistol
    2. .22 el3ectric
    3. 125mm BK-14M high-explosive anti-tank warhead
    4. 5.56/.223 muzzle brake
    5. Springfield XD-40 tactical slide assembly
    6. Sound Moderator — slip on
    7. “The Dirty Diane” ½-28 to 3/4-16 STP S3600 oil filter silencer adapter
    8. 12 gauge .22 CB sub-caliber insert
    9. Voltlock electronic black powder system
    10. VZ-58 front sight”

    The letter goes on, “Until the Department provides Defense Distributed with final CJ determinations, Defense Distributed should treat the above technical data as ITAR-controlled,” meaning the files must comply with the UN . “This means that all such data should be removed from public access immediately. Defense Distributed should also review the remainder of the data made public on its website to determine whether any additional data may be similarly controlled and proceed according to ITAR requirements.”

    Defense Distributed recently garnered major

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Clinton, Rice Presented Awards For Public Service On Same Day As Benghazi Hearing

    0
    Print

    Key players in failures, cover-up rewarded while whistleblower was demoted for questioning their bogus claims

    Steve Watson
    Prisonplanet.com
    May 9, 2013

    As State Department employees divulged information regarding woeful failures and dereliction of duty on behalf of both Hillary Clinton and Susan Rice over the Benghazi terror attack, both the former Secretary of State and the U.S. Ambassador to the U.N. were receiving awards for being great public servants.

    Fresh off the back of being presented with a ‘Distinguished Leadership Award’ by Bilderberg war criminal Henry Kissinger last week, Clinton pick up her latest gong from the Pacific Council on International Policy, this time it was the think tank’s Public Service Award.

    Anyone would think she was a pop star parading around endless and meaningless awards shows.

    The award Clinton received was created in honor of Warren Christopher, the former secretary of state who helped negotiate the release of 52 American hostages held in Iran in 1981.

    Of course, under Clinton’s watch as Secretary of State, Americans in Libya were not so fortunate. As Clinton failed to even read cables sent from diplomats in a desperate plea for help, four Americans, including Ambassador Christopher Stevens were murdered in cold blood by the same extremist terrorists that the Obama administration had aided in overthrowing Muamar Gaddafi.

    On the streets outside the elitist Beverly Hills gala, scores of sheeple from a group calling itself “Ready for Hillary 2016?” waved flags and placards begging Clinton to run for president in 2016.

    Many feel that Clinton’s career should end after the Benghazi revelations. Kentucky Senator Rand Paul slammed Clinton in a recent speech, saying she should never be allowed to hold another public office ever again.

    Meanwhile, the other key Obama official involved in the Benghazi scandal, Susan Rice, was also receiving a lavish reception at a different awards ceremony on the eve of the congressional hearings.

    Rice was honored Tuesday night with the 2013 Louis E. Martin ‘Great American Award’, presented by The Joint Center for Political and Economic Studies.

    A press release regarding the award noted that Rice was being honored for ”her work in advancing U.S. interests, strengthening the world’s common security and prosperity, and promoting respect for human rights,”.

    In the aftermath of the attack on the US Consulate last year, Rice appeared on several talk shows and stated every time that the incident that led to the deaths of four Americans was not

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Watchdog says government has tried to silence him on Afghanistan

    0
    Print

    STEPHANIE GASKELL
    politico
    May 9, 2013

    The watchdog who tracks the billions of taxpayer dollars spent to rebuild Afghanistan says government officials have tried to silence him because they think he’s embarrassing the White House and Afghan President Hamid Karzai by pointing out the waste and fraud.

    John Sopko, the special inspector general for Afghanistan reconstruction, used a speech at the New America Foundation on Wednesday to blast government “bureaucrats”’ who have told him to stop publicizing damning audits that detail case after case of waste, corruption and mismanagement of rebuilding efforts in Afghanistan. Some government officials have even complained that they aren’t allowed to pre-screen or edit his reports, he said.

    “Since my appointment by the president last summer, I have been surprised to learn how many people both in and out of the government do not understand the role of an independent inspector general,” Sopko said.

    The Pentagon did not address Sopko’s remarks about pre-screening, but it endorsed his role keeping watch over the Afghanistan effort.

    Full article here

    This article was posted: Thursday, May 9, 2013 at 11:41 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    There’s Potentially 100,000 People Now Printing Out Their Own Handguns

    0
    Print

    Geoffrey Ingersoll
    Business Insider
    May 9, 2013

    Downloaders have successfully acquired at least 100,000 schematics for Defense Distributed’s printable 3D handgun over the course of two days.

    By comparison, the first episode of Game of Thrones clocked in at a million downloads per day.

    Andy Greenberg of Forbes reports that company owner Cody Wilson teamed up with controversial Kim Dotcom to upload the gun’s print plans to the website Mega. Predictably, Greenberg notes, Americans have surged into the lead for the country with the most downloads, in front of Spain, Brazil, Germany and the U.K.

    And the plans are spreading.

    From Forbes:

    The gun’s blueprint, of course, may have also already spread far wider than Defense Distributed can measure. It’s also been uploaded to the filesharing site the Pirate Bay, where it’s quickly become one of the most popular files in the site’s 3D-printing category. “This is the first in what will become an avalanche of undetectable, untraceable, easy-to-manufacture weapons that will turn the tables on evil-doers the world over,” writes one user with the name DakotaSmith on the site. “Share and enjoy.”

    Wilson told Greenberg this about choosing Dotcom, “We’re sympathetic to Kim Dotcom. There are plenty of services we could have used, but we chose this one. He’s down for the struggle.”

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    A struggle it will be: currently California, New York, and D.C. are looking at possible bans for 3D printed weapons.

    This article was posted: Thursday, May 9, 2013 at 11:42 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Sheriff Arpaio to Testify in Case Challenging President’s Birth

    0
    Print

    Joe Wolverton, II, J.D.
    New American
    May 9, 2013

    World Net Daily, among others, is reporting that “the nation’s toughest sheriff,” Maricopa County, Arizona, Sheriff Joe Arpaio (shown), and his team of investigators called the “Cold Case Team” will soon give evidence in a case before the Alabama Supreme Court considering whether Barack Obama is qualified to serve as president of the United States.

    Although dismissed by a lower court, the case has been appealed to the Alabama Supreme Court. Specifically, the plaintiffs – 2012 Constitution Party presidential nominee Virgil Goode and Alabama Republican Party leader Hugh McInnish – are suing to force Alabama Secretary of State Beth Chapman to legally verify the Article II eligibility of all candidates for president on the 2012 ballot.

    Article II of the Constitution mandates that “No person except a natural born citizen, or a citizen of the United States, at the time of the adoption of this Constitution, shall be eligible to the office of President….”

    Goode and McInnish, represented by attorney Larry Klayman (founder and former chairman of Judicial Watch), argue that there is sufficient evidence to disqualify Barack Obama based on their allegation that the birth certificate provided by the White House identifying Hawaii as the state of the president’s birth is fraudulent.

    Sheriff Arpaio and his lead investigator, Mike Zullo, have been looking into the possible inconsistencies and irregularities in the Obama birth certificate proffered by Hawaii state health department officials.

    According to a statement published on a blog written by Commander Charles Kerchner, who filed one of the first cases challenging Obama’s status as a “natural born citizen, Zullo is quoted saying, “We recently discovered new irrefutable evidence, which confirms, hands down, the document is a fraud.”

    While similar challenges have been thrown out of court (including this very case), the likelihood of success of this appeal may be a bit brighter because of the man who was recently re-elected as the chief justice of the Alabama Supreme Court – Judge Roy Moore.

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    World Net Daily reports that “The case becomes all the more intriguing because Moore is on record previously questioning Obama’s constitutional eligibility to serve as president.”

    The participation of Sheriff Arpaio and Judge Moore in the case may prove to be the perfect storm of personality and pugnacity – and more importantly, compelling evidence – against

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Israel Informs US That Russia Plans To Sell Weapons To Syria

    0
    Print

    Zero Hedge
    May 9, 2013

    We almost got an entire 24 hour period that did not have news about imminent war rumblings out of Syria. Almost. Late last night WSJ reported about the civil war torn country (in which the rebels may or may not be using chemical weapons, but are backed by both Al Qaeda and the US government) again, this time on a leak by Israel having warned the US that Russians are “imminently” going to sell advanced ground-to-air missile systems to Syria “that would significantly boost the regime’s ability to stave off intervention in its civil war.” Supposedly this means that Israel would be unable to continue its unimpeded military incursions of Syrian sovereign airspace and blow stuff up at whim just because it feels like it, and for whatever pretext the Israeli defense forces come up with.

    Some details on what Syria is said to receive from Moscow via the WSJ:

    Israel has warned the U.S. that a Russian deal is imminent to sell advanced ground-to-air missile systems to Syria, weapons that would significantly boost the regime’s ability to stave off intervention in its civil war.

    The package includes six launchers and 144 operational missiles, each with a range of 125 miles, according to the information the Israelis provided. The first shipment could come over the next three months, according to the Israelis’ information, and be concluded by the end of the year. Russia is also expected to send two instruction teams to train Syria’s military in operating the missile system, the Israelis say.

    Naturally, there were no official statements on the matter, meaning interpretation of events is up to “objective”, “unconflicted” media spin, the same way the US government is convinced it was the Assad regime using chemical weapons despite the UN’s report claiming just the opposite.

    U.S. officials said on Wednesday that they are analyzing the information Israel provided, but wouldn’t comment on whether they believed the sale of S-300 missile batteries was near.

    Russian officials didn’t immediately return requests to comment. The Russian Embassy in Washington has said its policy is not to comment on arms sales or transfers between Russia and other countries.

    The government of President Bashar al-Assad has been seeking to purchase S-300 missile batteries–which can intercept both manned aircraft and guided missiles–from Moscow going back to the George W. Bush administration, U.S. officials said. Western nations have lobbied President Vladimir Putin’s government not to go

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Boston’s Top Cop Warns Against “Police State”

    0
    Bostons Top Cop Warns Against Police State 090513davis

    “I do not endorse surveillance cameras attached to every light pole in the city”

    Paul Joseph Watson
    Prison Planet.com
    May 9, 2013

    Boston Police Commissioner Edward Davis warned against creating a “police state” in the aftermath of the marathon bombings during testimony in front of a congressional hearing today.

    Edward Davis. Image: YouTube

    “We do not, and cannot, live in a protective enclosure because of the actions of extremists who seek to disrupt our way of life,” Davis told lawmakers, adding “I do not endorse actions that move Boston and our nation into a police state mentality, with surveillance cameras attached to every light pole in the city.”

    The hearing is designed to examine circumstances leading up to the bombings and find ways of decreasing the likelihood of similar attacks in future.

    Despite Davis’ call for the public’s privacy to be protected, he did call for more surveillance cameras as well as more undercover officers to increase security around big events.

    In the aftermath of the Boston bombings, numerous political figures and talking heads seized upon the attacks to call for big brother measures.

    Both Republican Congressman Peter King and New York Mayor Michael Bloomberg cited the attack to justify increased surveillance.

    “So, I do think we need more cameras. We have to stay ahead of the terrorists and I do know in New York, the Lower Manhattan Security Initiative, which is based on cameras, the outstanding work that results from that,” said King. “So yes, I do favor more cameras. They’re a great law enforcement method and device. And again, it keeps us ahead of the terrorists, who are constantly trying to kill us.”

    In reality, as Bruce Schneier has documented, the chance of an American being killed in a terrorist attack is virtually zero when compared to the most likely causes of death.

    Bloomberg echoed King, stating, “The Boston bombing is a terrible reminder of why we’ve made these investments–including camera technology that could help us deter an attack, or investigate and apprehend those involved.”

    However, figures from all over the world show that surveillance cameras are virtually useless in lowering crime, so to think they could prevent terrorist attacks is asinine. A British Home Office review of 22 studies from Britain and the US that found CCTV “had little or no effect on crime in public transport and city centre

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Australian Activist Defeats Spy Cameras In Landmark Case

    0
    Australian Activist Defeats Spy Cameras In Landmark Case 090513cctv

    Freedom Strikes Back Down Under — CCTV breaks Australian privacy law, cameras switched off

    Steve Jolly
    Prison Planet.com
    May 9, 2013

    Expansion of the global surveillance grid was dealt a major blow in Australia last week after a legal challenge by an individual against the State of New South Wales brought about a landmark ruling.

    Image: Wikimedia Commons

    A local resident opposed to the introduction of CCTV cameras succesfully proved that public surveillance carried out by his city council not only broke Australia’s privacy laws, but also did nothing to prevent crime — the supposed reason for its installation.

    This important ruling effectively challenges the legality of public space CCTV in New South Wales and sets a highly significant precedent with far-reaching consequences across the State and potential implications for the rest of Australia.

    The legal decision announced on 2nd May 2013 by an Administrative Decisions Tribunal for the State of New South Wales ruled that:

    “The Council is to refrain from any conduct or action in contravention of an information protection principle or a privacy code of practice;

    [and]

    “The Council is to render a written apology to the Applicant for the breaches, and advise him of the steps to be taken by the Council to remove the possibility of similar breaches in the future.”

    The tribunal also ruled that “the expert evidence suggests that CCTV does little to prevent crime,” and that “the Council has not demonstrated that filming people in the Nowra CBD is reasonably necessary to prevent crime.” It also found that “since the Council’s CCTV program was implemented, crime has increased in the Nowra CBD in the categories of assaults, break and enters and malicious damage.”

    Full details of the adjudication can be found here.

    As a result of this landmark ruling, cameras installed in the city of Nowra, New South Wales have been switched off while the local authority, Shoalhaven City Council and the State government of New South Wales consider their next move.

    Adam Bonner, the man who took the council to court, is not a lawyer or a seasoned campaigner, but a local farmer who simply acted on his principles, as he explains:

             “For many years, even before I started this whole action back in 2009, I had always believed in a free and fair society that a person should have to consent to have their personal information collected and stored by the state.”

             “There is also something

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Al-Qaeda Now in Control of CIA’s Covert War in Syria

    0
    Print

    Kurt Nimmo
    Prison Planet.com
    May 9, 2013

    The Guardian reported Wednesday that the CIA’s Free Syrian Army is losing mercenaries to a better equipped, more disciplined and religiously motivated al-Nusra.

    “Fighters feel proud to join al-Nusra because that means power and influence,” Abu Ahmed, a former teacher from Deir Hafer who now commands an FSA brigade, told the newspaper. “Al-Nusra fighters rarely withdraw for shortage of ammunition or fighters and they leave their target only after liberating it.”

    “Fighters are heading to al-Nusra because of its Islamic doctrine, sincerity, good funding and advanced weapons,” added Abu Islam, a member of the FSA’s al-Tawhid brigade.

    Jabhat al-Nusra is an al-Qaeda offshoot. In April, the al-Qaeda branch in Iraq, the Islamic State of Iraq, merged with al-Nusra and the group “renewed the bayaa” (oath of allegiance) to al-Qaeda leader Ayman al-Zawahiri, writes Rajeh Saeed.

    Ayman Al-Zawahiri is the current leader of al-Qaeda following the death of Osama bin Laden more than a decade ago.

    In December, 2012, the State Department officially listed al-Nusra as a terror group linked to al-Qaeda in Iraq. The Treasury Department then imposed sanctions on its leaders.

    “Jabhat al Nusra has claimed responsibility for numerous suicide bombings and other attacks that have killed hundreds of innocent people,” Paul Joseph Watson wrote on December 5, 2012. “Last weekend, disturbing footage emerged of one of their members slaughtering prisoners in cold blood. Extremist militants have also ransacked Christian churches and carried out sectarian beheadings.”

    “Among Nusra fighters are many Syrians who say they fought with al Qaida in Iraq, which waged a bloody and violent campaign against the U.S. presence in that country and is still blamed for suicide and car bombings that have killed hundreds of Iraqis since the U.S. troops left a year ago,” David Enders wrote for McClatchy Newspapers late last year.

    Niall Green writes that al-Nusra “militants, drawn to the Syrian war under the banner of Islamist jihad, are recruited from the ranks of Sunni extremist veterans of the wars in Chechnya, Iraq, Afghanistan, and Libya.”

    It is a well established fact that the United States and the CIA recruited and supported Islamic fighters in the covert war against the Soviet Union and later fashioned al-Qaeda and the Taliban from their ranks. The United States and al-Qaeda have worked together in Bosnia, Kosovo, Libya and elsewhere.

    “Islamist militias, including those

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Australian Activist Defeats Spy Cameras In Landmark Case

    0
    Australian Activist Defeats Spy Cameras In Landmark Case 090513cctv

    Freedom Strikes Back Down Under — CCTV breaks Australian privacy law, cameras switched off

    Steve Jolly
    Prison Planet.com
    May 9, 2013

    Expansion of the global surveillance grid was dealt a major blow in Australia last week after a legal challenge by an individual against the State of New South Wales brought about a landmark ruling.

    Image: Wikimedia Commons

    A local resident opposed to the introduction of CCTV cameras succesfully proved that public surveillance carried out by his city council not only broke Australia’s privacy laws, but also did nothing to prevent crime — the supposed reason for its installation.

    This important ruling effectively challenges the legality of public space CCTV in New South Wales and sets a highly significant precedent with far-reaching consequences across the State and potential implications for the rest of Australia.

    The legal decision announced on 2nd May 2013 by an Administrative Decisions Tribunal for the State of New South Wales ruled that:

    “The Council is to refrain from any conduct or action in contravention of an information protection principle or a privacy code of practice;

    [and]

    “The Council is to render a written apology to the Applicant for the breaches, and advise him of the steps to be taken by the Council to remove the possibility of similar breaches in the future.”

    The tribunal also ruled that “the expert evidence suggests that CCTV does little to prevent crime,” and that “the Council has not demonstrated that filming people in the Nowra CBD is reasonably necessary to prevent crime.” It also found that “since the Council’s CCTV program was implemented, crime has increased in the Nowra CBD in the categories of assaults, break and enters and malicious damage.”

    Full details of the adjudication can be found here.

    As a result of this landmark ruling, cameras installed in the city of Nowra, New South Wales have been switched off while the local authority, Shoalhaven City Council and the State government of New South Wales consider their next move.

    Adam Bonner, the man who took the council to court, is not a lawyer or a seasoned campaigner, but a local farmer who simply acted on his principles, as he explains:

    “For many years, even before I started this whole action back in 2009, I had always believed in a free and fair society that a person should have to consent to have their personal information collected and stored by the state.”

    “There is also something very unsavoury

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    It’s Dishonest to Talk about Benghazi Without Talking About the Syrian War

    0
    It’s Dishonest to Talk about Benghazi Without Talking About the Syrian War WestPoint 1 LibyaAQvsAS

    Washington’s Blog
    May 9, 2013

    According to Democrats, today’s Congressional hearings on Benghazi are nothing but a partisan witch hunt.

    According to Republicans, the Obama administration committed treason in it’s handling of Benghazi … and then tried to cover it up.

    Both parties are avoiding the bigger picture … The fact that Democrats and Republicans alike have been using Benghazi as the center of U.S. efforts to arm the Al Qaeda-affiliated Syrian rebels.

    Specifically, the U.S. supported opposition which overthrew Libya’s Gadaffi was largely comprised of Al Qaeda terrorists.

    According to a 2007 
    The Hindustan Times reported in 2011:

    “There is no question that al Qaeda’s Libyan franchise, Libyan Islamic Fighting Group, is a part of the opposition,” Bruce Riedel, former CIA officer and a leading expert on terrorism, told Hindustan Times.

    It has always been Qaddafi’s biggest enemy and its stronghold is Benghazi.

    Al Qaeda is now largely in control of Libya. Indeed, Al Qaeda flags were flown over the Benghazi courthouse once Gaddafi was toppled.

    (Incidentally, Gaddafi was on the verge of invading Benghazi in 2011, 4 years after the West Point report cited Benghazi as a hotbed of Al Qaeda terrorists. Gaddafi claimed — rightly it turns out — that Benghazi was an Al Qaeda stronghold and a main source of the Libyan rebellion. But NATO planes stopped him, and protected Benghazi.)

    In 2011, Ambassador Stevens was appointed to be the Obama administration’s liaison with the “budding Libyan opposition,” according to ABC News. Stevens and the State Department worked directly with Abdelhakim Belhadj of the Libyan Islamic Fighting Group. Belhadj has direct connections to al-Qaeda.

    CNN, the Telegraph, the Washington Times, and many other mainstream sources confirm that Al Qaeda terrorists from Libya have since flooded into Syria to fight the Assad regime.

    Mainstream sources also confirm that the Syrian opposition is largely comprised of Al Qaeda terrorists. (Indeed, the New York Times reported last week that virtually all of the rebel fighters are Al Qaeda terrorists.)

    The U.S. has been arming the Syrian opposition since 2006. The post-Gaddafi Libyan government is also itself a top funder and arms supplier of the Syrian opposition.

    This brings us to the murder of ambassador Stevens

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Israel Rescues Al-Qaeda Terrorists From Syria

    0
    Israel Rescues Al Qaeda Terrorists From Syria 010513rebel

    Fighters being treated in field hospitals and sent back to front lines

    Paul Joseph Watson
    Prison Planet.com
    May 9, 2013

    Israel is sending military vehicles into Syria to pick up wounded Al-Qaeda terrorists involved in the fight against the Syrian Army before patching them up and sending them back into battle, another startling example of how the Zionist state is working with its supposedly sworn enemies to topple President Bashar Al-Assad.

    FSA Rebel. Image: YouTube

    That’s a not a claim being made by Iranian or Syrian state media, it’s calmly admitted in a report by the staunchly pro-Israel DebkaFile.

    “Israel has set up a large field hospital near the Tel Hazakah observation and military post on Golan which overlooks southern Syria and northern Jordan. There, incoming Syrian war wounded are vetted and examined by Israeli army medics who decide whether to patch them up and send them back, or judge them badly hurt enough for hospital care. The seriously hurt are moved to one of the the nearest Israeli hospitals in Safed or Haifa,” states the report.

    The report notes that the wounded fighters are probably being rescued by unmarked “Israeli army vehicles” that are “entering Syria to pick up injured rebels.”

    In addition to the latest information, an AFP report from March also documented how the IDF had set up a “military field hospital” at army outpost 105 in the Golan Heights in order to rescue and treat FSA fighters.

    By treating and rehabilitating wounded FSA militants and Al-Qaeda terrorists, Israel is aiding the very same rebels who have burned Israeli flags in public and vowed to crush the Zionist regime once they are finished toppling Bashar Al-Assad.

    Multiple reports now confirm that the primary frontline militants in Syria fighting against Assad’s forces are members of the Al-Qaeda group Jabhat al-Nusra which “killed numerous American troops in Iraq,” and is now leading western-backed rebel forces in Syria. After the organization was declared a terrorist group by the US State Department, 29 different US-backed Syrian opposition groups pledged their allegiance to al-Nusra.

    The DebkaFile report admits that Jabhat al-Nusra fighters are now heavily concentrated, “in the 8 sq. km separation zone on the Golan” from where the Israeli military is rescuing them for medical treatment.

    According to Egyptian and Jordanian intelligence sources, Israel’s air strike on Syria was this past

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Ban on Displaying Guns at City Museums Should be Lifted, Ald. Burke Says

    0
    Print

    Kyla Gardner and Quinn Ford
    dnainfo.com
    May 9, 2013

    The city’s most powerful alderman – Edward Burke (14th) – introduced an ordinance at Wednesday’s City Council meeting that would allow Chicago museums to display unloaded firearms for historical purposes.

    Currently, city museums are prohibited from lawfully displaying firearms of historic value, according to the city’s long-standing gun ordinance.

    Burke said Wednesday he recently learned of the “anomaly in the city code.”

    “Museums are caught in a dilemma that if they have in their collections artifacts that can be defined as firearms, even though there’s historical significance to the memento, they can’t be registered in the city and can’t be displayed,” Burke said.

    Burke cited the example of Major General William P. Levine, one of the very first American soldiers to liberate the Dachau concentration camp during World War II.

    Levine’s family donated a German Walther PP he acquired during the war to the Pritzker Military Library following Levine’s death in March, but the library is unable to display the gun under the current ordinance.

    Full article here

    This article was posted: Thursday, May 9, 2013 at 5:26 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Benghazi whistleblower: ‘I’ve been demoted’ for challenging Susan Rice’s claims

    0
    Print

    Joel Gehrke
    The Washington Examiner
    May 9, 2013

    Gregory Hicks, former deputy chief of mission in Benghazi, told Congress today that a State Department official began criticizing his job performance, and he was ultimately demoted, after he asked why U.S. Ambassador to the United Nations Susan Rice attributed the Benghazi attack to an anti-Islamic Youtube video.

    “In hindsight, I think it began after I asked the question about Ambassador Rice’s statement on the TV shows,” Hicks said of the criticism during a House Oversight and Government Reform Committee hearing on the attack today.

    Hicks said he asked Assistant Secretary Beth Jones why Rice made the statements that she did on the 9/16/13 Sunday talk shows.

    “Her reaction was ‘I don’t know,’ and it was very clear from the tone that I should not proceed with any further [questions],” he told lawmakers.

    Full article here

    This article was posted: Thursday, May 9, 2013 at 5:23 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Secret email reveals top official told Libya’s U.S. Abmassador that terrorists were behind Benghazi attack — four days BEFORE U.S. Ambassador to UN said it was a spontaneous attack

    0
    Print

    Fiona Harvey
    UK Daily Mail
    May 9, 2013

    A top State Department appointee told Libya’s ambassador to the United States one day after the military-style assault on the U.S. Consulate in Benghazi that the terror group Ansar al-Shariah was responsible.

    But four days later, the U.S. Ambassador to the United Nations said on television that it was the product of a spontaneous protest.

    During a fiery and emotional congressional hearing on the 2012 attack on the U.S. Consulate in Benghazi, Rep. Trey Gowdy read aloud from an email dated Sept. 12, 2012 to senior State Department officers, from Elizabeth Jones, the acting Secretary of State for Near Eastern Affairs.

    Describing a conversation she had with then-Libyan ambassador Ali Aujali, Jones wrote in the previously undisclosed email that ‘I told him that the group that conducted the attacks, Ansar al-Sharia, is affiliated with Islamic terrorists.’

    ‘Let me say that again,’ Gowdy emphasized during the hearing: ‘She told him.’

    Full article here

    This article was posted: Thursday, May 9, 2013 at 5:05 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Robobee: Robot The Size Of A Quarter Shows Off New Flight Skills

    0
    Print

    Singularity Hub
    May 9, 2013

    A tiny biomimetic robot, dubbed RoboBee, recently took wing under controlled flight for the first time. The robot is part of Harvard’s “Micro Air Vehicles” program led by principal investigator Robert Wood, and the controlled flight, years in the making, is no small feat. Wood hopes these tiny robots may one day be so cheap they are all but disposable. Swarms will fly reconnaissance, search and rescue, or research missions. They may even one day pollinate crops.

    Full article here

    This article was posted: Thursday, May 9, 2013 at 4:51 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Prince Charles attacks global warming sceptics

    0
    Print

    Fiona Harvey
    London Guardian
    May 9, 2013

    The Prince of Wales has criticised “corporate lobbyists” and climate change sceptics for turning the earth into a “dying patient”, in his most outspoken attack yet on the world’s failure to tackle global warming.

    He attacked businesses who failed to care for the environment, and compared the current generation to a doctor taking care of a critically ill patient.

    “If you think about the impact of climate change, [it should be how] a doctor would deal with the problem,” he told an audience of government ministers, from the UK and abroad, as well as businesspeople and scientists. “A scientific hypothesis is tested to absolute destruction, but medicine can’t wait. If a doctor sees a child with a fever, he can’t wait for [endless] tests. He has to act on what is there.”

    He added: “The risk of delay is so enormous that we can’t wait until we are absolutely sure the patient is dying.”

    Full article here

    This article was posted: Thursday, May 9, 2013 at 4:54 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Free Syrian Army rebels defect to Islamist group Jabhat al-Nusra

    0
    Print

    Mona Mahmood and Ian Black
    London Guardian
    May 9, 2013

    Syria’s main armed opposition group, the Free Syrian Army (FSA), is losing fighters and capabilities to Jabhat al-Nusra, an Islamist organisation with links to al-Qaida that is emerging as the best-equipped, financed and motivated force fighting Bashar al-Assad’s regime.

    Evidence of the growing strength of al-Nusra, gathered from Guardian interviews with FSA commanders across Syria, underlines the dilemma for the US, Britain and other governments as they ponder the question of arming anti-Assad rebels.

    John Kerry, the US secretary of state, said that if negotiations went ahead between the Syrian government and the opposition — as the US and Russia proposed on Tuesday — “then hopefully [arming the Syrian rebels] would not be necessary”.

    The agreement between Washington and Moscow creates a problem for the UK and France, which have proposed lifting or amending the EU arms embargo on Syria to help anti-Assad forces. The Foreign Office welcomed the agreement as a “potential step forward” but insisted: “Assad and his close associates have lost all legitimacy. They have no place in the future of Syria.” Opposition leaders were sceptical about prospects for talks if Assad remained in power.

    Full article here

    This article was posted: Thursday, May 9, 2013 at 4:46 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    China may not overtake America this century after all

    0
    Print

    Ambrose Evans-Pritchard
    London Telegraph
    May 9, 2013

    China’s Development Research Council (DRC) expects growth to drop to 6pc by 2020. It could be much lower. The US Conference Board says it will average 3.7pc from 2019-2025 as the ageing crisis hits. Michael Pettis from Beijing University thinks it is likely to slow to 3pc to 4pc over the next decade, deeming this entirely desirable if it comes from taming the runaway state enterprises.

    If so, China’s growth may not be much higher than the new consensus estimate of 3pc for a reborn America, powered by its energy boom and the revival of the chemical, steel, glass, and paper industries.

    All those charts showing China’s economy surging past the US by 2030, or 2025, or even 2017, will look very credulous. China may not surpass the US this century.

    As of last year US GDP was roughly $15.7 trillion, compared to $8 trillion for China on a nominal exchange rate basis, the measure that matters for gauging economic power.

    Full article here

    This article was posted: Thursday, May 9, 2013 at 4:47 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    California, New York and DC look to ban 3D-printed guns

    0
    Print

    RT
    May 9, 2013

    A handgun made almost entirely using a consumer-grade 3D printer fired a bullet over the weekend for the first time in the history of the infant technology. If some lawmakers have their way, it will also be the last.

    Defense Distributed of Texas announced on Sunday that researchers fired a bullet designed for a traditional .380-caliber firearm with a gun built all but exclusively using digital blueprints, some plastic and an $8,000 printer. The only item aside from the bullet not printed out was a single nail that served as the firing pin.

    As early s Tuesday, though, California State Senator Leland Yee was already looking to pass a bill that would outlaw other 3D weapons from being built outside of the factories where firearms are regularly assembled.

    Sen. Lee, a Democrat that represents a large chunk of California that includes parts of San Francisco, issued a press release this week condemning Defense Distributed’s inaugural 3D handgun.

    We must be proactive in seeking solutions to this new threat rather than wait for the inevitable tragedies this will make possible,” Yee said.

    Of major concern to the lawmaker isn’t just the capabilities of 3D printer but how easily the technology can put weapons in the hands of convicted criminals and others who wouldn’t normally be able to obtain a firearm. Thanks to blueprints drafted by Defense Distributed and published on the Web, anyone willing to spend the money on supplies could essentially have a working gun without ever leaving their home.

    Part of the reason we have background checks is to ensure that felons, criminals, are not going to have guns,” Yee said this week. “[And] that those individuals who have mental health issues are not going to have guns. And so now there is a gaping loophole to allow any individual to make a gun undetected, and the guns themselves are undetected. It’s going to create a tremendously unsafe situation for the rest of society.”

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    What I’m looking at right now is to ensure that any individual who is going to make a gun out of these 3D printers go through a background check, just like any other individuals who purchase a gun,” Yee said.

    Elsewhere, lawmakers are looking to advance local 3D-printed gun bans as well. Washington, DC council member Tommy Wells (D-Ward 6) introduced a proposal that would

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    The Real Benghazi Story: U.S. Op to Arm al-Qaeda in Syria

    0
    Print

    Kurt Nimmo
    Prison Planet.com
    May 8, 2013

    Last November, we reported that the murder of ambassador Christopher Stevens wasn’t about a lame anti-Muslim video. It was connected to an arms shipment as part of the on-going “creative destruction” of the Middle East and North Africa.

    During an interview with CNBC’s Larry Kudlow, radio talk show host John Baxter said the resignation of CIA Director David Petraeus had nothing to do with an extramarital affair with his biographer, reserve Army officer Paula Broadwell, but was related to U.S. policy in the Middle East, ongoing “color revolutions” in the region, and specifically the operation underway to arm al-Qaeda in Syria and overthrow the al-Assad regime.

    “Benghazi is not about Libya, Benghazi is about the policy of the Obama administration to involve the United States without clarity to the American people, not only in Libya but throughout the whole of the Arab world now in turmoil,” Baxter told Kudlow. “Benghazi is about the NSC directing an operation that is perhaps shadowy, perhaps a presidential finding, perhaps doesn’t, that takes arms and men and puts them into Syria in the guise of the Free Syria Army.”

    Retired Lt. General William Boykin said in January that Stevens was in Benghazi as part of an effort to arm al-Qaeda, what the corporate media calls the rebels. “More supposition was that he was now funneling guns to the rebel forces in Syria, using essentially the Turks to facilitate that. Was that occurring, (a), and if so, was it a legal covert action?” Boykin said during an interview with CNS News.

    Boykin said Stevens was “given a directive to support the Syrian rebels” and the State Department’s Special Mission Compound in Benghazi “would be the hub of that activity.”

    In 2011, Stevens was officially appointed to be the Obama administration’s liaison with the “budding Libyan opposition,” according to ABC News. By March, 2011, it was firmly established that the so-called Libya opposition was interchangeable with al-Qaeda. Stevens and the State Department worked directly with Abdelhakim Belhadj of the Libyan Islamic Fighting Group. Belhadj has direct connections to al-Qaeda.

    The murder of Stevens, of course, did not slow down the flow of arms from Libya to al-Qaeda in Syria. “The United States is launching a covert operation to send weapons to Syrian rebels for the first time as it ramps up military efforts to

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    SEAL Team 6 Families to Blame Government For Deaths

    0
    SEAL Team 6 Families to Blame Government For Deaths 080513seal

    “Never before revealed information” to be aired at press conference

    Paul Joseph Watson
    Prison Planet.com
    May 8, 2013

    SEAL Team 6 Member. Image: Tumblr

    Families of the SEAL Team 6 members who were killed when their helicopter crashed in Afghanistan in August 2011 are set to give a press conference tomorrow during which they will hold the Obama administration partially responsible for the deaths of their sons.

    With the administration already reeling over today’s Benghazi revelations, a press release on the ‘Tea Party Command Center’ website promises “never before revealed information” about the circumstances behind the incident.

    “Accompanying the families of these dead Navy SEAL Team VI special operations servicemen will be retired military experts verifying their accounts of how and why the government is as much responsible for the deaths of their sons as is the Taliban,” states the press release.

    30 Americans were killed on August 6, 2011 when insurgents shot down a U.S. military helicopter during fighting in eastern Afghanistan. Most of the victims belonged to the same unit as the Navy SEALS involved in the Bin Laden operation, although US military officials said that none of the individuals involved directly in the Bin Laden mission were killed in the crash.

    Issues set to be raised include how the Obama administration’s handling of the death of Osama Bin Laden made retaliatory attacks against SEAL Team 6 more likely, as well as how SEALS were sent into battle “without special operations aviation and proper air support.”

    Perhaps even more controversially, the family members are set to reveal how a Muslim cleric attended the funerals of the servicemembers and disparaged them by “damning them as infidels to Allah.” The press release states that a video documenting this will be played to members of the press tomorrow.

    Other revelations include “How and why the denial of requested pre-assault fire may have contributed to the shoot down of the Navy SEAL Team VI helicopter,” and, “How Afghani forces accompanying the Navy SEAL Team VI servicemen on the helicopter were not properly vetted and how they possibly disclosed classified information to the Taliban about the mission, resulting in the shoot down of the helicopter.”

    *********************

    Paul Joseph Watson is the editor and writer for Infowars.com and Prison Planet.com. He is the author of Order Out Of Chaos. Watson is also a host for Infowars Nightly

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Rand Paul: Benghazi Should End Hillary Clinton

    0
    Print

    Senator calls State Dept. failures a “dereliction of duty”

    Steve Watson
    Prisonplanet.com
    May 8, 2013

    Kentucky Senator Rand Paul has said that Hillary Clinton should never be allowed to hold another public office ever again following the failures and subsequent response surrounding the attack on the US Consulate in Benghazi.

    As hearings into the September 2012 attack begin in Washington DC today, video has emerged of the Kentucky Senator laying into Clinton and calling her failures “inexcusable” in a speech before the Missouri Republican Party.

    “I think her dereliction of duty and her lack of leadership should preclude her from holding any office,” Paul said before a thunderous ovation.

    “I don’t think she should read every cable. Maybe from Estonia and Bulgaria an assistant should read it. But from one of the five most dangerous countries in the world, there’s no excuse for her not reading the cables,” Paul added.

    The Senator was following up on comments he addressed to Clinton during a Senate Foreign Affairs Committee hearing earlier this year when he said that he would have fired her over Benghazi if he were president, because she failed to read communications requesting additional help and security in Libya.

    At the hearing in January Clinton claimed that ”That cable did not come to my attention.”

    Watch the video:

    As this report goes live, Greg Hicks, the number two to murdered US Ambassador Christopher Stevens, is set to testify that US Special forces personnel were ordered to stand down as the attack on the US embassy in Libya was taking place on September 11, 2012.

    The scandal may de-rail the momentum that has been building around Hillary Clinton for a potential 2016 run.

    In recent weeks Clinton has been cited as leading several polls of potential 2016 presidential candidates. She has even been tacitly endorsed by the elites at lavish gatherings.

    That may all change today however.

    “I think the dam is about to break on Benghazi. We’re going to find a system failure before, during, and after the attacks,” Sen. Lindsey Graham (R-S.C.) wrote on his Facebook page Tuesday. “We’re going to find political manipulation seven weeks before an election. We’re going to find people asleep at the switch when it comes to the State Department, including Hillary Clinton.”

    Fox News’ James Rosen has also reported that the second whistleblower, senior official Mark Thompson, will testify on Wednesday that Clinton tried to cut the State Department’s counterterrorism bureau out of

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Latest On Benghazi: Continual Live Updates

    0
    Print

    Prison Planet.com
    May 8, 2013

    Oath Keepers Founder Attending Benghazi Hearing in DC Today and at Boston Bombing Hearing Tomorrow
    oathkeepers.org

    Oath Keepers Founder Stewart Rhodes is in DC and is attending the House Benghazi Hearings today, where three key witnesses will testify. Also attending are Richard Frye and Jeff Lewis of Patriot Coalition.

    NOTE FROM STEWART:

    As the founder and President of Oath Keepers, a national organization of current serving military, police, and first responders, as well as veterans, all dedicated to defending our Constitution, I felt compelled to be here in support of those who kept their oaths and to demand accountability from those who failed to support them.

    It is now looking like they (including Obama himself) intentionally and callously withheld crucial military support, watched good men die on their screens, and then punished and purged those who tried to help them.

    Read more

    Fourth Benghazi witness gagged by red tape
    dailycaller.com

    Obama administration officials are finally letting the attorney for a Benghazi whistle-blower get a security clearance – but the clearance is at such a low level that it will probably slow the congressional probe of how the administration handled last year’s terrorist attack on the embassy in Benghazi, Libya.

    Victoria Toensing represents an unnamed government official who can help explain the reaction of top government officials to the jihadi attack on the U.S diplomatic site in Benghazi and killed four Americans last Sept. 11.

    The official may also be able to explain if officials rewrote intelligence reports and took other actions to minimize media coverage of the administration’s errors and the perceived role of Al Qaeda jihadis.

    Read more

    The Benghazi Scandal Is Not Like Watergate—It’s Worse

    It’s clear that the Benghazi scandal is not like Watergate. It’s worse. While there are many similarities in process, e.g. possible cover-up, stonewalling, etc., as far as we know no one died in the Watergate scandal. So as I await the hearing in about one hour from now, my interest is in process. And it takes the form in the following questions–I believe–need answers:

    Read more

    Benghazi victim’s mother tells CNN she blames Hillary Clinton for her son’s death
    dailymail.co.uk

    The mother of one of the four Americans killed in the September 11, 2012 terror attack on the U.S. Consulate in Benghazi, Libya told CNN’s Jake Tapper that she blames former Secretary of State Hillary Clinton for her son’s death.

    Pat Smith’s son, State Department Information Officer Sean

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    Judge Orders Conspiracy Re-Education For Lauryn Hill

    0
    Print

    Singer told to undergo counseling over ‘conspiracy theory’ that music industry strangles real talent

    Paul Joseph Watson
    Prison Planet.com
    May 8, 2013

    Grammy award-winning singer Lauren Hill has been ordered by a judge to “undergo counseling because of her conspiracy theories.” What was her conspiracy theory? That the music industry oppresses people with actual talent in favor of pumping out mindless nonsense.

    Yesterday Hill was sentenced to 3 months in jail followed by three months’ home confinement after failing to pay a tax bill because she had withdrawn from society following threats to her family.

    In June last year, Hill posted a diatribe to her Tumbler account complaining of how the music industry is “manipulated and controlled by a media protected military industrial complex.”

    As we’ve highlighted numerous times in the past, other recording artists have made it clear that anyone who doesn’t conform to the strict demands of the music industry or even, as Nicole Scherzinger recently remarked, sell their soul to satan, tends to find success hard to maintain in an industry that punishes individuals who dare to speak their mind.

    In numerous performances and speeches over the last few years, Hill has attempted to warn young people about how “pop culture cannibalism” and the deliberate reductionism of art and music is damaging a whole generation and turning them into passive, unthinking consumers — destroying inspiration and true creativity in the name of profit.

    The Judge’s order that Hill undergo what amounts to brainwashing and re-education simply for publicly proclaiming the fact that the music industry is designed to strangle true talent while promoting amoral, vacuous, mindless, turgid drivel, is part of the increasing trend towards labeling common sense as a mental illness if it goes against the establishment grain in any way.

    Since people who post vehement political opinions on Facebook are already being kidnapped and taken to psychiatric wards across the country, how long before criticism of the state is officially recognized as a mental disorder?

    Those considered hostile to authority have already been tagged as sufferers of “oppositional defiant disorder” under the the DSM-IV-TR Manual.

    The definition of this mental illness is, “a recurrent pattern of negativistic, defiant, disobedient. and hostile behavior toward authority figures that persists for at least 6 months.”

    The attempt to frame alternative opinions as dangerous mental disorders has also entered the political realm. In 2009,

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    CNN anchors pretend they’re having a “satellite interview” even though they’re in the same parking lot

    0
    CNN anchors pretend theyre having a satellite interview even though theyre in the same parking lot 5189598906789

    Happy Place
    May 8, 2013

    “Sorry, we’re experiencing a delay in the broadcast while we both wait for this bus to go by.”

    Yes, those are all the same cars. Apparently they thought we wouldn’t notice because Nancy is on the right side of the screen, when in reality she is to Asleigh Banfield’s left.

    See The Atlantic Wire’s excellent breakdown of the shots to see exactly what happened.

    Tricky, CNN, very tricky. We understand, though. When a major crime story like the Cleveland Kidnapping breaks, you have to send in Nancy Grace. However, since Nancy Grace is a poorly-medicated vengeance demon who’s always just a bad morning away from ending up on her own show, you also send in a real anchor with whom she can “correspond.”

    Unfortunately, it’s hard to get shooting permits in Cleveland on short notice, so you set up in the same parking lot. Do us a favor, CNN, just put them next to each other and have them talk into each other’s faces instead of relaying their words through satellites to come back down 30 feet away like we’re idiots.

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 11:10 am





    Leave a Reply

    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Prison Planet

    SEAL Team 6 Families to Blame Government For Deaths

    0

    “Never before revealed information” to be aired at press conference

    Paul Joseph Watson
    Infowars.com
    May 8, 2013

    SEAL Team 6 Member. Image: Tumblr

    Families of the SEAL Team 6 members who were killed when their helicopter crashed in Afghanistan in August 2011 are set to give a press conference tomorrow during which they will hold the Obama administration partially responsible for the deaths of their sons.

    With the administration already reeling over today’s Benghazi revelations, a press release on the ‘Tea Party Command Center’ website promises “never before revealed information” about the circumstances behind the incident.

    “Accompanying the families of these dead Navy SEAL Team VI special operations servicemen will be retired military experts verifying their accounts of how and why the government is as much responsible for the deaths of their sons as is the Taliban,” states the press release.

    30 Americans were killed on August 6, 2011 when insurgents shot down a U.S. military helicopter during fighting in eastern Afghanistan. Most of the victims belonged to the same unit as the Navy SEALS involved in the Bin Laden operation, although US military officials said that none of the individuals involved directly in the Bin Laden mission were killed in the crash.

    Issues set to be raised include how the Obama administration’s handling of the death of Osama Bin Laden made retaliatory attacks against SEAL Team 6 more likely, as well as how SEALS were sent into battle “without special operations aviation and proper air support.”

    Perhaps even more controversially, the family members are set to reveal how a Muslim cleric attended the funerals of the servicemembers and disparaged them by “damning them as infidels to Allah.” The press release states that a video documenting this will be played to members of the press tomorrow.

    Other revelations include “How and why the denial of requested pre-assault fire may have contributed to the shoot down of the Navy SEAL Team VI helicopter,” and, “How Afghani forces accompanying the Navy SEAL Team VI servicemen on the helicopter were not properly vetted and how they possibly disclosed classified information to the Taliban about the mission, resulting in the shoot down of the helicopter.”

    *********************

    Paul Joseph Watson is the editor and writer for Infowars.com and Prison Planet.com. He is the author of Order Out Of Chaos. Watson is also a host for Infowars Nightly News.

    This article was posted:

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    The Real Benghazi Story: U.S. Op to Arm al-Qaeda in Syria

    0

    Kurt Nimmo
    Infowars.com
    May 8, 2013

    Last November, we reported that the murder of ambassador Christopher Stevens wasn’t about a lame anti-Muslim video. It was connected to an arms shipment as part of the on-going “creative destruction” of the Middle East and North Africa.

    During an interview with CNBC’s Larry Kudlow, radio talk show host John Baxter said the resignation of CIA Director David Petraeus had nothing to do with an extramarital affair with his biographer, reserve Army officer Paula Broadwell, but was related to U.S. policy in the Middle East, ongoing “color revolutions” in the region, and specifically the operation underway to arm al-Qaeda in Syria and overthrow the al-Assad regime.

    “Benghazi is not about Libya, Benghazi is about the policy of the Obama administration to involve the United States without clarity to the American people, not only in Libya but throughout the whole of the Arab world now in turmoil,” Baxter told Kudlow. “Benghazi is about the NSC directing an operation that is perhaps shadowy, perhaps a presidential finding, perhaps doesn’t, that takes arms and men and puts them into Syria in the guise of the Free Syria Army.”

    Retired Lt. General William Boykin said in January that Stevens was in Benghazi as part of an effort to arm al-Qaeda, what the corporate media calls the rebels. “More supposition was that he was now funneling guns to the rebel forces in Syria, using essentially the Turks to facilitate that. Was that occurring, (a), and if so, was it a legal covert action?” Boykin said during an interview with CNS News.

    Boykin said Stevens was “given a directive to support the Syrian rebels” and the State Department’s Special Mission Compound in Benghazi “would be the hub of that activity.”

    In 2011, Stevens was officially appointed to be the Obama administration’s liaison with the “budding Libyan opposition,” according to ABC News. By March, 2011, it was firmly established that the so-called Libya opposition was interchangeable with al-Qaeda. Stevens and the State Department worked directly with Abdelhakim Belhadj of the Libyan Islamic Fighting Group. Belhadj has direct connections to al-Qaeda.

    The murder of Stevens, of course, did not slow down the flow of arms from Libya to al-Qaeda in Syria. “The United States is launching a covert operation to send weapons to Syrian rebels for the first time as it ramps up military efforts to oust President

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Syria militants capture UN peacekeepers in Golan Heights

    0

    Press TV
    May 8, 2013

    Militants fighting against the Syrian government have abducted a group of UN peacekeepers monitoring the ceasefire line between Syria and the Israeli-occupied Golan Heights.

    According to Reuters news agency, a militant group operating in Syria issued a statement on Tuesday saying it was holding the four peacekeepers.

    The statement said the peacekeepers were being held for their own safety because of clashes in the separation zone between Syria and the Israeli-occupied heights.

    A picture accompanying the statement shows four peacekeepers wearing light-blue UN flak jackets marked “Philippines.”

    This is the second time that foreign-backed militants fighting against the government of President Bashar al-Assad seize UN troops in the Syrian side of the Golan Heights.

    In March, anti-Syria militants detained 21 Filipino peacekeepers in the same region. They were released after three days.

    Syria has been experiencing unrest since March 2011. Many people, including large numbers of security personnel, have been killed in the violence.

    Several international human rights organizations have accused foreign-sponsored militants of committing war crimes.

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 1:14 pm

    Tags: ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Rand Paul: Benghazi Should End Hillary Clinton

    0

    Senator calls State Dept. failures a “dereliction of duty”

    Steve Watson
    Infowars.com
    May 8, 2013

    Kentucky Senator Rand Paul has said that Hillary Clinton should never be allowed to hold another public office ever again following the failures and subsequent response surrounding the attack on the US Consulate in Benghazi.

    As hearings into the September 2012 attack begin in Washington DC today, video has emerged of the Kentucky Senator laying into Clinton and calling her failures “inexcusable” in a speech before the Missouri Republican Party.

    “I think her dereliction of duty and her lack of leadership should preclude her from holding any office,” Paul said before a thunderous ovation.

    “I don’t think she should read every cable. Maybe from Estonia and Bulgaria an assistant should read it. But from one of the five most dangerous countries in the world, there’s no excuse for her not reading the cables,” Paul added.

    The Senator was following up on comments he addressed to Clinton during a Senate Foreign Affairs Committee hearing earlier this year when he said that he would have fired her over Benghazi if he were president, because she failed to read communications requesting additional help and security in Libya.

    At the hearing in January Clinton claimed that ”That cable did not come to my attention.”

    Watch the video:

    As this report goes live, Greg Hicks, the number two to murdered US Ambassador Christopher Stevens, is set to testify that US Special forces personnel were ordered to stand down as the attack on the US embassy in Libya was taking place on September 11, 2012.

    The scandal may de-rail the momentum that has been building around Hillary Clinton for a potential 2016 run.

    In recent weeks Clinton has been cited as leading several polls of potential 2016 presidential candidates. She has even been tacitly endorsed by the elites at lavish gatherings.

    That may all change today however.

    “I think the dam is about to break on Benghazi. We’re going to find a system failure before, during, and after the attacks,” Sen. Lindsey Graham (R-S.C.) wrote on his Facebook page Tuesday. “We’re going to find political manipulation seven weeks before an election. We’re going to find people asleep at the switch when it comes to the State Department, including Hillary Clinton.”

    Fox News’ James Rosen has also reported that the second whistleblower, senior official Mark Thompson, will testify on Wednesday that Clinton tried to cut the State Department’s counterterrorism bureau out of the process

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Latest On Benghazi: Continual Live Updates

    0

    Infowars.com
    May 8, 2013

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 11:14 am

    Tags: , , ,





    Leave a Reply

    If you want your user name appearing on the comment, please log in or register.
    , Register, Lost password?

    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Human Takeover by Machines May Be Closer Than We Think

    0

    Tia Ghose
    Live Science
    May 8, 2013

    Are you prepared to meet your robot overlords?

    The idea of superintelligent machines may sound like the plot of “The Terminator” or “The Matrix,” but many experts say the idea isn’t far-fetched. Some even think the singularity – the point at which artificial intelligence can match, and then overtake, human smarts – might happen in just 16 years.

    But nearly every computer scientist will have a different prediction for when and how the singularity will happen.

    Some believe in a Utopian future, in which humans can transcend their physical limitations with the aid of machines. But others think humans will eventually relinquish most of their abilities and gradually become absorbed into artificial intelligence (AI)-based organisms, much like the energy-making machinery in our own cells.

    Read full article

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 11:13 am

    Tags: ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Federal Europe will be ‘a reality in a few years’, says Jose Manuel Barroso

    0

    Bruno Waterfield
    The Telegraph
    May 8, 2013

    The president of the European Commission has fanned the flames of British debate over EU membership by insisting that fiscal union in the eurozone will lead to “intensified political union” for all 27 member states.

    “This is about the economic and monetary union but for the EU as a whole,” he said.

    “The commission will, therefore, set out its views and explicit ideas for treaty change in order for them to be debated before the European elections.”

    Read full article

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 11:54 am

    Tags: ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Queen’s speech contains backing for EU ‘propaganda’ promoting the ‘virtues’ of Brussels

    0

    Matt Chorley
    dailymail.co.uk
    May 8, 2013

    Britain is to sign off taxpayer-funded ‘propaganda’ to promote the virtues European Union despite growing calls to quit Brussels altogether.

    Tory MPs had called on David Cameron to bring forward legislation in today’s Queen’s Speech for his promised in-out referendum.

    But instead, buried in the small print, was a plan for the UK to authorise the Europe for Citizens scheme which aims to ‘develop understanding of the EU’.

    Read more

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 10:59 am

    Tags:





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Judge Orders Conspiracy Re-Education For Lauryn Hill

    0

    Singer told to undergo counseling over ‘conspiracy theory’ that music industry strangles real talent

    Paul Joseph Watson
    Infowars.com
    May 8, 2013

    Grammy award-winning singer Lauren Hill has been ordered by a judge to “undergo counseling because of her conspiracy theories.” What was her conspiracy theory? That the music industry oppresses people with actual talent in favor of pumping out mindless nonsense.

    Yesterday Hill was sentenced to 3 months in jail followed by three months’ home confinement after failing to pay a tax bill because she had withdrawn from society following threats to her family.

    In June last year, Hill posted a diatribe to her Tumbler account complaining of how the music industry is “manipulated and controlled by a media protected military industrial complex.”

    As we’ve highlighted numerous times in the past, other recording artists have made it clear that anyone who doesn’t conform to the strict demands of the music industry or even, as Nicole Scherzinger recently remarked, sell their soul to satan, tends to find success hard to maintain in an industry that punishes individuals who dare to speak their mind.

    In numerous performances and speeches over the last few years, Hill has attempted to warn young people about how “pop culture cannibalism” and the deliberate reductionism of art and music is damaging a whole generation and turning them into passive, unthinking consumers — destroying inspiration and true creativity in the name of profit.

    The Judge’s order that Hill undergo what amounts to brainwashing and re-education simply for publicly proclaiming the fact that the music industry is designed to strangle true talent while promoting amoral, vacuous, mindless, turgid drivel, is part of the increasing trend towards labeling common sense as a mental illness if it goes against the establishment grain in any way.

    Since people who post vehement political opinions on Facebook are already being kidnapped and taken to psychiatric wards across the country, how long before criticism of the state is officially recognized as a mental disorder?

    Those considered hostile to authority have already been tagged as sufferers of “oppositional defiant disorder” under the the DSM-IV-TR Manual.

    The definition of this mental illness is, “a recurrent pattern of negativistic, defiant, disobedient. and hostile behavior toward authority figures that persists for at least 6 months.”

    The attempt to frame alternative opinions as dangerous mental disorders has also entered the political realm. In 2009, Psychology Today wrote a hit piece on Alex Jones insinuating that anyone who believes in a secret cabal ruling the world, which is a perfectly accurate description of the Bilderberg Group, has a mental disorder.

    We also reported recently on how Floridians are being encouraged to report their neighbors to authorities for making hateful comments about the government, leaving them to be targeted for home visits by police and “mental health professionals and caseworkers.”

    Lauren Hill’s case reminds us that the establishment not only seeks to ridicule, ostracize and sideline those who utter “conspiracy theories,” which has become a pejorative term for questioning authority, but they actually seek to have all dissent against the system classified as a form of mental illness in order to grease the skids for legally imposed “treatment” including re-education and even pharmacological lobotomy.

    *********************

    Paul Joseph Watson is the editor and writer for Infowars.com and Prison Planet.com. He is the author of Order Out Of Chaos. Watson is also a host for Infowars Nightly News.

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 9:40 am

    Tags: ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Britain lays out plan for arming Syrian rebels amid fears of ‘likely’ chemical weapons attack

    0

    telegraph.co.uk
    May 8, 2013

    A confidential paper, seen by The Daily Telegraph, sets out the case for two “options” allowing Britain and France to start supplying arms to the official Syrian opposition as early as June.

    “The situation in Syria is deteriorating sharply. With the likely use of chemical weapons and the growth of extremism, the conflict has entered an even more dangerous phase,” the paper argues.

    “We must consider all the options, [including] the ability to give further assistance to the moderate Syrian opposition. It will also protect civilians, and save lives. Crucially, it will ensure we can respond flexibly to a major escalation in the conflict, such as chemical weapons attacks.”

    Read more

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 9:40 am

    Tags: , ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Sen. Manchin: Background Checks “Expand Second Amendment”

    0

    Kurt Nimmo
    Infowars.com
    May 8, 2013

    Democrat Senator Joe Manchin is trying to get another background check bill through the Senate following last month’s defeat of a bill he introduced with Republican Senator Patrick Toomey.

    “I truly believe the background check bill is possible to get passed,” Manchin told CBS News on Tuesday.

    He also tried to sell the idea that laws restricting and regulating the Second Amendment actually expand it. Manchin said it is the job of Democrats in Congress to educate Americans who exercise the right to own firearms about this new interpretation of the Second Amendment.

    “We are going to have to make some adjustments to it and find out where the comfort zone is, but what we need to do really is educate the law-abiding gun owners like myself, people that might belong to the NRA or other gun organizations that don’t believe this is a threat to their Second Amendment. This bill, not only protects your Second Amendment, it expands your Second Amendment,” Manchin told CBS This Morning.

    “We had some people who were concerned that it would infringe on inter-family transfers, but it doesn’t at all,” he said. “We are going to clarify that language and anytime that you transfer to family – whether it is directly or online —it will be basically not subjected to the background check because that is a person transaction with a family member.”

    Manchin’s government-run universal background system is designed to shut down gun shows and restrict commercial sales of firearms. It has little to do with Uncle Harry selling a shotgun to his nephew. It is about the government knowing how many firearms you own and where they are so they can be confiscated.

    “Some of the proposals, like for example — universal background checks — would allow the federal government to surveil law-abiding citizens who exercise their Constitutional rights,” Senator Mike Lee, a Republican from Utah, said from the Senate floor last month. “One of the provisions we expect to see in the bill based on what we saw in the Judiciary Committee — on which I sit — would allow the Attorney General of the United States (Eric Holder) to promulgate regulations that could lead to a national registry system for guns.”

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 9:07 am

    Tags: , ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Obama Backs FBI Plan Making It Easier to Surveil Internet

    0

    Charlie Savage
    nytimes.com
    May 8, 2013

    The Obama administration, resolving years of internal debate, is on the verge of backing a Federal Bureau of Investigation plan for a sweeping overhaul of surveillance laws that would make it easier to wiretap people who communicate using the Internet rather than by traditional phone services, according to officials familiar with the deliberations.

    The F.B.I. director, Robert S. Mueller III, has argued that the bureau’s ability to carry out court-approved eavesdropping on suspects is “going dark” as communications technology evolves, and since 2010 has pushed for a legal mandate requiring companies like Facebook and Google to build into their instant-messaging and other such systems a capacity to comply with wiretap orders. That proposal, however, bogged down amid concerns by other agencies, like the Commerce Department, about quashing Silicon Valley innovation.

    While the F.B.I.’s original proposal would have required Internet communications services to each build in a wiretapping capacity, the revised one, which must now be reviewed by the White House, focuses on fining companies that do not comply with wiretap orders. The difference, officials say, means that start-ups with a small number of users would have fewer worries about wiretapping issues unless the companies became popular enough to come to the Justice Department’s attention.

    Read more

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 8:01 am

    Tags: , , , ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Internet down in Syria

    0

    Catherine E. Shoichet and Hamdi Alkhshal
    edition.cnn.com
    May 8, 2013

    Internet connections across Syria went down Tuesday night, according to several global monitoring sites.

    Google reported that its services became inaccessible in Syria around 9:45 p.m. (2:45 p.m. ET). The Renesys, Akamai and BGPmon Internet tracking companies also reported the loss of Syrian Internet connectivity at that time.

    “It seems Syria has largely disappeared from the Internet,” Dan Hubbard, chief technology officer for Umbrella Security Labs, wrote in a blog post about the apparent outage.

    Read more

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 7:46 am

    Tags: , ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Washington’s Presumption

    0

    Paul Craig Roberts
    Infowars.com
    May 8, 2013

    The new president of Venezuela, Nicolas Maduro, is cast in Chavez’s mold. On May 4, he called US president Obama the “grand chief of devils.”

    Obama, who has betrayed democracy in America, unleashing execution on American citizens without due process of law and war without the consent of Congress, provoked Maduro’s response by suggesting that Maduro’s newly elected government might be fraudulent. Obviously, Obama is piqued that the millions of dollars his administration spent trying to elect an American puppet instead of Maduro failed to do the job.

    If anyone has accurately summed up Washington, it is the Venezuelans.

    Who can forget Chevez standing at the podium of the UN General Assembly in New York City speaking of George W. Bush? Quoting from memory: “Right here, yesterday, at this very podium stood Satan himself, speaking as if he owned the world. You can still smell the sulphur.”

    Hegemonic Washington threw countless amounts of money into the last Venezuelan election, doing its best to deliver the governance of that country to a Washington puppet called Henrique Capriles, in my opinion a traitor to Venezuela. Why isn’t this American puppet arrested for treason? Why are not the Washington operatives against an independent country—the US ambassador, the counsels, the USAID/CIA personnel, the Washington funded NGOs—ordered to leave Venezuela immediately or arrested and tried for spying and high treason? Why allow any presence of Washington in Venezuela when it is clear that Washington’s intention is to make Venezuela a puppet state like the UK, Germany, Canada, Australia, Turkey, Japan, and on and on.

    There was a time, such as in the Allende-Pinochet era, when the American left-wing and a no longer extant liberal media would have been all over Washington for its illegal interference in the internal affairs of an independent country. But no more. As CounterPunch’s Jeffrey St. Clair has recently made clear, the American left-wing remains “insensate to the moral and constitutional transgressions being committed by their champion”—the first black, or half-black, US president—leaving “Rand Paul to offer official denunciations against [Washington’s] malignant operations” against independent countries.

    Against the Obama regime’s acts of international and domestic violence, “the professional Left, from the progressive caucus to the robotic minions of Moveon.org, lodge no objections and launch no protests.” St. Clair has written a powerful article. Read it for yourself:http://www.counterpunch.org/2013/05/03/the-game-of-drones/print

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    I think the American left-wing lost its confidence when the Soviet Union collapsed and the Chinese communists and Indian socialists turned capitalist. Everyone misread the situation, especially the “end of history” idiots. The consequence is a world without strong protests of Washington’s and its puppet states’ war criminal military aggressions, murder, destruction of civil liberty and human rights, and transparent propaganda: “Last night Polish forces crossed the frontier and attacked Germany,” or so declared Adolf Hitler. Washington’s charges of “weapons of mass destruction” are even more transparent lies.

    But hardly any care. The Western governments and Japan are all paid off and bought, and those that are not bought are begging to be bought because they want the money too. Truth, integrity, these are all dead-letter words. No one any longer knows what they mean.

    The moronic George W. Bush said, in Orwellian double-speak, they hate us for our freedom and democracy. They don’t hate us because we bomb them, invade them, kill them, destroy their way of life, culture, and infrastructure. They hate us because we are so good. How stupid does a person have to be to believe this BS?

    Washington and Israel present the world with unmistakable evil. I don’t need to stand at the UN podium after Bush or Obama. I can smell Washington’s evil as far away as Florida. Jeffrey St. Clair can smell it in Oregon. Nicolas Maduro can smell it in Venezuela. Evo Morales can smell it in Bolivia from where he cast out CIA-infiltrated USAID. Putin can smell it in Russia, although he still permits the treasonous “Russian opposition” funded by US money to operate against Russia’s government. The Iranians can smell it in the Persian Gulf. The Chinese can smell it as far away as Beijing.

    Homeland Security, a gestapo institution, has “crisis actors” to help it deceive the public in its false flag operations. http://www.governamerica.com/black-ops/boston-bombings/110-fema-hiring-actors-to-run-live-terror-drills

    The Obama regime has drones with which to silence American citizens without due process of law.
    http://www.salem-news.com/articles/may042013/drones-boston-wh.php

    Homeland Security has more than a billion rounds of ammunition, tanks, a para-military force. Detention camps have been built.

    Are Americans so completely stupid that they believe this is all for “terrorists” whose sparse numbers require the FBI to manufacture “terrorists” in so-called “sting operations” in order to justify the FBI’s $3 billion special fund from Congress to combat domestic terrorism?

    Congress has taxpayers paying the FBI to frame up innocents and send them to prison.

    This is the kind of country American has become. This is the kind of “security” agencies it has, filling their pockets by destroying the lives of the innocent and downtrodden.

    “In God we trust,” reads the coinage. It should read: “In Satan we follow.”

    Dr. Paul Craig Roberts is the father of Reaganomics and the former head of policy at the Department of Treasury. He is a columnist and was previously the editor of the Wall Street Journal. His latest book, “How the Economy Was Lost: The War of the Worlds,” details why America is disintegrating.

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 6:05 am

    Tags:





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    US Army Chief Suggests Military Intervention in Syria Before End of Summer

    0

    “The next three, four months, we probably have the capability to do it”

    Paul Joseph Watson
    Infowars.com
    May 8, 2013

    The U.S. Army’s top officer has said that the window of opportunity for a military assault on Syria is within the next three to four months and that budget cuts would render intervention after the end of summer unlikely.

    Gen. Ray Odierno. Image: Defense.gov

    Speaking with reporters yesterday Gen. Ray Odierno, Army chief of staff, warned that planned training cutbacks due to the sequester meant that if the Obama administration wanted to give the green light for intervention it would have to act quickly.

    “Readiness is OK right now, but it’s degrading significantly because our training is reducing. So, the next three, four months, we probably have the capability to do it,” he said, adding, “Next year, it becomes a little bit more risky.”

    Odierno made it clear that the longer it took to make the decision, the less likely the US is to intervene.

    “If you ask me today, we have forces that can go. I think it will change over time because the longer we go canceling training and reducing our training, the readiness levels go down,” he said.

    Odierno also praised FSA rebels, the majority of whom have pledged allegiance to and are being led by Al-Qaeda terrorists, for their fighting capabilities and said it was not a matter of if but when they claimed victory.

    “I think from what I’ve seen is they have made some significant gains. I think they are controlling the territory. It makes you think that, you know, it’s going to be difficult for the regime over time to survive,” Odierno said.

    However, recent victories by Assad’s forces, including the re-taking of central areas of Homs, are being seen by some as a reason for the west’s increased urgency to arm rebel fighters.

    Odierno acknowledged the presence of terrorists amongst the FSA ranks, but attempted to downplay their role as comparatively minor.

    “With the rebels, we do know there’s some terrorists in there,” he said. “Obviously, we don’t want them to be involved in the outcome, we don’t want them to gain power because of the impact they could have on the rest of the region – regionally and then potentially internationally.”

    As the White House prepares to arm militants with heavy weaponry, the US Army and the Obama administration’s support for opposition fighters has puzzled many who point out that the FSA rebels are primarily comprised of sectarian extremists and jihadists who have repeatedly made it clear that they view America as a sworn enemy.

    Rebels have been routinely caught ransacking Christian churchesburning US flags, chanting anti-American slogans and singing the praises of Osama Bin Laden as they glorify the 9/11 attacks, while also espousing their desire to fly the Al-Qaeda flag over the White House.

    The administration has already sent well over half a billion dollars in aid to such groups, while the CIA has overseen “a secret airlift of arms and equipment” to rebels since early 2012, according to the New York Times.

    Appetite amongst the America public for for yet another US-led war is noticeably lackluster. A recent Reuters/Ipsos poll found that only 10 per cent supported military intervention in Syria while 61 per cent opposed getting involved. Even if President Bashar Al-Assad’s forces used chemical weapons (the only reliable evidence suggests such weapons have actually been used by rebels), the figure favoring intervention remains at just 27 per cent.

    *********************

    Paul Joseph Watson is the editor and writer for Infowars.com and Prison Planet.com. He is the author of Order Out Of Chaos. Watson is also a host for Infowars Nightly News.

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 5:51 am

    Tags: ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    The Price Of Copper And 11 Other Recession Indicators That Are Flashing Red

    0

    Michael Snyder
    Economic Collapse
    May 8, 2013

    There are a dozen significant economic indicators that are warning that the U.S. economy is heading into a recession. The Dow may have soared past the 15,000 mark, but the economic fundamentals are telling an entirely different story. If historical patterns hold up, the economy is heading for a very rocky stretch. For example, the price of copper is called “Dr. Copper” by many economists because it so accurately forecasts the future direction of the U.S. economy. And so far this year the price of copper is way down. But that is not the only indicator that is worrying economists. Home renovation spending has fallen dramatically, retail spending is crashing in a way not seen since the last recession, manufacturing activity and consumer confidence are both declining, and troubling economic data continues to come pouring out of Asia and Europe. So why do U.S. stocks continue to skyrocket? Will U.S. financial markets be able to continue to be divorced from reality? Unfortunately, as we have seen so many times in the past, when stocks do catch up with reality they tend to do so very rapidly. So you better put on your seatbelts because a crash is coming at some point.

    But most average Americans are not that concerned with the performance of the stock market. They just want to be able to go to work, pay the bills and provide for their families. During the last recession, millions of Americans lost their jobs and millions of Americans lost their homes. If we have another major recession, that will happen again. Sadly, it appears that another major recession is quickly approaching.

    The following are 12 recession indicators that are flashing red…

    #1 The price of copper has traditionally been one of the very best indicators of the future performance of the U.S. economy. The fact that it is down nearly 20 percent so far this year has many analysts extremely concerned

    Copper’s downward trend foreshadows a stock market collapse, according to Societe Generale’s famously bearish strategist Albert Edwards, who said equity markets will riot “Japan-style.”

    “Copper is acting exactly as it did when I wrote about the impotence of liquidity in the face of the (then imminent) 2007 recession. Once again it is giving us an early warning that liquidity will not save risk assets: time to get out of equities,” Edwards wrote in his latest research note, on Thursday.

    #2 Home renovation spending has fallen back to depressingly-low 2010 levels.

    #3 As Zero Hedge recently pointed out, U.S. retail spending is repeating a pattern that we have not seen since the last recession…

    Retail sales of clothing is growing at the slowest pace since 2010; but while major store sales are about to drop negative YoY for the first time in over 3 years, the utter collapse in general merchandise sales is worse that at the peak of the last recession at -5%. It seems tough to see how a nation with an economy built on 70% consumption is not in a recessionary environment. And while this alone is a dismal signal for the discretionary upside of the US economy/consumer; as Gluskin Sheff’s David Rosenberg points out real personal income net of transfer receipts plunged at a stunning 5.8% annual rate in Q1. The other seven times we have seen such a collapse, the economy was either in recession of just coming out of one.

    #4 Manufacturing activity all over the country is showing signs of slowing down. In fact, Chicago PMI has dipped below 50(indicating contraction) for the first time since the last recession.

    #5 In April, consumer confidence unexpectedly fell to a nine-month low

    The Thomson Reuters/University of Michigan preliminary index of consumer sentiment declined to 72.3 in April from 78.6 a month earlier. This month’s reading was lower than all 69 estimates in a Bloomberg survey that called for no change from the March number.

    #6 NYSE margin debt peaked right before the recession that beganin 2002, it peaked right before the financial crisis of 2008, and it ispeaking again.

    #7 The S&P 500 usually mirrors the performance of Chinese stocks very closely. That is why it is so alarming that Chinese stocks peaked months ago. Will the S&P 500 soon follow?

    #8 The economic data coming out of the Chinese economy lately has been mostly terrible

    For starters, China’s recent economic data, as massaged as it is to the upside, is downright awful. China’s PMI numbers were the worst in two years. Staffing levels in the Chinese service sector decreased for the first time since January 2009(remember that year).

    China’s LEI also shows no sign of recovery. If anything, it indicates China is heading towards an economic slowdown on par with that of 2008.And if you account for the rampant debt fueling China’s economy you could easily argue that China is posting 0% GDP growth today.

    #9 Things just continue to get even worse over in Europe. Unemployment in both Greece and Spain is now about 27 percent, and the unemployment rate in the eurozone as a whole has just set a brand new all-time record high.

    #10 Crude inventories have soared to a record high as demand for energy continues to decline. As I have written about previously, this is a clear sign that economic activity is slowing down.

    #11 Casino spending is usually a strong indicator of the overall health of the U.S. economy. That is why it is so noteworthy that casino spending is now back to levels that we have not seen since the last recession.

    #12 The impact of the sequester cuts is starting to kick in. According to the Congressional Budget Office, the sequester cuts will cost the U.S. economy about 750,000 jobs this year.

    Do you have any other recession indicators that you would add to this list?

    I invite you to share your thoughts by posting a comment below…

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 6:06 am

    Tags: ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Statists Use Twisted Logic To Attack The Bill Of Rights

    0

    Brandon Smith
    Alt Market
    May 8, 2013

    In the war for the continued existence of our Nation’s Constitutional principles, I had long wondered whether statists were simply confounded by the Bill of Rights and ignorant of its function or whether they were maliciously inclined, knowing exactly what it means but seeking its destruction anyway. In recent years, I have decided it is a combination of both faults.

    Statists are people who view every aspect of society through the lens of government power. If you want to know the primary difference between Constitutionalists and anti-Constitutionalists, you have to understand that some people in this world only want control over their own lives, while other people desperately clamor for control over other people’s lives. Why do they do this? Usually, it’s fear. Fear of the persistent unknowns in life. Fear that they do not have the intelligence or the will to take responsibility for their own futures. Fear that they will be forced to take care of themselves. Fear that their ideologies will be found lacking. Fear that if others are allowed freedom, they will one day indirectly suffer for it.

    This fear makes statists easy to manipulate by the establishment and easy to use as a tool for the expansion of government dominance. Because statists are so weak-minded and fainthearted, they become very comfortable with the idea of other people making their decisions for them; and they will always attempt to answer every perceived problem with more government control.

    When confronted with a proponent of liberty, the statist typically reels in horror. He has so invested himself in bureaucracy that he sees himself as a part of it. To attack the bureaucracy is to attack him. To deny the validity of the bureaucracy is to deny the validity of his existence. His very personality and ego are tied to the machine, so he will spit and rage against anyone who refuses to conform. This is why it is not uncommon at all to find a wild collection of logical fallacies within the tirades of the average statist. Statists act as though they are driven by reason; but in reality, they are driven by seething bias.

    A perfect example of this insanity is the article “There Are No Absolute Rights,” published by The Daily Beast.

    Let’s first be clear about the kind of rag we are dealing with. The Daily Beast was launched by Tina Brown, a former editor of Vanity Fair and The New Yorker who was also a British citizen until 2005. I would say she’s a kind of female Piers Morgan. For anyone who might take that as a compliment, trust me; it isn’t. Brown and Morgan are European collectivists who immigrated to America just to tell us how our Constitutionally conservative heritage of independence is outdated; meanwhile, the EU is in the shambles of failed socialism. We used to drive such people into the ocean, and now they breathe our oxygen while telling us what is politically “fashionable.”

    In 2010, The Daily Beast merged with Newsweek, a magazine notorious for its statist crush on the Federal government (and now out of print). To say that The Daily Beast is a socialist platform and a mouthpiece for the Administration of President Barack Obama is an understatement, but I would point out that the website also tends to agree with politicians and judges on the right that also promote a “living document” interpretation of the Constitution. Whether right or left, if you believe that the Bill of Rights is up for constant interpretation and revision or outright destruction, then you are the bee’s knees in the eyes of The Beast.

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    The article focuses on gun rights and how silly conservatives foolishly cling to the idea that some lines in the sand should never be crossed in terms of personal freedom. In a rather mediocre and rambling analysis, The Beast uses two primary arguments to qualify this stance, essentially asserting that:

    1) Compromises have already been made to the Bill of Rights; therefore, nothing is sacred.

    2) Even some Republicans agree with compromises to the Bill of Rights when it comes to other Amendments, so why are we being so childish about “reinterpreting” the 2ndAmendment?

    First, the revisionist methodology of the Bill of Rights consistently ignores the history of its writing. The colonists and Founding Fathers of our Nation, having successfully triumphed in a bloody revolution against what many then considered the most advanced elitist military empire on Earth, had absolutely no trust whatsoever in the concept of centralized government. Many of the colonials were anti-Federalists who believed that an overly powerful central government was a threat to future liberty. They felt that an immovable and unchangeable legal shield had to be created in order to ensure that a tyrannical system never prevailed again.

    Thomas Jefferson said:

    “[A] bill of rights is what the people are entitled to against every government on earth, general or particular, and what no just government should refuse.”

    This statement includes modern governments as well. Technological advancement does not change the rules surrounding timeless inherent moral principles, as much as statists would like to argue otherwise.

    The colonials demanded the inclusion of the Bill of Rights in the Constitution as a prerequisite for the establishment of the Federal government. This means that the Federal government owes its entire existence to a very strict agreement made on the Bill of Rights. By extension, if the Bill of Rights is politically diluted or denied, then the legitimacy of the Federal government must also be denied, for it has violated the very charter that gave it life.

    The writer of the article, Michael Tomasky, lists numerous transgressions against our Constitutional protections; but he does not do so in the spirit of activism. Rather, he lists them as examples of how “compromise” on our freedoms is necessary (or somehow inevitable) in the name of the collective good. He claims Republicans are perfectly willing to sacrifice certain liberties, like freedom of speech, privacy or even Miranda rights, in the name of political expediency.

    I wholeheartedly agree that our civil liberties have been whittled away by the establishment. I also agree that many so-called Republicans have betrayed the founding values of our culture and even voted to diminish or destroy the 2nd Amendment. But let’s think hard about the faulty logic behind Tomansky’s position. Do two wrongs or hundreds of wrongs really make a right? Tomansky is saying that because we have failed as a society to fully protect our freedoms and because our government has been successful in criminally neglecting them, we should simply give in and relinquish all freedom.

    He would respond to this accusation by claiming that he is not calling for the relinquishment of all liberties, only the liberties he thinks are dangerous to society. The problem is, that is not how the Constitution was designed. Amendments can be made, yes. But amendments contrary to the Bill of Rights are not Constitutional as per the original agreement made after the revolution. The Bill of Rights was meant to be sacrosanct, untouchable – period. No Federal law, no State law and no Amendment can be enforced that violates those protections. The Bill of Rights was not created as a rule book for what the people can do; it was created as a rule book for what government cannot do. Once you remove hard fast restrictions like the Bill of Rights from the picture, you give the government license to make its own rules. That is how tyranny is born.

    As far as Republican attacks on the Constitution are concerned, Tomasky has obviously never heard of the false left/right paradigm. He finds solace in the totalitarian actions of neocons because neocons are not conservative; they are statists, just like him. Ultimately, there is no right or left. Only freedom and decentralization, or slavery and collectivism. There are those who revel in control, and those who rebel against control. The rest of the debate is nonsense and distraction.

    Tomsky opines: “Imagine what conservatives would think of a group of liberals who insisted, while threatening an insurrection, on a pure and absolute interpretation of the Fourth or Sixth Amendment—and imagine how ridiculous they would look to average Americans.”

    Actually, any true conservative would be standing right beside those liberals, as many of us in the liberty movement have done in the past in activism against the transgressions of fake conservatives like George W. Bush or Mitt Romney, with his dismal anti-Constitution voting record. Frankly, who cares what “average Americans” think about our battle for what is right? Does Tomasky base all of his personal convictions on what happens to be popular at the moment? I think so.

    What statists also don’t seem to comprehend is that there is a factor in the fight over Constitutional law that goes far beyond the Constitution itself.

    The Constitution, as a document, is not what we as Americans and human beings obtain our rights from. The Constitution is only a written representation of the inborn freedoms derived from natural law and inherent conscience. We are born with a sense of liberty and that includes a right to self-defense from any enemy, foreign or domestic. No amount of political gaming, twisted rationalizations or intellectual idiocy is ever going to change these pre-existing rights.

    Tomasky insists that: “[T]he idea that any right is unrestricted is totally at odds with history, the law, and reality.”

    He uses the tired argument that some restrictions on personal liberty, including restrictions on gun rights, are “reasonable” given the circumstances of the times. And, it only follows that he and other statists should be the ones to decide what is reasonable.

    I disagree, along with millions of other Americans; and believe me, this is a serious problem for statists. If Tomasky and The Daily Beast want to impose their collective worldview on the rest of us and dismantle our individual freedoms guaranteed in natural law and the Bill of Rights, then I’m afraid they’ll have to fight us for them. In the end, legal precedence is irrelevant. Political precedence is irrelevant. Political party is irrelevant. Historical precedence is irrelevant. The theater of words is irrelevant. Statists need to understand that there is no alternative. There is no “silver bullet” argument that will make us forget what is fundamentally true. There is no juxtaposition of logic that will muddle our resolve or confuse our principles. Some rights are indeed absolute; and we will not yield them, ever. The statist “reality” is a far cry from what actually is; and soon, I’m afraid, they will learn this lesson the hard way.

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 6:10 am

    Tags:





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    See for Yourself: Syrian Government Likely Did Not Use Chemical Weapons

    0

    Washington’s Blog
    May 8, 2013

    Haaretz reported on March 24th, “Jihadists, not Assad, apparently behind reported chemical attack in Syria“.

    UN investigator Carla Del Ponte said that there is strong evidence that the rebels used chemical weapons, but that there is not evidence that the government used such weapons:

    But the U.S. is blaming the Syrian government for the attacks in Syria.

    So who’s right?

    The Global Post reported on April 30th:

    A closer analysis, however, raises doubts and highlights the challenge of confirming whether the Syrian government—or anyone else—is using chemical weapons…. Looking at video and photos obtained by GlobalPost at the scene, experts say the spent canister found in Younes’ [a victim’s] house and the symptoms displayed by the victims areinconsistent with a chemical weapon such as sarin gas, which is known to be in Syria’s arsenal.

    Here’s a picture of the spent canister:

    Syria chemical weapons attack 1 Kurdish police and members of a Kurdish militia gather the remains of a device witnesses say was dropped by a helicopter onto the courtyard staircase of a family home in Sheikh Maqsoud, a neighborhood in Aleppo, Syria. Syrians suspect the device is some kind of chemical weapon. But experts have their doubts. — [Rojhat Azad/Courtesy]

    The GlobalPost continues:

    Looking at video and photos obtained by GlobalPost at the scene, experts say the spent canister found in Younes’ house and the symptoms displayed by the victims areinconsistent with a chemical weapon such as sarin gas, which is known to be in Syria’s arsenal. Sarin is typically delivered using artillery shells or spray tanks, not in the grenade-like device found in this Aleppo attack and in other similar attacks reportedin recent days.

    ***

    Watch the full, unedited video here

    While analysts have not been able to identify the canister, they said tear gas, some kind of generated smoke, as well as any number of chemicals found in military munitions and devices, could also have been responsible. Chemicals used for riot control are not prohibited by the 1993 Chemical Weapons Convention.

    ***

    Experts say an attack by sarin gas would cause virtually anyone who had come into contact with the toxin to immediately feel its effects. Exposure to even a very small amount of sarin could be lethal. While there were casualities in the Aleppo attack, most of the victims survived, which would not likely be the outcome of a sarin attack in a confined environment.

    The Washington Post reported yesterday:

    Adding to the doubts, some analysts are now wondering if the attack might have actually involved chlorine, which is also a chemical weapon but can be bought over-the-counter. A March Reuters story described a possible chemical attack in the northern town of Khan al-Assal, near Aleppo, after which residents said they could smell chlorine. The Telegraph reported at the time that Syrian regime forces accused rebels of using a homemade chlorine solution in the attack.

    ***

    Perhaps adding some credibility to fears that Syrian rebels could potentially use chlorine,militants in neighboring Iraq used chlorine bombs several times in 2007. Some Syrian fighters with the Islamist rebel group Jabhat al-Nusra are believed to have ties to Iraqi extremists.

    CNN notes:

    Al Qaeda in Iraq detonated a series of crude chlorine bombs in Iraq from late 2006 through mid-2007.

    ***

    Charles Faddis, who headed the CIA’s operations against al Qaeda in Iraq’s chlorine bomb network, told me in 2010: “[T]he attacks are not being particularly successful. The people are dying in the blast, but fortunately nobody is dying from chlorine.”

    The GlobalPost reported on May 5th:

    Doctors in Turkey say initial tests of blood samples from victims of a suspected chemical weapons attack in Syria last month are negative for sarin gas.

    ***

    It could have been tear gas or some other kind of generated smoke, normally used for riot control, some weapons experts said.

    In other words, those who question the claim that it was the Syrian government which used chemical weapons have photographic and other evidence on their side.

    Rebels Have More Motive than Government …

    The Washington Post reported yesterday:

    As Foreign Policy’s Blake Hounshell points out, Khan al-Assal was a regime-controlled area at the time, which suggests that if anyone were to attack it, it would probably be rebels. (Hat tip to Hounshell for resurfacing these March articles.)

    Similarly, Tony Cartalucci points out that the Syrian government has no motivation to use chemical weapons. And Lew Rockwell argues:

    Of course anyone whose brain fired on more than one cylinder should have questioned why in the hell the Syrian government would use in such a limited and militarily insignificant way the one weapon it knew would likely bring on a US and NATO Libya-style intervention. It made no sense at all for the Syrian government to use “just a little” sarin – not enough to do more than kill a few people, nothing to alter the course of the war – knowing about “red lines” and a US/Saudi/Qatari/Israeli/Turk bloodlust to invade.

    On the other hand, it made all the sense in the world for the insurgents to release some sarin here and there, make some videos of the victims, and email the links to some very willing Israeli generals and McCainian rabid warhawks in the US and their absurd poodles in the UK and France.

    CNN points out that the Syrian rebels have had chemical weapons training.

    Neoconservatives planned regime change in Syria — and throughout the Middle East and North Africa —20 years ago. And carrying out acts of violence and blaming it on the Syrian government as an excuse for regime change — i.e. false flag terror — was discussed over 50 years ago by British and American leaders.

    A top Bush administration official says it’s hard to say who used chemical weapons — if anyone — and that the chemical weapons attack may have been an Israeli false flag attack.

    And the American government has previously falsely blamed its enemies for chemical weapons attacks. For example, the American government gave chemical weapons to Saddam Hussein … which he then used on Iran and on his own Kurdish population. The American government attempted to blame Iran for the chemical weapons attack on Iraq’s Kurds … just as the U.S. is trying to blame the Syrian governmentfor the attacks in Syria.

    And see this.

    And the “rebels” in Syria that the U.S. has been arming and otherwise supporting are Al Qaeda and Muslim Brotherhood. Indeed, the New York Times reported last week that virtually all of the rebel fighters are Al Qaeda terrorist.

    But the war-hungry mainstream media — just as in Iraq — is pushing half-truths and bogus claims.

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 6:10 am

    Tags: ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Americans Convinced Gun Homicides Soar Despite Actual Plunge In Gun Crimes

    0

    Zero Hedge
    May 8, 2013

    In yet another example of the massive gap between the American people’s perception of what is going on around them (whether by propaganda channels or simply cognitive bias) and the actual reality, Reuters reports that while gun-related homicides are down 39% from the 1993 peak, only 12% of people believe that gun crimes have fallen. Non-fatal firearm crimes declined by 69% to 467,300 in the same period but 56% of Americans believe that gun crime is higher now than it was 20 years ago, the Pew Research Center said its poll showed. The dichotomy between record food stamp usage (and non-employment) and multi-year highs in consumer sentiment comes to mind — we wonder which is more ‘real’.

    Highlights of the report:

    – Firearm-related homicides declined 39%, from 18,253 in 1993 to 11,101 in 2011.

    – Nonfatal firearm crimes declined 69%, from 1.5 million victimizations in 1993 to 467,300 victimizations in 2011.

    – For both fatal and nonfatal firearm victimizations, the majority of the decline occurred during the 10-year period from 1993 to 2002.

    – Firearm violence accounted for about 70% of all homicides and less than 10% of all nonfatal violent crime from 1993 to 2011.

    – About 70% to 80% of firearm homicides and 90% of nonfatal firearm victimizations were committed with a handgun from 1993 to 2011.

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    – From 1993 to 2010, males, blacks, and persons ages 18 to 24 had the highest rates of firearm homicide.

    – In 2007-11, about 23% of victims of nonfatal firearm crime were injured.

    – About 61% of nonfatal firearm violence was reported to the police in 2007-11.

    – In 2007-11, less than 1% of victims in all nonfatal violent crimes reported using a firearm to defend themselves during the incident.

    – In 2004, among state prison inmates who possessed a gun at the time of offense, less than 2% bought their firearm at a flea market or gun show and 40% obtained their firearm from an illegal source.

    – Males, blacks, and persons ages 18 to 24 were most likely to be victims of firearm violence

    Directly from the government:

    Breakdown of homicides by age and sex:

    Breakdown of violence by region:

    And the full data:

    The full report can be found here

    This article was posted: Wednesday, May 8, 2013 at 6:07 am

    Tags: , ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Maryland to Become 19th State to Legalize Medical Marijuana

    0

    Andrew Nappi
    banoosh.com
    May 7, 2013

    Maryland became the 19th State to legalize marijuana for medical use Thursday when Governor Martin O’Malley signed the “Medical Marijuana — Academic Medical Centers — Natalie M. LaPrade Medical Marijuana Commission” act into law.

    Congress and the president claim the constitutional authority to prohibit weed. The Supreme Court concurs. But sharing an opinion on something doesn’t necessarily make it a fact. You can claim you are a unicorn, but you’re not. Clearly, the Constitution delegates no power of marijuana regulation to the feds. And the so-called war on drugs rests on the same legal authority as all of the other modern-day undeclared wars.

    None.

    So, more and more states continue to do exactly what they should do when the federal government tries exercise power it does not legitimately possess.

    Ignore it.

    With Maryland’s new law, 19 states have done just that, legalizing medical marijuana. That wave continues to build, with even more state legislatures considering medicinal marijuana legislation in the 2013 session, and more likely to follow suit.

    Better known by its shorter numerical designation, HB 1101, and introduced by Delgate Dan Morhaim, the new law allows academic medical research centers to create and implement programs to dispense marijuana to sick patients.

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    Under HB 1101 marijuana will only be provided through academic medical centers, more commonly known as teaching hospitals. Critics of the bill argue with hospitals having a choice to dispense or not dispense, some will opt to not participate. The new law also allows the governor to suspend the program if state employees fall under jeopardy of prosecution by the federal government.

    The current start date for implementation is 2016, another sore point with the bill’s critics.

    Despite the bill’s inability to grant every constituency’s wish, list it is viewed overall as a necessary step forward. The federal government forbids any marijuana use, even under a restrictive program like the one Maryland will implement. Tenth Amendment Center communications director Mike Maharrey said any resistance to the unconstitutional federal policy undermines the federal government’s position.

    “Obviously, this bill doesn’t allow patients the free access to marijuana for treatment of medical conditions that we would like to see. But it is a step forward. Each state that refuses to recognize the legitimacy of the federal prohibition in any way makes it that much more difficult for the federal government to enforce its unconstitutional policy,” he said. “As for the governor’s power to suspend the program, I just don’t see it happening. He would look pretty foolish all of a sudden telling patients successfully treating pain or other conditions with cannabis, ‘Sorry, you’re out of luck now. D.C. called and said we have to return you to your state of suffering.’ That wouldn’t go over well. I see expansion of the policy down the road as the more likely scenario.”

    Hospitals will be required to specify the medical conditions treated with marijuana and establish criteria under which patients would be admitted to the program. Concessions to privacy are also part of the bill, as participating hospitals will be required to provide the state department of health with data on both patients and caregivers. This data will also be required to be available to law enforcement. Licensed growers will be able to sell only to participating centers.

    Dan Morhaim, the bill’s sponsor, serves as a board-certified physician, logging over 30 years experience as an emergency room physician and internist. In a February 21,2012 editorial, the Baltimore Sun endorsed Morhaim’s plan saying, “With medical marijuana legal for medical use, someone has to grow it, someone has to distribute it and someone has to supervise the system. We think the Morhaim-endorsed plan, which will license growers and distributors under the supervision of medical professionals, is the most practical approach.”

    “I’ve long said Maryland should replace the dealer-patient relationship with the doctor-patient relationship,” Morhaim said. “This law gives us a chance to do that.”

    Morhaim’s credentials as an academic, who is on the faculty at the Johns Hopkins Bloomberg School of Public Health and on the faculty at the University of Maryland Medical School gave added weight and credibility to the bill.

    In support of HB 1101, HB0180, the ”Medical Marijuana — Caregiver — Affirmative Defense” sponsored by Delegate Cheryl D. Glenn in the House and Jamie Raskin in the Senate will become law on June 1,2013. In summary, this bill establishes an affirmative defense against prosecution for the possession of marijuana or the possession of specified drug paraphernalia that the marijuana or drug paraphernalia was intended for medical use by an individual with a specified debilitating medical condition for whom the defendant is a specified caregiver; etc.”

    A similar law for medical marijuana users is already in effect.

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 9:19 pm

    Tags: ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    D.C. Police Chief: We Will Arrest Adam Kokesh and Open Carry Protesters

    0

    Infowars.com
    May 7, 2013

    District of Columbia Metropolitan Police Department Chief Cathy Lanier says she will arrest Adam Kokesh and any other protesters who violate the district’s gun laws.

    “Passing into the District of Columbia with loaded firearms is a violation of the law and we’ll have to treat it as such,” she told NewsChannel 8.

    Kokesh plans to have 10,000 open carry activists march on the Capitol. Over 2,000 have so far pledged on Kokesh’s Facebook page to attend the July 4th event.

    Adam appeared on the Alex Jones Show on Monday to explain the march.

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 9:45 pm

    Tags: , , ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    World Unites Against the Illuminati: Professor Griff On Fire!

    0

    Infowars.com
    May 7, 2013

    Tonight’s Infowars Nightly News features the worldwide premiere of our groundbreaking interview with rap artist Professor Griff of Public Enemy.

    Professor Griff lists Obama’s lies, describes why hip hop stars are in the White House and breaks down some of the world’s deadliest corporations.

    Griff has always been an outspoken voice in the hip hop community and by combining forces with Alex Jones and Infowars, he attempts to break the public’s mass-media induced coma.

    Stay tuned and we’ll upload the entire interview immediately following the Nightly News.

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 6:11 pm

    Tags:





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    55 killed in northeast Nigeria attack: military

    0

    Xinhuanet
    May 7, 2013

    Military and police officials on Tuesday confirmed that at least 55 people were killed when suspected Boko Haram sect attacked security formations in the Nigeria troubled northeast Borno State.

    Spokesman of the military led Joint Task Force (JTF) in Borno, Lt- Colonel Sagir Musa said that the gunmen attacked Bama, a commercial town about 187 kilometers away from Maiduguri, the epicenter of the insurgency in the early hours of Tuesday.

    “Suspected Boko Haram terrorist today at about 5 am in the morning, about 200 Boko Haram terrorist in 18 seater buses and Hilux Vehicles mounted with anti aircraft machine guns, attempted to attack on 202 Battalion Barracks in Bama, about 10 insurgents were killed during exchange of fire. We lost 2 soldiers during the attack,” he added. “They came in army uniform pretending to be soldiers but were able to detect them,” Musa said.

    Read full article

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 4:48 pm

    Tags:





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Virginia Students Suspended for Pointing Pencils and Making Gun Noises

    0

    “Kids don’t think about ‘Cowboys and Indians’ anymore, they think about drive-by shootings and murders…”

    Adan Salazar
    Infowars.com
    May 7, 2013

    A couple of second grade students at a Virginia elementary school were recently suspended for two days after violating the school’s “zero tolerance” policy on weapons. The weapons in question? Pencils.

    Late last week, seven-year-old Christopher Marshall was taking on the role of a marine and his friend “a bad guy” when their teacher spotted them pointing pencils at each other and pretend shooting.

    According to the teacher at the Driver Elementary School in Suffolk, Christopher was heard “making gun noises,” something school officials say violated their policy on weapons.

    “A pencil is a weapon when it is pointed at someone in a threatening way and gun noises are made,” Bethanne Bradshaw, a spokesperson for Suffolk Public Schools told WAVY, but Christopher’s father, Paul Marshall, himself a former marine, says the decision absurdly restricts his son’s imagination and thinks the school’s punishment is going too far.

    “He’s just being a typical boy. You’re taking away his imagination,” Marshall told reporters.

    But as Bradshaw explains it, children nowadays are so frightened of school shootings that it makes sense to reprimand the threatening gesture. “Kids don’t think about ‘Cowboys and Indians’ anymore, they think about drive-by shootings and murders and everything they see on television news every day,” Bradshaw stated.

    “There’s gonna be people that are overly sensitive because of what has happened,” Christopher’s father argues, “but you also have to bring what used to be called ‘common sense’ into play.”

    It seems to be this same lack of common sense that has schools across the nation overreacting to a number of trivial weapon-related offenses, whether it’s pointing fingers in the shape of a gun and saying “pow,” biting a breakfast tart into a shape that vaguely resembles a gun, bringing a butter knife to school to cut a pear, or simply having a computer background featuring a firearm.

    The school spokesperson’s comments also reflect First Lady Michelle Obama’s recent statements that “gun violence” has school kids frightened they’re going to be killed any day, a puzzling remark to make as her own children safely attend private schools protected by at least 11 armed guards.

    Of course, in light of frenzied, concerted attempts to restrict gun rights, the demonization in schools of anything dealing with weapons whatsoever should be viewed as fuel for the campaign to brainwash Americans “into thinking about guns in a vastly different way,” as current Attorney General Eric Holder once stated.

    Apparently action taken against the boys was minimal, as the policy allows up to a ten day suspension.

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 2:51 pm

    Tags:





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Report: Legalizing Illegal Immigrants to Cost $6.3 Trillion

    0

    Stephen Dinan
    Washington Times
    May 7, 2013

    The Heritage Foundation said Monday that legalizing illegal immigrants would cost taxpayers a net $6.3 trillion over the next 50 years – releasing a report that ignited a venomous battle over an immigration bill and who is truly representing the conservative movement in the debate.

    Driving the costs in the Heritage report are simple demographics: Illegal immigrants are more likely to lack a high school education, and more than a third of households headed by illegal immigrants live below the poverty line, meaning those households consume more in services than they pay in taxes.

    Heritage said legalizing them improves the situation in the short run but leaves a big hole over the longer term, when they access public health programs and, eventually, Social Security and Medicare benefits.

    Read full article

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 1:00 pm

    Tags:





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Rep. Mike Rogers pushed for FBI chief

    0

    thehill.com
    May 7, 2013

    A group representing more than 12,000 FBI agents is urging President Obama to nominate Rep. Mike Rogers (R-Mich.) as the bureau’s next director.

    The FBI Agents Association said Rogers – a former FBI agent and chairman of the House Intelligence Committee – would be the perfect candidate to replace Director Robert Mueller when his term expires in September.

    “Chairman Rogers exemplifies the principles that should be possessed by the next FBI director,” said the group’s president, Konrad Motyka.

    Read more

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 1:22 pm

    Tags:





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Israeli Bombing of Syria and Moral Relativism

    0

    No universally applied principle justifies the Israeli attack on Damascus. Only self-flattering tribalism does that

    Glenn Greenwald
    guardian.co.uk
    May 7, 2013

    On Sunday, Israel dropped massive bombs near Damascus, ones which the New York Times, quoting residents, originally reported (then evidently deleted) resulted in explosions “more massive than anything the residents of the city. . . have witnessed during more than two years of war.” The Jerusalem Post this morning quoted “a senior Syrian military source” as claiming that “Israel used depleted uranium shells”, though that is not confirmed. The NYT cited a “high-ranking Syrian military official” who said the bombs “struck several critical military facilities in some of the country’s most tightly secured and strategic areas” and killed “dozens of elite troops stationed near the presidential palace”, while the Syrian Observatory for Human Rights said that “at least 42 soldiers were killed in the strikes, and another 100 who would usually be at the targeted sites remain unaccounted for.”

    Israeli defenders claim that its air attack targeted weapons provided by Iran that would have ended up in the hands of Hezbollah. Obama officials quickly told media outlets that “the administration is fully supportive of Israel’s airstrikes”. Indeed, Democratic Sen. Pat Leahy noted: “Keep in mind the Israelis are using weapons supplied by us.” There is, needless to say, virtually no condemnation of the Israeli assault in US media or political circles. At this point, the only question is how many minutes will elapse before Congress reflexively adopts a near-unanimous or unanimous resolution effusively praising Israel for the attack and unqualifiedly endorsing all past and future attacks as well.

    Because people who cheer for military action by their side like to pretend that they’re something more than primitive “might-makes-right” tribalists, the claim is being hauled out that Israel’s actions are justified by the “principle” that it has the right to defend itself from foreign weapons in the hands of hostile forces. But is that really a “principle” that anyone would apply consistently, as opposed to a typically concocted ad hoc claim to justify whatever the US and Israel do? Let’s apply this “principle” to other cases, as several commentators on Twitter have done over the last 24 hours, beginning with this:

    Read more

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 2:55 pm

    Tags: , ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    FBI Wants You to Know About Explosive Tannerite

    0

    Infowars.com
    May 7, 2013

    Back in March, the FBI released a bulletin warning that “criminals and extremists” might use a material used for “exploding targets” in recreational shooting to build IEDs.

    “The FBI assesses with high confidence recreationally used exploding targets (ETs), commonly referred to as tannerite, or reactive targets, can be used as an explosive for illicit purposes by criminals and extremists and explosive precursor chemicals (EPCs) present in ETs can be combined with other materials to manufacture explosives for use in improvised explosive devices (IEDs),” the FBI warned on March 5.

    The FBI describes “extremists” as “international terrorists, homegrown violent extremists, domestic terrorists, and lone wolf offenders operating in the United States or abroad.”

    Tannerite, however, would not prove to be a practical material for a terrorist IED, that is unless a terrorist does not have an issue with exposing himself to capture. Tannerite can only be exploded by using a high velocity rifle bullet – and that means he would need to be within several hundred years of the target.

    Leave it up to the FBI, though, to frighten folks into believing there is another substance out there that terrorists can use at marathons.

    If you like to use reactive material in your recreational shooting, you might want to stock up on this stuff. It will probably be illegal before too long.

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 2:17 pm

    Tags: , , , ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Lauryn Hill Blames Slavery, Economic Conspiracy as She’s Jailed for $500,000 Unpaid Tax Bill

    0

    Dominic Gover
    IB Times
    May 7, 2013

    Photo by Daigo Oliva, via Wikimedia Commons

    Fugees singer [Lauren] Hill, 37, was sentenced to three months’ jail followed by three months’ home confinement for failing to pay $500,000 to the taxman in the United States.

    […] Hill pleaded guilty to charges of tax evasion last year. Her lawyers said she had paid more than $970,000 of an outstanding tax bill which amounted to more than $2m.

    […] During her trial, Hill was ordered by the judge in Newark, New Jersey to undergo counselling because of her conspiracy theories — including that artists are being oppressed by a plot involving the military and media.

    […] She told the court: “I am a child of former slaves who had a system imposed on them. I had an economic system imposed on me.”

    Read full article

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 12:07 pm

    Tags: ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    Idaho Seizes Medical Marijuana Activists’ Kids

    0

    Phillip Smith
    StopTheDrugWar.org
    May 7, 2013

    Idaho is officially not a marijuana-friendly state. Although it is bordered on most sides by medical marijuana states (Washington, Oregon, Nevada, and Montana), it so far refuses to accept the medicinal use of the herb. And even though one of those states (Washington) has legalized marijuana and two others (Nevada and Oregon) have decriminalized it, Idaho remains firmly grounded in 20th Century attitudes toward the plant. The state legislature this year took the time to approve a non-binding resolution noting its opposition to marijuana legalization.

    But that doesn’t mean there aren’t reformers in the Gem State. There have been sporadic local marijuana legalization efforts in past years, and this year, medical marijuana supporters are in the midst of signature-gathering campaign to put an initiative on the ballot.

    That campaign is led by Compassionate Idaho, some of whose most stalwart and publicly visible members are Lindsey and Josh Rinehart and Sarah Caldwell. But with an incident that began while Caldwell and the Rineharts were away on a retreat, the trio are learning a harsh lesson in hardball pot politics. When they got back home, their kids were gone, and the police and child social services had them.

    According to Boise Police, who released a statement on the matter as controversy grew, on April 23, they were contacted by a local school official about a child who had apparently eaten marijuana and fallen ill. Police “learned from witnesses” that the supposed marijuana supposedly came from the Rinehart residence, and, “concerned for the safety of children at the residence,” they went there and found a baby sitter caring for the Rinehart and Caldwell children.

    Police persuaded the baby sitter to let them search the residence and “found drug paraphernalia, items commonly used to smoke marijuana, and a quantity of a substance that appeared to be marijuana in locations inside the house accessible to the children.” Police at the scene then contacted both narcotics investigators and the department’s Special Victims Unit.

    (Rinehart, a Multiple Sclerosis sufferer, said she indeed had medical marijuana at home, but that she had a small amount and a pipe on a dresser in her bedroom, a larger amount of trim locked away in a freezer, and some marijuana tincture in a bottle in a kitchen cabinet atop her refrigerator.)

    “Based on the fact that illegal drugs and drug paraphernalia were located in an area that appeared to be commonly used by the children in the residence and the fact that one child had already become ill from ingesting what he assumed was marijuana, and the inability to contact the children’s parents, detectives made the decision to contact Idaho Health and Welfare officials and place the children in imminent danger, meaning they were placed in the protective custody of the state until it can be determined they are in a safe environment,” the statement said.

    • A d v e r t i s e m e n t

    At this point, it is unclear whether whatever made the school child sick was marijuana. It is equally unclear that any marijuana came from the Rinehart residence. What is clear is that both the Rineharts and Sarah Campbell are up-front, in-your-face medical marijuana patients and activists, and that their children were being subjected to the tender mercies of the state.

    Sarah Caldwell has had her kids returned to her – it was not her child who is suspected of providing the suspected marijuana – but the Rineharts are still fighting to get their kids returned.

    “My sons were not involved,” Caldwell said. “They were at the house the police searched, the police decided my kids were in ‘imminent danger,’ and it took three days to get them back.”

    While the two boys and the Rinehart kids were held at the same foster home, providing them with the small comfort of being with friends, Caldwell said her younger son was traumatized.

    “My six-year-old is autistic,” she explained. “I noticed when he came home, he started packing his favorite toys. I asked him why and he said, ‘In case the police make me go away again.’ He doesn’t understand why,” Caldwell said, her voice breaking.

    While Caldwell has her children at home again, both she and the Rineharts are going to have to comply with the requirements of the child welfare system to ensure that their children can return to their old lives. But, Lindsey Rinehart said, Child Protective Services is moving more quickly than usual in her case.

    Sarah Caldwell’s boys are back at home now, but the Rineharts are still waiting to get theirs back.

    Normally, Child Protective Services requires parents to meet with them at the department three times, then allows them to have three visits with their children in the community, then inspects the home to ensure a safe environment is being provided, and only then considers returning the kids, most likely with the added provision that the parents must undergo parenting and drug education classes.  But when the Chronicle last spoke to Rinehart Saturday, she was in the middle of a home visit with her kids – one that ends Sunday morning.

    “They seem to be expediting the process because they realize they messed up,” she said. The state taking her kids wasn’t doing them any favors, she added.

    “My oldest son now will only talk if you ask him really specific questions, and my younger one is acting out,” she said. “He is upset and argumentative; he has a hard time vocalizing things,” she said of her six-year-old. “I told him I had to go to the store, and he freaked out; he didn’t want me to leave him. He’s reacting like I’ve never seen before. He was a happy kid; now he’s mad and confused. He doesn’t understand what’s going on.”

    The older Rinehart son is having issues, too, she said.

    “He’s mad. Both of the kids have been educated about my medicine, so they know this is wrong,” the multiple sclerosis sufferer explained. “They’re mad that they were taken away because mommy had her medicine. I’m trying to comfort them as best as I can. They just know that somebody took them away, and now I have to explain that they have to go back to foster care tomorrow,” Rinehart said, her voice trembling.

    Both the Rineharts and Sarah Caldwell suspect they were set up.

    “I’m the director of Compassionate Idaho. Everybody knows who I am. I’m on the news at least once a month,” said Rinehart. “We had just done the Hemp Fest in Moscow and signature-gathering in five towns. The police knew what they were looking for, and they knew where to look without anyone telling them. Those kids on the playground didn’t know where to look. There were kids from several other families involved in that playground incident, but we think the police got who they wanted.”

    “I do think they were targeting us,” Caldwell agreed. “That incident at the school was just an excuse for them to try to get us.”

    “This has got me fired up,” Caldwell said. “They took my children to try to keep me focused on getting my kids back so I wouldn’t do my activism, but I’m not going to stop.”

    The use of children as pawns in the marijuana culture wars is shocking and distressing, but nothing new, said Keith Stroup, founder and currently counsel for the National Organization for the Reform of Marijuana Laws (NORML).

    “We get calls three or four times a week from people who have lost custody of their children because they tested positive at birth or in a situation where parents are feuding over custody,” Stroup said. “One will say ‘My spouse smokes marijuana and is thus not a fit parent,’ and once that child welfare issue is raised, it’s a totally separate matter from the criminal justice system. Even if no one is proposing to arrest the parent, this is far more damaging and destructive to the family.”

    That’s at least in part because once child welfare has its clutches on you, it doesn’t want to let go, and it typically has an attitude toward marijuana use that is right out of Reefer Madness, Stroup said.

    “They can require that you take parenting and drug education courses right out of the 1950s,” he said. “It’s a worthless routine, but you have to do it, you have to pay hundreds of dollars to do it, and you can’t get your kids back until you do it. It doesn’t matter how nice or good a parent you are or how well-intentioned you are, once you get caught up in this, you are in for a bad time.”

    NORML is doing what it can to assist the Idaho activists, Stroup said, adding some words of advice for other marijuana-using parents, especially (but not only) in places where attitudes toward the herb are hide-bound and hardened.

    “If you’re in a place like Idaho and you’re a young parent, never smoke in front of your kids, so if that issue ever arises, you can make sure nobody can say you were smoking marijuana and kids were playing in the same room,” he counseled. “You have to be able to demonstrate convincingly that you are providing a safe and secure place for your kids. In places like Idaho, you could lose custody over your kids for something many of us in many parts of the country take for granted.”

    Getting the kids back is only part of the problem for the Rineharts. Idaho treats even small-time pot possession seriously – it’s one of those place where people still actually do get jail time for it – and the couple is facing possible felony charges for possessing more than an ounce of trim.

    Lindsey Rinehart tabling at the Moscow Hemp Fest just days before it all went down.

    “I’m living in an ongoing panic attack,” said Lindsey Rinehart. “They update their warrants every five hours, so I check in frequently, and first thing in the morning. Because of my illness, I can’t handle physical pressure very well, and I’m afraid they could hurt me when arresting me, so my lawyer has asked that if they do charge me, they just cite me.”

    All the stress isn’t helping, and now, Rinehart can’t have her medicine, either.

    “I have prescribed meds to suppress my immune system, but those make me really sick. With cannabis, I only had to take it every other day,” she explained. “Now, I have to take it every day, and it’s so dangerous we have to regularly check my heart, liver, kidney, and eye function. And if I have pain, I’ll have to go back to hydrocodone. I’ll be going back on those meds I had been able to taper down from with cannabis.”

    But despite the trials and tribulations, neither the Rineharts nor Sarah Caldwell have been cowed, and their travails have energized supporters as well.

    “People are really mad about this and are getting involved,” said Rinehart. “We even have people reaching out to help fund Compassionate Idaho.

    “People are coming out of the woodwork after hearing our kids got taken because of our activism,” said Caldwell. “People are saying they want to help. Education is key here – a lot of people here believe the Reefer Madness, but this is a non-toxic plant; it can’t hurt you.”

    “The bigger picture is that we don’t want this to happen to more families,” said Rinehart.

    “We’re getting more calls than we ever did about child custody,” Stroup reiterated. “There are still people being seriously damaged from what’s left of marijuana prohibition. Few go to jail for marijuana anymore, but many lose custody of their kids. These repercussions may be more subtle, but they are not insignificant.”

    The Rineharts and Sarah Caldwell still have to deal with Child Protective Services, and the Rineharts are still waiting to see if they will face criminal marijuana and child endangerment charges. But in the meantime, there are 55,000 signatures to be gathered to get medical marijuana on the ballot and start changing Idaho’s reactionary response to marijuana.

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 12:20 pm

    Tags: ,





    This article originally appeared on : Infowars

    BBC reports explosions heard in Tehran near missile facility

    0

    jpost.com
    May 7, 2013

    Three explosions were heard in western Tehran on Tuesday, in an area where Iran carries out missile research and storage, according to a Tweet by a BBC Persian journalist.

    It was not immediately clear if there were injuries or damage in the incident.
    Related:

    In January, both Iran and the International Atomic Energy Agency denied reports that a blast had hit the Fordow underground uranium enrichment center near Qom.

    Read more

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 11:48 am

    Tags: , , ,





    From: Infowars

    Video: Students Submit to ‘Obama Security Force’ Bag Searches

    0

    Activist Mark Dice illustrates absurdity of Americans eager to relinquish 4th amendment rights

    Paul Joseph Watson
    Infowars.com
    May 7, 2013

    Activist Mark Dice illustrated the absurd ease with which some Americans are willing to relinquish their 4th amendment rights by performing mock ‘Obama National Civilian Security Force’ bag searches on students at San Diego State University.

    Despite the fact that Dice is not even wearing a uniform of any kind, several of the individuals shown in the clip willingly consent to have their bag searched by a random stranger simply as a result of Dice mentioning the words “Boston bombings”.

    The clip shows Dice rifling through people’s bags in order to make sure, “nobody is carrying any harmful or potentially hazardous materials,” while proclaiming himself to be part of the “Obama citizen security volunteer force.”

    When one woman refuses to partake and asks Dice, “Are you serious?” he responds, “No we’re just showing what suckers people are and how they’ll obey and willingly let their 4th amendment be violated.”

    “The 4th amendment is so last year,” remarks Dice as he subjects another student to a bag search.

    Dice then tells another student he needs to perform a “real quick violation of your 4th amendment rights” before adding, “anybody carrying a black backpack, dark skin like yours is a potential terrorist these days.”

    After one of the students makes a complaint, Dice and his cameraman are confronted by police who tell them to leave campus. However, a clip at the end of the video shows Dice being put in handcuffs after he tried to pull the same stunt on the streets of San Diego.

    The video brings to mind the Milgram experiment, a series of social psychology tests conducted by Yale University psychologist Stanley Milgram based around the willingness of people to submit to authority figures even in direct conflict with their conscience.

    The majority of participants agreed to deliver the experiment’s final 450-volt shock to victims when ordered to do so despite them being under the false belief that doing so could easily result in the person’s death, illustrating how obedience to authority no matter how illogical is ingrained within the human psyche.

    Dice’s previous videos made headlines after he was successful in getting numerous people to sign a petition to repeal both the First and Second Amendments and throw gun owners in prison.

    *********************

    Paul Joseph Watson is the editor and writer for Infowars.com and Prison Planet.com. He is the author of Order Out Of Chaos. Watson is also a host for Infowars Nightly News.

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 5:49 am

    Tags:





    Via: http://www.infowars.com/video-students-submit-to-obama-security-force-bag-searches/

    Eyewitnesses: Dzhokhar Tsarnaev Did Not Shoot Boston Cop

    0

    Friendly fire incident heaps more skepticism on official narrative behind raid

    Paul Joseph Watson
    Infowars.com
    May 7, 2013

    Dzhokhar Tsarnaev. Image: FBI

    Eyewitnesses to the shootout involving the alleged Boston bombers have thrown up another contradiction to the official narrative, asserting that MBTA Transit Police Officer Richard H. Donohue Jr. was not shot by Dzhokhar Tsarnaev but by other cops in a friendly fire incident.

    Previous media reports had blamed the Tsarnaev brothers for the shootings of both MIT campus police officer Sean Collier and Donohue, feeding the narrative that the suspects were engaged in a desperate attempt to flee police by returning fire and throwing improvised bombs.

    However, as we previously highlighted, footage from the raid suggests the brothers may have been trying to surrender as they came under a barrage of gunfire. Audio from the scene captures the suspects yelling, “chill out” and “we didn’t do it,” as bullets seem to fly in one direction only.

    Add this to the claim of the aunt of Tamerlan Tsarnaev, that the footage which emerged of police arresting a naked uninjured man was her nephew, contradicting the official narrative that Tsarnaev was critically injured in a shootout and suggesting he may have been killed while in custody, and it’s easy to see why some are questioning whether the raid unfolded exactly as authorities claimed.

    Eyewitnesses to the shootout also contradicted claims by police that Dzhokhar Tsarnaev ran over his own brother in a car, stating instead that he was run over by police.

    “Eyewitness accounts strongly suggest that MBTA Transit Police Officer Richard H. Donohue Jr. was shot and nearly killed by a fellow officer in Watertown April 19 during the hail of gunfire unleashed on Dzhokhar Tsarnaev as the suspected terrorist made a getaway in a carjacked sport utility vehicle,” reports the Boston Globe.

    Witnesses who lived close to the scene of the shootout said they clearly remember Donohue falling to the ground while Dzhokhar Tsarnaev was speeding away in an SUV.

    “A black SUV appeared, and rapid gun fire was focused on the vehicle,” Jane Dyson wrote in a statement provided to the Globe. “It appeared to me that an individual at the corner [of the street] fell to the ground and had probably been hit in the gunfire,” adding that the officer appeared to be a victim of “friendly fire.”

    The report notes how the suspects were no longer armed at this point, “suggesting that the shot that wounded (Donohue) came from police.”

    In addition, when cops apprehended Dzhokhar Tsarnaev the next evening he did not have a gun and only one other gun was found at the scene of the shootout, again confounding claims that the brothers could have returned anything near the 300 rounds ammo police fired at them.

    Donohue almost bled to death at the scene and was in critical condition when taken to hospital but is now expected to make a full recovery.

    Skeptics of the official story suggest that the brothers could have been just two members of a wider plot or that they could have been convenient patsies, having allegedly been under the tutelage of the FBI for years before the bombings.

    The suspects’ mother Zubeidat Tsarnaeva continues to insist that her sons are innocent, telling the Associated Press last week, “It’s all lies and hypocrisy.”

    *********************

    Paul Joseph Watson is the editor and writer for Infowars.com and Prison Planet.com. He is the author of Order Out Of Chaos. Watson is also a host for Infowars Nightly News.

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 8:12 am

    Tags: ,





    Via: http://www.infowars.com/eyewitnesses-dzhokhar-tsarnaev-did-not-shoot-boston-cop/

    Police Confirm Bilderberg 2013 to Take Place in Watford, UK

    0

    Authorities will “facilitate peaceful protest”

    Paul Joseph Watson
    Infowars.com
    May 7, 2013

    Hertfordshire Police have confirmed that the 2013 Bilderberg Group meeting will take place at the Grove luxury hotel in Watford, United Kingdom early next month as over 100 of the world’s most influential power brokers will meet clandestinely to discuss global policy behind closed doors.

    Image: The Grove, Watford

    Although the site of the meeting had been known amongst Bilderberg sleuths for weeks, police confirmation appears to diminish any chances that the location was a red herring designed to throw activists off the scent.

    “A Hertfordshire Police spokesman confirmed the event was taking place but declined to comment on operational policing details,” reports the Watford Observer.

    The spokesman added that the force would “facilitate people who want to undertake peaceful protest.”

    The police’s insistence that demonstrations will be allowed (despite a “security exercise” which is expected to surround the hotel grounds and keep prying eyes away), bolsters the view that Bilderberg has learned from previous years when protesters and journalists were treated with disdain, leading to negative press attention.

    According to the Observer, the dates of the conference are June 6-8, although it is expected that most of the attendees will leave on the morning of the 9th as is routine.

    As we reported yesterday, Alex Jones will travel to the United Kingdom to cover the protest unless he is barred from entering the country by UK authorities who have previously prevented other media personalities such as Michael Savage from entering based on their political viewpoints.

    Any attempt to deport Jones will be seen as an embarrassing PR disaster for both UK authorities and the Bilderberg Group, who previously attempted to get Jones kicked out of Canada back in 2006 only for the incident to cause a huge media spectacle.

    It remains to be seen how much attention the British press will bestow on a group that habitually relies on a castrated and compliant media to either ignore its existence or play down the Bilderberg as a mere “talking shop,” despite innumerable instances of the group wielding its influence with scant regard for democratic transparency.

    In 2010, former NATO Secretary-General and Bilderberg member Willy Claes admitted that Bilderberg attendees are mandated to implement decisions that are formulated during the annual conference of power brokers.

    In 2009, Bilderberg chairman Étienne Davignon even bragged about how the Euro single currency was a brainchild of the Bilderberg Group.

    Back in February, Italian lawyer Alfonso Luigi Marra requested that the Public Prosecutor of Rome investigate Bilderberg for criminal activity, questioning whether the elitist organization’s 2011 meeting in Switzerland led to the selection of Mario Monti as Prime Minister of Italy.

    Last month, Honorary President of the Supreme Court of Italy and former Senior Investigative Judge Ferdinando Imposimato accused the Bilderberg Group of being behind terrorist attacks in Europe.

    Hundreds of activists are expected to descend on Watford and Infowars invites as many people as possible to make the trip in order to force the mainstream press to give Bilderberg the attention it deserves, thereby dismantling the shadowy group’s much cherished veil of secrecy.

    *********************

    Paul Joseph Watson is the editor and writer for Infowars.com and Prison Planet.com. He is the author of Order Out Of Chaos. Watson is also a host for Infowars Nightly News.

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 9:50 am

    Tags: ,





    This entry passed through the Full-Text RSS service — if this is your content and you’re reading it on someone else’s site, please read the FAQ at fivefilters.org/content-only/faq.php#publishers. Five Filters recommends: Thatcher’s Tyrants – The Tanks, The Guns, The Christmas Cards.

    Via: http://www.infowars.com/police-confirm-bilderberg-2013-to-take-place-in-watford-uk/

    Establishment Media Spins al-Qaeda’s Use of Chemical Weapons in Syria

    0

    Evidence pointing at al-Qaeda will not derail globalist effort to take down Syria

    Kurt Nimmo
    Infowars.com
    May 7, 2013

    Time is calling the prospect of al-Qaeda in Syria getting chemical weapons “a nightmare scenario” and warns that the terrorist group may end up using them in the United States.

    “The prospect of Assad’s weapons falling into anti-American hands is real enough for the U.S. to be watching very, very closely,” writes Michael Crowley for the magazine. “But it’s probably not threatening enough — at least not yet — to justify the kind of full-scale ground invasion that might be required to secure Syria’s chemical arsenal.”

    If we are to believe the United Nations, however, the al-Qaeda affiliate in Syria, the al-Nusra Front, has already used chemical weapons.

    On Sunday, Carla Del Ponte, a leading UN human rights investigator, told Al Jazeera that a UN commission of inquiry has evidence that the “rebels” in Syria used sarin nerve gas.

    “Our investigators have been in neighboring countries interviewing victims, doctors and field hospitals and, according to their report of last week which I have seen, there are strong, concrete suspicions but not yet incontrovertible proof of the use of sarin gas, from the way the victims were treated,” Del Ponte told Swiss-Italian television.

    “This was use on the part of the opposition, the rebels, not by the government authorities,” she said.

    Saleem Edris, FSA chief of staff, rejected the accusation. The CIA’s FSA, however, is more or less irrelevant — even the establishment fount The New York Times reports that al-Qaeda controls the manufactured opposition to the al-Assad regime.

    “Nowhere in rebel-controlled Syria is there a secular fighting force to speak of,” the newspaper reported on April 27.

    Back in November, the Pentagon floated the idea of using Syrian chemical weapons as a pretext to send 75,000 troops into Syria.

    “The Pentagon has told the Obama administration that any military effort to seize Syria’s stockpiles of chemical weapons would require upward of 75,000 troops, amid increasing concern that the militant group Hezbollah has set up small training camps close to some of the chemical weapons depots, according to senior American officials,” the New York Times reported.

    The Washsington Post tried its best to spin the latest evidence that al-Nusra is responsible for using chemical weapons, not the al-Assad regime.

    “If the chemical taboo is broken in Syria, does that make the regime more likely to use those weapons itself?” Max Fisher wrote on May 6. “At what point does the United States or Jordan activate its nearby troops, which are on standby to secure loose chemical weapons in a worst-case scenario?”

    In other words, despite the evidence al-Nusra (and by extension Saudi Arabia and Qatar) are responsible for using chemical weapons, the response — more likely with each passing day — will be to attack the government of Syria, not al-Qaeda.

    The end game in Syria is the same as the one imposed on Libya — “creative destruction” designed to reduce the country to a failed state and ensure that rivals to the power of the United States, Israel and the international bankers do not establish a foothold. Radical Muslim groups controlled by the CIA and British intelligence asset the Muslim Brotherhood will be installed. The result will be, as it is currently in Iraq, endless religious (Sunni vs. Shia) strife and sectarian conflict that will effectively prevent the vassals from coming together.

    “Neocons and their affinity for violent Arab and Muslim-hating Israeli settlers is only a sideshow for the central dynamic — the clash of civilizations as defined by the elite and the plan to take out anybody who challenges their drive for global domination,” we noted in 2011 after the successful destruction of Libya and the engineered mass murder of more than 30,000 people.

    “The overthrow of the regime in Syria will not result in democracy. It will produce the sort of chaos previously witnessed in Iraq and now unfolding in Libya.”

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 9:18 am

    Tags: , ,





    This entry passed through the Full-Text RSS service — if this is your content and you’re reading it on someone else’s site, please read the FAQ at fivefilters.org/content-only/faq.php#publishers. Five Filters recommends: Thatcher’s Tyrants – The Tanks, The Guns, The Christmas Cards.

    Via: http://www.infowars.com/establishment-media-spins-al-qaedas-use-of-chemical-weapons-in-syria/

    Danger! Google Warns Drudge Report and Infowars.com are Malware

    0

    Kurt Nimmo
    Infowars.com
    May 7, 2013

    How best to scare people away from alternative media? Make them think Drudge Report and Infowars.com web pages contain malicious software.

    In April, White House Senior Advisor Dan Pfeiffer tried to steer traffic away from the Drudge Report. His effort directed more traffic to the website.

    During a news conference last year, White House Press Secretary Jay Carney instructed a reporter to “be mindful of your sources” when asked about the Drudge Report and a rumor about Mitt Romney.

    More traffic flowed to Drudge.

    Despite the best efforts of Obamaites and Democrats to diss Drudge and put a dent in the web site’s popularity, millions of folks peruse the site daily.

    Back in March of 2010, the Senate’s Committee on Environment and Public Works sent out an email stating Drudge’s website was “responsible for the many viruses popping up throughout the Senate,” according to a CNet report.

    No appreciable drop in viewership ensued.

    Ditto Infowars.com. In recent weeks, a large number of critics led by spurious reports posted on the Southern Poverty Law Center’s website and elsewhere have posted stories accusing Alex Jones and Infowars.com of fomenting some kind of rightwing terror campaign and distributing baseless conspiracy theories.

    No matter. Following the attack, millions of people flocked to the website to get the other side of the story on everything from Sandy Hook to the Boston bombings.

    Now Google Chrome tags Infowars.com as a malware distributor.

    It is a tactic destined to failure.

    The CNet article posted on March 9, 2010 reported that the malware allegedly distributed by the Drudge Report actually came from DoubleClick, a subsidiary of Google which develops and provides internet ad serving services. It serves customers like Microsoft, General Motors, Coca-Cola, Motorola, Apple Inc., Visa USA, Nike and dozen of others.

    So, when are we going to hear that large transnational corporations are purveyors of malware?

    Is it possible Google will advise web travelers to avoid their websites?

    This article was posted: Tuesday, May 7, 2013 at 10:17 am

    Tags: , , ,





    This entry passed through the Full-Text RSS service — if this is your content and you’re reading it on someone else’s site, please read the FAQ at fivefilters.org/content-only/faq.php#publishers. Five Filters recommends: Thatcher’s Tyrants – The Tanks, The Guns, The Christmas Cards.

    Via: http://www.infowars.com/danger-google-warns-drudge-report-and-infowars-com-are-malware/